Introduction

Introduction

This manual is designed primarily for use by trained technicians in a properly equipped workshop. However, it contains enough detail and basic information to make it useful to the owner who desires to perform his own basic maintenance and repair work. The work can only be carried out if the owner has the necessary hand and special service tools to complete the job.

A basic knowledge of mechanics, including the proper use of tools and workshop procedures is necessary in order to carry out maintenance and repair work satisfactorily. Whenever the owner has insufficient experience or doubts regarding his ability to do the work, an authorised Triumph dealer must undertake all adjustments, maintenance, and repair work.

In order to perform the work efficiently and to avoid costly mistakes, read the text and thoroughly familiarise yourself with procedures before starting work.

All work should be performed with great care and in a clean working area with adequate lighting.

Always use the correct special service tools or equipment specified. Under no circumstances use makeshift tools or equipment since the use of substitutes may adversely affect safe operation.

Where accurate measurements are required, they can only be made using calibrated, precision instruments.

For the duration of the warranty period, an authorised Triumph dealer must perform all repairs and scheduled maintenance.

To maximise the life of your motorcycle:

  • Accurately follow the maintenance requirements of the periodic maintenance chart in the Service Manual.

  • Do not allow problems to develop. Investigate unusual noises and changes in the riding characteristics of the motorcycle. Rectify all problems as soon as possible (immediately if safety related).

  • Use only genuine Triumph parts as listed in the electronic parts catalogue (EPC).

  • Follow the procedures in this manual carefully and completely. Do not take short cuts.

  • Keep complete records of all maintenance and repairs with dates and any new parts installed.

  • Use only approved lubricants, as specified in the Owner's Handbook, in the maintenance of the motorcycle.

How to use this manual

To assist in the use of this manual, the section title is given at the top.

Each major section starts with a contents page, listing the information contained in the section.

The individual steps comprising repair operations are to be followed in the sequence in which they appear.

Adjustment and repair operations include reference to service tool numbers and the associated illustration depicts the tool.

Where usage is not obvious, the tool is shown in use.

Adjustment and repair operations also include reference to wear limits, relevant data, torque figures, specialist information and useful assembly details.

Dangers, Warnings, Cautions and Notices

Particularly important information is presented in the following form:

danger
This danger symbol identifies special instructions or procedures which, if not correctly followed, will result in serious injury, or death.
warning
This warning symbol identifies special instructions or procedures which, if not correctly followed, could result in serious injury, or death.
caution
This caution symbol identifies special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in minor or moderate injury.
notice
This notice symbol indicates points of particular interest for more efficient and convenient operation.

Noise Control System

Owners are warned that the law may prohibit:

  1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use and,

  2. the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below:

  • Removal of, or puncturing the muffler, baffles, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.

  • Removal of, or puncturing of any part of the intake system.

  • Lack of proper maintenance.

  • Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the manufacturer.

References

References to the left hand or right hand side given in this manual are made when viewing the motorcycle from the rear.

Operations covered in this manual do not always include reference to testing the motorcycle after repair. It is essential that work is inspected and tested after completion and, if necessary, a road test of the motorcycle is carried out particularly where safety related items are concerned.

Dimensions

The dimensions quoted are to design engineering specification with service limits where applicable.

During the period of running-in from new, certain adjustments may vary from the specification figures given in this manual. These will be reset by the dealer at the 600 mile/1000 km service, and thereafter should be maintained at the figures specified in this manual.

Repairs and Replacements

Before removal and disassembly, thoroughly clean the motorcycle. Any dirt entering the engine or other parts will work as an abrasive and shorten the life of the motorcycle. Particular attention should be paid when installing a new part, that any dust or metal filings are cleared from the immediate area.

Force

Common sense should dictate how much force is necessary in assembly and disassembly. If a part seems especially difficult to remove or install, stop and examine what may be causing the problem. Never lever a component as this will cause damage both to the component itself and to the surface being levered against.

Whenever tapping to aid removal of an item is necessary, tap lightly using a hide or plastic faced mallet.

Edges

Watch for sharp edges, especially during engine disassembly and assembly. Protect the hands with industrial quality gloves.

When replacement parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Triumph parts are used.

Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the motorcycle may be impaired if parts other than genuine Triumph parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to the manufacturer's specification.

Fixings

Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted.

If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.

Micro-encapsulated and patch locked fixings must always be replaced if disturbed.

Where necessary, the text in this manual will indicate where such a fixing is used.

notice
Remove any old locking agent prior to fitting a new Micro-encapsulated or patch locked fixing.
  • An encapsulated fixing can be identified by the diameter of threads is encompassed by the locking agent.

  • A patch locked fixing can be identified by a coloured section of thread which is treated with a locking agent.

Encapsulated fixing_1_generic
  1. Fixing

  2. Encapsulation

  3. Mating surface

  4. Screw

  5. Patch locking

Tightening Procedures

Generally, when installing a part with several bolts, nuts or screws, they should all be started in their holes and tightened to a snug fit, evenly and in a cross pattern. This is to avoid distortion of the part and/or gas or oil leakage. Conversely, bolts, nuts, or screws, should all be loosened (in sequence if specified) by about a quarter of a turn and then removed.

Where there is a tightening sequence specified in this Service Manual, the bolts, nuts, or screws must be tightened in the order and by the method indicated.

Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be observed. The torque tools used must be of accurate calibration.

Torque Tolerance

Torque

Tolerance

0 Nm to 25 Nm

+/- 10%

26 Nm to 100 Nm

+10% -0%

101 Nm to 200 Nm

+10% -0%

Locking devices, where specified, must be fitted. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.

This applies particularly to micro-encapsulated and patch locked fixings which must always be replaced if disturbed.

Where necessary, the text in this manual will indicate where such a fixing is used.

Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches

The use of a crow foot spanner adapter will effectively lengthen the lever arm of a torque wrench. The amount of torque applied to a fastener is increased as the torque wrench lever arm is extended, therefore the torque wrench setting must be adjusted in order to achieve the correct tightening torque.

Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, measure the normal length of the torque wrench from the centre of the drive square to the centre of the handle (dimension L1). Fit the crow foot spanner adapter to the torque wrench as shown below. Measure the extended length of the torque wrench from the centre of the crow foot spanner head to the centre of the handle (dimension L2).

Use the following formula to calculate the correct torque wrench setting to achieve the required tightening torque.

note
The example shown below is calculated using a crow foot spanner measuring 25 mm from the centre of the spanner head to the centre of the drive square.
Torque wrench and crow foot_cijy_2

M1 = M2 x L1 / L2

Example

M2 is the required tightening torque to be applied

90 Nm

L1 is the normal length of the torque wrench, measured from the centre of the drive square to the centre of the handle

300 mm

L2 is the extended length of the torque wrench, measured from the centre of the crow foot spanner head to the centre of the handle

325 mm

M1 is the calculated torque wrench setting

83 Nm

Using a Micrometer

Calibration

note
When calibrating, always refer to the instructions supplied with the micrometer.
  • The thimble is fixed to the spindle so that both components turn together.

  • The sleeve is fixed to one end of the frame. It has graduations and an index line to aid the reading of the graduations on the thimble.

micrometer_3
  1. Micrometer frame

  2. Anvil

  3. Spindle

  4. Sleeve

  5. Thimble

Measuring

  1. Hold the micrometer frame and place the item to be measured between the anvil and spindle.
  2. Using the ratchet adjuster, close the spindle until the ratchet freely clicks.
  3. Lock the thimble using the locking device.
  4. micrometer_2
    1. Micrometer frame

    2. Sleeve

    3. Thimble

    4. Ratchet adjuster

    5. Locking device

    6. Spindle

    7. Anvil

Component Serviceability

Premature wear of a surface finish should be visually checked for:

  • Abrasive wear;

  • Corrosion and oxidation;

  • Erosive wear;

  • Fretting;

  • Surface fatigue.

Examples

  • Taper - to become gradually smaller toward one end.

  • Wear - the continuing loss of material from the surface of a solid body.

  • Ovality - the difference between the maximum and minimum dimensions of the overall diameter.

The following illustration measures a crankshaft as an example.

Big End Bearing measurement_B02188
  1. Wear check/ Taper

  2. Wear check/ Taper

  3. Wear check

  4. Ovality check

  5. Ovality check

  6. Ovality check

General Information

Ignition System Safety Precautions

Warning ignition system high voltage

warning
The ignition system produces extremely high voltages.Do not touch any part of the ignition system or any cables while the engine is running.An electric shock caused by contact with the ignition system may lead to illness, serious injury or death.

Warning Pacemaker Devices and Ignition System High Voltage

warning
Wearers of surgically implanted heart pacemaker devices should not be in close proximity to ignition circuits and or diagnostic equipment.The ignition system and any diagnostic equipment may interrupt the normal operation of such devices.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious illness or death.

Dangerous Substances

Warning Dangerous Substances

warning
Many liquids and other substances used in motor vehicles are poisonous and should under no circumstances be consumed and should, as far as possible, be kept from contact with the skin.These substances among others include acid, antifreeze, asbestos, brake fluid, fuel, lubricants, and various adhesives.Always pay close attention to the instructions printed on labels and obey the instructions contained within.These instructions are included for your safety and well-being.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Third Party Products

warning
Many proprietary products, such as chemicals, solvents and cleaning agents, will cause damage to components if used incorrectly or inappropriately. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions printed on the product container’s labels and obey the instructions given. These instructions are included for your safety and well-being.Damage to the motorcycle components caused by the incorrect or inappropriate use of chemicals, solvents and cleaning agents may reduce the components efficiency, resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Fluoroelastomers

warning
Fluoroelastomer material is used in the manufacture of various seals in Triumph motorcycles.In fire conditions involving temperatures greater than 315°C this material will decompose and can then be potentially hazardous. Highly toxic and corrosive decomposition products, including hydrogen fluoride, carbonyl fluoride, fluorinated olefins and carbon monoxide can be generated and will be present in fumes from fires. In the presence of any water or humidity, hydrogen fluoride may dissolve to form extremely corrosive liquid hydrofluoric acid. If such conditions exist, do not touch the material and avoid all skin contact. Skin contact with liquid or decomposition residues can cause painful and penetrating burns leading to permanent, irreversible skin and tissue damage.

Oils

warning
The engine oil may be hot to the touch. Contact with hot oil may cause the skin to be scalded or burned.
warning
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and avoid skin contact.

Health Protection Precautions

  • Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.

  • Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.

  • Do not put oily rags in pockets.

  • Overalls must be cleaned regularly. Discard heavily soiled clothing and oil impregnated footwear.

  • First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Always be aware of who your nearest First Aider is and where the medical facilities are kept.

  • Use barrier creams, applying before each work period to protect the skin from the effects of oil and grease and to aid removal of the same after completing work.

  • Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.

  • Do not use petrol, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.

  • If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.

  • Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling.

warning
Any risk of eye injury must be avoided. Always wear eye protection when using a hammer, air line, cleaning agent or where there is ANY risk of flying debris or chemical splashing.

Environmental Protection Precautions

caution
Do not pour oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. To prevent pollution of water courses etc., dispose of used oil sensibly. If in doubt contact your local authority.

Burning of used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. If in doubt, check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of the approved appliance.

Dispose of used oil and used filters through authorised waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on disposal facilities.

Brakes

Warning Brakes - Hygroscopic plus list of other wngs

warning
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture will greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid causing a reduction in braking efficiency.Replace brake fluid in line with the routine maintenance schedule. A dangerous riding condition could result if this important maintenance item is neglected! Do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork as this will damage any painted or plastic surface. Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container and never use fluid from an unsealed container or from one that has been previously opened.Check for fluid leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints. Do not mix different brands of brake fluid.Check regularly for brake hose damage.Failure to follow the advice above may reduce braking efficiency, leading to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Warning Brakes - Depleted Brake Fluid Levels

warning
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the fluid in either fluid reservoir the brake system must be inspected.If the brake lever or pedal feels soft when it is applied, or if the lever/pedal travel becomes excessive, there may be air in the brake lines or the brake may be defective.Riding with depleted brake fluid levels, or with a brake fluid leak is dangerous and will cause reduced brake performanceContact a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer to inspect and, if necessary, repair the brake system.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
warning
Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid.The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids may reduce the efficiency of the braking system.

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible.Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Warning Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid

warning
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components. This will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders leading to reduced braking efficiency.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Safety Instructions

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

warning
If the motorcycle falls over or is involved in an accident, diagnostic trouble codes may be triggered and stored.If the motorcycle has fallen over or been involved in an accident, always clear any diagnostic trouble codes.If diagnostic codes reappear, address them immediately.

Jacking and Lifting

warning
Always ensure that any lifting apparatus has adequate load and safety capacity for the weight to be lifted. Ensure the motorcycle is well supported to prevent any possibility of the machine falling prior to lifting or jacking or while repairs and servicing are carried out.Never rely on a single means of support when working with the motorcycle. Use additional safety supports and straps to prevent toppling.Do not leave tools, lifting equipment, spilled oil, etc. in a place where they could become a hazard to health. Always work in a clean, tidy area and put all tools away when the work is finished.

Precautions Against Damage

Avoid spilling brake fluid or battery acid on any part of the bodywork. Wash spillages off with water immediately.

Disconnect the battery earth lead before starting work, see ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS.

Always use the recommended service tool where specified.

Protect exposed bearing and sealing surfaces, and screw threads from damage.

Coolant

warning
Coolant mixture, which is blended with antifreeze and corrosion inhibitors contains toxic chemicals which are harmful to the human body. Never swallow antifreeze, corrosion inhibitors or any of the motorcycle coolant.
warning
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
caution
The coolant antifreeze contains a corrosion inhibitor which helps prevent damage to the metal surfaces inside the cooling system. Without this inhibitor, the coolant would 'attack' the metals and the resulting corrosion would cause blockages in the cooling system leading to engine overheating and damage. Always use the correct antifreeze as specified in the Owner's Handbook. Never use a methanol based antifreeze as this does not contain the required corrosion inhibition properties.
caution
Distilled water must be used with the antifreeze (see specification for antifreeze) in the cooling system.If hard water is used in the system, it causes scale accumulation in the water passages, and considerably reduces the efficiency of the cooling system. Reduced cooling system efficiency may lead to the engine overheating and engine damage.

Cleaning Components

A high flashpoint solvent is recommended to reduce fire hazard.

Always follow container directions regarding the use of any solvent.

Always use the recommended cleaning agent or equivalent.

Do not use degreasing equipment for components containing items which could be damaged by the use of this process. Whenever possible, clean components and the area surrounding them before removal. Always observe scrupulous cleanliness when cleaning dismantled components.

Lubrication

The majority of engine wear occurs while the engine is warming up and before all the rubbing surfaces have an adequate lubrication film. During assembly, oil or grease (whichever is more suitable) should be applied to any rubbing surface, which has lost its lubrication film. Old grease and dirty oil should be cleaned off. This is because used lubricants will have lost some lubrication qualities and may contain abrasive foreign particles.

Use recommended lubricants. Some oils and greases in particular should be used only in certain applications and may be harmful if used in an application for which they are not intended. This manual makes reference to molybdenum disulphide grease in the assembly of certain engine and chassis parts. Always check manufacturer recommendations before using such special lubricants.

Joints and Joint Faces

Assemble joints dry unless otherwise specified in this manual.

If gaskets and/or jointing compound is recommended for use; remove all traces of old jointing material prior to reassembly. Do not use a tool which will damage the joint faces and smooth out any scratches or burrs on the joint faces using an oil stone. Do not allow dirt or jointing material to enter any tapped holes.

Gaskets, O-rings

Do not reuse a gasket or O-ring once it has been in service. The mating surfaces around the gasket should be free of foreign matter and perfectly smooth to avoid oil or compression leaks.

Liquid Gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent

Follow manufacturer's directions for cleaning and preparing surfaces where these compounds will be used. Apply sparingly as excessive amounts of sealer may block engine oil passages and cause serious damage.

Prior to reassembly, blow through any pipes, channels or crevices with compressed air.

warning
To prevent injury, always use eye, face and ear protection when using compressed air. Always wear protective gloves if the compressed air is to be directed in proximity to the skin.

Screw Threads

Metric threads to ISO standard are used.

Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded.

Castellated nuts must not be loosened back to accept a split pin, except in those recommended cases when this forms part of an adjustment.

Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind threaded holes. The hydraulic action on screwing in the bolt or stud could split the housing.

Always tighten a nut or bolt to the recommended torque figure. Damaged or corroded threads can affect the torque reading.

Unless specified, threaded fixings must always be fitted dry (no lubrication).

warning
Never lubricate a thread unless instructed to do so.When a thread of a fixing is lubricated, the thread friction is reduced. When the fixing is tightened, reduced friction will cause over tightening and possible fixing failure.A fixing which fails in service could cause component detachment leading to loss of control and an accident.

Locking Devices

Always release locking tabs and fit new locking washers. Do not reuse locking tabs.

Fitting a Split Pin

Always fit new split pins of the correct size for the hole in the bolt or stud. Do not loosen back castle nuts when fitting a split pin, except in those recommended cases when this forms part of an adjustment.

Always fit new roll pins of an interference fit in the hole.

Circlips, Retaining Rings

Replace any circlips and retaining rings that are removed. Removal weakens and deforms circlips causing looseness in the circlip groove. When installing circlips and retaining rings, take care to compress or expand them only enough to install them.

Always use the correct replacement circlip as recommended in the Triumph parts catalogue.

Self-Locking Nuts

Self-locking nuts can be reused, provided resistance can be felt when the locking portion passes over the thread of the bolt or stud.

DO NOT reuse self-locking nuts in critical locations, e.g. suspension components. Always use the correct replacement self-locking nut.

Encapsulated Bolts

An encapsulated bolt can be identified by a coloured section of thread which is treated with a locking agent.

Unless a specified repair procedure states otherwise, encapsulated bolts cannot be reused and MUST be replaced if disturbed or removed.

warning
Failure to replace an encapsulated bolt could lead to a dangerous riding condition. Always replace encapsulated bolts.

Oil and Grease Seals

Replace any oil or grease seals that are removed. Removal will cause damage to an oil seal which, if reused, would cause an oil leak.

Ensure the surface on which the new seal is to run is free of burrs or scratches. Renew the component if the original sealing surface cannot be completely restored.

Protect the seal from any surface which could cause damage over which it has to pass when being fitted. Use a protective sleeve or tape to cover the relevant surface and avoid touching the sealing lip.

Lubricate the sealing lips with a recommended lubricant. This will help to prevent damage in initial use. On dual lipped seals, smear the area between the lips with appropriate grease.

When pressing in a seal which has manufacturer's marks, press in with the marks facing out.

Seals must be pressed into place using a suitable driver. Use of improper tools will damage the seal.

Press

A part installed using a press or driver, such as a wheel bearing, should first be coated with oil or grease on its outer or inner circumference so that it will locate smoothly.

Ball Bearing

When installing a ball bearing, the bearing race which is an interference fit should be pushed by a suitable driver. This prevents severe stress or damage to the load carrying components. Press a ball bearing until it touches the shoulder in the bore or on the shaft.

With the sealing lip facing the lubricant, press or drift a seal to the depth of its housing, if the housing is shouldered, or flush with the face of the housing where no shoulder is provided.

Motorcycle Inspection after an Accident, Collision or Fall

Warning Maintenance - Motorcycle in Accident/Fall

warning
If the motorcycle is involved in an accident, collision or fall, it must be taken for inspection and repair.Inspections and repairs must be completed by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Any accident can cause damage to the motorcycle that, if not correctly repaired, may cause a second accident which could result in serious injury or death.

If the motorcycle is involved in an accident, collision or fall, it must be carefully inspected and repaired before being used again.

Damage may not be obvious. Even apparently minor damage may conceal more serious concerns, inspect all signs of damage carefully.

Items such as fairings, bodywork, engine covers and other components may require removal prior to inspection.

Damaged components may require removal from the motorcycle for further inspection or measurement to fully assess the extent of any damage.

Below is a non-exhaustive list of areas that should be inspected when assessing accident damage.

  • Check wheel alignment for signs of a damaged or twisted main frame or damaged suspension.

  • Check the main frame for any damage including twisting or cracking of materials or welds.

  • Check front forks for any bending.

  • Check wheels for any tyre, rim or spoke damage. Tyre removal may be required.

  • Check for damage to extremities (levers, mirrors, handlebars and end weights, footrests (including bank angle indicators), silencers, etc).

  • Check the functionality of all controls, throttle, clutch, brakes, gear selection, electronic functionality.

  • Check lighting, braking and indicator functionality (if fitted).

  • Check for any fluid leaks (engine oil, final drive oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluids).

  • Check for bodywork damage.

  • Check for correct torque or damage (including bolt bending) of fasteners including frame to engine bolts, brake calliper bolts, wheel axle bolts, fork pinch bolts.

  • Check for any stored Diangostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Clear the DTCs and check if the DTC reappears. Investigate the component giving rise to the DTC.

Chassis Bearing Lubrication

notice
This information relates only to bearing lubrication. For the procedures necessary to replace a bearing, always refer to the relevant section of this Service Manual.Bearings installed in engine and transmission applications are not covered by this information. Refer to the Lubrication chapter or the relevant engine chapter for additional information.

General

For a bearing to be serviceable for its anticipated life span it must be checked, adjusted and lubricated at regular intervals, as specified in the service schedules given in the Owner’s Handbook and this Service Manual.

A correctly lubricated bearing will have a film of lubrication that separates the moving parts, disperses heat and protects the bearing surfaces from corrosion.

notice
In all cases, use the lubricant recommended.Grease the bearing, not the cavity where it is located.A bearing that is not regularly checked and lubricated will have a reduced life span.

New Bearings

New bearings are typically protected with an oil preservative to prevent corrosion etc. during storage. This is NOT the lubrication for the bearing but DOES NOT need to be washed off prior to assembly and in-service lubrication.

When lubricating a new bearing with grease the following steps should be taken:

  1. Do not clean off the oil preservative.
  2. Grease must be forced between the roller elements and the roller cage.
  3. Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
  4. Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.

Lubrication and Checks While Servicing a Bearing

  1. Disassemble parts as necessary to access the bearing.
  2. Inspect the old grease covering the bearing, looking for signs of bearing damage, i.e. flakes or specks of metal.
  3. Remove the old grease.
  4. Check the bearing for smooth operation and visually check for corrosion, dents and flaking in the bearing race, rollers or cage. Replace if necessary.

Several common bearing types and the lubrication procedures for each are identified below:

Sealed Bearings  ceon

Sealed Bearings

notice
Sealed bearings can be identified by their integrated seals.Sealed bearings are lubricated for life by the manufacturer.Any attempt to change the grease in a sealed bearing will damage the integrated seals. If the seals are damaged, dirt and water will ingress and the life of the bearing will be greatly reduced.
Taper Bearing ceoq

Taper Bearings

  1. Grease must be forced between the inner race and the roller carrier.
  2. Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
  3. Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.
Angular contact and ball bearing ceoo

Angular Contact and Ball Bearing

  1. Grease the bearing races and the ball bearing carrier.
  2. Rotate the bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
Needle Roller Bearing ceop

Needle Roller Bearings

  1. Coat the needle rollers with grease.
  2. Ensure the needle rollers turn so that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
  3. Assemble the parts, adjust and check as necessary.

Metal Bushes

  1. Disassemble the parts as necessary to access the bush.
  2. Remove the old grease.
  3. Apply fresh grease to the metal bush.

Fuel Handling Precautions

General

The following information provides basic precautions which must be observed if petrol (gasoline) is to be handled safely. It also outlines other areas of risk which must not be ignored. This information is issued for basic guidance only and, if in doubt, appropriate enquiries should be made to your local Fire Officer.

Petrol – Gasoline

When petrol (gasoline) evaporates it produces 150 times its own volume in vapour which when diluted with air becomes a readily ignitable mixture. The vapour is heavier than air and will always fall to the lowest level. It can readily be distributed throughout any indoor environment by air currents, consequently, even a small spillage of petrol (gasoline) is potentially very dangerous.

Warning Petrol Handling

warning
Petrol (gasoline) is highly flammable and can be explosive under certain conditions. When opening the fuel tank cap always observe all the following items:- Turn the motorcycle ignition switch OFF. - Do not smoke. - Always have a suitable fire extinguisher close at hand when handling or draining fuel or fuel systems. Fire extinguishers must also be present in areas where fuel is stored.- Always disconnect the vehicle battery, negative (black) lead first, before carrying out, dismantling or draining work on a fuel system.- Whenever petrol (gasoline) is being handled, drained, stored or when fuel systems are being dismantled, make sure the area is well ventilated. All potential forms of ignition must be extinguished or removed (this includes any appliance with a pilot light). Any lead-lamps must be flame-proof and kept clear of any fuel spillage.- Warning notices must be posted at a safe distance from the site of the work to warn others that petrol (gasoline) is being openly handled. The notice must instruct the reader of the precautions which must be taken.Failure to follow the advice above could lead to a fire hazard which could result in serious injury, or death.

Warninig petrol related components

warning
No one should be permitted to repair components associated with petrol (gasoline) without first having specialist training on the fire hazards which may be created by incorrect installation and repair of items associated with petrol (gasoline).Inspections and repairs must be completed by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of closed-course competition motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph motocross and enduro centre.Repairs carried out by untrained personnel could bring about a safety hazard leading to a risk of serious injury or death.

Warning Fuel Draining/Refill

warning
Draining or extraction of petrol (gasoline) from a vehicle fuel tank must be carried out in a well ventilated area.The receptacle used to contain the petrol (gasoline) must be more than adequate for the full amount of fuel to be extracted or drained. The receptacle should be clearly marked with its contents, and placed in a safe storage area which meets the requirements of local authority regulations.When petrol (gasoline) has been extracted or drained from a fuel tank, the precautions governing naked lights and ignition sources should be maintained.Failure to follow the advice above could lead to a fire hazard which could result in serious injury or death.

Fuel Tank Removal

Fuel tanks should have a PETROL (GASOLINE) VAPOUR warning label attached to them as soon as they are removed from the vehicle. In all cases, they must be stored in a secured, marked area.

Chassis Repairs

Warning Motorcycle involved in an accident

warning
If the motorcycle is involved in an accident, collision or fall, it must be taken for inspection and repair.Inspections and repairs must be completed by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of closed-course competition motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph motocross and enduro centre.Any accident can cause damage to the motorcycle that, if not correctly repaired, may cause a second accident which could result in serious injury or death.

Electrical Precautions

The following guidelines are intended to ensure the safety of the operator whilst preventing damage to the electrical and electronic components fitted to the motorcycle. Where necessary, specific precautions are detailed in the relevant sections of this manual which should be referred to prior to commencing repair operations.

Equipment - Prior to commencing any test procedure on the motorcycle ensure that the relevant test equipment is working correctly and any harness or connectors are in good condition, in particular mains leads and plugs.

warning
The ignition system produces extremely high voltages. Do not touch any part of the ignition system or any cables while the engine is running.An electric shock caused by contact with the ignition system may lead to illness, injury or death.
warning
Wearers of surgically implanted heart pacemaker devices should not be in close proximity to ignition circuits and/or diagnostic equipment. The ignition system and any diagnostic equipment may interrupt the normal operation of such devices causing illness or death.
warning
The battery contains harmful materials. Always keep children away from the battery whether or not it is fitted in the motorcycle.Do not jump start the battery, touch the battery cables together or reverse the polarity of the cables as any of these actions may cause a spark which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.

High Voltage Circuits - Whenever disconnecting live H.T. circuits always use insulated pliers. Exercise caution when measuring the voltage on the coil terminals while the engine is running. High voltage spikes can occur on these terminals.

Connectors and Harness - The engine of a motorcycle is a particularly hostile environment for electrical components and connectors. Always ensure these items are dry and oil-free before disconnecting and connecting test equipment. Never force connectors apart either by using tools or by pulling on the wiring itself. Always ensure locking mechanisms are disengaged before removal and note the orientation to enable correct reconnection. Ensure that any protective covers and substances are replaced if disturbed.

Having confirmed a component to be faulty, switch off the ignition and disconnect the battery negative (black) lead first. Remove the component and support the disconnected harness. When replacing the component keep oily hands away from electrical connection areas and push connectors home until any locking mechanism becomes fully engaged.

Battery Disconnecting

Before disconnecting the battery, switch off all electrical equipment.

warning
To prevent the risk of a battery exploding and to prevent damage to electrical components ALWAYS disconnect the battery negative (black) lead first. When reconnecting the battery, always connect the positive (red) lead first, then the negative (black) lead. Always disconnect the battery when working on any part of the electrical system.Failure to observe the above warnings may lead to electrical damage and a fire hazard which could cause personal injury.

Always ensure that battery leads are routed correctly and are not close to any potential chafing points.

Disciplines

Switch off the ignition prior to making any connection or disconnection in the system. An electrical surge can be caused by disconnecting 'live' connections which can damage electronic components.

Ensure hands and work surfaces are clean and free of grease, swarf, etc. as grease collects dirt which can cause tracking or high-resistance contacts.

Prior to commencing any test, and periodically during any test, touch a good earth to discharge body static. This is because some electronic components are vulnerable to static electricity.

Electrical Wires

All the electrical wires are either single-colour or two-colour and, with only a few exceptions, must be connected to wires of the same colour. On any of the two-colour wires there is a greater amount of one colour and a lesser amount of a second colour. A two-colour wire is identified by first the primary colour and then the secondary colour. For example, a yellow wire with thin red stripes is referred to as a 'yellow/red' wire; it would be a 'red/yellow' wire if the colours were reversed to make red the main colour.

Glossary of Circuit Diagram Symbols

The following is a description of the symbols found in the circuit diagrams used in all Triumph Service Manuals.

Connector

Connector Circuit Diagram Symbols

This illustration is used to show all multiplug type electrical connectors on Triumph circuit diagrams. The numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the connector pins. On ECMs with two connectors, the number would be prefixed with the letters 'A' or 'B' to identify each connector. An additional number outside the box will identify the component.

Diode

Diode Circuit Diagram Symbols

An electrical one-way valve. Diodes allow current to flow in one direction but will not allow it to return. The arrow, which forms part of the diode symbol, indicates the direction of current flow.

Electromagnetic Winding (solenoid)

Circuit Diagram Symbols_Solenoid_2

An electromagnetic winding (or solenoid) is used to convert an electrical current into a lateral movement. This can then be used to operate switches (as used in relays) or other components such as fuel injectors or secondary air injection solenoids.

Fuse

Fuse EN Circuit Diagram Symbols

A fuse is a device which protects a circuit in the event of a fault. The fuse will 'blow' should a short circuit occur, protecting that circuit from further damage. The number next to the fuse on the circuit diagram indicates the position of the fuse in the fuse box.

Ground Point

Ground Circuit Diagram Symbols

This symbol is used to show ground points. This is the negative connection to either the frame or engine, and is a common cause of intermittent faults due to loose or corroded connections.

Lamp or Bulb

Bulb Circuit Diagram Circuits

This symbol is used to show all types of light bulbs. The numbers in the box relate to the terminal numbers of the connector pins. An additional number outside the box will identify the component.

LED (Light Emitting Diode)

Diode Circuit Diagram Symbols

Triumph use LEDs for the alarm warning light, instrument illumination and warning lights, gear change lights and rear light/brake lights on various models.

Motor

Motor Circuit Diagram Symbols

An electric motor. This could be the starter motor or a motor within an actuator, for example within the ABS modulator.

Relay

Relay Circuit Diagram Symbols

A relay is effectively an electromagnetic switch. To close the relay contacts and complete the circuit, an electromagnet in the relay is energised which causes the relay contacts to close, making the circuit complete.

Relays are used when the electrical current is too great for a mechanical switch, usually when the switching must be done quickly to prevent arcing across the switch contacts. If a mechanical switch were used, the mechanical switch contacts would quickly burn away.

Resistor

Resistor Circuit Diagram Symbols

A device placed in a cable to reduce a voltage or restrict the maximum current a device can draw.

Splice

Splice Circuit Diagram Symbols

A hard cable joint where two or more cables are joined in the wiring harness. A potential source of both open and short circuits.

Switches

Switches EN Circuit Diagram Symbols

A mechanical device for completing or breaking a circuit. There are three common types of switch: normally open, normally closed and changeover.

Electrical Testing

For any electrical system to work, electricity must be able to flow in a complete circuit from the power source (the battery) via the components and back to the battery. No circuit means no electrical flow. Once the power has left the positive side of the battery and run through the component it must then return to the battery on its negative side (this is called earth or ground). To save on wiring, connections and space, the negative side of the battery is connected directly to the frame or engine. Around the frame and engine will be various other ground points to which the wiring coming from components will be connected. In the case of the starter motor it bolts directly to the engine, which is bolted to the frame. Therefore the frame and engine also form part of the earth return path.

Ohm’s Law

The relationship between voltage, current and resistance is defined by Ohm’s Law.

  • The potential of a battery is measured in volts (V).

  • The flow of current in a circuit (I) is measured in amperes.

  • The power rating of a consumer is measured in watts (W).

  • The resistance (R) of a circuit is measured in Ohms.

Ohm’s law, for practical work can be described as -

Ohms Law 1 Electrical Testing

Power is calculated by multiplying Volts x Amps -

Ohms Law 2 electrical Testing

By transposing either of these formulae, the value of any unit can be calculated if the other two values are known.

For example, if a battery of 12 V is connected to a bulb of 60 W:

  • the current flowing in the circuit can be calculated by using -

  • Ohms Law 3 Electricat Testing
  • the bulb resistance can be calculated by using -

Ohms law 4_1 Electrical Testing

To use either of the following triangles, put your finger over the value you want to find. Multiply the remaining values if side by side, or divide if one is over the other.

Ohms Law 5_1 Electrical Testing

Basic Electrical Circuits

Basic Circuit Electrical Testing

Basic Circuit Diagram

In the above circuit an electrical reservoir (the battery) is connected via a cable to a terminal on the controlling device (the switch) whose contacts are either open or closed. The other terminal on the switch is connected via a cable to the consumer (the bulb), and the other side of the bulb filament is connected to ground (earth) by another cable. The ground point is usually a part of the frame or engine, to which the battery negative terminal is also connected.

When the switch contacts are open (as shown in the diagram), the circuit is broken and no current flows. When the switch contacts are closed, the circuit is made and current flows from the battery positive terminal through the switch contacts and bulb filament to ground. The frame completes the circuit to the battery negative terminal and the bulb illuminates.

Although some circuits on the circuit diagram may at first seem more complicated, it will generally be found that they can be broken down into sections which do not differ greatly from the basic circuit above.

Circuit Diagrams

Circuit diagrams are created to provide a 'picture' of the electrical system and to identify the route taken by each individual wire through the system, in order to identify which components it feeds and which connectors the wire runs through. Circuit diagrams are an essential tool for fault finding, as it is possible to locate start and finish points for a circuit without having to manually trace the wire through the motorcycle itself. Circuit diagrams may look confusing at first but when they are studied closely they soon become logical.

Circuit diagrams also depict the inner workings of a switch housing (i.e. which wire connects to which when a switch is turned from one position to another) so that a test of that switch can be made using the wire terminals in the connector instead of disassembling the switch itself.

More information can be found in Circuit Diagrams, in the Electrical section of the Service Manual.

Tracing Circuits

The following is a description of two types of common electrical failures, and some of the methods which may be used to find them.

Open Circuit

Open circuit Trace Circuit

A break in an electrical circuit - current cannot flow. Usually caused by a break in a wire or cable or by a loose connection. Open circuits can often be intermittent, making diagnosis difficult.

Short Circuit

Short circuit Trace Circuit

A 'short cut' in an electrical circuit - current bypasses the intended circuit, either to ground or to another, different circuit. Often caused by failure of the cable insulation due to chafing or trapping of the wire. There are two different types of short circuit - short to ground and short to battery Voltage.

A short to ground means that the current is going to ground before it reaches the component it is supposed to feed. These are often caused by chafing of the harness to the frame or wires trapped between a bolted component, and will often blow the fuse on that circuit.

A short to battery voltage (12 Volts) is caused by a live power supply wire contacting an adjacent cable. Note that it is also possible for a 5 Volt sensor reference voltage to short to an adjacent circuit, which can also cause electrical failures and DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Code) to be stored.

When tracing a wire that is suspect, carefully check the circuit diagram before starting. Remember:

  • a wire may diverge at a splice and go off to feed other circuits. If these circuits are working, check for wiring faults from the splice onwards.

  • the circuit diagram is not an accurate guide to the actual location of the parts when fitted on the motorcycle. It is a schematic diagram of the circuits.

  • particularly where engine management items are concerned, the circuit is only completed by the ECM. If the ECM is not connected, the circuit may register as open.

To Check Continuity:

caution
Ensure the circuit being tested is switched off before measuring continuity. Damage to the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) may result from testing a 'live' circuit with the meter set to resistance (Ω).

In the example below, the ground circuit continuity is being tested from the battery to the frame.

Check continuity Tracing Circuits
  • Locate each end of the wire.

  • Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to resistance check Ohms.

  • Probe each end of the wire.

  • If there is continuity, the meter will usually bleep or register the resistance of the cable.

  • A high resistance figure could indicate a dirty or corroded connection.

  • If there is a break in the wire, the meter will not bleep or register a resistance.

  • By probing the wire in various places, the position of a high resistance or break in the wire (open circuit) can be narrowed down until it is found.

To Measure Voltage:

In the example below, the circuit voltage is being measured at the bulb positive (+) terminal.

Measure voltage Tracing Circuits
  • Turn the circuit to be tested 'ON'.

  • Set the Digital Multi Meter (DMM) to Voltage Check (V). Ensure the multi meter is set to DC Volts for direct current circuits (most circuits) or AC Volts for alternating current circuits (typically alternator output voltage tests).

  • Set the range of the DMM to the range best suited to the voltage of the circuit being tested (typically 20 Volts for most DMMs). Refer to the DMM manufacturers instructions.

  • Connect the black (ground) lead of the DMM to a reliable ground connection (usually the battery or frame ground).

  • Locate the positive terminal of the wire or component to be tested.

  • Connect the red (positive) lead of the DMM to the positive terminal.

  • Read the voltage from meter.

Splices

Splices are probably the most common cause of wiring faults after connectors. Splices are made where two or more wires come together and diverge in different directions, usually to feed a different circuit.

To locate a splice, it is necessary to peel back the insulation and examine the splice for its integrity. The most common fault is where one of the wires at the joint has come adrift usually causing the circuit it feeds or grounds to become 'dead'.

Switches

To check a switch, set the multimeter to resistance/continuity and probe the two pins that form a closed circuit when the switch is pushed. If the switch is working correctly, the resistance should register or the meter will bleep.

Relays

All relay cases have a circuit path engraved on them showing the circuit path across the electromagnet and the switch. Before making any checks, first note the pin designations, current paths, and whether or not there is a diode in either circuit path.

Relays

Make continuity checks across the electromagnet first, usually from pin 86 (positive) to pin 85 (negative). If a diode appears in the circuit use the diode check on the multimeter (Volts scale) in the direction of current flow. If there is no diode, use the resistance check facility. An open circuit or unusually high resistance value indicates a faulty relay.

To check the switch side, apply a 12 Volt supply between pins 86 and 85. With the supply connected, the relay should be heard to click and there should be continuity between pins 30 and 87. An open circuit indicates a faulty relay.

CAN (Controller Area Networking)

CAN (sometimes called CANbus) is a protocol for data communication between Electronic Control Modules (ECMs) and other components. Each component on the network is connected by a single pair of twisted wires (or bus) which are used for the transmission of vehicle sensor data. By using CAN, the overall number of system sensors, and the amount of cabling required to allow components to communicate with each other is greatly reduced.

This saves cost, weight and space, and makes the system more reliable, as the physical number of wires and connections is reduced.

CAN works by components sending and/or receiving 'packets' of information (such as engine speed or fuel consumption information) onto the network bus (note that the network must be free of data before any ECM is allowed to transmit). This data is given a priority according to its importance (for example 'engine speed' may have a higher priority than 'low fuel level'), so that even if two ECMs send data at the same time, high priority information is always sent first. Lower priority data is then resent after the high priority data has been received by all components on the network.

The receiving ECM confirms the data has been received correctly and that the data is valid, and this information is then used by the ECM as necessary. Specific data not required by an ECM will still be received and acknowledged as correct but then disregarded. For example: if an ECM does not require 'clutch switch position' information, this data packet would be ignored.

This allows for a very high speed system of communication, which is also very reliable. If one ECM fails or the transmit is corrupted, or otherwise incorrect messages are transmitted, none of the other ECMs on the network will be affected. Then, after a certain time that ECM will be prevented from transmitting further messages until the fault is rectified. This stops the ECM from clogging the network with incorrect data and preventing other messages from getting through. The fault would then be reported by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).

Triumph currently uses CAN for communication between the following:

  • Engine ECM

  • Instruments

  • ABS ECM

  • Immobiliser or Chassis ECM

  • Diagnostic connector

  • Inertial Measurement Unit (if fitted)

  • Audio system (if fitted)

  • Electronic steering lock (if fitted)

  • LED Headlights (if fitted).

  • Bluetooth module (if fitted)

  • Suspension ECM (if fitted)

  • Blind spot radar (if fitted)

LIN (Local Interconnect Network)

LIN (Local Interconnect Network) is a serial network protocol used for communication between components in vehicles. The bus is a single master/multiple slave bus that uses a single wire to transmit data.

By using LIN, the amount of cabling required to allow components to communicate with each other is greatly reduced. This saves cost, weight and space, and makes the system more reliable, as the physical number of wires and connections is reduced.

The instruments use some of this data internally and also broadcasts it on the CANbus (Controller Area Networking) for use on the motorcycle as necessary.

Information (such as headlight main beam) is being requested continuously by the Instruments, once a confirmation of the request is recognised the instruments will react accordingly.

LIN_diagram
  1. Instruments

  2. Switch housing (left hand side)

Example

  • Pressing the headlight main beam button on the switch housing (left hand handlebar) confirms to the instruments that headlight main beam is required.

  • The instruments confirm the data has been received correctly and that the data is valid.

  • Once confirmed the headlight main beam is switched on.

Triumph currently uses LIN on certain models for communication between the instruments and the following components:

  • Fog light button

  • Heated seat

  • Dip beam/Daytime running lights (DRL) switch (if equipped)

  • Mode button

  • Turn signal switch

  • Joystick button

  • Horn button

  • High beam button

Service Tools

Service Tools and Garage Equipment

Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of certain mechanical components in a practical manner without causing damage. Some operations in this service manual cannot be carried out without the aid of the relevant service tools. Where this is the case, the tools required will be described during the procedure.

Special Service Tools

Special Service Tools - LG1; LGX; LL1

T3880001

T3880003

T3880001 - Fuel Pressure Gauge

T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer

T3880023

T3880027

T3880023 - 50 mm Socket

T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit (RK final drive chain)

T3880053

T3880065

T3880053 - Wheel Bearing Extraction Kit

T3880065 - Bearing Installer

T3880067

T3880070

T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor

T3880070 - Bearing Installer

T3880085

T3880101

T3880085 - Fork Piston Holder

T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners

T3880104

T3880105

T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench

T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge

T3880123

T3880147

T3880123 - Extension Cable

T3880147 - Radiator and Cap Tester Kit

T3880160

T3880166

T3880160 - Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator

T3880166 - Wrench, Engine Mounting Adjuster

T3880171

T3880172

T3880171 - Fork Holding Tool

T3880172 - Pulser Ring Alignment Tool

T3880174

T3880207

T3880174 - Alternator Housing Puller

T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers

T3880215

T3880307

T3880215 - Fork Seal Cleaner, 35-45 mm forks

T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig

T3880313

T3880315

T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench

T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner

T3880367

T3880368

T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm

T3880368 - Bearing Installer

T3880375

T3880601

T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder

T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

T3880607

T3880609

T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter

T3880642

T3880640

T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector

T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate

T3880750

BatteryMate

T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool

BatteryMate Battery Charger - See Latest Parts Catalogue for Part Number Information

Specifications

Specification

Dimensions, Weights, and Performance

Specifications - Refer to web site for weights and performance

A list of model specific dimensions, weights and performance figures is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk.

Engine

Engine Specifications LG1/LL1/LGX

Engine Configuration

3 cylinder 12 valve DOHC

Arrangement

Transverse in-line

Displacement

659.3 cc

Bore x Stroke

74 x 51.1 mm

Compression Ratio

11.95:1

Cylinder numbering

Left to right (no.3 adjacent to camshaft drive)

Cylinder Sequence

Number 1 at left

Firing order

1 2 3

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Valve Head Diameter

Inlet

30.50 mm

Exhaust

24.20 mm

Valve Lift

Inlet

8.50 mm

Exhaust

7.36 mm

Valve Stem Diameter

Inlet

3.975-3.990 mm

Service Limit

3.965 mm

Valve Stem Diameter

Exhaust

3.965-3.980 mm

Service Limit

3.955 mm

Valve Guide Bore Diameter

Inlet

4.000 - 4.015 mm

Service Limit

4.043 mm

Valve Guide Bore Diameter

Exhaust

4.000 - 4.015 mm

Service Limit

4.043 mm

Valve Stem to Guide Clearance

Inlet

0.010-0.040 mm

Service Limit

0.078 mm

Valve Stem to Guide Clearance

Exhaust

0.020-0.050 mm

Service Limit

0.088 mm

Valve Seat Width (in head)

Inlet

1.20 mm

Service Limit

1.50 mm

Valve Seat Width (in head)

Exhaust

1.00 mm

Service Limit

1.70 mm

Valve Seat Width (valve)

Inlet

0.990-1.838 mm

Exhaust

1.065-1.918 mm

Valve Seat Angle

45°

Inlet/Exhaust Valve Spring Load and Length

508 N +/- 25 N @27.5 mm

Valve Clearance

Inlet

0.10 - 0.20 mm

Exhaust

0.325 - 0.375 mm

Valve Bucket Diameter

Inlet

25.385 - 25.399 mm

Service Limit

25.375 mm

Valve Bucket Diameter

Exhaust

25.385 - 25.399 mm

Service Limit

25.375 mm

Valve Bucket Bore Diameter

Inlet

25.421 - 25.431 mm

Service Limit

25.449 mm

Valve Bucket Bore Diameter

Exhaust

25.421 - 25.431 mm

Service Limit

25.449 mm

Camshafts

Camshafts Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Camshaft Timing

Inlet

Open = 3° BTDC (@1 mm lift)

Close = 34° ABDC (@1 mm lift)

Duration

217° (@1 mm lift)

Exhaust

Open = 27° BBDC (@1 mm lift)

Close = 2° BTDC (@1 mm lift)

Duration

205° (@1 mm lift)

Camshaft Journal Diameter

23.940 - 23.960 mm

Camshaft Journal Clearance

0.040 - 0.081 mm

Service Limit

0.17 mm

Camshaft Journal Bore Diameter

24.000 - 24.021 mm

Camshaft End Float

0.23 - 0.33 mm

Service Limit

0.40 mm

Camshaft Run-out

0.15 mm max.

Clutch and Primary Drive

Clutch and Primary Drive Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Primary Drive Type

Gear

Reduction Ratio

1.854:1 (76/41)

Clutch Type

Wet multi-plate, slip assist

Number of Friction Plates

7

Plate Flatness

Within 0.1 mm

Friction Plate Thickness

3.80 mm

Service Limit

3.62 mm

Clutch Pack Height

38.90 mm

Clutch Actuation Method

Cable

Cable Free Play (at lever)

2-3 mm

Balancer

Balancer Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

End Float

0.68 mm

Pistons

Pistons Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Cylinder Bore Diameter

74.040-74.058 mm

Service Limit

74.11 mm

Piston Diameter (at 90° to gudgeon pin)

73.974-73.990 mm

Service Limit

73.930 mm

Piston Ring to Groove Clearances

Top

0.02-0.06 mm

Service Limit

0.075 mm

Second

0.30-0.45 mm

Service Limit

0.075 mm

Piston Ring End Gaps

Top

0.15-0.30 mm

Service Limit

0.42 mm

Second

0.30-0.45 mm

Service Limit

0.57 mm

Oil

0.20-0.70 mm

Service Limit

0.84 mm

Gudgeon Pin Bore Diameter in Piston

16.994-17.001 mm

Service Limit

17.030 mm

Gudgeon Pin Diameter

16.984-16.989 mm

Service Limit

16.970 mm

Connecting Rods

Connecting Rods - LG1; LL1; LGX

Connecting Rod Small End Diameter

17.014-17.027 mm

Service Limit

17.037 mm

Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance

0.15-0.30 mm

Service Limit

0.50 mm

Crankshaft

Crankshaft Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Crankshaft Big End Journal Diameter

32.994-33.010 mm

Service Limit

32.950 mm

Crankshaft Big End Bearing Clearance

0.032-0.064 mm

Service Limit

0.070 mm

Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter

32.972-32.988 mm

Service Limit

32.948 mm

Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance

0.020-0.046 mm

Service Limit

0.070 mm

Crankshaft End Float

0.15-0.30 mm

Service Limit

0.5 mm

Crankshaft Run-out

0.02 mm or less

Service Limit

0.05 mm

Transmission

Transmission Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Type

6 speed, constant mesh

Gear Ratios

1st

2.867:1 (43/15)

2nd

2.053:1 (39/19)

3rd

1.565:1 (36/23)

4th

1.286:1 (27/21)

5th

1.107:1 (31/28)

6th

0.967:1 (29/30)

Gear Selector Fork Thickness

5.90-6.00 mm

Service Limit

5.80 mm

Gear Selector Groove Width

6.10-6.17 mm

Service Limit

6.27 mm

Gear Selector Fork to Groove Clearance

0.47 mm max

Final Drive

Final Drive Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Final Drive

Chain

Final Drive Ratio

3.188:1 (51/16)

Chain Type

DID520VM4

Number of Links

120

20 Link Length

319 mm

Drive Chain Play

43 - 55 mm

Chain Lubrication

Triumph Performance chain lubricant

Lubrication

Lubrication Specifications - LG1, LK1, LGX

Type

Pressure lubrication, wet sump

Oil Capacity (dry fill)

3.2 litres

Oil Capacity (wet fill including filter)

2.8 litres

Oil Capacity (wet fill excluding filter)

2.6 litres

Recommended Oil Approval Rating

API SH (or higher) and JASO MA

Viscosity

10W/40 or 10W/50

Type

Fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended

Oil pressure (in main gallery)

30.0 lb/in² min. @80°C oil temperature @ 5,000 rpm

Oil Pump Rotor Tip Clearance

0.15 mm

Service Limit

0.20 mm

Oil Pump Body Clearance

0.15 - 0.22 mm

Service Limit

0.35 mm

Oil Pump Rotor End Float

0.04 - 0.09 mm

Service Limit

0.17 mm

Ignition System

Ignition System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Type

Digital inductive

Electronic Rev Limiter

10,500 rpm

Primary Coil Resistance

10 K Ohms +/- 15%

Ignition Coil Type

Plug-top

Spark Plug Type

NGK CR9EK

Spark Plug Gap

0.60-0.75 mm

Fuel System

Fuel System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Fuel Type

Unleaded, 91 RON (U.S. 87 CLC/AKI)

Fuel Tank Capacity (motorcycle upright)

14.4 litres

Low Level Warning Lamp

4 litres remaining

Fuel Pump Type

Submerged electric

Fuel Pressure (nominal)

3.5 bar (50.8 lb/in²)

Purge Control System

Electronic, via fuel system ECM

Fuel Injection System

Fuel Injection System - LG1, LL1, LGX

Type

Electronic, sequential

Idle Speed

1300 rpm

Injector Type

Twin jet, solenoid operated plate valve

Throttle

Electronically controlled throttle body

Control Sensors

Atmospheric air pressure, throttle position, twist grip position, coolant temperature, crankshaft position sensor, oxygen sensor, intake air temperature, gear position sensor, MAP, road speed (from ABS).

Emissions Controls

Emissions Controls - LG1, LL1, LGX

Catalytic converter

1 between Headers and Silencer

Oxygen sensor

Heated, in front of Catalyst

Evaporative Control

Activated carbon canister (certain markets only)

Secondary Air Injection

Solenoid controlled, reed valve type

Coolant System

Coolant System Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Anti-Freeze Type

Triumph D2053 OAT Coolant

Freezing point

-35°C

Cooling System Capacity

2.20 litres

Radiator Cap Opening Pressure

1.1 bar

Thermostat Opening Temperature

71°C +/-2°C

Cooling Fan Switch On Temperature

103°C

Temperature Gauge Sensor Resistance

2.46 K Ohms +/-10% @ 20°C

Suspension

Suspension Specs LG1 LGX

Front Fork Travel

120 mm

Recommended Fork Oil Grade

Showa SS47G

Left Hand Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed)

125 mm

Right Hand Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed)

115 mm

Left Hand Fork Oil Volume (dry fill)

560 cc

Right Hand Fork Oil Volume (dry fill)

475 cc

Fork Pull Through (measured from the flat/machined surface on the underside of the upper yoke to the top of the fork outer tube)

39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm

Rear Wheel Travel

133.5 mm

Frame

Frame Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Frame Type

Tubular steel perimeter frame

Rake

24.6°

Trail

107.3 mm

Maximum Payload (rider, passenger, luggage and accessories)

205 kg (452 lb)

Brakes

Brakes Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Front Type

Two hydraulically actuated twin piston sliding calipers acting on twin discs

Front Caliper Piston Diameter

27 mm

Front Disc Diameter

310 mm

Front Disc Thickness

4.5 mm

Service Limit

4.0 mm

Front Disc Run-out

0.25 mm

Front Master Cylinder Diameter

14 mm

Recommended Fluid

DOT 4

Rear Type

Hydraulically actuated single piston caliper, single disc

Rear Caliper Piston Diameter

27 mm

Rear Disc Diameter

255 mm

Rear Disc Thickness

5.5 mm

Service Limit

5.0 mm

Rear Disc Run-out

0.25 mm

Rear Master Cylinder Diameter

12.7 mm

Recommended Fluid

DOT 4

Wheels and Tyres

Wheels and Tyres Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Front Wheel Size

MT 3.5 x 17

Front Tyre Size

120/70 ZR17 58W

Front Tyre Pressure

2.34 bar (34 lb/in²)

Recommended Front Tyre

A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk

Front Wheel Rim Axial Run-out

0.5 mm

Front Wheel Rim Radial Run-out

0.5 mm

Rear Wheel Size

MT 5.5 x 17

Rear Tyre Size

180/55 ZR17 73W

Rear Tyre Pressure

2.90 bar (42 lb/in²)

Recommended Rear Tyres

A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the Internet at www.triumph.co.uk

Rear Wheel Rim Axial Run-out

0.5 mm

Rear Wheel Rim Radial Run-out

0.5 mm

Electrical Equipment

Electrical Equipment Specifications - LG1, LL1, LGX

Battery Type

YTX9-BS

Battery Rating

12 Volt - 8 Ah

Alternator Rating

14 Volt, 29 Amp at 5,000 rpm

Fuses

See Fuse Identification

Torque Wrench Settings

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Torques LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Camshaft cover to cylinder head

10 Nm

See Camshaft Cover - Installation

Apply Action Can AC-90 to the seals

Camshaft drive chain tensioner to cylinder head

8 Nm

Camshaft ladder to cylinder head

*

See Camshaft - Installation and Timing

Camshaft sprocket to camshaft

22 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Cylinder head bypass spigot

15 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Cylinder head M6 fixings

10 Nm

Exhaust stud to cylinder head

10 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Secondary air injection valve covers to camshaft cover

9 Nm

Sound suppression bolt

12 Nm

Spark plug

12 Nm

Timing torque limiter

0.6 Nm

Clutch

Clutch Torques LG1 LL1, LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Clutch cable bracket

9 Nm

Clutch centre nut

98 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Fit new Belleville washer

Clutch lever clamp bolts

9 Nm

Clutch lever nut

6 Nm

Clutch support plate to centre

10 Nm

Clutch switch to switch housing

2 Nm

Balancer, Crankshaft and Crankcase

Balancer Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Camshaft drive sprocket to crankshaft

27 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Crankcase dry seal plug

33 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Crankcase to crankcase fixings

*

See Crankcases - Assembly

Connecting rod big end bolts

*

See Connecting Rods - Installation

Sprag clutch to crankshaft

16 Nm

See Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Installation

Engine Covers

Engine Covers Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Alternator cover to crankcase

10 Nm

See Alternator Cover - Installation

Balancer cover

8 Nm

Camshaft cover to cylinder head

*

See Camshaft Cover - Installation

Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s)

Clutch cover to crankcase

8 Nm

See Clutch Cover - Installation

Engine breather cover to crankcase

10 Nm

See Engine Breather Cover - Installation

Front sprocket cover to crankcase

9 Nm

See Front Sprocket Cover - Installation

Right hand side crankcase cover

8 Nm

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Installation

Sump to crankcase

10 Nm

See Sump - Installation

Sump plug

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Transmission

Transmission Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Detent arm fixing

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Detent wheel to selector drum

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Front sprocket to output shaft nut

85 Nm

Gear change clamp pinch bolt

9 Nm

Gear change pedal bolt

22 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Gear change rod lock nuts

6 Nm

Input shaft bearing retainer

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Input selector shaft retainer

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Output selector shaft retainer

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Selector drum bearing retaining screw

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Spring abutment bolt

15 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Lubrication System

Lubrication Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Crankcase breather baffle plate

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil breather drain pipe

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil filter

10 Nm

Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s)

Oil filter adapter

16 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil level dipstick

1.2 Nm

Oil pick up pipe

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil pressure relief valve

15 Nm

Apply ThreeBond 1305 to the threads

Oil pressure switch

13 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Oil pump drive chain retainer plate

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil pump drive sprocket to oil pump

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil pump to crankcase

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Oil transfer pipe

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Final Drive

Final Drive Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Chain rubbing strip to swinging arm

4 Nm

Drive chain adjuster nut

3 Nm

See Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment

Drive chain adjuster lock nut

15 Nm

See Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment

Rear sprocket to sprocket carrier

55 Nm

See Rear Sprocket - Installation

Rear sprocket carrier stud

*

See Rear Sprocket - Installation

Rear hugger and chain guard moulding to swinging arm

4 Nm

Cooling System

Cooling Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Coolant drain (on water pump outlet pipe)

10 Nm

Coolant expansion tank

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Coolant inlet to crankcase

8 Nm

Coolant temperature sensor

18 Nm

Cooling fan to radiator

8.5 Nm

Radiator lower mounting bracket to coolant inlet cover bracket

6 Nm

Radiator to frame upper

9 Nm

Radiator to lower bracket

6 Nm

Thermostat housing

9 Nm

Water pump inlet pipe to crankcase

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Water pump outlet pipe to crankcase

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Fuel System, Exhaust System and Airbox

Fuel System Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Air temperature sensor (inlet manifold)

1 Nm

Apply ThreeBond 1360 to the threads

Airbox front band clamp

1.5 Nm

Airbox to frame

6 Nm

Airbox upper to lower

1.5 Nm

Ambient air pressure sensor

3 Nm

Catalytic converter heat shield

5 Nm

Crankshaft position sensor

6 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Exhaust header to cylinder head

15 Nm

See Exhaust System - Installation

Exhaust silencer to frame fixings

19 Nm

Fall detection switch

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Fuel pump mounting plate to fuel tank

9 Nm

See Fuel Pump Assembly - Installation

Fuel rail to inlet manifold

4 Nm

Fuel tank to frame (pivot nut)

8 Nm

Fuel tank front mounting fixings

9 Nm

Fuel tank rear mounting bracket to frame

12 Nm

See Fuel Tank - Installation

Fuel tank bodywork fixings

3 Nm

Gear position sensor

5 Nm

Inlet manifold casting

8 Nm

See Inlet Manifold - Installation

Inlet manifold moulding

8 Nm

See Inlet Manifold - Installation

Immobiliser module

1.5 Nm

Left hand switch housing

2.5 Nm

MAP sensor

5 Nm

Oxygen sensor

25 Nm

Purge valve

3 Nm

Right hand switch housing

2.5 Nm

Silencer rear finisher

5 Nm

Throttle body to intake manifold

8 Nm

Twist grip housing

2.5 Nm

Front Suspension

Front Suspension Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Fork top cap

35 Nm

Handlebar clamp bolt

26 Nm

Handlebar end weights

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Headstock bearing adjuster and lock nut

*

See Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment

Left hand grip

3 Nm

Lower yoke pinch bolt

22 Nm

Upper yoke centre nut

90 Nm

Upper yoke pinch bolt

26 Nm

Rear Suspension

Rear Suspension Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Drag link to drop link

48 Nm

See Rear Suspension Unit - Installation

Drag link to frame

48 Nm

See Rear Suspension Unit - Installation

Drive chain rubbing strip

4 Nm

Drive chain slack adjuster lock nut

15 Nm

Rear hugger and drive chain guard moulding to swinging arm

4 Nm

Rear suspension unit drop link to swinging arm

48 Nm

See Rear Suspension Unit - Installation

Rear suspension unit lower mounting to drop link

48 Nm

See Rear Suspension Unit - Installation

Rear suspension unit upper mounting

48 Nm

Swinging arm pivot bolt adjuster

6 Nm

See Swinging Arm - Installation

Swinging arm pivot nut

110 Nm

See Swinging Arm - Installation

Wheels

Wheels and Tyres Torques LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Fork to wheel spindle pinch bolts

22 Nm

Front wheel spindle/axle bolt

65 Nm

Rear wheel spindle lock nut

110 Nm

Make sure the wheel spindle is fully inserted before tightening the lock nut.

Sprocket carrier stud

*

See Rear Sprocket - Installation

Front Brakes

Front Brake Torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Brake caliper to front fork

21 Nm

Brake hose to front caliper

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Brake hose to front master cylinder

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Brake lever pivot bolt

1 Nm

Brake lever pivot bolt lock nut

6 Nm

Brake master cylinder reservoir cap fixings

1.5 Nm

Brake pad retaining pin

18 Nm

Caliper bleed screw

6 Nm

Front brake disc to wheel

22 Nm

Fit new if loosened or removed

Front brake master cylinder to handlebar

12 Nm

Front brake switch bracket

2 Nm

Rear Brakes

Rear Brakes Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Brake caliper bleed screw

6 Nm

Brake caliper to carrier (external hex fixing)

29 Nm

Brake caliper to carrier (internal hex fixing)

22 Nm

Brake disc to wheel

22 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Brake hose to rear caliper

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Brake light switch bracket

3 Nm

Brake master cylinder reservoir to frame

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Brake master cylinder to frame

16 Nm

Brake pad retaining pin

18 Nm

Brake pedal pivot bolt

22 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Master cylinder push rod lock nuts

17 Nm

Return spring bracket

3 Nm

ABS System

ABS System torques LG1 LL1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

ABS modulator bracket to frame

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

ABS modulator to bracket

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

ABS wheel speed sensors

9 Nm

Brake line union to modulator

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Rear brake line protector moulding to alternator regulator/rectifier bracket

9 Nm

Frame, Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings

Frame and Bodywork Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Bank angle indicator

9 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Battery tray front fixings

5 Nm

Battery tray side fixings

4 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Battery tray rear fixings

3 Nm

Engine mounting bolts

48 Nm

See Engine - Installation

Frame adjusters

3 Nm

See Engine - Installation

Frame side covers

3 Nm

Front control plate

24 Nm

Front mudguard to front forks

6 Nm

Front mudguard centre moulding

1.5 Nm

Fuel tank bracket to frame

12 Nm

See Fuel Tank - Installation

Gear change bracket to frame

24 Nm

Grab handle bolts - Applicable markets only

24 Nm

Grab handle lower fixings - Applicable markets only

9 Nm

Mirror

17 Nm

Radiator cowls

2.5 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Rear footrest hanger

24 Nm

Rear bodywork bracket fixings

12 Nm

Rear mudguard side arm to swinging arm

32 Nm

Rear mudguard to side arm

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Rear mudguard to rear light moulding

6 Nm

Rear mudguard side arm harness cover plate

1 Nm

Rear panels to rear undertray

1 Nm

Rear undertray to frame

3 Nm

Seat lock latch

5 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Side panels

3 Nm

Electrical

Electrical Torques LG1 LGX

Application

Torque (Nm)

Notes

Alternator rotor to crankshaft

120 Nm

Alternator stator to cover

12 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Alternator cable bracket to cover

6 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Alternator regulator/rectifier to bracket

9 Nm

Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket to frame

5 Nm

Battery terminal fixings

4.5 Nm

Front direction indicator

3 Nm

Immobiliser ECM

1.5 Nm

Ignition switch

16 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Instrument assembly

3 Nm

Instruments bracket to upper yoke

3 Nm

Headlight to headlight bracket

3 Nm

Headlight rear cover

3 Nm

Headlight pivot lock nut

26 Nm

Horn

9 Nm

Negative battery lead to ground lock nut

10 Nm

Negative battery lead to ground stud

4 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Main harness front connector bracket

5 Nm

Rear direction indicator

3 Nm

Rear licence plate light

0.5 Nm

Rear light

3 Nm

Side stand switch

7 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Starter motor power lead connection

3 Nm

Starter motor solenoid lead connection

5 Nm

Starter motor to crankcase

10 Nm

Routings

Routings - Main Harness

Routings - Harness (ckyx)

Routings - ABS

Routings - ABS (ckyw)

Routings - Evaporative Hose Routing

Routings - EVAP (ckyy)

Routings - Clutch Cable

Routings - Clutch Cable (ckyv)

Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance - Legal Consideration Warning

warning
Triumph Motorcycles cannot accept any responsibility for damage or injury resulting from incorrect maintenance or improper adjustment.Scheduled maintenance must be carried out by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Incorrect or neglected maintenance may lead to a dangerous riding condition, leading to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Scheduled Maintenance - Main Section Warning

warning
All maintenance is vitally important and must not be neglected. Incorrect maintenance or adjustment may cause one or more parts of the motorcycle to malfunction.Weather, terrain and geographical location affect maintenance. The maintenance schedule should be adjusted to match the particular environment in which the motorcycle is used and the demands of the individual owner.Special tools, knowledge and training are required in order to correctly carry out the maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. An authorised Triumph dealer will have the necessary knowledge, equipment, and skills to maintain your Triumph motorcycle correctly.Scheduled maintenance must be carried out by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Incorrect or neglected maintenance may lead to a dangerous riding condition, leading to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

To maintain the motorcycle in a safe and reliable condition, the maintenance and adjustments outlined in this section must be carried out as specified in the schedule of daily checks, and also in line with the scheduled maintenance chart. The information that follows describes the procedures to follow when carrying out the daily checks and some simple maintenance and adjustment items.

Scheduled maintenance may be carried out in three ways; annual maintenance, mileage based maintenance or a combination of both, depending on the mileage the motorcycle travels each year.

  1. Motorcycles travelling less than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must be maintained annually. In addition to this, mileage based items require maintenance at their specified intervals, as the motorcycle reaches this mileage.

  2. Motorcycles travelling approximately 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the annual maintenance and the specified mileage based items carried out together.

  3. Motorcycles travelling more than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the mileage based items maintained as the motorcycle reaches the specified mileage. In addition to this, annual based items will require maintenance at their specified annual intervals.

In all cases maintenance must be carried out at or before the specified maintenance intervals shown. For advice on which maintenance schedule is most suitable for your motorcycle, contact a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.

Triumph Motorcycles cannot accept any responsibility for damage or injury resulting from incorrect maintenance or improper adjustment.

Service Symbol - Handbook

Service Symbol/General Warning Symbol

Service Mode spanner_D_seriesThe service symbol will illuminate for five seconds after the motorcycle start up sequence as a reminder that a service is due in approximately 60 miles (100 km). The service symbol will illuminate permanently when the mileage is reached, it will remain permanently illuminated until the service interval is reset. We recommend the service interval is reset by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.

Service Mode spanner_D_seriesThe general warning symbol will flash if an ABS or engine management fault has occurred and the ABS and/or MIL warning lights are illuminated. The fault must be checked and rectified by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.

notice
Items marked * in the Scheduled Maintenance Table are subject to additional labour charge, above the cost and time allowance for the basic service, which includes time to check only.

Scheduled Maintenance Table

Operation Description

Odometer Reading in Miles (Km) or time period, whichever comes first

Every

First Service

Annual Service

Mileage Based Service

600

(1000) six months

Year

10,000 and 30,000 (16,000 and 48,000)

20,000

(32,000)

40,000

(64,000)

Lubrication

Engine and oil cooler - check for leaks

Day

Engine oil - renew

-

Engine oil filter - renew

-

Fuel System and Engine Management

Fuel system - check for leaks

Day

Air filter - renew (replace more often if consistently riding in wet or dusty conditions)

-

-

-

Spark plugs - renew

-

-

-

-

Cooling System

Cooling system - check for leaks

Day

Coolant level - check/adjust

Day

Cooling system - check coolant hoses for chafing, cracks or damage. Replace if necessary

-

Coolant - renew - every 3 years, regardless of mileage*

Every 3 years, regardless of mileage

Engine

Clutch - Check operation

Day

Clutch cable - check function and adjust as necessary (models fitted with a cable clutch only)

Day

Clutch lever pivot - clean/grease

-

-

Valve clearances - check/adjust*

-

-

-

-

Camshaft timing - check/adjust*

-

-

-

-

Wheels and Tyres

Wheels - inspect for damage

Day

Tyre wear/tyre damage - check

Day

Tyre pressures - check/adjust

Day

Wheel bearings - check for wear/smooth operation

-

-

-

-

Steering and Suspension

Steering - check for free operation

Day

Front and rear suspension - check for damage/leaks/smooth operation

Day

Headstock bearings - check/adjust

-

-

-

-

Rear suspension unit and linkage - lubricate (single rear suspension unit models only)

-

-

-

-

Fork oil - renew

-

-

-

-

-

Swinging arm spindle - lubricate

-

-

-

-

-

Brakes

Brake system - check operation

Day

Brake pads - check wear levels*

Day

Brake fluid levels - check

Day

Brake fluid - renew - every 2 years, regardless of mileage*

Every 2 years, regardless of mileage

Final Drive

Drive chain slack - check/adjust

Day

Drive chain rubbing strip - check for wear, cracks or damage*

-

Drive chain - wear check*

-

Drive chain - lubricate

-

Electrical

Lights, instruments and electrical systems - check/adjust

Day

General

Bank angle indicators - check for wear*

Day

Centre and/or side stand - check for wear/smooth operation

Day

Instruments and engine ECM - check for latest calibration download using the Triumph diagnostic tool

-

Autoscan - carry out a full Autoscan using the Triumph diagnostic tool (print a customer copy)

-

Carry out all outstanding Service Bulletin and warranty work

-

Carry out road test

-

Complete the service record book and reset the service indicator (if fitted)

-

Service Specifications

Service Specifications LG1; LGX; LL1

Engine Oil Type

Fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended

Engine Oil Capacity (Wet Fill Including Filter)

2.8 litres

Spark Plug Type

NGK CR9EK

Spark Plug Gap

0.60-0.75 mm

Coolant Type

Triumph D2053 OAT Coolant

Coolant Capacity

2.20 litres

Clutch Lever Free Play

2-3 mm

Valve Clearances - Inlet

0.10 - 0.20 mm

Valve Clearances - Exhaust

0.325 - 0.375 mm

Front Tyre Pressure

2.34 bar (34 lb/in²)

Rear Tyre Pressure

2.90 bar (42 lb/in²)

Fork Oil Grade

Showa SS47G

Fork Oil Level - Left Hand Fork

125 mm

Fork Oil Level - Right Hand Fork

115 mm

Fork Oil Volume - Left Hand Fork

560 cc

Fork Oil Volume - Right Hand Fork

475 cc

Front Fork Pull Through

39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm

Front Brake Disc Maximum Run Out

0.25 mm

Rear Brake Disc Maximum Run Out

0.25 mm

Front Brake Disc Minimum Thickness

4.0 mm

Rear Brake Disc Minimum Thickness

5.0 mm

Brake Fluid Type

Triumph Performance DOT 4 brake fluid

Front Brake Pad Minimum Thickness

1.5 mm

Rear Brake Pad Minimum Thickness

1.5 mm

Drive Chain Type

DID520VM4

Drive Chain Play Measurement

43 - 55 mm

Drive Chain 20 Link Limit

319 mm

Drive Chain Lubrication

Triumph Performance chain lubricant

Bank Angle Indicator Service Limit

15 mm

Service Torque Wrench Settings

Service Torques LG1; LGX

Oil Filter

10 Nm

Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s)

Sump Plug

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Upper Airbox Fixings

1.5 Nm

Spark Plugs

12 Nm

Camshaft Cover

10 Nm

See Camshaft Cover - Installation

Apply clean engine oil to the seal(s)

Front Wheel Spindle

65 Nm

Front Wheel Spindle Pinch Bolts

22 Nm

Upper Yoke Centre Nut

90 Nm

Swinging Arm Spindle Nut

110 Nm

Front Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir Cap

1.5 Nm

Front Brake Hose to Caliper

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Front Brake Hose to Master Cylinder

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Front Brake Caliper

21 Nm

Front Brake Caliper Bleed Screw

6 Nm

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir

3 Nm

Fit new fixing(s) if loosened or removed

Rear Brake Hose to Master Cylinder

25 Nm

Fit new sealing washer(s)

Rear Brake Master Cylinder to Control Plate

16 Nm

Rear Brake Pad Retaining Pins

18 Nm

Rear Brake Caliper Bleed Screw

6 Nm

Fuel Tank Bracket to Frame

12 Nm

See Fuel Tank - Installation

Fuel Tank Front Fixings

9 Nm

Fuel Tank Rear Fixing

3 Nm

Fuel Tank Rear Pivot Fixing

8 Nm

Battery Terminals

4.5 Nm

Engine Check For Fluid Leaks

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Standard required:

All engine components must be free from fluid leaks.

Check:

Check the visible areas of the crankcase, cylinder head and transmission for fluid leaks.

Visually inspect the oil hoses (if fitted) for fluid leaks and signs of damage or chafing (where accessible).

Rectification if required:

A leaking or damaged component must be replaced.

Oil Level Inspection

In order for the engine, transmission, and clutch to function correctly, maintain the engine oil at the correct level, and change the oil and oil filter in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.

Warning - General - Contaminated Oil

warning
Motorcycle operation with insufficient, deteriorated, or contaminated engine oil will cause accelerated engine wear resulting in engine or transmission seizure. Seizure of the engine or transmission may lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. Start the engine and run at idle for approximately five minutes.
  2. Stop the engine, then wait for at least three minutes to allow the oil to settle.
  3. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean and screw fully home in the crankcase.
  4. Engine Oil Level Check
    1. Filler

    2. Dipstick

    3. Dipstick location in crankcase

    4. Upper marking

    5. Lower marking

    note
    The actual level is indicated when the motorcycle is level and upright, not on the side stand, and when the dipstick has been screwed fully home.Do not add oil through the dipstick hole in the crankcase.
  5. Remove the dipstick.
  6. The oil level is indicated by lines on the dipstick. When full, the indicated oil level must be level with the upper marking on the dipstick.
  7. If the oil level is too low, remove the filler plug and add oil a little at a time through the filler plug hole in the clutch cover, until the correct level is reached.
  8. Once the correct level is reached, fit the dipstick and the filler plug.

Oil and Oil Filter Change

Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil

warning
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contamination which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and avoid skin contact.The engine oil and filter must be replaced in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.

Warning - Hot Engine oil

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the engine oil will be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot oils may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, do not touch hot oil.
  1. Warm up the engine thoroughly, and then stop the engine and secure the motorcycle in an upright position on level ground.
  2. Place an oil pan beneath the engine.
  3. Remove the oil drain plug.
  4. Engine Oil Filter
    1. Oil filter

    2. Oil drain plug

  5. Unscrew and remove the oil filter using service tool T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench. Dispose of the old oil filter in an environmentally friendly way.
  6. Apply a smear of clean engine oil to the sealing ring of the new oil filter.
  7. Fit the oil filter and tighten to 10 Nm using T3880313 - Oil Filter Wrench.
  8. After the oil has completely drained out, fit a new sealing washer to the drain plug. Fit and tighten the plug to 25 Nm.
  9. Using a suitable funnel, fill the engine with a fully or semi synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SN (or higher) and JASO MA2. Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended.
  10. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
  11. caution
    Raising the engine speed above idle before the oil reaches all parts of the engine can cause engine damage or seizure. Only raise engine speed after running the engine for 30 seconds to allow the oil to circulate fully.
    caution
    If the engine oil pressure is too low, the low oil pressure warning light will illuminate. If this light stays on when the engine is running, stop the engine immediately and investigate the cause. Running the engine with low oil pressure will cause engine damage.
  12. Ensure that the low oil pressure warning light remains off and the oil pressure message is not visible in the instrument display screen.
  13. Stop the engine and check the oil level. Adjust if necessary.

Fuel/Evaporative System - Check For Leaks, Routing, Chafing and Security

Standard required:

Fuel/evaporative hoses must be secure and routed in such a way that they do not chafe against moving parts of the motorcycle.

Fuel/evaporative hoses must not be routed around sharp curves. This could cause restrictions in the flow of fuel.

Fuel/evaporative system components must be free from damage.

The fuel tank cap must be easy to open and close.

The fuel tank cap seal must be free from damage.

The fuel cap lock barrel and key (if fitted) must operate easily and smoothly.

Check:

Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for signs of fuel leakage.

Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for signs of damage.

Visually check fuel/evaporative system components for security (where accessible).

Check the operation of the fuel filler cap and lock (if fitted).

Visually inspect the fuel cap seal for signs of damage.

Rectification if required:

Fuel/evaporative leaks must be rectified.

Damaged fuel/evaporative system components must be replaced.

An incorrectly fitting fuel cap must be replaced.

MAP Sensor Drain Hose - Draining

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

The MAP sensor drain hose is to be drained every 10,000 miles.

notice
For best results use either a vacuum brake bleeding kit, a vacuum hand pump or an oil and brake fluid syringe to extract the oil from the drain hose.To prevent damage to the MAP sensor, the MAP hose must be detached from the MAP sensor.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Release the fixing, detach the MAP sensor from the bracket and disconnect the MAP sensor hose.
  2. Map Sensor Hose LG1
    1. MAP sensor (Trident shown)

    2. Fixing

    3. MAP sensor hose

  3. Remove the swinging arm pivot cover from the left hand outrigger.
  4. SwingArm Pivot Cover_1 (ckyc)
    1. Swinging arm pivot cover (left hand side shown)

  5. Release the fixing, detach the retaining clips and remove the left hand outrigger cover.
  6. LH outrigger cover clhk
    1. Fixing

    2. Retaining clips locations

    3. Outrigger cover

    4. Retaining clip grommet

  7. Remove the cable tie securing the drain hose to the frame.
  8. Remove the drain hose plug and connect a suitable vacuum device or syringe to extract any oil from the drain hose.
  9. Detach drain hose from frame clhl_1
    1. Cable tie

    2. Drain hose plug

  10. When the oil is drained, refit the drain hose plug.
  11. notice
    Do not over tighten the cable tie.Over tightening the cable tie will crush the MAP sensor drain hose.
  12. Route the drain hose to the left hand side of the frame, as shown in the illustration below.
  13. Secure the drain pipe to the frame with a cable tie as shown in the illustration below.
  14. Drain pipe routing clhl
    1. Drain hose

    2. Frame

    3. Cable tie

  15. Fit the left hand outrigger cover and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
  16. LH outrigger cover clhk
    1. Fixing

    2. Retaining clips location

    3. Outrigger cover

    4. Retaining clip grommet

    notice
    Note that on the inside surface of the pivot cover the are L and R markings.When fitting the left hand cover, make sure that the L marking aligns with the alignment mark on the outrigger cover.
  17. Refit the swinging arm pivot covers, using the alignment marks.
  18. Outrigger cover install clhn
    1. Alignment mark, outrigger cover

    2. Alignment mark, pivot cover

    3. L and R markings, shown for clarity

  19. Fit the MAP sensor hose to the MAP sensor.
  20. Fit the sensor to the bracket, tighten the fixing to 5 Nm.
  21. Map Sensor Hose LG1
    1. MAP sensor (Trident shown)

    2. Fixing

    3. MAP sensor hose

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  • Battery - Installation

  • Seat - Installation

Air Filter Element - Renew

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Removal

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the nine fixings and separate the airbox upper from the airbox.
  2. Airbox Top_1 (ckvs)
    1. Airbox upper

    2. Fixings

  3. Remove the air filter from the airbox.
  4. Air Filter_1 (ckvp)
    1. Air filter

    2. Seal

    3. Airbox

Installation

  1. Install the air filter into the airbox.
  2. Check the condition of the seal and, if necessary, replace.
  3. Air Filter_1 (ckvp)
    1. Air filter

    2. Seal

    3. Airbox

  4. Fit the airbox upper to the airbox and secure with nine fixings. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
  5. Airbox Top_1 (ckvs)
    1. Airbox upper

    2. Fixings

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Spark Plugs - Renew

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

Spark Plug Replace - LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Detach the electrical connections from the ignition coils.
  2. Remove the ignition coils from the cylinder head.
  3. Using a suitable tool remove the spark plugs from the cylinder head.
  4. Fit new spark plugs and tighten to 12 Nm.
  5. Inspect the ignition coils seal for damage and replace if necessary.
  6. Refit the ignition coils and reconnect the ignition coils electrical connections.
  7. Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Coolant System - Check For Fluid Leaks

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
warning
Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the cooling system will be hot and may also be under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.

Caution - Cooling - Coolant Level Inspection (overheating)

caution
If the coolant level is found to be low, or if coolant has to be added regularly, inspect the cooling system for coolant leaks. If necessary, pressure test the system to locate the source of the leak and rectify as necessary. Loss of coolant may cause the engine to overheat and suffer severe damage.

All cooling system components must be free from fluid leaks.

Check the visible areas of the radiator heat exchanger/oil cooler (if fitted) for fluid leaks.

Visually inspect the coolant hoses for fluid leaks.

A leaking or damaged cooling system component must be replaced.

Coolant Level Inspection

note
The coolant level should be checked when the engine is cold (at room or ambient temperature).
  1. Position the motorcycle on level ground and in an upright position. The expansion tank can be viewed from the left hand side of the motorcycle, below and towards the rear of the fuel tank.
  2. Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. The coolant level must be between the MAX and MIN marks. If the coolant is below the minimum level, the coolant level must be adjusted.
  3. Coolant Level Inspection
    1. Expansion tank cover

    2. Expansion tank

    3. MAX mark

    4. MIN mark

Coolant Level Adjustment

warning
Do not remove the expansion tank or radiator pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator will be hot and also under pressure. Contact with this hot, pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
note
If the coolant level is being checked because the coolant has overheated, with the motorcycle on level ground and in an upright position, also check the level in the radiator and top up if necessary.In an emergency, distilled water can be added to the cooling system. However, the coolant must then be drained and replenished with Triumph D2053 OAT Coolant as soon as possible.
caution
If hard water is used in the cooling system, it will cause scale accumulation in the engine and radiator, and considerably reduce the efficiency of the cooling system. Reduced cooling system efficiency may cause the engine to overheat and suffer severe damage.
  1. Allow the engine to cool.
  2. Remove the cap from the expansion tank and add coolant mixture through the filler opening until the level reaches the MAX mark. Refit the cap.
  3. Coolant Level Adjustment
    1. Expansion tank cap

    2. Expansion tank cover

    3. Expansion tank

    4. MAX mark

    5. MIN mark

Coolant Renew

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Cooling - Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when engine is hot

warning
Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the cooling system will be hot and may also be under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
  • Allow the engine to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes.

Clutch Cable - Check/adjust

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Standard required:

It should be possible to pull the clutch lever easily and smoothly towards the handlebar grip.

The clutch cable must be routed such that it does not chafe against moving parts of the motorcycle.

Clutch Free Play LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1

When the clutch lever is released, check for correct clutch free play at the lever is as described in the Service Specifications.

Check:

Check the action of the clutch by pulling the clutch lever towards the handlebar grip in order to disengage the clutch.

Check that the clutch cable is correctly routed and free from sharp bends or twists along its length.

Check that the clutch lever returns to the fully forward position when released (allowing for the specified free-play).

Check the operation of the clutch lever span adjuster.

Rectification if required:

If necessary, adjust the clutch cable as described in the Owner’s Handbook.

If undue resistance is felt when pulling the clutch lever towards the handlebar grip, check that the clutch cable is correctly routed. Twists or sharp bends in the cable will result in increased friction between the inner and outer cables.

Valve Clearance Adjustment

note
To adjust the valve clearances the camshafts must be removed. Follow the camshaft removal procedure.
  1. Remove the camshafts (see Camshaft - Removal).
  2. Remove the tappet bucket from the cylinder head.
  3. Remove the shim from the valve head.
  4. Remove tappet bucket cdrb
    1. Tappet bucket

    2. Shim

    note
    The shim may withdraw with the tappet bucket.
  5. Measure the original shim, using a micrometer and select the appropriate new shim as required.
  6. * Clearance too small: fit a thinner shim.
    * Clearance too large: fit a thicker shim.
    note
    Shims are available ranging from 1.70 mm to 3.00 mm in increments of 0.025 mm.
  7. Fit the new shim to the valve head.
  8. Lubricate the tappet bucket(s) with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
  9. Refit the tappet bucket.
  10. Refit the camshafts (see Camshaft - Installation and Timing).
  11. Re-check all valve clearances.
  12. Repeat the procedure if the valves require further adjustment.
  13. Fit the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover - Installation).

Camshaft Timing Adjust

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

note
After the initial camshaft timing has been completed and T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate removed, it will not be possible to refit it without first loosening the camshafts.
caution
The camshaft sprockets are attached to the camshafts using slotted bolt holes. This allows for very accurate valve timing and therefore improved performance and fuel economy. Never fit the camshaft sprockets without correctly setting the valve timing using the service tools and timing procedure described below. Severe engine damage will result from incorrect camshaft adjustment.
note
The camshaft sprocket fixings need only be loosened sufficiently to allow the sprockets to rotate on the camshafts.Removing the spark plugs reduces compression resistance when turning the engine
  1. Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
  2. note
    While rotating the crankshaft, ensure that the front camshaft drive chain rubbing blade remains in its mounting.Before inserting the timing pin, ensure the dot on the primary gear is aligned with the line on the crankcase.
  3. Using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft, rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation). Stop rotation when the camshaft alignment marks are positioned outwards as shown below and the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  4. camshaft alignment_gaaa_14
    1. Camshaft alignment marks

    2. Fixings

  5. Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  6. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. DOT alignment mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  7. Evenly release the camshaft drive chain tensioner mounting bolts until the plungers spring tension has been released.
  8. Remove the tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.
  9. LG1 Tensioner
    1. Tensioner

    2. Fixings

  10. Fit the service tool T3880607 using the original fixings and tighten to 8 Nm.
  11. LG1 Tensioner Tool
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    caution
    The torque value stated is very important to accurate timing. Always use the correct value of 0.6 Nm, as set using the service tool T3880609. Using an incorrect torque value will result in incorrect valve timing being set, or damage to the tensioner blade or other valve train components.Either condition may result in serious damage to the engine, reduced engine performance, or reduced fuel economy.
  12. Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
  13. LG1 Tensioner Tool Adapter
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    2. T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter

    3. 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key

    note
    Loosen the camshaft sprocket fixings just enough to allow the sprocket and camshaft to be able to move independently.
  14. Make sure there is no slack in the chain between the crankshaft and the sprockets.
  15. Loosen but do not remove the two accessible fixings.
  16. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Fixings

  17. Remove service tool T3880601 from the crankcase and crankshaft.
  18. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. DOT alignment mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  19. Using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft, rotate the crankshaft 360° clockwise (the normal direction of rotation). Stop rotation when the camshaft alignment marks are positioned inwards as shown below and the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  20. In addition to the crankshaft alignment mark, at TDC, the alignment marks on the camshaft bosses will point inwards.
  21. Camshaft alignment gaaa_12
    1. Camshaft alignment marks

    caution
    Do not rotate the engine further once the four camshaft sprocket bolts have been loosened. Rotation of the engine with the four sprocket bolts loose will result in valve to piston contact.Valve to piston contact will cause serious engine damage.
  22. Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  23. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. DOT alignment mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

    note
    Loosen the camshaft sprocket fixings just enough to allow the sprocket and camshaft to be able to move independently.
  24. Loosen but do not remove the remaining two fixings.
  25. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Fixings

  26. Note the orientation of the camshaft ladder in relation to the cylinder head.
  27. Progressively release the fixings securing the camshaft ladder to the cylinder head in the sequence shown below.
  28. Camshaft ladder removal cdqs

    Camshaft Ladder Fixing Release Sequence

  29. Remove the camshaft ladder, top pad, dowels and spark plug tower O-rings, noting their orientation for installation.
  30. note
    Adjust the valve clearances as required using the data collected prior to removal of the camshafts (see Valve Clearance Adjustment).
    caution
    Make sure the service tool T3880640 removal screw is unscrewed fully.The service tool T3880640 must be positioned so that it is located centrally between the camshafts.Failure to fit the service tool T3880640 correctly may lead to the irreparable damage to the camshafts.
  31. Insert the service tool T3880640 into the camshaft slots as shown below.
  32. Remove camshaft timing plate choj
    1. T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate

    2. Camshaft slots

    3. Removal screw

    note
    Make sure the alignment marks on the camshaft bosses are pointing inwards.
  33. Rotate both sprockets on the camshafts until the fixings are positioned centrally within the slots.
  34. camshaft sprocket slots_gaaa_15
    1. Elongated slots

    2. Fixings

  35. Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
  36. Assemble the dowels, spark plug tower O-rings, camshaft ladder and top pad in the same location and orientation as prior to removal.
  37. note
    The bolts for the camshaft cap ladder are tightened in two stages.
  38. Stage 1 - Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 5 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
  39. Camshaft ladder tightening sequence cdqr

    Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

  40. Stage 2 - Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 10 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
  41. Camshaft ladder tightening sequence cdqr

    Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

    caution
    The torque value stated is very important to accurate timing. Always use the correct value of 0.6 Nm, as set using the service tool T3880609. Using an incorrect torque value will result in incorrect valve timing being set, or damage to the tensioner blade or other valve train components.Either condition may result in serious damage to the engine, reduced engine performance, or reduced fuel economy.
  42. Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
  43. LG1 Tensioner Tool Adapter
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    2. T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter

    3. 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key

  44. Tighten the two accessible (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
  45. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Uppermost fixings

  46. Remove the service tool T3880640 by rotating the removal screw clockwise as shown below.
  47. Install camshaft timing plate choj_1
    1. T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate

    2. Removal screw

  48. Remove service tool T3880601 from the crankcase and crankshaft.
  49. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. DOT alignment mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  50. Rotate the crankshaft until the remaining two fixings are accessible.
  51. Make sure there is no slack between the crankshaft and exhaust sprocket when the sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes and the alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
  52. Camshaft alignment gaaa_12

    Camshaft Alignment Marks

  53. Tighten the two remaining (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
  54. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Uppermost fixings

  55. Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
  56. caution
    Always check that the service tool T3880640 has been removed before rotating the engine. Severe damage will result to the camshafts or service tool T3880640 if engine rotation is attempted with the tool installed.
  57. Set the hydraulic tensioner onto the first tooth of the ratchet (minimum extension) carry out the following:
  58. note
    If installing a new hydraulic tensioner, do not release the plunger before fitting.If installing the original hydraulic tensioner, the engine oil must be drained out of the tensioner to enable the plunger to be set onto the first tooth of the ratchet.Prior to installation the hydraulic tensioner must be set to the first tooth on the ratchet (minimum extension).
  59. Hold the resister ring ends together and pull out the plunger.
  60. Hold resister ring ends cfei_2
    1. Resister ring ends

    2. Plunger

  61. Remove the spring.
  62. Remove spring cfhp
    1. Spring

  63. While holding the resister ring in place, pour out the engine oil into a suitable container.
  64. Make sure the resister ring is correctly located as shown in the illustration below.
  65. Resister ring location cfho
    1. Resister ring

  66. Refit the spring.
  67. caution
    When resetting the tensioner, care must be taken to avoid activating the tensioner when there is no resistance on the plunger.Activating the tensioner when there is no resistance on the plunger may cause internal damage to the tensioner housing.It is recommended that the plunger is pushed into the tensioner housing in a controlled manner using a suitable soft jawed vice. Once the snap ring is located into its groove, the vice should be released slowly to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
  68. Hold the resister ends together and insert the plunger into the tensioner housing.
  69. Place the tensioner in a soft jawed vice.
  70. While holding the resister ends together, use the vice to push the plunger through the resister ring until the groove for the snap ring aligns with the snap ring.
  71. Refit plunger (cfei_3)
    1. Resister ring

    2. Plunger

    3. Groove for snap ring

    4. Snap ring

  72. When the groove aligns with the snap ring, release the resister ring and move one end of the snap ring into the groove. Slowly release the vice to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
  73. Snap ring to groove cfej
    1. Groove for snap ring

    2. Snap ring

  74. Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the service tool T3880607.
  75. 9 mm spacer for timing tensioner install_chwh_1
    1. Wedge

    2. Crankcase

    3. Tensioner blade

  76. Release the tension on Camshaft Timing Tensioner T3880607and remove the T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter .
  77. LG1 Tensioner Tool Adapter
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    2. T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter

    3. 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key

  78. Remove the T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner.
  79. LG1 Tensioner Tool
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

  80. Fit the timing chain tensioner, incorporating a new gasket and O-ring. Tighten the fixings to 8 Nm.
  81. LG1 Tensioner
    1. Tensioner

    2. Fixings

  82. Remove the wedge from between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase.
  83. To release the hydraulic tensioner, rotate the crankshaft 1/4 of a turn anticlockwise using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Then rotate the crankshaft clockwise two revolutions until the 'dot' mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  84. note
    Before inserting the timing pin, make sure the 'dot' on the primary gear is aligned with the line on the crankcase.
  85. Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  86. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. Dot mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  87. Check that the timing marks are still approximately aligned (to check that the camshaft timing has not moved during service tool T3880607 removal).
  88. Remove the service tool T3880601.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Wheels - Check For Damage

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
warning
Check the wheel rims for dents or deformation.Operation with damaged or defective wheels is dangerous and loss of motorcycle control or an accident could result.Always consult your authorised Triumph dealer for a safety inspection of the wheels, or for wheel replacement.

Alloy wheels - DP5, CF7; CM7; CM8; CR7; CR8; CT7; D34; D64; DD2; DD4; DP; DP2; DP3; DP4; DPA; DPZ; HA6; HB6; HD; HD2; HD4; HD5; HD6; HDA; HE7; HF7; HF8; HG7; HG8; HH7; HJ7; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1; NN3; NN4; NN5; NN6; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PSB; PX1; PXB; PXC; PYB; TD1; TH1; YE1; YF1; YJ1; YK1; YL1; YM1; YN1

  1. Check the wheel rims for broken or damaged spokes.
  2. Check the wheel hubs for any visible signs of cracks, damage or deformation.

Wheel Bearings - Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Paddock stand (Unordered List)

  • Position the motorcycle on level ground and place on a paddock stand.

  1. Hold the wheel at the top and bottom and rock the wheel checking for movement when a force is applied.
  2. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play.
  3. If the bearings do not spin smoothly or there is excessive play in the wheel bearings, replace all bearings in that wheel.
  4. LG1 Wheel Bearings

    Bearing check

Tyres - Check For Wear/Damage

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Warning - Tyre Safety Fragment

warning
Operation with excessively worn tyres is hazardous and will adversely affect traction, stability and handling which may lead to loss of control and an accident.When tubeless tyres, used without a tube, become punctured, leakage is often very slow. Always inspect tyres very closely for punctures. Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or other sharp objects. Operation with punctured or damaged tyres will adversely affect motorcycle stability and handling which may lead to loss of control or an accident.Check the rims for dents or deformation. Operation with damaged or defective wheels or tyres is dangerous and loss of motorcycle control or an accident could result.Always consult your authorised Triumph dealer for tyre replacement, or for a safety inspection of the tyres.

As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more susceptible to puncture and failure. It is estimated that 90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread life (90% worn). It is false economy and unsafe to use tyres until they are worn to their minimum.

All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the tyre becomes worn down as far as the top of a tread wear indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must be replaced.

Tyre Wear_Wheel Inspection (gafj.svg)
  1. Tread wear indicator

Attention must also be paid to the legal limits for tread wear, which differ from country to country. Tyres that have worn to the legal limit in the country or region in which the motorcycle is operated must be replaced, even if tread wear has not yet reached the level of the tread wear indicators.

Measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth.

Inspect tyres for cracks, splits and kerb damage. Always replace tyres that are suspected of having become damaged.

Damaged tyres must be replaced.

Tyre Pressures - Check/Adjust

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
notice
Always check the tyre pressures when they are cold.Checking tyre pressures when they are cold will achieve a more accurate reading on the tyre pressure gauge.
  1. Remove the caps from the tyre valves.
  2. Position the tyre pressure gauge onto the end of the valve body making sure the tyre valve is in contact with the tyre inflator.
  3. Momentarily deflate the tyre to equalise the pressure in the tyre and the gauge.
  4. Check that the correct pressure is displayed on the gauge.
  5. If the air pressure is below the recommended setting, inflate the tyre until the correct pressure is achieved.
  6. If it is greater than the recommended setting, slowly deflate the tyre checking the gauge regularly until the correct reading is achieved.
  7. Maintenance - Tyre Presure Gauge_ckie
    1. Tyre Valve

    2. Tyre gauge (valve connector)

    3. Tyre gauge

  8. Repeat the process for the remaining tyre.
  9. Refit the caps to the tyre valves.

Steering Check

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Move the handlebars to left and right full lock while checking that the brake hose, clutch cable and electrical harnesses do not bind or that the steering feels tight or difficult to turn. Rectify as necessary.

Fork Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching of the slider surface or for oil leaks.

If any damage or oil leakage is found, strip and repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.

Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:

  • Place the motorcycle on level ground.

  • While holding the handlebars and applying the front brake, pump the forks up and down several times.

If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as described in the Front suspension section of this service manual or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.

warning
Riding the motorcycle with defective or damaged suspension can cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident. Never ride with damaged or defective suspension.

Rear Suspension Unit - Inspection

Warning - Suspension - Contents under Pressure, Never Disassemble the RSU

warning
Contents under pressure. Never attempt to open this rear suspension unit. Never attempt to service this rear suspension unit. Never incinerate, puncture, or disassemble this rear suspension unit. Opening this rear suspension unit may result in severe injuries or even death.

RSU warning symbol and text

SafetyIcon.danger_pressurised container

The rear suspension units are sealed units and do not have any internally user serviceable parts.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Clean all components and inspect for damage/wear to:
  2. * rear suspension unit upper and lower mounting sleeve and bearing
    * drag link, bearings, sleeves and seals
    * rocker, its bearings, sleeves and seals.
  3. Renew as necessary, see the following:

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Headstock Bearing - Inspection

warning
Only remove raised witness marks from within the frame. Removal of material below any raised areas will reduce the level of interference between the frame and the bearings. Loss of interference could cause the bearing to become loose in the frame leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. Examine the frame for any raised witness marks caused by the removal process. Remove any such marks with fine emery paper or a suitable file.

Headstock Bearings - Lubricate

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Inspect the headstock bearings for damage/wear (see Headstock Bearing - Inspection).
  2. Lubricate the headstock bearings, using finger pressure, force five grammes of Triumph Performance RG2 grease (NLGI 2) or an equivalent heavy duty lithium based grease between the inner race and the carrier.
  3. Rotate the ball bearing to ensure that the grease is distributed over the entire circumference of the internal parts.
  4. Any excess grease should be smeared on the outside of the rollers.
  5. Headstock Bearings_ckid
    1. Roller bearing

    2. Inner carrier face

    3. Outer carrier face

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Steering Head Bearing - Check

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
  1. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
  2. Front Fork Wear Inspection
  3. Hold the bottom end of the front fork outer tubes as illustrated and rock with a front-to-rear motion. If free play can be detected, the headstock bearings require adjustment.

Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
  1. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
  2. Remove the fixings that attach the handlebar clamp to the upper yoke. Detach the clamp and release the handlebar.
  3. As an assembly, raise the handle bars until clear of the upper yoke. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the headstock top nut and the adjustment nuts is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
  4. Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
  5. warning
    Do not loosen the lower yoke fixings because the forks will no longer support the weight of the motorcycle.If this happens, the motorcycle could fall over and causing damage or personal injury.
    notice
    Take care when you remove the upper yoke centre nut, to make sure that the centre nut and upper yoke do not become scratched.Protect the surfaces with a suitable cloth or tape to prevent scratching.
  6. Remove the upper yoke centre nut from the steering stem.
  7. LG1 Top Nut
    1. Upper yoke centre nut

  8. Ease the upper yoke and instrument assembly from the forks and support them while detached.
  9. notice
    When you adjust the bearing free play, make sure that the threaded part of the stem is free from grease.
    notice
    Keep the torque wrench at 90 degrees to the centre line of service tool T3880750 when you tighten the adjustment nut in the stage that follows. This will apply the correct torque to the adjustment nut.
  10. Adjust the bearing free play as follows, using service tool T3880023 and service tool T3880750:
  11. * Remove the lock nut using service tool T3880023.
    * Remove and discard the washer.
    Headstock Bearing Adjustment, cdbo1
    1. Adjuster nut

    2. Lock nut

    3. T3880023 - 50 mm Socket

    * Thoroughly clean the threads on the steering stem.
    * Loosen the adjuster nut using service tool T3880750, then tighten to 40 Nm. Keep the torque wrench at 90 degrees to the centre line of the tool.
    * Loosen the adjuster nut using service tool T3880750, then tighten to 10 Nm. Keep the torque wrench at 90 degrees to the centre line of the tool.
    T3880750 and Torque Tighten
    1. T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool

    2. Torque wrench

    * Fit a new tab washer and the lock nut.
    warning
    It is essential that the adjuster nut is not over-tightened.If the adjuster nut is over-tightened it will cause a pre-load on the headstock bearings.This will cause tight steering, which may lead to loss of motorcycle control, which could result in serious injury or death.
    * Position service tool T3880023 to the lock nut and tighten to 10 Nm.
    Headstock Bearing Adjustment, cdbo1
    1. Adjuster nut

    2. Lock nut

    3. T3880023 - 50 mm Socket

    * Add an alignment mark between the adjuster nut and the lock nut.
    * Position service tool T3880750 to the adjuster nut.
    * Whilst restraining the lock nut with service tool T3880023, turn the adjuster nut with service tool T3880750 and proprietary wrench counter-clockwise by 45 degrees.
    * Whilst restraining the lock nut with service tool T3880023, turn the adjuster nut with service tool T3880750 and torque wrench counter-clockwise and tighten to 45 Nm. Keep the torque wrench at 90 degrees to the centre line of the tool.
    Steering head bearing tighten
    1. Adjuster nut

    2. Lock nut

    3. T3880023 - 50 mm Socket

    4. T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool

    * Make sure that the alignment mark between the adjuster nut and lock nut is no longer aligned.
  12. Refit the upper yoke and instrument assembly to the forks.
  13. Fit the upper yoke centre nut and tighten to 90 Nm.
  14. Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts to 26 Nm.
  15. Locate the handlebar assembly in the lower halves of the clamps. Fit the upper clamps and bolts.
  16. Rotate the handlebars so that the alignment mark on the handlebar aligns with the split line.
  17. Tighten the front clamp bolts to 26 Nm, then the rears.
  18. LG1 Handlebar Align
    1. Alignment mark

    2. Split line

  19. Recheck the bearing adjustment (see Steering Head Bearing - Check).

Maintenance - Fork Oil Renew

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Brake Master Cylinders - Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Inspect both the front and rear master cylinders for fluid leaks. Rectify as necessary.

Front Brake Wear inspection

Brake pads must be inspected in accordance with scheduled requirements and replaced if worn to, or beyond the minimum service thickness.

Brake Wear Inspection cbmz_1 svg
  1. Carrier plate

  2. Brake pad

Minimum lining thickness

1.5 mm

If the lining thickness of any pad is less than that specified in the table, replace all the pads on the wheel.

Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material

warning
Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.The ABS calibration is optimised for use with the friction material provided on brake pads supplied by Triumph.The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as differing friction material specifications will affect the performance of the ABS, potentially causing loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness

warning
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph are specifically designed for use with the brake calipers fitted to your motorcycle. The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as these may have a reduced carrier plate thickness when compared with the Triumph genuine parts. Brake pads with an incorrect carrier plate thickness can potentially become dislodged from the caliper body as they wear, leading to brake failure, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph will have the carrier plate at the correct thickness. Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.

H7_front pad_chbe_2
  1. Carrier plate

  2. Brake pad lining

Rear Brake Wear inspection

If the lining thickness of any pad is less than that specified in the table, replace all the pads on the wheel.

Minimum lining thickness

1.5 mm

Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material

warning
Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.The ABS calibration is optimised for use with the friction material provided on brake pads supplied by Triumph.The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as differing friction material specifications will affect the performance of the ABS, potentially causing loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness

warning
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph are specifically designed for use with the brake calipers fitted to your motorcycle. The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as these may have a reduced carrier plate thickness when compared with the Triumph genuine parts. Brake pads with an incorrect carrier plate thickness can potentially become dislodged from the caliper body as they wear, leading to brake failure, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Brake pads supplied by Triumph will have the carrier plate at the correct thickness. Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.

HD-rear brake pad
  1. Carrier plate

  2. Brake pad lining

Front Brake Fluid Level Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
    HD-HD4 Front master cylinder-kabi_1_1
    1. Front brake fluid reservoir, upper level line

    2. Lower level line

  1. The brake fluid level in the reservoirs must be kept between the upper and lower level lines (reservoir held horizontal).
  2. To inspect the fluid level, check the level of fluid visible in the window at the front of the reservoir body.
  3. To adjust the fluid level, release the screws and remove the cover.
  4. Noting its position, remove the sealing diaphragm.
  5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
  6. Refit the cover, ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cover and reservoir body.
  7. Tighten the cover retaining screws to 1.5 Nm.
warning
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the fluid in either fluid reservoir, consult your authorised Triumph dealer for advice before riding. Riding with depleted brake fluid levels, or with a brake fluid leak is dangerous and will cause reduced brake performance potentially leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Rear Brake Fluid Level Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
Rear brake reservoir, chrk_1
  1. Rear reservoir cap

  2. Rear reservoir upper level

  3. Rear reservoir lower level

  1. The reservoir is visible from the right hand side of the motorcycle, forward of the silencer, below the rider’s seat.
  2. To inspect the fluid level, check the level of fluid visible in the reservoir. The fluid level must be kept between the upper and lower level lines (reservoir held horizontal).
  3. To adjust the fluid level, remove the reservoir cap and diaphragm seal. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
  4. Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly fitted.
warning
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the fluid in either fluid reservoir, consult your authorised Triumph dealer for advice before riding. Riding with depleted brake fluid levels, or with a brake fluid leak is dangerous and will cause reduced brake performance potentially leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Brake Fluid - Renew

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
warning
Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Do not allow moisture or debris to enter the cylinder, as this will adversely affect the fluid properties. Always use fluid from a sealed container and do not use fluid from a container that has been opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid leakage around hydraulic fittings and for damage to hoses. A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
caution
Do not allow the fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the reservoir. If the fluid level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and the sequence of bleeding must be repeated.

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.

Front Brake Fluid

  • Note the original setting of the brake lever adjuster in order that it can be returned to the same position when the bleeding operation is complete. Set the brake lever adjuster to position No. 1.

Brake lever adjuster cjev
  1. Adjuster wheel

  2. Arrow mark

  1. Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a level position.
  2. Front brake reservoir, kabi_3
    1. Front reservoir upper level

    2. Front reservoir lower level

    3. Screws

  3. Remove the screws from the brake reservoir cover.
  4. warning
    Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Do not allow moisture or debris to enter the cylinder as this will adversely affect the fluid properties. Always use fluid from a sealed container and do not use fluid from a container which has been opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid leakage around hydraulic fittings and for damage to hoses.A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
    caution
    To prevent body damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.
  5. Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
  6. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the reservoir. Replace if necessary.
  7. Remove the rubber cap from the bleed screw on the right hand caliper.
  8. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
  9. Front brake bleed, HD front caliper bleed
    1. Bleed screw

    2. Bleed tube

    3. Container

  10. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid. Keep the tube end below the level of fluid.
  11. note
    The bleed screws should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pulling the brake lever or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.
  12. Partially open the bleed screw.
  13. note
    Pressure applied to the brake lever during the brake fluid renew process must be applied and removed smoothly and slowly. It must take a minimum of five seconds between lever positions (from fully released to stop).Failure to do this slowly can allow air to be drawn in to the system through the bleed screw threads.
  14. Get an assistant to slowly pull the brake lever to the handlebar and then slowly release the brake lever.
  15. Repeat step 9 until fresh brake fluid appears in the bleed tube.
  16. When fresh brake fluid is in the system, apply pressure to the brake lever, close the bleed screw and tighten it to 6 Nm.
  17. Remove the bleed tube and replace the bleed screw cap.
  18. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
  19. Repeat steps 5 to 13 for the other front brake caliper.
  20. When the brake fluid has been renewed, make sure the brake lever operation has a firm resistive feel to it, does not feel spongy and that the lever cannot be pulled directly back to the handlebar. Take remedial action as necessary.
  21. Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cap and the reservoir body. Tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.
  22. warning
    Always return the lever adjuster to the original setting as noted in paragraph 1. Operating the motorcycle with lever settings that are unfamiliar may lead to loss of control or an accident.
    warning
    It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Rear Brake Fluid

  1. Remove the cap from the rear bleed screw.
  2. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
  3. Bleeding the Rear Brakes, (cbgk2)
    1. Bleed screw

    2. Spanner

    3. Bleed tube

  4. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
  5. caution
    To prevent body damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.
  6. Unscrew and remove the rear brake reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
  7. Rear brake reservoir, chrk_1
    1. Rear reservoir cap

    2. Rear reservoir upper level

    3. Rear reservoir lower level

    warning
    Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Do not allow moisture or debris to enter the cylinder as this will adversely affect the fluid properties. Always use fluid from a sealed container and do not use fluid from a container which has been opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid leakage around hydraulic fittings and for damage to hoses.A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
  8. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm. Replace the diaphragm as necessary.
  9. note
    The bleed screws should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pressing the brake pedal or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.
  10. Partially open the bleed screw.
  11. note
    Pressure applied to the brake pedal during the brake fluid renew process must be applied and removed smoothly and slowly. It must take a minimum of five seconds between lever positions (from fully released to stop).Failure to do this slowly can allow air to be drawn in to the system through the bleed screw threads.
  12. Get an assistant to slowly depress the brake pedal and then slowly release the brake lever.
  13. Repeat step 7 until fresh brake fluid appears in the bleed tube.
  14. When fresh brake fluid is in the system, apply pressure to the brake pedal, close the bleed screw and tighten it to 6 Nm.
  15. Remove the bleed tube and replace the bleed screw cap.
  16. Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the cap and the reservoir body.
  17. Check the operation of the rear brake. Rectify as necessary.
  18. warning
    It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Drive Chain Free Movement - Inspection

Drive Chain Free Movement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
  1. Place the motorcycle on a level surface and hold it in an upright position with no weight on it.
  2. Rotate the rear wheel by pushing the motorcycle to find the position where the chain is tightest.
  3. Stretch the chain taut by applying pressure on the chain.
  4. Measure from the bottom of the swingarm to the centre of the chain pin, as shown in the illustration.
  5. notice
    The drive chain free play measurement value is different to the drive chain adjustment measurement. Please refer to the correct measurement corresponding to the process being performed.
  6. The measurement must be in the range of 43 - 55 mm.
  7. If the measurement exceeds the range, then the chain needs to be adjusted, see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment.

Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment

warning
Operation of the motorcycle with insecure adjuster lock nuts or a loose wheel spindle may result in impaired stability and handling of the motorcycle. This impaired stability and handling may lead to loss of control or an accident.

If the drive chain free movement measurement is incorrect, adjustments must be made as follows:

  1. Loosen the rear wheel spindle nut.
  2. Loosen the adjuster lock nut on both the left and right hand side drive chain adjusters.
  3. Drive Chain Free Movement Adjustment

    A. Clockwise direction

    B. Anticlockwise direction

    1. Spindle adjuster

    2. Rear wheel spindle nut

    3. Adjuster nut

    4. Adjuster lock nut

  4. Equally turn both the left and right hand adjuster nuts clockwise (A) to decrease drive chain free movement and anticlockwise (B) to increase drive chain free movement.
  5. Make sure the same adjuster marking is aligned with the spindle adjuster on both sides of the swinging arm.
  6. Drive Chain Free Movement Adjustment
    1. Spindle adjuster (left hand side shown)

    2. Adjuster markings

  7. Make sure that both the left and right hand adjuster nuts are set to the same measurement.
  8. notice
    The drive chain free play measurement value is different to the drive chain adjustment measurement. Please refer to the correct measurement corresponding to the process being performed.
  9. Set the amount of drive chain free movement to 43 - 46 mm and tighten the rear wheel spindle nut to 110 Nm.
  10. Repeat the drive chain adjustment check. Readjust if necessary.
  11. Tighten both left and right hand side adjuster nuts to 3 Nm.
  12. Hold the adjuster nuts in place, and tighten the adjuster lock nuts to 15 Nm.
  13. Repeat the drive chain adjustment check. Readjust if necessary.
  14. Check the rear brake effectiveness. Rectify if necessary.

Brakes - Defective Warning

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes.If a problem is detected or any doubt exists, the brakes must be inspected by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Operation of the motorcycle with defective brakes may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Check

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series

  1. Inspect the drive chain rubbing strip, including the underside, for cracks, damage or excessive wear.
  2. LG1 Chain Rubbing Strip
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

  3. If the drive chain rubbing strip needs replacing, see Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Removal and Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Installation.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series

Drive Chain and Sprocket Wear Inspection

Drive Chain - Maintenance Warning

warning
Replacement drive chains must be installed by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.We recommend to always replace worn or damaged chains using genuine Triumph parts.Incorrectly installed drive chains may result in a broken drive chain or may cause the drive chain to jump off the sprockets, leading to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Notice Drive Chain - Worn Sprockets

notice
If the sprockets are found to be worn, always replace the sprockets and drive chain together.Replacing worn sprockets without also replacing the drive chain will lead to premature wear of the new sprockets.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

L series chain guard removal SM only

Drive chain damage and wear inspections

Drive Chain Damage Inspection

    warning
    If the drive chain is found to have damaged rollers, loose pins or stiff links, the drive chain must be replaced.Do not attempt to loosen any stiff links. The stiff link may have damaged or worn components.Riding with drive chain stiff links, or loosened stiff links, may result in a broken drive chain or may cause the drive chain to jump off the sprockets, leading to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Rotate the rear wheel and inspect the drive chain for damaged rollers, loose pins and stiff links.
  2. Stiff link
    1. Stiff link

  3. If the drive chain has any damaged rollers, loose pins or stiff links, the drive chain must be replaced by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.

Drive Chain Wear Inspection

  1. Stretch the drive chain taut by hanging a 10 - 20 kg (20 - 40 lb) weight on the drive chain.
  2. Drive chain measurement
    1. Measure across 20 links

    2. Weight

  3. Measure the length of 20 links on the straight part of the drive chain from pin centre of the 1st pin to the pin centre of the 21st pin. Since the drive chain may wear unevenly, take measurements in several places.
  4. If the length exceeds the maximum service limit, the drive chain must be replaced. Refer to the Specifications section for the maximum service limit.

Sprockets Wear Inspection

    notice
    The illustration shows wear on sprockets mounted on the left hand side of the motorcycle. For sprockets mounted on the right hand side of the motorcycle, the wear is on the opposite side of the tooth.
  1. Rotate the rear wheel and inspect the sprockets for unevenly or excessively worn or damaged teeth.
  2. Chain and Sprocket Wear
  3. If there is any wear or damage, the drive chain and the sprockets must be replaced by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

L series chain guard install SM only

Final Drive Chain Lubrication

Lubrication is necessary every 200 miles (300 km) and also after riding in wet weather, on wet roads, or any time that the chain appears dry.

Use the special drive chain lubricant as recommended in the specification section.

Correct application is critical for drive chain lubrication. Apply the lubricant for one full drive chain revolution only, then leave for eight hours before riding. This allows the lubricant’s solvent (used to thin the oil) to evaporate and the oil to 'soak' into all parts of the drive chain. If the lubricant is applied and the motorcycle is ridden shortly afterwards, the lubricant is unlikely to reach all parts and the majority will be flung off and wasted. Applying excessive amounts is not helpful under any circumstances.

It should be noted that the lubricant is applied to the drive chain to lubricate its action across the sprockets. In an O-ring chain, external lubrication does not penetrate to the bushes and rollers as the O-ring seals prevents this from happening.

caution
Do not use a power jet washer to clean the chain as this may cause damage to the chain components.

Check Lights, Instruments and Electrical Systems

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Check the instruments, lights and electrical systems for functionality. Rectify if necessary.

Bank Angle Indicators

  1. Inspect the bank angle indicators on the rider's footrests for wear. The bank angle indicators are worn out when 15 mm of the bank indicator remains.
  2. Bank Angle Indicator
    1. Bank angle indicator

    warning
    Use of a motorcycle with bank angle indicators worn beyond the maximum limit (when the bank angle indicator is worn to a minimum 15 mm in length) will allow the motorcycle to be banked to an unsafe angle. Therefore, always replace the bank angle indicator pegs when they are worn to 15 mm in length.Banking to an unsafe angle may cause instability, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
    warning
    The bank angle pegs must not be used as a guide to how far the motorcycle may be safely banked. This depends on many various conditions including, but not limited to, road surface, tyre condition and weather. Banking to an unsafe angle will lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Latest Calibrations Check

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Check for the latest calibration download for the following using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool:

  • Instruments (if applicable)

  • Chassis ECM (if fitted)

  • Keyless ECM (if fitted)

  • Suspension ECM (if fitted)

  • Immobiliser (if fitted)

  • ABS ECM

  • Engine ECM

See the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide for more information.

Autoscan

Actions required

Perform an Autoscan using the Triumph Diagnostic Software in accordance with the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.

Check

Check all results pass the Autoscan, and save the results.

Print a customer copy.

Additional Work

Standard required:

Check Triumph Online for all additional work required by relevant Triumph issued Service Bulletins, Recalls and Technical News Bulletins. These must be completed prior to the road test.

Road Test

warning
When riding the motorcycle the rider must always wear a safety helmet, eye protection, gloves, boots, trousers (close fitting around the knee and ankle) and a brightly coloured jacket. Brightly coloured clothing will considerably increase a rider's visibility to other operators of road vehicles. Although full protection is not possible, wearing correct protective clothing can reduce the risk of injury when riding.
warning
A safety helmet is one of the most important pieces of riding gear as it offers protection against head injuries. Your safety helmet should be carefully chosen and should fit your head comfortably and securely. A brightly coloured safety helmet will increase a rider's visibility to other operators of road vehicles. An open face helmet offers some protection in an accident though a full face helmet will offer more. Always wear a visor or approved goggles to help vision and to protect your eyes.
warning
Do not attempt to test the ABS function of the motorcycle’s braking system during road test. The ABS function is for use in emergency situations only. Any attempt to artificially create an emergency situation is extremely hazardous and could lead to a collision with a following vehicle or loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
note
For the first 1,000 miles, the motorcycle should be ridden within the running in procedure (see Owner’s Handbook), checking for abnormalities, unusual noises and for satisfactory operation.When checking the brakes on road test, a suitable safe place should be found to carry out the test.
note
Faults detected during road test or post road test inspection, must be rectified before the motorcycle is released to the customer. The distance covered on the road test should be long enough to allow a satisfactory check to be made in the following areas:

Engine Cold Start Performance

Standard required:

The engine must start quickly and idle smoothly.

note
This check is to be carried out when the engine is cold.

Action:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

Start the engine and allow to idle.

ABS (anti-lock brake system) indicator light (models fitted with ABS only)

Standard required:

Refer to the Owner’s Handbook for further information regarding the ABS indicator light illumination sequence for the relevant model.

The ABS indicator light should flash on and off and continue to flash after engine start up until the motorcycle first reaches a speed exceeding 6 mph (10 km/h).

Clutch

Standard required:

The clutch should engage smoothly, without judder, slipping or noise.

Gear Change

Standard required:

Changing between gears must be smooth and easily accomplished.

Throttle Response

Standard required:

The engine should be quick to respond to any movement of the throttle.

There should be no pronounced misfires.

The idle speed must not change when the handlebars are turned from lock to lock.

Brakes

Standard required:

The brakes should have a firm, responsive feel.

The brakes should act smoothly and silently without judder.

Upon activation of the brakes, the motorcycle should come to rest without deviating from a straight line.

Instrument Panel

Standard required:

All instruments must operate correctly.

Check:

Check that the warning lights on the instruments operate correctly.

Steering and Suspension

Standard required:

The motorcycle should be easy to steer and should not pull to one side.

Cornering should be precise with the motorcycle leaning naturally into the corner and returning to the upright position upon exiting the corner.

The front and rear suspension operation should be smooth with no excessive stiffness, roughness or tight spots.

Check:

Check the correct action of the front suspension, including the damper action.

Check the correct action of the rear suspension, including the damper action.

Cruise Control (if fitted)

Standard required:

All cruise control switches must operate correctly. All functions and displays must operate as described in the Owner’s Handbook.

Check:

Once the relevant conditions have been met as described in the Owner’s Handbook, turn the cruise control ON and OFF.

Check the functionality of all following actions:

Cruise control function - all models except DS1 DSA DSB DSX

  • SET the speed

  • Resume the SET speed

  • Increase the SET speed

  • Decrease the SET speed

  • Throttle cancel - twist the throttle fully forward to cancel the cruise control

  • Brake cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled by use of the front brake, then the rear brake

  • Clutch cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled by pulling the clutch lever in

  • Gear change cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled when changing gear

  • Sixty second overtake cancel - make sure the cruise control is cancelled after increasing the speed with the throttle for more than sixty seconds.

Post Road Test

warning
Certain components of the motorcycle will be hot immediately after road test. Care must be taken to avoid burn injuries caused by contact with hot components.
notice
The following tests should be carried out immediately after the motorcycle returns from the road test.Faults detected during road test or post road test inspection, must be rectified before the motorcycle is released to the customer. The fan(s) may come on earlier and at a slower speed. Depending on the ambient temperature, it is possible the fan(s) may not reach 100% speed.

Cooling Fan Operation (liquid cooled engines only)

Standard required:

notice
Some models are fitted with a cooling fan variable speed controller. This controls the speed of the cooling fan(s) at various speeds depending on the temperature of the coolant.The fan(s) may come on earlier and at a slower speed. Depending on the ambient temperature, it is possible the fan(s) may not reach 100% speed.

The fan should operate when the coolant temperature rises above normal operating temperature. It will stop automatically.

The blades of the cooling fan must not come into contact with the radiator or the guard which surrounds the cooling fan blades.

There must be no abnormal noises when the cooling fan is operating.

warning
The cooling fan operates automatically, even with the ignition switched off. To prevent injury, keep hands and clothing away from the fan blades at all times.

Action:

With the engine idling, allow the engine temperature to rise to above normal operating temperature.

caution
Do not allow the engine temperature to rise too high. Serious damage may result if the engine is allowed to overheat.

Check:

Check the cooling fan for correct operation.

Action:

Switch off the engine.

Hot Start

notice
This test should be carried out when the engine is at normal operating temperature.

Standard required:

The engine should start easily when at normal operating temperature and run smoothly at idle.

Action:

Switch off the engine (if running) and wait thirty seconds.

Start the engine and allow to idle.

Switch off the engine.

Engine

Standard required:

The engine must be free from fluid leaks.

Fuel System

Standard required:

The fuel system must be free from leaks.

Tyres

Standard required:

Front and rear tyres must be free from damage.

warning
Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or other sharp objects.Check the wheel rims for dents or deformation. Operation with damaged or defective wheels or tyres is dangerous and loss of motorcycle control or an accident could result.

Bodywork

Standard required:

The motorcycle bodywork must be clean and free from damage.

Check:

Check the motorcycle bodywork for new damage.

Check the motorcycle bodywork for cleanliness.

Service Indicator and Service Maintenance Book

Reset the service indicator using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool.

See the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide for more information.

Stamp and date the relevant section of the Service Record.

Engine Covers

Exploded View - Sump

Exploded View - Sump

Exploded View - Clutch Cover

Exploded View - Clutch Cover

Exploded View - Alternator Cover

Exploded View - Alternator Cover

Exploded View - Camshaft Cover

Exploded View - Camshaft Cover

Exploded View - Front Sprocket Cover and Breather Cover

Exploded View - Front Sprocket Cover and Breather Cover

Exploded View - Crankcase Right Hand Cover and Balancer Cover

Exploded View - Crankcase and Balancer Covers

Sump - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Exhaust - Removal L Series

Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans

warning
Always wear suitable protective clothing and avoid skin contact with used engine oil.Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis.Used engine oil contains harmful contamination that can lead to skin cancer.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Caution Engine Oil - Heat

caution
The engine oil may be hot.Avoid contact with the hot engine oil by wearing suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye protection.Contact with the hot engine oil may cause minor to moderate injury to exposed skin.
  1. Release the bolts securing the sump to the lower crankcase.
  2. sumpsequence (ckvc)

    Sump Fixings Release Sequence

  3. Detach the sump and collect the water pump drain tube. Remove and discard the four drain tube O-rings.
  4. notice
    The water pump drain tube may remain attached to the water pump or become detached with the sump.
    Water pump drain tube L0348
    1. Water pump drain tube

    2. O-rings

  5. Remove and discard the sump gasket.
  6. If necessary, remove the oil transfer pipe, oil pick up pipe and breather drain pipe. Discard the fixings and the four O-rings.
  7. If necessary, remove the oil pressure relief valve.
  8. Sump Cover Removed_1 (ckvb)
    1. Oil pressure relief valve

    2. Oil transfer pipe

    3. Fixings

    4. Oil pick up pipe

    5. Fixings

    6. Oil breather drain pipe

    7. Fixing

Sump - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.
  1. If removed, refit the oil pressure relief valve. Tighten to 15 Nm.
  2. If removed, fit the oil transfer pipe incorporating new O-rings. Fit new fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
  3. If removed, refit the oil pick up pipe incorporating a new O-ring. Fit new fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
  4. If removed, refit the oil breather drain pipe incorporating a new O-ring. Fit a new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
  5. Sump Cover Removed_1 (ckvb)
    1. Oil pressure relief valve

    2. Oil transfer pipe

    3. Fixings

    4. Oil pick up pipe

    5. Fixings

    6. Oil breather drain pipe

    7. Fixing

  6. Incorporating new O-rings, position the water pump drain tube to the oil pump.
  7. Water pump drain tube L0348
    1. Water pump drain tube

    2. O-rings

  8. Incorporating a new sump gasket, position the sump to the lower crankcase.
  9. Tighten the sump fixings to 10 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  10. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
  11. sumpsequence (ckvc)

    Sump Fixings Tightening Sequence

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Exhaust - Installation L Series

Battery - Install L Series

  • Start the engine and make sure that the low oil pressure warning light goes out shortly after starting

  • Stop the engine and check the engine oil level. Adjust if necessary (see Oil Level Inspection)

Seat - Install L Series

Clutch Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

  1. Release the clutch cable from the actuating arm (see Clutch Cable - Removal).
  2. Place an oil catch tray beneath the clutch cover to collect any oil that may spill out during removal.
  3. Release the fixings that attach the clutch cover to the crankcases. Note the position of the copper washer for installation.
  4. Clutch cover removal L0330
    1. Clutch cover

    2. Copper washer position

  5. Carefully withdraw the cover.
  6. Remove the gasket and clean the surfaces of the crankcase and the clutch cover using a lint free cloth.

Clutch Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.
notice
The pull-rod should be free to move in and out, and also it should be free to turn.
  1. Incorporating a new clutch cover gasket, position the clutch cover to the crankcase.
  2. Install the clutch cover fixings and the copper washer in the position noted during removal.
  3. Tighten the clutch cover fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  4. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
  5. Clutch cover install L0330_1

    Clutch Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

  6. Fit the clutch cable to the actuating arm (see Clutch Cable - Installation).
  7. Set the clutch adjustment (see Clutch Cable - Installation).

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Alternator Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Caution - Alternator rotor magnets finger injury SM

caution
The rotor magnets are very strong.When you handle the alternator cover, the magnets may 'grab' the stator and cause injury to the hands or fingers.When you handle the alternator cover, wear suitable gloves and only grip the alternator cover by the outside surfaces. Always keep your hands and fingers clear when you handle the alternator cover.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

Throttle Body - RemoveLG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series

    note
    Note the routing of the crankshaft position sensor harness for installation.
  1. Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor from the sub harness. Route the harness back to the alternator cover.
  2. crank pos sensor LG1
    1. Crankshaft position sensor connector

    note
    Note the routing of the alternator harness for installation.
  3. Disconnect the grey connector from the regulator/rectifier. Route the harness back to the alternator cover.
  4. RegRec_1 (ckya)
    1. Grey connector

    2. Regulator/rectifier

  5. Place an oil catch tray beneath the alternator cover to collect any oil that may spill out on removal.
  6. Release the fixings securing the alternator cover to the crankcases, noting the position of the coolant expansion tank bracket.
  7. Alt Cover_1 (ckxu)
    1. Alternator cover

    2. Fixings

  8. Withdraw the cover from the crankcase and discard the gasket.

Alternator Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.
  1. Apply ThreeBond 1216E sealant to the grommet on the path shown below. The bead of sealant should extend around the grommet perimeter (including the underside) and be approximately 3.5 mm wide.
  2. HD Alt Grommet Sealant

    Alternator Cover Grommet Sealant Path

  3. Position the grommet to the alternator cover.
  4. Position a new gasket to the crankcase dowels then refit the alternator cover, refitting the coolant expansion tank bracket as noted during removal.
  5. Make sure a copper washer is fitted under fixing position 7 in the image below.
  6. Tighten the cover bolts to 10 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  7. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
  8. Alt Cover_1_seq (ckxu_1)

    Alternator Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

  9. Route the alternator harness to the regulator/rectifier as noted for removal.
  10. Connect the grey connector to the regulator/rectifier.
  11. Route the crankshaft position sensor harness to the main harness as noted for removal.
  12. Connect the crankshaft position sensor the main harness.
  13. crank pos sensor LG1
    1. Crankshaft position sensor connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series

Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series

Throttle Body - Install - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

Airbox - Install - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Camshaft Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

SAI Reed Valves - Removal L Series

  1. Disconnect the electrical connections to the ignition coils and remove the coils.
  2. Lift the air deflector plate from the top of the camshaft cover and fold it forwards towards the radiator.
  3. Air Deflector Plate_1 (ckut)
    1. Camshaft cover

    2. Air deflector

  4. Progressively release the camshaft cover fixings in the sequence shown below.
  5. note
    Two shorter bolts are fitted at the end adjacent to the camshaft drive chain.
    Camshaft cover tightening sequence cdqz_1

    Camshaft Cover Fixings Release Sequence

  6. Remove the camshaft cover from the engine.
  7. notice
    Never use a lever to remove the camshaft cover from the head.Using a lever will damage the cylinder head and camshaft cover, which can cause an oil leak.
  8. Remove the camshaft cover gasket. If necessary, recover the three dowels from the secondary air injection holes in the camshaft ladder (these may stay in the camshaft cover or gasket).
  9. Discard the camshaft cover gasket and bolt seals.
  10. Use a syringe or lint free cloth to remove any residual oil from the front of the cylinder head.

Camshaft Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
  1. Refit the three dowels to the camshaft ladder.
  2. Refit three dowels to camshaft ladder cdqu_1
    1. Dowels

    notice
    Make sure that the groove in the gasket is correctly seated to the cylinder head.Make sure the plug tower seals and the dowels are correctly located to the cylinder head.
  3. Lubricate a new camshaft cover seal with Action Can AC-90.
  4. Fit the camshaft cover seal to the cylinder head.
  5. Camshaft cover gasket Installation (cdqv.svg)
    1. Camshaft cover seal

    2. Dowels

    3. Plug tower seals

    notice
    Make sure that the gasket remains located in the correct position during fitment.
  6. Fit the camshaft cover.
  7. Lubricate the new camshaft cover screw seals with Action Can AC-90.
  8. Fit the camshaft cover screws and screw seals and tighten until finger tight.
  9. Table

    Stage 1

  10. Tighten the camshaft cover fixings one to six in the sequence shown to 6 Nm.
  11. Camshaft cover tightening sequence cdqz_1

    Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

    Table

    Stage 2

  12. Re-tighten the camshaft cover fixings one to six in the sequence shown to 14 Nm.
  13. Refit the air deflector plate on top of the camshaft cover.
  14. Air Deflector Plate_1 (ckut)
    1. Camshaft cover

    2. Air deflector

  15. Inspect the ignition coil seals for damage and replace if necessary.
  16. Fit the ignition coils and connect the electrical connectors.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

SAI Reed Valves - Installation L Series

ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Front Sprocket Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Caution - Drive Chain trapped fingers

caution
If the rear wheel is rotated, fingers, hands or loose clothing could become trapped as the drive chain rotates on the sprockets, and cause a crushing injury to the fingers, hands or other parts of your body.To prevent injury, never place fingers, hands or loose clothing near the drive chain or sprockets.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

notice
Note the routing of the breather hoses and harnesses in front of the sprocket cover for installation.

Front Sprocket Cover Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

  1. Remove the fixings securing the sprocket cover to the crankcase.
  2. Manoeuvre the evaporative drain hose upwards, noting its position for installation, and remove the front sprocket cover.
  3. Sprocket Cover (ckva_1)
    1. Front sprocket cover

    2. Fixings

    3. Breather hoses and harnesses

    4. Evaporative canister drain hose

Front Sprocket Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Caution - Drive Chain trapped fingers

caution
If the rear wheel is rotated, fingers, hands or loose clothing could become trapped as the drive chain rotates on the sprockets, and cause a crushing injury to the fingers, hands or other parts of your body.To prevent injury, never place fingers, hands or loose clothing near the drive chain or sprockets.

Front Sprocket Cover Install LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

  1. Fit the sprocket cover, ensuring that the breather hoses and harnesses are routed as noted for removal.
  2. Fit the sprocket cover fixings and evenly tighten to 9 Nm.
  3. Position the evaporative drain hose as noted during removal.
  4. Sprocket Cover (ckva_1)
    1. Front sprocket cover

    2. Fixings

    3. Breather hoses and harnesses

    4. Evaporative canister drain hose

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Caution Engine Oil - Heat

caution
The engine oil may be hot.Avoid contact with the hot engine oil by wearing suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye protection.Contact with the hot engine oil may cause minor to moderate injury to exposed skin.

Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans

warning
Always wear suitable protective clothing and avoid skin contact with used engine oil.Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis.Used engine oil contains harmful contamination that can lead to skin cancer.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Place an oil catch tray beneath the crankcase right hand cover to collect any oil that may spill out during removal.
  2. notice
    Note the position of the copper washer for installation.
  3. Release the eight fixings and remove the right hand crankcase cover. Discard the gasket.
  4. Right hand crank cover_LG2;LH2_ckux_6
    1. Fixings

    2. Copper washer

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.
  1. Fit a new gasket to the crankcase right hand cover.
  2. notice
    Make sure the copper washer is fitted between the crankcase cover and the head of fixing number one.
  3. Fit the crankcase right hand cover with the copper washer in the position noted during removal.
  4. Tighten its fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  5. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
  6. rh crank cover_seq (ckuw)

    Crankcase Right Hand Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

Engine Breather Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

Airbox - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Engine Breather Cover Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

  1. Release the hose clip and detach the engine breather hose from the engine breather cover.
  2. notice
    Note the positions of the two harness brackets and the inlet manifold bracket mounted to the engine breather cover for installation.
  3. Detach the harness from the two brackets mounted to the breather cover.
  4. Release the six fixings and remove the engine breather cover.
  5. breather cover (ckuv_1)
    1. Engine breather cover

    2. Fixings

    3. Harness bracket

    4. Harness bracket

    5. Inlet manifold bracket

  6. Discard the gasket.

Engine Breather Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Breather Cover Installation - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

  1. Fit a new engine breather cover gasket to the crankcase.
  2. Fit the engine breather cover, ensuring that the gasket remains in the correct position.
  3. Position the harness brackets and the inlet manifold bracket to the engine breather cover as noted during removal.
  4. breather cover (ckuv_1)
    1. Engine breather cover

    2. Fixings

    3. Harness bracket

    4. Harness bracket

    5. Inlet manifold bracket

  5. Install the fixings to the engine breather cover and tighten to 10 Nm in the sequence shown.
  6. breather cover seq (ckuv)

    Engine Breather Cover fixings Tightening Sequence

  7. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Balancer Cover - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Caution Engine Oil - Heat

caution
The engine oil may be hot.Avoid contact with the hot engine oil by wearing suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye protection.Contact with the hot engine oil may cause minor to moderate injury to exposed skin.

Warning - Engine Oil - Harmful to Humans

warning
Always wear suitable protective clothing and avoid skin contact with used engine oil.Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis.Used engine oil contains harmful contamination that can lead to skin cancer.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Balancer Cover Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

  1. Place an oil catch tray beneath the balancer cover to collect any oil that may spill out on removal.
  2. Release the four fixings and remove the balancer cover. Discard the gasket.
  3. Balancer Cover (ckux_1)
    1. Fixings

Balancer Cover - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Balancer Cover Install LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL2

  1. Fit a new gasket to the balancer cover.
  2. Fit the balancer cover and tighten its fixings to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  3. Re-tighten the fixings one and two to 8 Nm.
  4. Balancer Cover Sequence (ckux_2)

    Balancer Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

Cylinder Head

Exploded View - Cylinder Head

Exploded View - Cylinder Head

Exploded View - Camshaft, Camshaft Drive and Valves

Exploded View - Camshaft, Camshaft Drive and Valves

Cylinder Head Description

The engine is fitted with an aluminium alloy cylinder head, which carries the camshafts, valves and spark plugs. The cylinder head is cast as a single entity and various components are permanently added after machining.

The camshafts run directly in the cylinder head without separate bearings. Valve clearances are adjusted by changing variable thickness shims which sit between the valve tappet bucket and the valves.

The camshafts are driven by a silent-type drive chain, via a sprocket bolted to each of the camshafts, using slotted holes. The use of slotted holes allows the camshaft timing to be adjusted very accurately, to compensate for manufacturing tolerances in the camshaft drive system.

The chain is guided by two blades and is tensioned by a hydraulic tensioner.

The hydraulic tensioner is fed oil via a gallery in the cylinder head. The combination of oil pressure and spring pressure pushes the plunger against the tensioner blade which tensions the camshaft drive chain. The hydraulic tensioner has an oil pressure relief valve located in the plunger that is set to open between 12-16 bar and when open sprays oil through a drilling in the tensioner blade onto the camshaft drive chain.

Oil is supplied to the cylinder head by a gallery in the crankcase. Once supplied to the head, the oil is distributed along internal drillings within the cylinder head casting and camshaft.

Single valve springs are used to close both the inlet valves and exhaust valves. These valve springs have close wound coils at one end to assist in the prevention of valve bounce at high engine speed and to give a smooth valve actuation. When assembling the cylinder head it is important that the close wound, colour coded ends of the springs are fitted downwards (towards the piston). Both the tip and seating face of the valves are hardened to give a long service life.

Due to the methods used to assemble the valve seat and valve guides to the head, these parts cannot be replaced.

caution
In any of the following operations which necessitate the removal or disconnection of the camshaft drive chain, NEVER turn the engine without the camshaft drive chain and tensioner correctly fitted and adjusted. In the disassembled condition, the pistons will contact the valves if the crankshaft is turned, causing severe engine damage.

Valve Clearances

Camshaft, valve, valve shim and valve seat wear affects the valve clearances. The effect of this wear is to change the gap between the camshaft and tappet bucket, causing engine noise and improper running. If the valve clearances become too small, permanent damage to the valve and valve seat will take place. If the valve clearance becomes too great, the engine will become noisy and will not run correctly.

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Remove L Series

    note
    While rotating the crankshaft, ensure that the front camshaft drive chain rubbing blade remains in its mounting.Before inserting the timing pin, ensure the dot on the primary gear is aligned with the line on the crankcase.
  1. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation), using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  2. Insert service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  3. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. DOT alignment mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  4. In addition to the dot mark alignment, at TDC, the alignment marks on the camshaft bosses will point inwards.
  5. Camshaft alignment gaaa_12
    1. Camshaft alignment marks

  6. Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the tensioner.
  7. warning
    The hydraulic tensioner is under spring tension. Always wear hand, eye, and face protection when withdrawing the tensioner mounting bolts and take great care to minimise the risk of injury and loss of components.
    note
    Note the orientation of the hydraulic tensioner.
  8. Evenly release the hydraulic tensioner mounting bolts until the plunger spring tension has been released.
  9. Remove the hydraulic tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Inspection

  1. Inspect the camshaft drive chain tensioner spring for damage and deformation. Renew as necessary.
  2. Inspect the tip of the camshaft drive chain tensioner plunger for wear and damage. Renew as necessary.

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Check that the dot mark on the primary gear is still aligned with the line on the crankcase and the service tool T3880601 is installed. Ensure the crankshaft cannot rotate.
  2. Ensure that the wedge fitted earlier is still holding the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade in contact with the camshaft drive chain.
  3. Check that the camshaft alignment marks point inwards.
  4. To set the hydraulic tensioner onto the first tooth of the ratchet (minimum extension) carry out the following:
  5. note
    If installing a new hydraulic tensioner, do not release the plunger before fitting.If installing the original hydraulic tensioner, the engine oil must be drained out of the tensioner to enable the plunger to be set onto the first tooth of the ratchet.
  6. Hold the resister ring ends together and pull out the plunger.
  7. Hold resister ring ends cfei_2
    1. Resister ring ends

    2. Plunger

  8. Remove the spring.
  9. Remove spring cfhp
    1. Spring

  10. While holding the resister ring in place, pour out the engine oil into a suitable container.
  11. Ensure the resister ring is correctly located as shown in the illustration below.
  12. Resister ring location cfho
    1. Resister ring

  13. Refit the spring.
  14. caution
    When resetting the tensioner, care must be taken to avoid activating the tensioner when there is no resistance on the plunger.Activating the tensioner when there is no resistance on the plunger may cause internal damage to the tensioner housing.It is recommended that the plunger is pushed into the tensioner housing in a controlled manner using a suitable soft jawed vice. Once the snap ring is located into its groove, the vice should be released slowly to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
  15. Hold the resister ends together and insert the plunger into the tensioner housing.
  16. Place the tensioner in a soft jawed vice.
  17. While holding the resister ends together, use the vice to push the plunger through the resister ring until the groove for the snap ring aligns with the snap ring.
  18. Refit plunger (cfei_3)
    1. Resister ring

    2. Plunger

    3. Groove for snap ring

    4. Snap ring

  19. When the groove aligns with the snap ring, release the resister ring and move one end of the snap ring into the groove. Slowly release the vice to ensure that the plunger is held in place.
  20. Snap ring to groove cfej
    1. Groove for snap ring

    2. Snap ring

  21. Fit a new O-ring and gasket to the hydraulic tensioner.
  22. Fit the tensioner to the cylinder head as noted for removal. Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm.
  23. Remove the wedge, taking care not to move or damage the tensioner blade.
  24. Remove the service tool T3880601.
  25. To release the hydraulic tensioner, rotate the crankshaft 1/4 of a turn anticlockwise using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Then rotate the crankshaft clockwise two revolutions until the 'dot' mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  26. Check that there is tension in the camshaft drive chain and the timing marks at the camshaft sprockets are correctly aligned.
  27. note
    After fitting to the engine, the hydraulic tensioner will be empty of engine oil. After starting the engine, the camshaft drive chain and tensioner blade will be noisy until full pressure is felt at the tensioner plunger. This could take up to 5 seconds.
  28. Check that the tensioner plunger is correctly located in the middle of the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade when viewed from above.
  29. Rotate the engine through 4 full revolutions, and reset number 1 cylinder to TDC. Ensure that the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  30. TDC Alignment cdrd
    1. Dot mark

    2. Marker line

    note
    The alignment marks do not need to be perfectly in line to each other, they only need to be pointing to each other.
  31. Check that the camshaft timing marks point as illustrated below.
  32. Camshaft alignment gaaa_12

    Camshaft Alignment Marks

  33. Re-check the tensioner plunger location against the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Camshaft Cover - Install L Series

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Install L Series

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - Disassembly

note
For the purpose of this instruction, the top of the tensioner blade is where the pad is located.
  1. Release the clips and remove the pad.
  2. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - pad removal (cfee.svg)
    1. Pad

    2. Clip (one side shown)

  3. Detach the top hook from the tensioner blade.
  4. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade hook detachment (cfef.svg)
    1. Top hook

    2. Tensioner blade

  5. Release the three side locating devices.
  6. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade locating devices (cfeg.svg)
    1. Locating devices

    2. Facing blade

  7. Release the three hooks and remove the facing blade.
  8. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade facing blade hooks (cfeh.svg)
    1. Hooks

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade and Rubbing Strip - Inspection

  1. Check the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and rubbing strip for wear or damage. Renew if worn or damaged.

Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - Assembly

note
For the purpose of this instruction, the top of the tensioner blade is where the pad is located.
  1. Align the three hooks and fit the facing blade.
  2. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade facing blade hooks (cfeh.svg)
    1. Hooks

  3. Align the three side locating devices.
  4. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade locating devices (cfeg.svg)
    1. Locating devices

    2. Facing blade

  5. Attach the top hook to the tensioner blade.
  6. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade hook detachment (cfef.svg)
    1. Top hook

    2. Tensioner blade

  7. Fit the pad and secure the clips..
  8. Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Blade - pad removal (cfee.svg)
    1. Pad

    2. Clip (one side shown)

Camshaft - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
  2. note
    The camshaft sprocket fixings need only be loosened sufficiently to allow the sprockets to rotate on the camshafts.
  3. Loosen the two camshaft sprocket fixings. Do not remove the fixings at this stage.
  4. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Fixings

    note
    While rotating the crankshaft, ensure that the front camshaft drive chain rubbing blade remains in its mounting.
  5. Rotate crankshaft until the remaining two fixings are accessible.
  6. caution
    Do not rotate the engine further once the four camshaft sprocket bolts have been loosened. Rotation of the engine with the four sprocket bolts loose will result in valve to piston contact and serious engine damage.
  7. Loosen the two remaining camshaft sprocket fixings. Do not remove the fixings at this stage.
  8. note
    Note the orientation of the tensioner before removal.
  9. Evenly release the camshaft drive chain tensioner mounting bolts until the plunger spring tension has been released.
  10. Remove the tensioner and discard the O-ring and gasket.
  11. Note the orientation of the camshaft ladder in relation to the head.
  12. Progressively release the bolts securing the camshaft ladder to the head in the sequence shown below.
  13. Camshaft ladder removal cdqs

    Camshaft Ladder Bolt Release Sequence

  14. Remove the camshaft ladder and top pad, and collect the dowels (if loose) and spark plug tower O-rings.
  15. note
    Each camshaft and sprocket is removed as an assembly.
  16. Lift the camshaft drive chain from the inlet camshaft sprocket and remove the inlet camshaft.
  17. Lift the camshaft drive chain from the exhaust camshaft sprocket and remove the exhaust camshaft.
  18. Exhaust camshaft removal chej
    1. Camshaft drive chain

    2. Inlet camshaft

  19. For the removal of the camshaft drive chain (see Camshaft Drive Chain - Removal).
  20. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (the normal direction of rotation), using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  21. note
    Before inserting the timing pin, ensure the dot on the primary gear is aligned with the line on the crankcase.
  22. Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  23. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. Dot mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  24. At this stage the camshafts and sprockets can be separated if required.

Camshaft and Sprocket Identification

note
The inlet and exhaust camshafts are different. They can be identified by a raised feature in the centre of the exhaust camshaft, which is machined off on the inlet camshaft. The camshafts can be further identified by a letter I for inlet or E for exhaust stamped on the end of the sprocket boss.
Camshaft and Sprocket Identification gabo_1
  1. Inlet camshaft

  2. Machined section

  3. Exhaust camshaft

  4. Raised section

caution
Never fit a camshaft sprocket to a camshaft using incorrectly identified bolt holes. Severe engine damage will result from incorrect attachment.

The same sprocket is used for both inlet and exhaust camshafts, and is attached to the camshaft using slotted bolt holes. The same holes are used when fitting the sprocket to either camshaft.

Note that the mark on the camshaft boss is not a timing mark, it is used as a visual aid during the timing adjustment procedure.

Accurate camshaft timing can only be obtained using the correct timing method and service tools as described on Camshaft - Installation and Timing in this chapter.

Camshaft and Bearing Cap Inspection

  1. Inspect the camshaft sprockets for damaged and worn teeth. Replace as necessary.
  2. Measure the camshaft journals with a micrometer. If any journal is outside the specified tolerance, replace the camshaft. For specifications refer to Camshafts.
  3. Camshaft journal measurement - cheg
    1. Camshaft journal

  4. Examine all camshaft and camshaft bearing caps for excessive wear and damage.
  5. Check the journal-to-head clearances, using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301) as follows:
  6. * Wipe the exposed areas of both the camshaft journal and a single cap or cap area of the ladder.
    * Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the cap.
    * Size a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the camshaft journal. Fit the Plastigauge to the camshaft journal using the grease to hold the strip in place.
    * Ensuring that the camshaft sprocket alignment marking is located as for removal, refit the camshaft cap ladder then evenly and progressively tighten the ladder bolts to 5 Nm and then to 10 Nm in the correct sequence (see Camshaft - Installation and Timing).
    * Release the bolts and remove the ladder. Using the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the now compressed Plastigauge.
    Measuring plastigauge - camshaft journal - cbqg_1

    Measuring the Compressed Plastigauge

    note
    The camshaft ladder is unique to each cylinder head and is, therefore, not available separately. If the camshaft ladder is worn or damaged, the complete cylinder head must be replaced.
  7. Calculate the journal clearance using the Plastigauge chart supplied with the Plastigauge kit.
  8. For specifications refer to Camshafts.
  9. If the clearance measured is within the specified tolerance, remove the cap/ladder and clean off all traces of Plastigauge. Assemble the camshafts (see Camshaft - Installation and Timing).
  10. caution
    Although Plastigauge is oil soluble, all traces of the material must be removed to prevent blockage of the oil drillings and resultant engine damage.

Camshaft - Installation and Timing

caution
The camshaft sprockets are attached to the camshafts using slotted bolt holes. This allows for very accurate valve timing and therefore improved performance and fuel economy. Never fit the camshaft sprockets without correctly setting the camshaft timing using the service tools and timing procedure described below. Severe engine damage will result from incorrect valve timing adjustment.
  1. Check that the dot mark on the primary gear is still aligned with the line on the crankcase and the service tool T3880601 is installed. Ensure the crankshaft cannot rotate.
  2. Thoroughly clean the camshafts and journals. Inspect the ends of the camshafts for correct fitment of the sealing plugs. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil before fitting to the head.
  3. If removed, refit the camshaft sprockets noting their orientation, and secure using the original bolts. DO NOT tighten the fixings at this stage; the sprockets must be free to rotate.
  4. Refit the camshaft drive chain and, if removed, the tensioner blade and rubbing strip (see Camshaft Drive Chain - Installation).
  5. note
    Locate each camshaft to the head ensuring the camshafts are correctly identified (inlet and exhaust) and are also correctly located over their respective valve banks.
  6. Refit the exhaust camshaft to the cylinder head, hooking the camshaft drive chain over the sprocket as you do so.
  7. Ensure there is no slack between the crankshaft and exhaust sprocket when the sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes. Ensure alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
  8. Refit the inlet camshaft to the cylinder head, hooking the chain over the sprocket as you do so.
  9. Ensure the fixings on the inlet sprocket are also centrally located within the slotted holes when there is no slack between the exhaust and inlet sprockets. Ensure alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
  10. Check that the chain is correctly located around the crankshaft, and both camshaft sprockets.
  11. Rotate the camshafts until the alignment marks on the end of the camshaft journals are pointing inwards.
  12. Camshaft alignment gaaa_12

    Camshaft Alignment Marks

    caution
    The service tool T3880640 must be located centrally between the camshafts. Incorrect positioning of the tool may prevent the camshaft ladder locating correctly to the cylinder head during fixing tightening, resulting in incorrect valve timing being set. Severe engine damage will result from incorrect valve timing adjustment.
  13. Insert the service tool T3880640 into the camshaft slots, ensuring the removal screw is unscrewed fully, as shown below. Ensure that the tool is centrally located between the camshafts.
  14. Remove camshaft timing plate choj
    1. T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate

    2. Camshaft slots

    3. Removal screw

  15. Assemble the dowels, spark plug tower O-rings, camshaft ladder and top pad in the same location and orientation as prior to removal.
  16. note
    The bolts for the camshaft cap ladder are tightened in two stages.

Stage 1

  1. Fit and evenly tighten the fixings to 5 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
  2. Camshaft ladder tightening sequence cdqr

    Camshaft Cover Fixings Tightening Sequence

Stage 2

  1. In the sequence shown above, tighten the bolts to 10 Nm.
  2. Fit the service tool T3880607 using the original fixings and tighten to 8 Nm.
  3. Fit service tool 3880607 chwf
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    caution
    The torque value stated is very important to accurate timing. Always use the correct value of 0.6 Nm, as set using the service tool T3880609. Using an incorrect torque value will result in incorrect valve timing being set, or damage to the tensioner blade or other valve train components. Either condition may result in serious damage to the engine, reduced engine performance, or reduced fuel economy.
  4. Using the service tool T3880609 and a 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key, tighten the service tool T3880607 to 0.6 Nm preset by the service tool T3880609.
  5. Torque 3880607 to 0.6 Nm chwe
    1. T3880607 - Camshaft Timing Tensioner

    2. T3880609 - Timing Torque Limiter

    3. 6 mm Ball Ended Allen Key

  6. Tighten the two accessible (uppermost) camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
  7. Camshaft sprocket fixings chei_1
    1. Uppermost fixings

  8. Remove the service tool T3880601 by rotating the removal screw clockwise as shown below.
  9. Install camshaft timing plate choj_1
    1. T3880640 - Camshaft Timing Plate

    2. Removal screw

  10. Remove the service tool T3880601.
  11. caution
    Always check that the service tool T3880640 has been removed before rotating the engine. Severe damage will result to the camshafts or service tool T3880640 if engine rotation is attempted with the tool installed.
  12. Rotate the engine until the remaining two sprocket fixings are accessible.
  13. Tighten the two remaining camshaft sprocket fixings to 22 Nm.
  14. Place a suitable wedge between the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade and crankcase, to hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the service tool T3880607.
  15. Release the tension on Camshaft Timing Tensioner T3880607 and remove it.
  16. Refit the timing chain tensioner, incorporating a new gasket and O-ring (see Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner - Installation).
  17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 2 complete turns, using the bolt fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at Top Dead Centre (TDC), that is when the dot mark on the primary gear aligns with the line on the crankcase.
  18. note
    Before inserting the timing pin, ensure the 'dot' on the primary gear is aligned with the line on the crankcase.
  19. Insert the service tool T3880601 into the timing holes in the crankcase and crankshaft.
  20. Fit service tool 3880601 chwh
    1. Dot mark

    2. Marker line

    3. T3880601 - Camshaft Timing Pin

    4. Timing hole in crankcase

  21. Check that the timing marks are still approximately aligned (to check that the camshaft timing has not moved during service tool T3880607 removal).
  22. Remove the service tool T3880601.
  23. Check the valve clearances. Adjust as necessary (see Valve Clearance Measurement).

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Camshaft Cover - Install L Series

Crankcase Right Hand Cover - Install L Series

Valve Clearance Measurement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Valve clearance measurement must be carried out with the engine cold.When replacing a valve shim, always refer to the EPC.For valve clearance specifications (see Cylinder Head).
  1. Remove the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover - Removal).
  2. Remove the spark plugs to reduce compression resistance when turning the engine.
  3. Select a high gear and, using the rear wheel, turn the engine until a pair of camshaft lobes are positioned pointing away from the valves.
  4. Using feeler gauges, measure and record the clearances for this pair of valves only.
  5. Repeat the process until the valve clearances for all valves have been checked.
  6. note
    If the measurement does not fall within the specified range, adjustment must be made.
    caution
    If the valve clearances are not checked and corrected, wear could cause the valves to remain partly open, which lowers performance, burns the valves and valve seats and may cause serious engine damage.
  7. Record the measured valve clearances on a chart similar to the example shown.

Typical Valve Clearance Chart

Inlet Valve No.

Gap Measured

1

as measured (mm)

2

as measured (mm)

3

as measured (mm)

4

as measured (mm)

5

as measured (mm)

6

as measured (mm)

Exhaust Valve No.

Gap Measured

1

as measured (mm)

2

as measured (mm)

3

as measured (mm)

4

as measured (mm)

5

as measured (mm)

6

as measured (mm)

Camshaft Drive Chain - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Remove the bolt from the centre of the camshaft drive chain housing in the cylinder head.
  2. Sound suppresion bolt cdrc
    1. Centre bolt

  3. Raise the front camshaft drive chain rubbing blade and detach the camshaft drive chain from the crankshaft gear.
  4. The camshaft drive chain is removed from inside the head-space.

Camshaft Drive Chain - Inspection

Visual in-situ checks can also be made as follows:

  1. Check for significant blue discolouration of the drive chain plates indicating excessive heat build-up.
  2. Examine all pins for signs of rotation.
  3. Check for cracking or deep scratching of the drive chain plates.
  4. Check for severe wear of the inner plates as indicated in the diagram below.
  5. Camshaft Chain plates - Inspection ccrv

For a more thorough check, proceed as follows:

  1. Remove the drive chain from the engine.
  2. Suspend the drive chain from a pin or hook with a 13 kg weight attached at the lower end.
  3. Camshaft Chain add 13 kg weight - Inspection cajs
  4. Measure across 23 links as shown in the diagram below. If the drive chain is within limits, the measurement should be no longer than 149.48 mm. Measurements beyond 149.48 mm indicate that the drive chain must be replaced.
  5. Camshaft Chain - Inspection 23 link measure cajt
  6. Check for severe wear of the inner surface of the outer plates at the side-contact points with the sprocket teeth.
  7. Camshaft Chain - Inspection inner plate wear ccru
  8. Check for signs of stiffness or kinking.
  9. Check for severe wear of the plates in the area shown below.
  10. Camshaft Chain - Inspection wear on plate edges caju
  11. If any of these symptoms are evident, the camshaft drive chain must be replaced.

Camshaft Drive Chain - Installation

  1. Fit the camshaft drive chain and locate the lower end around the crankshaft gear.
  2. Incorporating a new seal, refit the bolt to the centre of the camshaft drive chain housing in the cylinder head, tightening to 12 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Cylinder Head - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Removal of the cylinder head is not possible with the engine in the frame.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Remove - L Series

  1. Remove the camshaft drive chain tensioner blades.
  2. Note the position of all tappet buckets and shims such that they can be refitted in the same positions. Remove all the tappet buckets and shims.
  3. Remove tappet bucket cdrb
    1. Tappet bucket

    2. Shim

    note
    To prevent the tappet buckets and shims from becoming mixed, place the shim and tappet together in a marked container. The components must be refitted in their original positions.
  4. Disconnect the coolant bypass hose from the rear of the cylinder head.
  5. Release the screws securing the outside of the cylinder head to the upper crankcase.
  6. Cylinder head outside two screws cdra_1
    1. Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws

  7. Progressively release the cylinder head bolts in the order shown below.
  8. Cylinder head release

    Cylinder Head Release Sequence

  9. Lightly tap the cylinder head with a rubber mallet to break the seal of the gasket.
  10. Remove the cylinder head. Discard the cylinder head gasket and the nuts and washers.

Cylinder Head - Inspection

  1. Thoroughly clean the surface of the cylinder head and check for damage and/or pitting of the combustion chambers.
  2. Using a straight edge and feeler gauges, check the cylinder head face for warp, which could lead to gasket failure. Replace the cylinder head if warped beyond the flatness limit. For specifications refer to Cylinder Head.
  3. cylinder head flatness check gabp_1
    1. Cylinder head

    2. Straight edge

  4. Inspect the valve guides for damage or wear.
  5. If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the complete cylinder head must be renewed. For specifications refer to Cylinder Head.
  6. Check the camshaft drive chain rubbing blades. Renew if worn or damaged.
caution
Ensure all traces of fluid (coolant, oil etc.) are removed from the threaded holes in the crankcase. Should any fluid remain in any of the threaded holes, severe crankcase damage could result from hydraulic locking of head bolts on assembly of the engine.

Cylinder Head - Installation

  1. Fit a new cylinder head gasket ensuring that the head to crankcase location dowels are correctly in place.
  2. Cylinder head gasket cart_2
    1. Cylinder head gasket

  3. Ensure that the cylinder head face is completely clean.
  4. Carefully lower the cylinder head over the camshaft drive chain and locate the head onto the dowels.
  5. caution
    Using the correct procedure to fit and tighten the cylinder head bolts will ensure the long term reliability of the cylinder head gasket. Clean each bolt, paying particular attention to the threads. If any of the threads are damaged, replace the bolt(s). Lubricate the threads of the bolts with engine oil, and then wipe clean with a lint-free cloth leaving minimal oil on the threads (that is, almost dry to touch).Tighten the bolts using the three-stage procedure given below. Failure to observe these important items may lead to engine damage through a damaged head gasket.
    note
    New cylinder head bolts and washers must be fitted.
  6. Lubricate the threads on the bolts and the top surface of the hardened washer with clean engine oil.
  7. Fit new bolts and washers to the cylinder head as noted for removal and tighten until finger tight.
  8. The cylinder head bolts are tightened in four stages, in the sequence shown below. This is to ensure that the cylinder head gasket seals correctly to the head and crankcase.
  9. note
    For stages one, two and four of the cylinder head tightening operation, a torque wrench of known, accurate calibration must be used.For stage three of the cylinder head tightening operation, the bolts must be turned through a set number of degrees to reach the final setting. To accurately gauge the turn, T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge must be used.

Stage 1

  • Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 15 Nm, in the sequence shown below.

Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence Cylinder head tighten

Cylinder Head Tightening Sequence

Stage 2

  • Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 20 Nm, in the sequence shown above.

Stage 3

Fit the service tool T3880105 between the Torx socket and the drive handle and locate the Torx drive to the bolt. Pick an increment point on the torque turn gauge which aligns with a suitable reference point on the head.

  • Tighten the cylinder head bolts through 120° of bolt rotation as measured using the service tool T3880105, in the sequence shown above.

Stage 4

  • Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 40 Nm, in the sequence shown above.

  1. Fit the screws securing the side of the cylinder head to the crankcase and tighten to 10 Nm.
  2. Cylinder head outside two screws cdra_1

    Cylinder head to upper crankcase screws

  3. Install the camshaft drive chain tensioner blades.
  4. Clean and lubricate the tappet buckets with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease and refit the buckets and shims in the same locations from which they were removed.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Valves and Valve Stem Seals - Removal

  1. Remove each valve from the head using a valve spring compressor. The compressor must act on the valve spring retainer to allow removal of the valve collets.
  2. Compress valve spring gadh

    Valve removal

  3. Once the collets are released, remove the following items:
  4. * Valve spring retainer
    * Valve spring
    * Valve spring base
    * Valve stem oil seal
    * Valve (deburr before removal).
    Remove valve and seals carr
    1. Valve stem seal

    note
    Ensure the inlet and exhaust valve components do not become mixed.
    Valve, spring ans seals view ccrx_1
    1. Collets

    2. Valve spring retainer

    3. Valve spring

    4. Valve spring base

    5. Valve stem oil seal

    6. Valve

Cylinder Head Valve Guide Wear Check

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

note
Do not remove the valve or valve stem seal.
  1. Position the valves so that the valve stem ends are level with the valve stem seal (the valves must remain in this position for the duration of the test).
  2. HD Valve Stem Ends
    1. Valve stem ends

    2. Valve stem seals

  3. Complete each step below for each valve in the cylinder head.
  4. note
    Excessive force must not be used when measuring the valve guide wear. Excessive force will bend the valve stem and give a false reading.
  5. The valve should be gently rocked to one side of the valve guide in line with the camshaft.
  6. note
    A flat ended contact point must be fitted to the dial gauge.Ensure the dial gauge is level and is in line with the directional movement of the valve being checked.
  7. Secure a dial gauge to the cylinder head such that the clamping device will not damage any of the cylinder head surfaces.
  8. Position the dial gauge to the valve head on the opposite side to where the valve has made contact to the valve guide, as shown in the illustration below.
  9. HD Valve Wear Check Fig 2
    1. Dial gauge

    2. Flat ended contact point

    3. Direction valve rocked to valve guide

  10. Zero the dial gauge.
  11. Gently rock the valve to the opposite side of the valve guide in line with the camshaft and note the reading on the dial gauge.
  12. Repeat steps 3 to 7 but with the rocking of the valve head at 90° to the original measurement, as shown in image below. Note the reading on the dial.
  13. HD Valve Wear Check Fig 3
    1. Dial gauge

  14. The maximum movement of the valve in either direction must be less than 0.96 mm.
note
Due to the methods used to assemble the valve guides, these parts cannot be replaced. If the maximum movement of the valve exceeds 0.96 mm in either direction, the cylinder head must be replaced.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Valves and Valve Stem Seals - Installation

  1. Lubricate the valve stems with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  2. Install the valve into the valve guide.
  3. Fit the valve stem seal over the valve stem and, using a suitable tool, press down fully until the seal is correctly seated over the valve guide.
  4. note
    During fitment of the valve stem seal, two distinctly different degrees of resistance will be noted when the seal is correctly fitted. Firstly, press the seal down the valve stem until the lower side of the seal comes into contact with the valve guide. Greater resistance is felt at this contact point and further gentle pressure is then required to locate the seal over the top end of the valve guide. On application of this pressure, the seal can be felt to positively locate over the top face of the valve guide. Once correctly positioned, the seal cannot be pushed down any further.
    caution
    Incorrect fitment of the valve stem oil seals could lead to high oil consumption and blue smoke emissions from the exhaust system. Do not use excessive force in fitting the seal as this may break the seal ring.
  5. Install the valve spring over the valve stem. Ensure the close wound, colour coded ends of the springs are fitted downwards (towards the piston).
  6. Fit the valve spring retainer.
  7. Compress the valve spring ensuring that the spring is compressed squarely to prevent damage to the valve stem and cylinder head.
  8. Fit the valve collets ensuring correct collet location in the spring retainer and valve as the spring compressor is released.
  9. caution
    Always check for correct location of the valve collets during and after assembly. If not fitted correctly, the collets may become dislodged when the engine is running allowing the valves to contact the pistons. Any such valve to piston contact will cause severe engine damage.

Valve to Valve Guide Clearance

If the valve guides are worn beyond the service limit given below, the cylinder head must be replaced.

Valve Stem to Guide Clearance

Inlet

0.010-0.040 mm

Service limit

0.078 mm

Exhaust

0.020-0.050 mm

Service limit

0.088 mm

Valve Guides

If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the complete cylinder head must be renewed.

Clutch

Exploded View - Clutch Controls

Exploded View - Clutch Controls

Exploded View - Clutch

Exploded View - Clutch

Clutch Cable - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Clutch Cable Remove LG1

    note
    Note the routing of the clutch cable and the position of the retaining clips/grommets for installation.
  1. Detach the clutch cable retaining clip from the right hand headstock gusset.
  2. Loosen the cable lock nut and release the adjuster at the clutch cover end to give maximum play in the cable.
  3. Clutch Cable Adjuster (chur_2)
    1. Clutch cable

    2. Adjuster

  4. Release the clutch cable from the actuating arm by pushing the inner cable nipple through the arm and sliding the cable out of the slot. Detach the cable from the bracket.
  5. Cable Clutch end LG1
    1. Actuating arm

    2. Inner cable nipple

  6. Align the cable adjuster and lever bracket slots.
  7. Pull in the clutch lever and turn the inner cable, anticlockwise through the slots in the adjuster and lock nut, until the cable can be detached from the lever by pushing downwards.
  8. Detach clutch cable lever end (L0336_1)
    1. Cable adjuster/lever bracket slots

    2. Cable release point

  9. Detach the two grommets from the radiator brackets and remove the clutch cable, noting the routing through the instruments bracket.
  10. Clutch Cable Rad LG1
    1. Grommets

    2. Clutch cable

Clutch Cable - Inspection

  1. Check the inner cable for free movement through the outer cable.
  2. Examine the inner cable for frayed strands.
  3. Examine the two inner cable nipples for signs of looseness and damage. Replace the cable if necessary.

Clutch Cable - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Clutch Cable Install LG1

  1. Make sure the two grommets and retaining clip are fitted to the clutch cable.
  2. Feed the clutch cable through the radiator brackets and instruments bracket and position the clutch cable as noted during removal.
  3. Attach the inner cable to the clutch lever and actuating arm using a reversal of the removal process.
  4. Refit the outer cable to the adjuster bracket at the clutch end.
  5. Attach the clutch cable retaining clip to the right hand headstock gusset.
  6. Secure the two grommets to the radiator brackets.
  7. note
    Ensure that the two adjuster nuts are positioned one either side of the bracket.Ensure the steering is at full right hand lock to adjust the clutch cable.
  8. Turn the steering to full right hand lock.
  9. Set the lever adjuster to a point where an equal adjustment is possible in both directions.
  10. Set the adjuster at the clutch end to give a preliminary setting of 2 - 3 mm of free play as measured at the lever. Tighten the lock nut.
  11. Operate the clutch lever several times and recheck the amount of free play present.
  12. Set the final adjustment of the cable to give 2 - 3 mm of free play at the lever by turning the adjuster nut and lock nut at the lever end.
  13. LG1 Clutch Free Play
    1. Clutch lever

    2. Correct setting, 2 - 3 mm

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Clutch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch Cover - Remove L Series

    note
    The spring seats will remain seated in the stopper plate during removal.
  1. Release the three fixings evenly to ensure the stopper plate is released squarely. Remove the stopper plate, springs and pressure plate.
  2. Clutch Pressure Plate LG1_1
    1. Fixings

    2. Stopper plate

    3. Spring seats

    4. Springs

    5. Pressure Plate

  3. Remove the pull rod and bearing from the clutch pressure plate.
  4. Clutch Bearing Pull Rod LG1_1 (ckxe)
    1. Pull rod

    2. Bearing

    3. Clutch pressure plate

  5. Remove the clutch plates, anti-judder seat washers and springs, noting the orientation of the each component as they are removed.
  6. note
    The innermost friction plate is different to the remainder and must not be fitted in any other position.Refer to Friction Plate Inspection for details of clutch friction plate inspection.
  7. Engage second gear and lock the inner and outer clutch drums together using service tool T3880307 as shown below.
  8. Clutch Retaining Plate - Install (ciwx_2)
    1. T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig

  9. Release the clutch centre nut.
  10. Remove the centre nut, Belleville washer, plain washer, clutch inner drum and thrust washer.
  11. Discard both the Belleville washer and plain washer.
  12. caution
    Do not remove the bearing sleeve from the shaft.Removing the bearing sleeve will allow the oil pump drive chain to become dislodged.If the oil pump drive chain becomes dislodged the oil pump will not operate causing severe engine damage.
  13. Slide the bearing sleeve forward and backwards a maximum of 10 mm to allow the needle roller bearing to become dislodged.
  14. Remove the needle roller bearing from the clutch outer drum.
  15. Clutch - bearing sleeve cixd D Series.svg)
    1. Bearing sleeve

    2. Needle roller bearing

    3. Shaft

  16. Slide the clutch outer drum away from the gearbox input shaft.

Friction Plate Inspection

Thickness

    note
    If any friction plate thickness is outside the service limit, replace the friction plates as a set.
  1. Measure the thickness of the friction plate.
  2. Friction Plate Inspection verniers D Series cbvy.svg
    1. Clutch friction plate

  3. For the clutch friction plate thickness, refer to Clutch and Primary Drive.

Steel Plate Inspection

Bend/warp

Check all plates for bend and warp as follows:

  1. Place the plate being checked on a clean surface plate and attempt to pass a feeler gauge of the maximum service limit thickness between the steel plate and surface plate. If the feeler gauge can be passed beneath the steel plate at any point, renew the plates as a set.
  2. Steel Plate Inspection feeler blades cbvz D Series.svg)
    1. Steel plate

    2. Feeler gauge

    3. Surface plate

  3. For specifications refer to Clutch and Primary Drive.

Clutch Pack Height

Clutch pack height introduction

The clutch pack height should only be measured if the friction plates and the steel plates have been replaced.

The clutch pack height is critical for a smooth operation of the gear change and needs to be measured prior to installation.

If used steel plates are being fitted, the clutch pack height measurement is not necessary, as the plates may not be worn to the service limit (and are therefore still serviceable), but could fall outside the clutch pack height tolerance when measured.

If building a new clutch pack, its height must be correct. To achieve this, build the new clutch pack with the following:

  • 1 x new inner friction plate

  • 1 x inner steel plate

  • 6 x new friction plates

  • 4 x steel plates, 2.0 mm thick

  • 1 x outer steel plate, 2.3 mm thick.

  • 1 x new outer friction plate

Friction plate and steel plate arrangement

  1. Arrange the new friction and new steel plates in a stack as shown below.
  2. Clutch plate arrangement
    1. Friction plates

    2. Inner friction plate

    3. Inner steel plate

    4. Steel plates, 2.0 mm thickness

    5. Outer steel plate, 2.3 mm thickness

  3. Place the assembled clutch pack on a flat surface and measure its height as shown below.
  4. Clutch Pack Height (T0943_2)
    1. Clutch pack height

  5. For the correct clutch pack height for this clutch assembly see Clutch and Primary Drive.

Clutch - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
    caution
    Make sure the oil pump drive chain is engaged with the oil pump drive gears. Running the engine without drive to the oil pump will stop oil supply to the engine. Running the engine without oil pressure will cause severe engine damage.
  1. Visually check the oil pump drive chain is engaged with the drive gears.
  2. Position the clutch outer drum assembly to the input shaft and align the oil pump sprocket drive pegs with the corresponding holes in the rear of the clutch outer drum.
  3. Clutch Align LG1_1 (ckxd)
    1. Clutch outer drum (rear view)

    2. Oil pump sprocket drive pegs

    3. Clutch outer drum sprocket drive holes

  4. While holding the clutch outer drum in position and ensuring correct engagement with the oil pump drive, refit the bearing.
  5. Clutch - bearing sleeve cixd D Series.svg)
    1. Bearing sleeve

    2. Needle roller bearing

    3. Shaft

    note
    When the bearing and sleeve are correctly fitted, it will be a flush fit with the clutch drum face.
  6. Fit the thrust washer to the shaft.
  7. Fit the clutch inner drum.
  8. Fit the flat washer, a new Belleville washer (OUT mark facing outwards), and a new centre nut.
  9. LG1 Clutch Inner Drum Install
    1. Thrust washer

    2. Clutch inner drum

    3. Flat washer

    4. Belleville Washer OUT Mark

    5. Centre nut

  10. Using service tool T3880307, lock the inner and outer drums together. Depress the rear brake pedal to prevent the engine rotating, and tighten the centre nut to 98 Nm.
  11. Remove service tool T3880307.
  12. Clutch Retaining Plate - Remove (ciwx_3)
    1. T3880307 - Clutch Anti-rotation Jig

  13. Disengage second gear and check for free rotation of the clutch inner drum.
  14. Using a suitable pin punch, stake the nut to the shaft.
  15. note
    Always refer to the Clutch Pack Height prior to fitting new clutch plates to the motorcycle.
  16. Coat all clutch friction plates in clean engine oil before fitting the friction plates, steel plates, anti-judder spring and anti-judder seat washer to the clutch basket in the same order and orientation as noted during removal.
  17. note
    The inner friction plate is different to the other friction plates. It must be fitted in its noted position.The inner and outer steel plates are different to the other plates. They must be fitted in their noted position.
    LG1 Clutch Plate Assembly
    1. Clutch outer drum

    2. Clutch inner drum

    3. Anti-judder seat washer

    4. Anti-judder spring

    5. Friction plate (inner)

    6. Steel plate (inner)

    7. Friction plates

    8. Steel plates

    9. Steel plate (outer)

    10. Pressure plate

  18. Refit the clutch pull rod.
  19. Ensure that the spring seats are fitted into the pressure plate as noted for removal.
  20. Fit the pressure plate to the clutch centre, making sure the three raised teeth on the pressure plate align with the three missing teeth sections on the clutch centre, and the three raised teeth on the clutch centre align with the three missing teeth sections on the pressure plate.
  21. LG1 Clutch Pressure Plate Alignment_1
    1. Raised teeth

    2. Missing teeth sections

    3. Clutch pressure plate

  22. Rotate the clutch pressure plate in a clockwise direction until it comes into contact with the ramps on the clutch centre and the bolt holes align.
  23. LG1 Clutch Pressure Plate Alignment_2
    1. Clutch pressure plate

    2. Alignment mark (1 of 3)

    3. Bolt hole (1 of 3)

    note
    There are spring seats located in the stopper plate. Ensure the seats are in the stopper plate prior to fitting the springs.
    caution
    Make sure the clutch stopper plate is tightened evenly. Failure to tighten the clutch stopper plate fixings as described may cause severe engine damage.
  24. Fit the springs and stopper plate. Install the fixings and tighten finger tight until resistance is felt against the springs on each fixing.
  25. Tighten the fixings to a maximum of three turns each in an alternating pattern. Continue until the stopper plate is fully down.
  26. Tighten the fixings to 5 Nm.
  27. Tighten the fixings to 10 Nm.
  28. Clutch Pressure Plate LG1_1
    1. Fixings

    2. Stopper plate

    3. Spring seats

    4. Springs

    5. Pressure plate

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch Cover - Install L Series

Crankcase, Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons

Exploded View - Crankcase

Exploded View - Crankcases

Exploded View - Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons

Exploded View - Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons

Crankcases - Disassembly

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
caution
The upper and lower crankcases are machined as a matched set and must never be assembled to non-matching halves. Doing so may cause seizure of the engine.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Remove - L Series

Clutch - Remove L Series

Camshaft Cover - Remove L Series

Sump - Removal L Series

  1. Invert the engine to give access to the lower crankcase bolts.
  2. caution
    Failure to follow the correct screw release sequence may result in permanent crankcase damage.
  3. Release the lower crankcase bolts in the sequence shown in the diagram below. Note the position of the hardened washers under bolts 19 to 26.
  4. LG1 crankcase undo

    Crankcase Bolt Release Sequence

  5. Separate the lower and upper crankcases ensuring that the three locating dowels remain in the upper crankcase.
  6. caution
    Do not use levers to separate the upper and lower sections of the crankcase or damage to the crankcases could result.
    note
    The position of each individual bearing shell. At this point the transmission shafts, balancer, crankshaft, bearings etc. can be removed.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Crankcases - Assembly

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Use high flash-point solvent to clean the crankcase mating faces. Wipe the surfaces clean with a lint-free cloth.
  2. Make sure that the transmission is in neutral.
  3. Make sure that the three locating dowels are in position in the upper crankcase.
  4. Three locating dowels cdmx
    1. Locating dowels

  5. Apply a thin bead of silicone sealant (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used) to the lower crankcase mating faces.
  6. Apply sealant to crankcase cdmy

    Sealant Areas

    caution
    Do not use excessive amounts of sealant.The excessive sealant may become dislodged and could block the oil passages in the crankcases causing severe engine damage.
    caution
    Make sure the three piston cooling jets are installed.If the piston cooling jets are omitted, oil pressure will be reduced.Running the engine with low oil pressure will cause severe engine damage.
  7. Install and lubricate the crankshaft bearing shells with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection before proceeding).
  8. Lubricate the crankshaft journals with clean engine oil.
  9. Fit the crankshaft (see Crankshaft - Installation).
  10. If removed, refit the balancer (see Balancer - Installation).
  11. Position the lower crankcase to the upper. An assistant may be required to support the crankcase during alignment.
  12. Fit the bolts into the lower crankcase and hand tighten until the bolt heads are near contact with the crankcase. Note the position of the hardened washers under bolts 1 to 8.
  13. notice
    The crankcase screws are tightened in stages.Two different sizes of crankcase bolts are used. All bolts must be tightened in the four stages that follow:
    caution
    Failure to follow the correct bolt tightening sequence can result in permanent crankcase damage.

Stage 1

  1. In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 9 to 26 to 12 Nm.
  2. LG1 crankcase tighten 9 to 26

    Crankcase Bolt 9 to 26 Tightening Sequence

Stage 2

  1. In the sequence shown below, tighten the new crankcase bolts 1 to 8 to 10 Nm.
  2. LG1 crankcase tighten 1 to 8

    Crankcase Bolt 1 to 8 Tightening Sequence

Stage 3

  1. In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 1 to 8 to 70° of bolt rotation using the service tool T3880105 :
  2. LG1 crankcase tighten 1 to 8

    Crankcase Bolt 1 to 8 Tightening Sequence

    T3880105

    T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge

Stage 4

  1. In the sequence shown below, tighten the crankcase bolts 14 to 19 to 32 Nm.
  2. LG1 crankcase tighten 14 to 19

    Crankcase Bolt 14 to 19 Tightening Sequence

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Sump - Install L Series

Camshaft Cover - Install L Series

Clutch - Install L Series

Engine - Install - L Series

Crankshaft - Removal

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Remove - L Series

  1. Release and remove the crankshaft from the upper crankcase.
  2. note
    Identify the location of each bearing shell.Remove all bearings and inspect for damage, wear, overheating (blue discolouration) and any other signs of deterioration. Replace the bearings as a set if necessary (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).If the camshaft drive chain sprocket is removed from the crankshaft for any reason, always install a new fixing. Tighten to 27 Nm.
  3. Remove the balancer (see Balancer - Removal).

Crankshaft - Installation

caution
Always check the bearing journal clearance (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection and Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection), before final assembly of the crankshaft. Failure to correctly select crankshaft bearings will result in severe engine damage.
    caution
    Ensure the three piston cooling jets are installed. If the piston cooling jets are omitted, oil pressure will be reduced. Running the engine with low oil pressure will cause severe engine damage.
  1. Select and fit new main and big end bearing shells using the selection processes (see Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).
  2. Big end bearing selection cdmx_1
    1. Big end shells

  3. Lubricate all bearings with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
  4. Ensure that the crankshaft is clean, and that the oil ways within the crankshaft are clean and free from blockages and debris.
  5. Refit the balancer (see Balancer - Installation).
  6. Install the crankshaft ensuring that the crankshaft journals align with the big ends and that the crankshaft and balancer gear markings align as shown in the next illustration.
  7. Balancer markings cdmz
    1. Balancer backlash and drive gear markings

    2. Crankshaft markings

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Install - L Series

Connecting Rods - Removal

Connecting rods may be removed from the engine after first removing it from the frame. The cylinder head must be removed and the crankcase halves separated.

  1. Mark each big end cap and connecting rod to identify both items as a matched pair and to identify the correct orientation of the bearing cap to the connecting rod.
  2. Release the connecting rod bolts and remove the big end cap. Ensure that the bearing shell remains in place in the cap.
  3. Graphic from Installation (cdur.svg)
    1. Big end cap

    2. Connecting rod bolt

    note
    It may be necessary to gently tap the big end cap with a rubber mallet to release the cap.
  4. Push the connecting rod up through the crankcase and collect the piston and connecting rod from the top.
  5. Label the assembly to identify the cylinder from which it was removed.
  6. caution
    Never reuse connecting rod bolts. If the connecting rod cap is disturbed, always renew the bolts. Using the original bolts may lead to severe engine damage.
  7. Remove the liner using service tool T3880101 (see Cylinder Liner - Removal).
  8. Detach the piston from the connecting rod (see Pistons - Disassembly).

Connecting Rods - Installation

note
Connecting rod bolts are treated with an anti-rust solution which must not be removed.Clean the connecting rod with high flashpoint solvent.Remove all bearings and inspect for damage, wear and any signs of deterioration and replace as necessary.
warning
Connecting rod bolts MUST only be used once. If the bolts are removed or undone for any reason, new bolts MUST always be used.Reusing bolts can cause connecting rods and their caps to detach from the crankshaft causing severe engine damage, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
note
Ensure the piston is fitted correctly to the connecting rod.If a previously run engine is being rebuilt, always ensure that the piston and connecting rod are assembled in the same orientation, and to the same cylinder, as prior to disassembly.
  1. Fit the piston onto the connecting rod (see Pistons - Assembly Piston Assembly).
  2. Apply silicone sealer to the liner-to-crankcase mating face (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used).
  3. Liner (cbef_1_1)
    1. Liner

    2. Sealer area

  4. Fit the piston and connecting rod assembly into the liner from the bottom.
  5. Cylinder Liners Installation (ccvl)

    Arrowed: Liner-Piston Fitment

  6. Fit the liner into the crankcase ensuring that the arrow on the piston faces forward.
  7. The liners must be positioned such that they do not touch each other - it must be possible to pass a 0.1 mm feeler gauge between the centre liner and its adjacent liner on either side. If the liners touch at any point, rotate the liners until there is a minimum 0.1 mm clearance.
  8. Connecting Rods - Bore Clearance
    1. Liners

    note
    Ensure that the piston/liner/connecting rod assembly aligns correctly with the crankshaft journal during assembly into the crankcase.
  9. Select the big end bearing shells (see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).
  10. Fit the bearing shells to the connecting rod and big end cap and lubricate with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
  11. Align the connecting rod to the crankshaft and fit the big end cap.
  12. Graphic from Installation (cdur.svg)
    1. Big end cap

    2. Connecting rod bolt

    caution
    The torque characteristics of the connecting rod bolts are sensitive to the correct lubrication being applied. If the threads and under-head areas are not lubricated with molybdenum disulphide grease, the bolts may be stretched and may become loose when in service resulting in an expensive engine failure.
  13. Lubricate the threads and under-head area of the new bolts with molybdenum disulphide grease. Tighten the bolts evenly and progressively in two stages as follows:
  14. caution
    The torque characteristics of the connecting rod bolts are sensitive to the rate at which they are tightened. If all the torque is applied in one action, the bolt may be stretched and may become loose when in service resulting in an expensive engine failure.
  • Tighten to 14 Nm.

  • Tighten through 210° of bolt rotation as measured using service tool T3880105.

T3880105

T3880105 - Torque Angle Gauge

Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection

Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Selection/Crankshaft Journal Wear Check

  1. Measure the bearing and crankshaft journal clearance as follows.
notice
The crankshaft journal clearances are measured using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301).Do not turn the connecting rod and crankshaft during the clearance measurement as this will damage the Plastigauge.
  • Remove the big end cap from the journal to be checked.

  • Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journal, and the bearing face inside the cap.

  • Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the bearing.

  • Size a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the crankshaft journal. Fit the Plastigauge to the journal using the grease to hold the strip in place.

  • Lubricate the threads and under-head of the bolt with molybdenum disulphide grease. Refit the bearing and cap and tighten the big end bolts (see Connecting Rods - Installation).

  • Remove the big end cap from the journal being checked. Using the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.

Graphic from Connecting Rod Big End Bearing Selection_Crankshaft Journal Wear Check (gagd.svg)

Connecting Rod Big End Bearing/Crankshaft Journal Clearance

For specifications refer toCrankshaft.

notice
If the measured clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the crankshaft journal diameter.

Crankshaft Journal diameter

For specifications refer toCrankshaft.

note
If any crankshaft journal has worn beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft. Because of the advanced techniques used during manufacture, the crankshaft cannot be re-ground and no oversize bearings are available.

Connecting Rod - Bearing Selection

Minor differences in crankshaft dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts information.

  1. Select the correct big end bearing shell as follows:
  • Measure each crankshaft journal diameter.

  • Select the correct bearings by matching the information found with the chart below.

notice
All dimensions in millimetres.

Big end bearing selection chart

Shell Colour

White

Red

Connecting Rod Big End Bore Dia.

36.009

36.000

36.009

36.000

Crankshaft Journal Dia.

33.010

33.003

33.002

32.994

Running Clearance Range

0.064

0.036

0.061

0.032

Running Clearance Nominal

0.049

For instance:

Connecting Rod Big End Dia. 36.002

Crankshaft Journal Diameter 32.987

Required Bearing Red

note
Repeat the measurements for all connecting rods and their respective crankshaft journals.It is normal for the bearings selected to differ from one connecting rod to another.
  1. Install the new bearings in the connecting rod.
Graphic from Connecting Rod Bearing Selection (cdmx1.svg)
  1. Big end bearings

caution
Always confirm, using the Plastigauge method, that the running clearance is correct before final assembly. Severe engine damage could result from incorrect clearance.

Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection

Minor differences in crankshaft dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts information.

note
All dimensions in millimetres.
caution
Always confirm, using the Plastigauge method, that the running clearance is correct before final assembly. Severe engine damage could result from incorrect clearance.

Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Wear

Minor differences in crankshaft and crankcase dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts catalogue information.

  1. Measure the bearing to crankshaft journal clearance as follows:
  2. Measure the bearing to crankshaft main journal clearance using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150-T0301).
  3. note
    Do not turn the connecting rods and crankshaft during the clearance measurement as this will damage the Plastigauge.
  4. Separate the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Disassembly).
  5. Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journal, and the bearing faces inside the crankcase halves.
  6. Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the bearing.
  7. Trim a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the crankshaft journal.
  8. Fit the Plastigauge to the journal using the grease to hold the strip in place.
  9. note
    The original fixings may be reused for bearing selection. Do not use new fixings as they may only be used once, even if the single use is related to bearing selection.
  10. Lubricate the threads and the face of the fixings with molybdenum disulphide grease.
  11. note
    It is not necessary to apply silicone sealer to the crankcase mating faces during the bearing selection process.Only apply silicone sealer during final assembly.
  12. Refit the crankcase and tighten the original fixings (see Crankcases - Assembly).
  13. Release the fixings and remove the crankcase.
  14. Using the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
  15. Graphic from Connecting Rod Bearing Selection (gagc.svg)

    Checking Crankshaft Journal Clearance using Plastigauge

  16. For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
  17. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of the crankshaft bearing journal.
note
If any journal has worn beyond the service limit, the crankshaft must be replaced. Due to the techniques used during manufacture, the crankshaft cannot be re-ground and no oversize bearings are available.

Main Bearing Selection

note
Minor differences in dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross-references, see the latest parts information.

Select the bearings as follows:

  1. Measure and record the diameter of each crankshaft main bearing journal.
  2. Measure and record each main bearing bore diameter in the crankcase (bearings removed, crankcase halves assembled and all fixings fully torqued).
  3. Select and install the correct bearings by matching the information found in the Main Bearing Selection Chart.
  4. Table

    For example:

    Crankcase Bore

    35.990 mm

    Crankshaft Journal Diameter

    32.978 mm

    Required Bearing

    Blue

    note
    It is normal for the bearings selected to differ from one journal to another.It is also normal for there to be two options of bearing shell colour. In such cases, pick the shell size that gives the greater running clearance.
  5. Install the new bearings.

Crankshaft End Float

Standard

0.15-0.30 mm

Service Limit

0.5 mm

note
Crankshaft end float is controlled by the tolerances in crankshaft and crankcase machining. No thrust washers are used. If the crankshaft end float is outside the specified limit, the crankshaft and/or the crankcases must be replaced.

Main Bearing Selection Chart

Crankcase

Bore

Diameter

Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter

32.972

32.973

32.974

32.975

32.976

32.977

32.978

32.979

32.980

32.981

32.982

32.983

32.984

32.985

32.986

32.987

32.988

35.980

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.981

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.982

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.983

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.984

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.985

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.986

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.987

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.988

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.989

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

Red

35.990

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

Red

35.991

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

Red

35.992

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Red

35.993

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

35.994

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

35.995

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

35.996

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

35.997

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

Blue

35.998

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Green

Blue

Blue

Blue

For instance:

Crankcase Bore

35.990

Crankshaft Journal Diameter

32.978

Required Bearing

Blue

warning
Always confirm, using the Plastigauge method, that the running clearance is correct before final assembly. Severe engine damage could result from incorrect clearance resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
note
Repeat the measurements for all respective journals.It is normal for the bearings selected to differ from one journal to another.

Pistons - Disassembly

note
It is not necessary to remove the connecting rods from the crankshaft.
  1. Remove the liner, using the frame from service tool T3880315, and service tool T3880101 (see Cylinder Liner - Removal).
  2. Remove and discard the gudgeon pin circlip from one side of the piston.
  3. Graphic from Disassembly (cape.svg)

    Removing the Gudgeon Pin Circlip

  4. Remove the gudgeon pin by pushing the pin through the piston and rod toward the side from which the circlip was removed.
  5. caution
    Never force the gudgeon pin through the piston. This may cause damage to the piston which may also damage the liner when assembled.
    note
    If the gudgeon pin is found to be tight in the piston, check the piston for a witness mark caused by the circlip. Carefully remove the mark to allow the pin to be removed.
  6. Piston rings must be removed from the piston using hand pressure only. Do not overextend the piston rings during removal.
  7. note
    If the piston rings are to be reused, note the orientation of the oil control rings prior to removal.

Piston Wear Check

  1. Measure the piston outside diameter, 8 mm up from the bottom of the piston and at 90° to the direction of the gudgeon pin.
Piston Wear Check (capf_2)
  1. Piston outside diameter

  2. Measurement point

  3. Circlip removal groove

All Pistons

73.974-73.990 mm

Service limit

73.930 mm

Replace the piston if the measured diameter falls outside the specified limit.

Pistons - Assembly

  1. Clean the piston ring grooves and fit the piston rings to the piston.
  2. note
    The top ring upper surface is marked N and can be identified by a chamfer on the inside edge.The second ring upper surface is marked N2, and is plain on the inside edge.When new, the oil control rings can be fitted with either face upward. Used oil control rings must be refitted in the same orientation as noted prior to removal.
    Piston Rings

    Piston Ring Identification

  3. Fit the piston onto the connecting rod.
  4. note
    Connecting rods may be fitted either way around. However, ensure all three are fitted the same way.
  5. Lubricate the piston, small end and gudgeon pin with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
  6. Align the small end in the connecting rod with the gudgeon pin hole in the piston and fit the gudgeon pin.
  7. Fit new circlips on both sides of the gudgeon pin ensuring the circlips are correctly fitted in the grooves.
  8. warning
    Failure to use new gudgeon pin circlips could allow the pin to detach from the piston. This could seize the engine, resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  9. The piston ring gaps must be arranged as shown in the diagram below.
  10. Piston Ring Assembly
    1. Top ring

    2. Second ring

    3. First steel oil control ring

    4. Oil control ring expander

    5. Second steel oil control ring

    note
    The top ring gap should be positioned in the 12 o'clock position, and the second ring gap in the 6 o'clock position. The first steel oil control ring gap should be in the 12 o'clock position and the second steel oil control ring should be in the 6 o'clock position. The oil control ring expander should be in the 7 o'clock position.
  11. Fit the piston into the liner from below using a gentle rocking motion to engage the rings in the bore.

Piston Rings/Ring Grooves

Check the pistons for uneven groove wear by visually inspecting the ring grooves.

If all the rings do not fit parallel to the groove upper and lower surfaces, the piston must be replaced.

Clean the piston ring grooves.

Fit the piston rings to the pistons. Check, using feeler gauges, for the correct clearance between the ring grooves and the rings. Replace the piston and rings if outside the specified limit.

Piston Ring Groove Clearance Check (capg)

Piston Ring to Ring Groove Clearance Check

Piston Ring/Groove Clearance

Top ring

0.02-0.06 mm

Service limit

0.075 mm

Second

0.02-0.06 mm

Service limit

0.075 mm

Piston Ring Gap

note
The piston ring gap, with the piston ring fitted in the liner, must be checked before final assembly.
  1. Place the piston ring inside the liner.
  2. Push the ring into the top of the cylinder, using the piston to hold the ring square with the inside of the bore. Continue to push the ring into the bore until the third groove of the piston is level with the cylinder top, around the full circumference of cylinder.
  3. Cylinder Liner (cduo_3)

    Aligning Piston Rings using the Piston

  4. Remove the piston and measure the gap between the ends of the piston ring using feeler gauges.

Piston Ring End-Gap Tolerances

Top

0.15-0.30 mm

Service limit

0.42 mm

Second

0.30-0.45 mm

Service limit

0.57 mm

Oil Control

0.20-0.70 mm

Service limit

0.84 mm

note
If the end-gap is too large, replace the piston rings with a new set.If the gap remains too large with the new piston rings, both the pistons and barrels must be replaced.If the gap is too small, check the cylinder bore for distortion, replacing as necessary. DO NOT FILE PISTON RINGS!

Cylinder Liner - Removal

  1. Assemble the frame from service tool T3880315 to service tool T3880101 as shown below.
  2. Graphic from Removal  (gakh_2.svg)
    1. T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner

    2. T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners

  3. Mark each liner to identify correct orientation and the cylinder number from which it has been removed.
  4. Cylinder Liner (cduo_4)
    1. Paint mark

  5. Turn the crankshaft until the piston in the liner to be removed is at the bottom of its stroke.
  6. Graphic from Removal  (gajw.svg)
    1. T3880315 - Extractor, Cylinder Liner and T3880101 - Extractor, Cylinder Liners

    2. Extraction nut

    3. Locking nut

  7. Check that the locking nut on service tool T3880101 is loose, then fully unscrew the extraction nut.
  8. Carefully fit the tool fully into the cylinder bore, positioning the tool legs on the crankcase. Turn the locking nut clockwise until the rubber sleeve on the tool tightly grips the bore of the liner.
  9. Check that the tool legs are positioned to allow withdrawal of the liner, then turn the extraction nut clockwise to extract the liner. Take care to ensure that the piston/connecting rod is not allowed to fall against the inside of the crankcase.
  10. Turn the locking nut anticlockwise to release the liner.
  11. note
    The tool must be used to release the seal between the liner and the crankcase. It is not intended that the tool is used to fully extract the liner. Once the seal is released, the tool must be removed and the liner extracted by hand.

Cylinder Liner - Installation

  1. Thoroughly clean the liner removing all traces of old silicone sealer.
  2. Remove all traces of sealer from the crankcase bores.
  3. Apply silicone sealer to the liner to crankcase mating face (at the factory, ThreeBond 1216E is used).
  4. Fit each liner over the piston using a gentle rocking motion to allow compression of the piston rings.
  5. Cylinder Liner (cbef_5)
    1. Liner

    2. Sealer area

    3. Chamfer

  6. The liners must be positioned such that they do not touch each other - it must be possible to pass a 0.1 mm feeler gauge between the centre liner and its adjacent liner on either side. If the liners touch at any point, rotate the liners until there is a minimum 0.1 mm clearance.
  7. Connecting Rods - Bore Clearance
    1. Liners

    note
    The liners have a large chamfer at the bottom of the bore enabling fitting of the piston without need for a piston ring compressor.
    caution
    Fit each liner over whichever piston is at TDC. When turning the engine, do not allow the pistons to contact the inside of the crankcase and also do not allow fitted liners to lift off the crankcase base.
  8. Continue fitting each liner in turn until all are fitted and sealed.
  9. note
    When the liners have been fitted, they should not be disturbed. If it is necessary to remove the liner after fitting, the sealer must be reapplied.

Cylinder Wear

Measure the inside diameter of each cylinder using an internal micrometer or similar accurate measuring equipment.

Cylinder bore diameter

Standard

74.040-74.058 mm

Service limit

74.11 mm

Graphic from Cylinder Wear (gaep1.svg)

Test Position For Bore Wear Check (bore shown in section)

  1. Measure the inside diameter 10 mm from the top of the bore as shown above.
  2. If the reading is outside the specified limits, replace the liner and piston as an assembly.

Balancer

Exploded View - Balancer

Exploded View - Balancer

Balancer

The balancer is fitted to control 'pulsing' within the engine. Without any form of balancer, the engine would 'pulse' each time the crankshaft rotated. This 'pulsing' would be felt as a vibration which would amplify as the engine speed was increased.

The balancer has the effect of a pair of counterbalance weights which create an equal amount of energy in the opposite direction, and at the same time as that produced by the crankshaft, pistons and connecting rods. Because the opposing pulses occur at the same point of crankshaft rotation, and are of an equal magnitude, a state of equilibrium or balance is reached.

Balancer - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Separate the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Disassembly).
  2. With the crankcase halves separated, lift out the balancer shaft complete with the shaft bearings/circlips.
  3. Balancer RH Bearings (ckme)
    1. Balancer shaft

    2. Crankcase

  4. To remove the left hand bearing, slide the needle roller bearing and circlip from the shaft. Remove the circlip and bearing sleeve from the balancer shaft.
  5. Balancer LH Bearings (ckmf_1)
    1. Balancer shaft

    2. Needle roller bearing

    3. Bearing sleeve

    4. Circlip

    5. Needle roller bearing circlip

  6. To remove the right hand bearing, remove the circlip and washer, and, using a press and press bars remove the bearing race from the shaft, ensuring the inner bearing race is supported. Note the orientation of the bearing prior to removal. DO NOT remove the drive gear from the shaft.
  7. Balancer RH Bearings (ckmg)
    1. Balancer shaft

    2. Circlip

    3. Washer

    4. Bearing

    warning
    When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.

Balancer - Inspection

  1. Inspect all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
  2. Inspect all bearings for signs of overheating (blue discolouration), seized or damaged rollers, and any other damage.
  3. Inspect the gear teeth for overheating (blue discolouration).
  4. note
    Signs of blue discolouration on the gear centre are due to the manufacturing process and must be disregarded.

Balancer - Installation

  1. Lubricate and fit the right hand bearing, washer and circlip to the shaft.
  2. Fit the left hand bearing sleeve and circlip to the balancer shaft.
  3. Balancer LH Bearings (ckmf_1)
    1. Balancer shaft

    2. Needle roller bearing

    3. Bearing sleeve

    4. Circlip

    5. Needle roller bearing circlip

    note
    Before fitting the balancer shaft to the crankcase, lubricate the rollers of the needle roller bearing with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  4. Fit the needle roller bearing and circlip to the balancer shaft.
  5. caution
    If the balancer and crankshaft are not correctly aligned, severe engine vibration will occur leading to damage to components.
  6. Locate the balancer to the crankcase aligning the balancer gears and crankshaft as shown in the illustration below, while ensuring that the bearing circlips locate correctly in their corresponding grooves in the crankcase.
  7. Balancer Gear alignment (ckmh)
    1. Balancer drive gear mark

    2. Crankshaft marking

  8. Check that the balancer and crankshaft are correctly aligned before continuing to assemble the crankcase halves (see Crankcases - Assembly).

Transmission

Exploded View – Gear Selectors and Drum

Exploded View - Gear Selector Drum

Exploded View - Gear Change Lever

Exploded View - Gear Change Lever

Exploded View - Input and Output Shafts

Exploded View - Input and Output Shafts

Gear Change Linkage - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
If the gear change linkage requires disassembly, continue from step one. If the gear change linkage requires removal only, continue from step three.
  1. Remove the wire clips retaining the gear change linkage upper and lower ball joints.
  2. Wire clip install to gear linkage T0550
    1. Ball joint

    2. Wire clip

  3. Remove the gear change linkage.
  4. Remove the gear change clamp fixing.
  5. LG1 Gear Change Clamp_1
    1. Gear change clamp

    2. Fixing

  6. Remove and discard the gear change pivot bolt.
  7. Gear Change Pivot LG1 (ckyo)
    1. Gear change pivot bolt

    2. Gear change pedal

  8. Remove the gear change pedal and gear change clamp from the motorcycle, noting the position of the gear change clamp for installation.

Gear Change Linkage - Installation

  1. Locate the gear change clamp to the gear selector shaft, as noted for removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  2. Install gear change pedal to the gear change bracket and tighten the new pivot bolt to 22 Nm.
  3. If required, attach the upper ball joint to the transmission linkage.
  4. If required, attach the lower ball joint to the gear change pedal.
  5. Refit the wire clips to retain the ball joints. Ensure the wire clips locate correctly in the ball joints before rotating the clips to lock in place.
  6. Wire clip install to gear linkage T0550
    1. Ball joint

    2. Wire clip

Gear Change Rod Setting

note
If accessory fit Triumph Shift Assist (TSA) is fitted, the length of the rod should not be altered.

Gear Rod Setting LG1

If the gear change linkage needs to be removed, ensure the setting dimension and alignment are as described below when refitting.

  • Make sure the alignment mark on the gear pedal crank lines up to the alignment mark on the gear change shaft

  • Ensure the distance between the flats of the ball joints is 242.5 mm as shown below.

  • LG1 Gear Change Rod Setting

    Gear change rod setting dimension

  • The length of exposed thread at each end of the gear change rod should be equal.

  • Tighten the gear change rod lock nuts to 6 Nm.

  • Ensure the gear change mechanism is free to operate, without any excessive play.

Gear Change Shaft - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the E-clip and washer from the gear pedal end of the gear change shaft.
  2. Remove E clip and washer kakh_2
    1. Gear change shaft

    2. E-clip

    3. Washer

  3. Release the two fixings and remove the baffle plate from the crankcase breather. Discard the fixings.
  4. Breather Baffle Plate (cdnl)
    1. Crankcase breather baffle plate

    2. Fixings

  5. Withdraw the gear change shaft from the clutch end of the crankcase.
  6. Gear Shaft Remove (cdnm)
    1. Gear change shaft

    note
    The detent arm is held in position under spring pressure. Prior to removal, note the orientation of the detent arm, fixing and spring, relative to the selector drum detent wheel. The same orientation must be retained on assembly.
  7. Remove and discard the fixing securing the detent arm.
  8. Withdraw the detent arm complete with its flanged sleeve, spring and washer.
  9. Detent Arm (cdnj)
    1. Detent arm

    2. Fixing

    3. Spring

    4. Detent wheel

Gear Change Shaft - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Assemble the detent arm as noted during removal with a new fixing and place up to the crankcase.
  2. Detent Arm plus Exploded (cdnj_1)
    1. Spring

    2. Washer

    3. Detent arm

    4. Flanged sleeve

    5. Fixing

  3. Hold the detent arm assembly in position and insert a new fixing. Start the thread and push the detent arm, using finger pressure only, to locate on the selector drum detent wheel.
  4. Make sure the detent arm remains correctly located on the detent wheel and the spring is correctly seated in the recess in the crankcase. Make sure the shoulder of the flanged sleeve is located in the bore of the detent arm and tighten the fixing to 12 Nm.
  5. Detent Arm (cdnj)
    1. Detent arm

    2. Fixing

    3. Spring

    4. Detent wheel

  6. Rotate the selector drum to the neutral position. Make sure that the detent arm locates in the raised profile in the detent wheel (neutral position).
  7. Neutral Position (cdnj_2)
    1. Detent arm

    2. Neutral position

  8. Using clean engine oil, lubricate the lip of the seal on the gear change shaft.
  9. Shaft Seal/Bearing (cdnj_4)
    1. Gear change shaft seal

    2. Gear change shaft bearing

  10. Lubricate both sides of the forks and slider plates of the selector mechanism on the gear change shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  11. caution
    Take care to avoid damaging the lip of the seal when inserting the gear change shaft into the crankcase. A damaged seal will lead to oil loss and could result in engine damage.
  12. Insert the gear change shaft into the crankcase. Gently push the gear pedal end of the shaft through the bearing and lip seal at the clutch side of the crankcase, and the sealed bearing, located at the gear pedal side of the crankcase.
  13. Gear Shaft Install (cdnm_1)
    1. Gear change shaft

    2. Abutment bolt

    3. Spring

  14. Make sure the gear change shaft fingers locate in the detent wheel/arm and the spring fits either side of the abutment bolt.
  15. Fit the washer and E-clip to the gear pedal end of the gear change shaft.
  16. Remove E clip and washer kakh_2
    1. Gear change shaft

    2. E-clip

    3. Washer

  17. Refit the baffle plate with two new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch - Install L Series

Selector Forks and Drum - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Remove - L Series

Crankcases - Disassembly L Series

  1. Remove and discard the two selector shaft fixings, noting the position of the washer and keeper plate. Note the position of the washer and keeper plate for installation.
  2. Selector Shaft Retainers (cdnj_3)
    1. Fixings

    2. Selector drum and input selector shaft keeper plate

    3. Output selector shaft retaining washer

    caution
    The two output shaft selector forks can be fitted incorrectly. Ensure the position and orientation of the selector forks are marked prior to removal. Incorrect fitting of the selector forks will cause gearbox damage.
    note
    There are identification markings on one side of the fork. These markings must face the alternator side of the engine when installed.Note the orientation of the selector forks for installation.
  3. Slide the output selector shaft from the crankcase in the direction of the clutch. Collect the two selector forks as they are released by the selector shaft.
  4. Output Selector Shaft (cdme)
    1. Output selector shaft

    2. Sixth gear selector fork

    3. Fifth gear selector fork

  5. Noting the position of the selector fork, remove the input selector shaft, leaving the selector fork in the gearbox.
  6. Input selector shaft removal cdmd
    1. Input selector shaft

    2. Selector fork

  7. Withdraw the selector drum from within the crankcase.
  8. Selector drum removal cdmc
    1. Selector drum removal

  9. Collect the input shaft selector fork from the crankcase.

Selector Forks and Drum - Inspection

Inspect all bearings for damage or wear. Renew as necessary.

Inspect the selector forks and selector grooves for wear beyond the service limits. Renew the components as necessary.

  1. Examine the gear change shaft seal for damage and/or wear. Replace the seal if damaged and/or worn.

Selector Forks and Drum - Installation

  1. Position the input shaft selector fork into the crankcase, locating the fork into the selector groove on the input shaft. Make sure the fork is fitted in the position noted during removal.
  2. Input selector fork position cdny
    1. Input shaft selector fork

    2. Input shaft

  3. Using clean engine oil, lubricate the selector drum bearings. Lubricate the selector drum tracks with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  4. Position the selector drum into the crankcase.
  5. Selector drum removal cdmc
    1. Selector drum

  6. Rotate the selector drum and ensure a smooth movement. Rectify as necessary.
  7. caution
    The selector forks can be fitted incorrectly. Ensure the position and orientation of the selector forks are the same as noted during removal. Incorrect fitting of the selector forks will cause gearbox damage.
  8. Push the input selector shaft into the crankcase from the clutch end. As the shaft is inserted, locate the selector fork onto the shaft. Ensure the fork is fitted in the position noted during removal.
  9. Input selector shaft removal cdmd
    1. Input selector shaft

    2. Selector fork

  10. Push the output selector shaft into the crankcase from the clutch end. As the shaft is inserted, locate the selector forks. Ensure the selector forks are fitted in the positions and orientation as noted during removal.
  11. Output Selector Shaft (cdme)
    1. Output selector shaft

    2. Sixth gear selector fork

    3. Fifth gear selector fork

  12. Fit new fixings for the selector drum and input shaft keeper plates and output shaft retaining washer, making sure the washer and the keeper plate are fitted in the positions noted during removal. Tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
  13. Selector Shaft Retainers (cdnj_3)
    1. Fixings

    2. Selector drum and input selector shaft keeper plate

    3. Output selector shaft retaining washer

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Crankcases - Assembly L Series

Engine - Install - L Series

Input and Output Shaft Assemblies - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
The input and output shafts may be removed from the upper crankcase after first separating the lower crankcase from the upper.The rear needle roller bearing on the input shaft remains in the crankcase on removal of the shaft.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Engine - Remove - L Series

Crankcases - Disassembly L Series

  1. Lift the output shaft from the upper crankcase, noting the orientation of each bearing, their circlips and dowels.
  2. Remove the selector shafts, forks and selector drum (see Selector Forks and Drum - Removal).
  3. note
    The input shaft bearing housing fixings may not be reused but should be retained for use during installation of the input shaft.
  4. Release the three fixings securing the input shaft bearing housing to the upper crankcase.
  5. Input shaft bearing housing fixings L0339_1
    1. Fixings

    2. Bearing housing

    note
    Note the orientation of the bearing housing for installation.
  6. Insert two M6 bolts into the two threaded holes at the periphery of the bearing housing. Evenly and progressively tighten both bolts to draw the bearing housing and input shaft from the crankcase.
  7. Pulling input shaft bearing housing L0339_2
    1. Bearing housing

    2. M6 threaded holes

    3. Transmission oil tube

  8. If required, the transmission oil tube can now be removed. Remove and discard the three oil tube O-rings.

Input and Output Shaft Assemblies - Installation

  1. If removed, check the transmission oil tube for blockages and contamination. Carefully fit new O-rings to the transmission oil tube and insert the tube into the crankcase, ensuring the tag on the tube locates in the slot in the crankcase.
  2. Locate the input shaft to the upper crankcase, installing it through the aperture for the bearing housing.
  3. Align the fixing holes to the threaded holes in their crankcase and fit the bearing housing into the aperture, by hand, as deeply as possible.
  4. Using the old fixings, evenly and progressively tighten them to draw the bearing housing into the upper crankcase until fully home as noted for removal. Remove and discard the fixings.
  5. Input shaft bearing housing install L0339
    1. Bearing housing

    2. Fixings

    3. M6 threaded holes

    4. Transmission oil tube

  6. Install new fixings to the bearing housing and tighten to 12 Nm.
  7. Refit the selectors and shafts (see Selector Forks and Drum - Installation).
  8. Refit the output shaft to the crankcase ensuring the snap-ring locates in the corresponding groove in the crankcase, and the dowel locates in the slot in the upper crankcase.
  9. Ensure the output shaft seal aligns with its recess in the crankcase.
  10. Output shaft install kaix_4
    1. Groove in crankcase

    2. Snap ring

    3. Dowel

    4. Seal

  11. Ensure the hole in the output shaft needle roller bearing outer race is positioned to locate onto the dowel provided in the upper crankcase.
  12. Output shaft needle roller bearing cdqj
    1. Roller bearing

    2. Dowel

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Crankcases - Assembly L Series

Engine - Install - L Series

Exploded View - Input Shaft

Exploded View - Input Shaft Input Shaft_2
  1. Thrust washer

  2. Second gear

  3. Lock washer

  4. Splined washer

  5. Splined bush

  6. Sixth gear

  7. Splined thrust washer

  8. Circlip

  9. Third/fourth gear

  10. Circlip

  11. Splined thrust washer

  12. Fifth gear

  13. Plain bush

  14. Input shaft

  15. Bearing

  16. Bearing housing

  17. Bearing retainer

Input Shaft - Disassembly

note
The numbers in brackets in the following text refer to the exploded view on Exploded View - Input Shaft.

Working from the opposite end to where the clutch assembly is fitted, dismantle the input shaft as follows:

  1. Slide off the plain thrust washer (1).
  2. Mark one side of second gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove second gear (2).
  3. Remove the splined lock washers (3 and 4).
  4. Mark one side of sixth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove sixth gear (6), complete with the splined bush (5) which runs inside the gear.
  5. Note their orientation and remove the splined thrust washer (7) from in front of the circlip between sixth and third/fourth gear.
  6. Remove the circlip (8) from the shaft.
  7. Mark one side of the combined third/fourth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove the combined third/fourth gear (9).
  8. Remove the circlip (10) from in front of fifth gear.
  9. Remove the splined thrust washer (11) adjacent to fifth gear.
  10. Mark one side of fifth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fifth gear (12), complete with the plain bush (13) which runs inside the gear.
  11. note
    Unless the bearing at the clutch end of the input shaft is damaged or worn, it is not normally necessary to remove it from the shaft. The bearing is pressed onto the shaft and is also pressed into its housing. The bearing and housing are removed from the shaft together and are then separated.
    warning
    When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injuries to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
  12. Support the bearing and housing (15 and 16) on press bars, then press the shaft (14) through the bearing and housing as shown below.
  13. Remove bearing from input shaft ccbl
    1. Press bars

    2. Bearing/housing

  14. Support the outer circumference of the bearing housing on press bars, then press the bearing through the housing.
  15. Remove bearing from housing ccbm_2

    Pressing out the Bearing

Input Shaft - Inspection

  1. Examine all gears, bearings and bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all defective components and always use new circlips to assemble the shaft.
  2. Thoroughly clean the bearing housing and inspect for damage, scoring and cracks. Replace the housing if necessary.

Input Shaft - Assembly

note
The numbers in brackets in the following text refer to the exploded view on Exploded View - Input Shaft.Lubricate each gear, thrust washer and bush with clean engine oil during assembly.
warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injuries to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
caution
Bushes and gears with oil holes must always be MISALIGNED with the corresponding oil holes in the input shaft. Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication may result from alignment of the oil holes, which would cause premature wear of engine and transmission components.
caution
Removing the input shaft bearing from the shaft and its housing will damage the bearing and snap ring. Never reuse removed bearings or snap rings as use of damaged or weakened components could lead to engine and transmission damage. Also, check for damage to the housing itself.
caution
Press only on the bearing outer race to prevent bearing damage.
  1. Support the housing on press bars as shown below and press the bearing fully into the housing in the direction of the arrow.
  2. Bearing into housing ccbn_2
    1. Bearing housing

    2. Bearing

    caution
    Press only on the bearing inner race to prevent bearing damage.
  3. Locate the bearing and housing to the input shaft. Carefully support the shaft on the press bed, and using a suitable sleeve over the input shaft to ensure the bearing is pressed only on the inner race, press the bearing onto the shaft.
  4. Fit bearing to input shaft ccbo_1
    1. Sleeve

    2. Bearing/housing

    3. Press bars

    4. Input shaft

  5. Fit the plain bush (13) to the shaft.
  6. Fit fifth gear (12) to the input shaft as noted during disassembly, with the dog teeth pointing away from the input shaft bearing.
  7. Slide on the splined thrust washer (11).
  8. Fit a new circlip (10) to the input shaft ensuring that the clip is located in the circlip groove as shown below.
  9. Fit new circlip cdmo
    1. Fifth gear

    2. Thrust washer

    3. Circlip

  10. Fit the combined third/fourth gear (9) as noted during disassembly, with the larger gear facing toward fifth gear. Ensure that the oil hole in the input shaft DOES NOT align with the oil hole in the gear.
  11. warning
    If the oil hole in the third/fourth gear is aligned with the corresponding hole in the input shaft, engine oil pressure and gear lubrication will be reduced.Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication will cause engine damage and could also lead to engine seizure resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  12. Fit a new circlip (8) to the input shaft ensuring that the circlip is located in the circlip groove as shown below.
  13. Circlip for 3rd 4th gear cdmp
    1. Sixth gear

    2. Thrust washer

    3. Circlip

  14. Fit the splined thrust washer (7) to the input shaft and slide up the shaft until in contact with the circlip.
  15. Fit the splined bush (5) from sixth gear. Ensure that the oil hole in the input shaft DOES NOT align with the oil hole on the shaft.
  16. Fit sixth gear (6) as noted during disassembly, with the dog teeth facing third/fourth gear.
  17. Fit the splined and lock washers (4 and 3), ensuring the tabs in the smaller washer (3) locate in the slots in the larger (4) washer.
  18. Circlip for 6th gear cdmq
    1. Second gear

    2. Large splined lock washer

    3. Small splined lock washer

  19. Fit second gear (2) to the shaft as noted during disassembly.
  20. Fit the plain thrust washer (1) adjacent to second gear.

Exploded View - Output Shaft

Exploded View - Output Shaft Output shaft_3
  1. Bearing

  2. Thrust washer

  3. First gear

  4. Plain bush

  5. Thrust washer

  6. Fifth gear

  7. Circlip

  8. Splined thrust washer

  9. Fourth gear

  10. Splined bush

  11. Lock washer

  12. Splined washer

  13. Splined bush

  14. Third gear

  15. Splined washer

  16. Circlip

  17. Sixth gear

  18. Circlip

  19. Splined thrust washer

  20. Plain bush

  21. Second gear

  22. Output shaft

  23. Snap ring

  24. Bearing

  25. Sprocket spacer

  26. Output shaft seal

  27. Output sprocket

  28. Tab washer

  29. Output sprocket nut

Output Shaft - Disassembly

note
The numbers in brackets in the following text refer to the exploded view on Exploded View - Output Shaft.

Working from the opposite end to the drive sprocket, dismantle the output shaft as follows.

  1. Remove the output shaft bearing (1) and plain thrust washer (2).
  2. Mark one side of first gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove first gear (3) from the shaft, complete with the plain bush (4) which runs inside the gear.
  3. Remove the plain thrust washer (5).
  4. Mark one side of fifth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fifth gear (6) from the shaft.
  5. Remove the circlip (7) and splined thrust washer (8) from in front of fourth gear.
  6. Mark one side of fourth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove fourth gear (9) complete with the splined bush which runs inside the gear (10).
  7. Note their orientation and remove the splined lock washers (11 and 12).
  8. Mark one side of third gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove third gear (14) off the shaft complete with the splined bush (13) which runs inside the gear.
  9. Remove the splined thrust washer (15).
  10. Remove the circlip (16) from in front of sixth gear.
  11. Mark one side of sixth gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove sixth gear (17) from the shaft.
  12. Remove the circlip (18) from in front of second gear.
  13. Remove the splined thrust washer (19).
  14. Mark one side of second gear to denote its correct orientation. Remove second gear (21) from the shaft, complete with the plain bush (20) which runs inside the gear.
  15. Position the output shaft (22) in a vice with soft jaws fitted. Tighten the vice to prevent the shaft from turning and release the tab washer (28) from the output sprocket nut (29), then release the nut.
  16. Remove the output sprocket nut (29), tab washer (28) and sprocket (27).
  17. Collect the output shaft seal (26).
  18. If it is found necessary to replace the large bearing (24) at the end of the shaft, use a press to remove both the bearing and output shaft sprocket spacer (25) together.
warning
When removing the output shaft bearing, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. The bearing races are hardened and are liable to splinter if broken. Debris from broken bearings could cause injury to eyes, face and any unprotected parts of the body.

Output Shaft - Inspection

  1. Examine all gears, bearings, bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all suspect components and always use a new circlip to assemble the shaft.

Output Shaft - Assembly

note
The numbers in brackets in the following text refer to the exploded view on Exploded View - Output Shaft.Lubricate each gear and bush with clean engine oil during assembly.Examine all gears, bearings and sleeves for damage, chipped teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all suspect components and always use new circlips, a new output shaft seal and a new sprocket tab washer to assemble the shaft.
warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injuries to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
caution
Bushes and gears with oil holes must always be MISALIGNED with the corresponding oil holes in the output shaft. Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication may result from alignment of the oil holes, which would cause premature wear of engine and transmission components.
caution
Removing the output shaft bearing from the shaft will damage the bearing and snap ring. Never reuse removed bearings or snap rings as use of damaged or weakened components could lead to engine and transmission damage.
caution
Press only on the bearing inner race to prevent bearing damage.
  1. Working from the output sprocket end of the shaft, fit a new bearing (24) and a new sprocket spacer (25) to the shaft using a press and press bars. Fit the sleeve with the large chamfer facing outwards.
  2. Bearing to output shaft ccbo_2
    1. Output shaft

    2. Bearing

    3. Press bars

  3. Lubricate and fit a new output shaft seal (26).
  4. Transfer the shaft to the vice and secure between soft jaws. Fit the output sprocket (27), new tab washer (28) and nut (29). Tighten the nut to 85 Nm. Close the tab washer.
  5. Withdraw the shaft from the vice and continue to assemble from the opposite end to the output sprocket.
  6. Fit the plain bush (20) to the shaft.
  7. Locate second gear (21) to the shaft as noted during disassembly, with the large step side facing towards the output sprocket end. Fit the splined thrust washer (19) and retain with a new circlip (18) as shown below.
  8. 2nd gear circlip cdmr
    1. Second gear

    2. Thrust washer

    3. Circlip

  9. Fit sixth gear (17) as noted during disassembly, with the selector fork groove facing away from the output sprocket end. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
  10. Fit a new circlip (16) to retain sixth gear. Fit the splined thrust washer (15) to the rear of third gear as shown below.
  11. 6th gear circlip cdms
    1. Third gear

    2. Splined thrust washer

    3. Circlip

  12. Fit the splined bush (13) for third gear. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft. Fit third gear (14) to the shaft with the large step side facing away from the output sprocket.
  13. Fit the splined lock washers (12 and 11), ensuring the tabs in the smaller washer (11) locate in the slots in the larger washer (12) as shown below.
  14. 3rd gear circlip cdmt
    1. Third gear

    2. Large splined lock washer

    3. Small splined lock washer

  15. Fit the splined bush (10) from fourth gear. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
  16. Fit fourth gear (9) as noted during disassembly, with the larger step side facing towards the output sprocket.
  17. Fit the splined thrust washer (8) and retain with a new circlip (7) as shown below.
  18. 4th gear circlip cdmu
    1. Fourth gear

    2. Splined thrust washer

    3. Circlip

  19. Fit the fifth gear (6) to the shaft with the groove facing towards the output sprocket. Ensure that the oil holes in the gear DO NOT align with the corresponding oil hole in the output shaft.
  20. Fit the first gear thrust washer (5) and plain bush (4).
  21. note
    When fitting first gear, ensure the solid side of the gear faces the clutch.
  22. Fit first gear (3) to the shaft as marked during disassembly as shown below.
  23. 1st gear cdmv_1
    1. First gear

    2. Thrust washer

    3. Thrust washer

    4. Needle roller bearing

  24. Finally fit the thrust washer (2) and needle roller bearing (1) to the end of the shaft.

Starter Drive and Sprag Clutch

Exploded View - Sprag Clutch and Starter Gears

Exploded View - Sprag Clutch and Starter Drive

Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Alternator Cover - Remove L Series

  1. Withdraw the starter idler gear and shaft, noting the fitted position of the components.
  2. Starter idler gear L0346
    1. Idler gear

    2. Idler shaft

  3. Remove the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor - Removal).
  4. Withdraw the starter drive gear from the sprag clutch.
  5. Detach starter drive gear cdnb_1
    1. Starter drive gear

    2. Sprag clutch/housing

    3. Alternator rotor

  6. Remove and discard the fixings securing the sprag clutch housing to the alternator rotor. Withdraw the sprag clutch housing.
  7. Remove the sprag clutch from the housing.
  8. Sprag clutch from housing sprag hub
    1. Sprag clutch housing

    2. Sprag clutch assembly

Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Inspection

  1. Check the sprag clutch bearings for overheating, wear and/or non-smooth operation. Replace the sprag clutch if overheating, wear and/or non-smooth operation is found.
  2. Examine all gears for chipped teeth and for any other damage.
  3. With the sprag clutch mounted in the housing, check the sprag clutch for smooth, free movement in one direction only (as indicated by the arrow marked on the sprag clutch body).

Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch - Installation

  1. Locate the sprag clutch to the sprag clutch housing as shown below. Push firmly until the lip seats in the recess provided in the housing.
  2. Sprag clutch from housing sprag hub
    1. Sprag clutch housing

    2. Sprag clutch assembly

  3. Fit the housing to the alternator rotor.
  4. Ensure that the housing is squarely seated and is not on the rotor. Install new fixings.
  5. Tighten the cover bolts to in the sequence shown below to 16 Nm.
  6. Sprag tightening sequence Sprag

    Tightening Sequence

  7. Once all six bolts have been tightened, go around again in sequence and recheck each bolt is correctly torqued, if any bolt moves, go around again. Repeatedly check the bolts in sequence until all are correctly torqued and do not move when checked, this will ensure the sprag clutch housing is correctly seated on the rotor.
  8. Fit the starter drive gear to the sprag clutch.
  9. Detach starter drive gear cdnb_1
    1. Starter drive gear

    2. Sprag clutch/housing

    3. Alternator rotor

  10. Refit the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor - Installation).
  11. Lubricate the idler gear shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  12. Fit the starter idler gear and shaft to the crankcase.
  13. Starter idler gear L0346
    1. Idler gear

    2. Idler shaft

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Alternator Cover - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Lubrication

Exploded View - Oil Pump/Water Pump, Gears and Heat Exchanger

Exploded View - Oil Pump

Engine Oil - Specification

Triumph's high performance fuel injected engines are designed to use 10W/40 or 10W/50 fully or semi synthetic motorcycle engine oil that meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.

Triumph Performance fully synthetic engine oil is recommended.

The oil viscosity may need to be changed to accommodate the ambient temperatures in your riding area.

Refer to the chart below for the correct oil viscosity (10W/40 or 10W/50) to be used in your riding area.

Oil Viscosity

Oil Viscosity Temperature Range

caution
Triumph's high performance fuel injected engines are designed to use 10W/40 or 10W/50 fully or semi synthetic motorcycle engine oil that meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.Do not add any chemical additives to the engine oil. The engine oil also lubricates the clutch and any additives could cause the clutch to slip.Do not use mineral, vegetable, non-detergent oil, castor based oils or any oil not conforming to the required specification. The use of these oils may cause instant, severe engine damage.Ensure no foreign matter enters the crankcase during an oil change or top up.

Disposal of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

To protect the environment, do not pour oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into watercourses.

Do not place used oil filters in with general waste. If in doubt contact your local authority.

Engine Oil Circuit Description

Oil is collected from the sump and is drawn through a mesh strainer into the oil pump rotor. The oil pump is fitted with a single pumping rotor which supplies pressurised oil to the lubrication circuit via the oil pressure relief valve. The relief valve is set to open at 5.1 bar (75 lb/in ²) and when open, returns high pressure oil directly to the sump.

Pressurised oil is delivered to the outside rim of the oil filter, where it is filtered by passing through the filter membrane.

Filtered oil is then delivered to the oil-to-water heat exchanger (mounted on the front of the engine), where it is cooled.

The cooled oil is then fed into the lower crankcase gallery. From here it is distributed around the engine:

  • Oil is delivered to the crankshaft main bearings and, via drillings in the crankshaft, to the big end bearings.

  • Spray jets located in the upper crankcase, behind the main bearing shells, lubricate the pistons and connecting rod small ends. These jets are fed oil from the crankshaft oil feed. A low oil pressure warning light switch is also located in the upper crankcase gallery.

  • Some oil is sent directly to the cylinder head via an internal gallery. Oil that arrives at the cylinder head is fed to both camshafts via a gallery in the cylinder head casting that delivers oil directly to the sprocket end of the camshafts. Oil is then fed through the hollow camshafts to the other camshaft bearings, the tappet buckets and the valves.

  • Oil is fed to the gearbox via internal oil pipes and drillings that supply oil directly to the end of each shaft. Oil is circulated along the gearbox shafts to exit holes that feed directly to the bearings, gears and selectors.

  • Oil is fed to the alternator to aid cooling of the alternator components. The oil is taken from the crankshaft oil feed and directed to the alternator via a drilling in the alternator bolt.

Engine Oil Circuit

Engine Oil Circuit

Oil and Coolant Pump - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)

warning
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.

Warning - Hot Engine oil

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the engine oil will be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot oils may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, do not touch hot oil.

Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil

warning
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contamination which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and avoid skin contact.The engine oil and filter must be replaced in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.

Caution - General - Do not pour engine oil - pollution

caution
Do not pour engine oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into watercourses. To prevent pollution of watercourses etc., dispose of used oil sensibly. If in doubt contact your local authority.
note
The oil pump and water pump are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated. This procedure covers the removal of the oil and water pump assembly.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Radiator - Remove L Series

Exhaust - Removal L Series

Clutch - Remove L Series

Sump - Removal L Series

  1. Release and discard the two fixings and remove the oil transfer pipe. Remove and discard the two O-ring seals.
  2. Oil transfer pipe (chyf_1)
    1. Oil transfer pipe

    2. Fixings

  3. Release and discard the two fixings and remove the oil pick-up. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
  4. Oil Pick Up (chyc_1)
    1. Oil pick-up

    2. Fixings

  5. Remove and discard the bolt securing the coolant outlet pipe to the crankcase and withdraw the pipe. Remove and discard the O-rings from the elbow.
  6. Coolant Outlet Pipe (cdph_3)
    1. Coolant outlet pipe

    2. Fixing

  7. Remove and discard the bolt securing the coolant inlet elbow to the crankcase and withdraw the elbow. Remove and discard the O-ring from the elbow.
  8. Coolant inlet elbow cdpg_1
    1. Coolant inlet pipe

    2. Fixing

  9. Release the fixings securing the drive chain guide to the crankcase and remove the guide.
  10. Oil pump chain guide cdpk
    1. Oil pump drive chain guide (engine shown inverted)

    2. Fixings

  11. Slide the oil pump drive sprocket gently backwards and forwards to dislodge the inner needle roller bearing.
  12. Oil pump drive sprocket bearing cdwf
    1. Oil pump drive sprocket (engine shown inverted)

    2. Needle roller bearing

  13. Carefully remove the bearing while supporting the oil pump drive sprocket.
  14. Remove needle roller bearing cdwg
    1. Needle roller bearing (engine shown inverted)

    2. Oil pump drive sprocket

    note
    Note the position of the washer under the oil pump fixing for the oil pump dowel for installation.
  15. Release the fixings securing the oil pump. Remove the fixings and collect the washer.
  16. Oil Pump fixings (B00533_1)
    1. Oil pump

    2. Fixings

    3. Washer

  17. Using a suitable tool, slide the dowel upwards to release the oil pump from the crankcase. It is not necessary to remove the dowel completely from the oil pump.
  18. Oil Pump Dowel (B00534_1)
    1. Oil pump

    2. Dowel

  19. Detach the drive chain from the oil pump.
  20. Oil Pump Drive Chain (B00536_1)
    1. Oil pump

    2. Drive chain

  21. Carefully withdraw the oil pump from the crankcase.
  22. Remove and discard the O-ring from the inlet sleeve on the water pump body.

Oil Pump - Disassembly

  1. Release the fixing and remove the drive sprocket and spacer washer.
  2. Oil Pump, Spacer, Drive Sprocket and Fixing cdpp_5
    1. Oil pump

    2. Spacer washer

    3. Drive sprocket

    4. Fixing

  3. Release the three fixings and withdraw the oil pump body.
  4. Oil Pump Body Fixings (cdpn.svg)
    1. Oil pump body

    2. Fixings

Oil Pump - Inspection

    caution
    If any part of the oil pump is found to be outside the service limit, the complete pump must be replaced. Severe engine damage may result from the continued use of a faulty oil pump.
  1. Measure the rotor tip clearance using feeler gauges.
  2. Table

    Rotor Tip Clearance

    Standard

    0.15 mm

    Service limit

    0.20 mm

    Oil Pump Rotor Tip Clearance (cdqi.svg)

    Rotor Tip Clearance

  3. Measure the pump body clearance using feeler gauges.
  4. Oil Pump Body Clearance (cdqh.svg)

    Pump Body Clearance

    Table

    Pump Body Clearance

    Standard

    0.15 - 0.22 mm

    Service limit

    0.35 mm

  5. Measure the pump end clearance.
  6. * Wipe the exposed areas of both the outer rotor and the oil pump cover.
    * Apply a thin smear of grease to the outer rotor and a small quantity of silicone release agent to the oil pump cover.
    * Size a length of Plastigauge to fit across one of the lugs on the outer rotor, as shown below. Fit the Plastigauge to the outer rotor using the grease to hold the strip in place.
    Oil Pump End Clearance cdqi_1.svg)
    1. Outer rotor

    2. Plastigauge

    * Without any twisting action, refit the oil pump cover and tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
    * Release the fixings and remove the oil pump cover.
    * Using the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the now compressed Plastigauge.
    * If the clearance is within the specified tolerance, clean off all traces of Plastigauge from the outer rotor and oil pump cover. Assemble the oil pump (see Oil Pump - Assembly).
    Oil Pump End Clearance plastigauge cdqi_2 .svg)
    1. Outer rotor

    2. Plastigauge

    3. Gauge, in millimetres

    Table

    Pump End Clearance

    Standard

    0.04 - 0.09 mm

    Service limit

    0.17 mm

Oil Pump - Assembly

  1. If all clearances are within service limits, liberally apply clean engine oil to all internal components and refit the oil pump body to the oil pump rotor. Refit the fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
  2. If any clearance measured is outside the service limits, renew the complete pump.
  3. Inspect the sprockets and chain for wear and/or damage. Replace the sprockets and chain if wear and/or damage is found.
  4. Check the water pump shaft and shaft bearings for side and end float. Renew if necessary.
  5. Check for corrosion and scale build-up around the impeller and in the pump body. Renew if necessary.
  6. Check the oil pump location dowel for damage. Renew if necessary.
  7. Refit the spacer washer and drive sprocket. Apply ThreeBond 1374 to the fixing and tighten to 12 Nm.
Oil Pump, Spacer, Drive Sprocket and Fixing cdpp_5
  1. Oil pump

  2. Spacer washer

  3. Drive sprocket

  4. Fixing

Oil and Coolant Pump - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
caution
Before fitting the oil pump to the crankcase ensure the pump internal surfaces have been wetted with clean engine oil. The pump may fail to pick up oil from the sump if the surfaces have not been wetted. This will cause the engine to run without engine oil pressure and will lead to severe engine damage.
  1. Install a new O-ring to the inlet sleeve on the water pump body.
  2. Fill the oil pump with new engine oil, turning the pump rotor as the oil is poured in to ensure all surfaces are coated with oil.
  3. Position the oil pump to the crankcase and insert the water pump inlet sleeve into the opening in the crankcase.
  4. Fit the oil pump to the crankcase, ensuring the oil pump dowel correctly locates into the bolt hole in the crankcase.
  5. caution
    Do not use excessive force to insert the dowel into the crankcase. Severe dowel or crankcase damage may result from the use of excessive force.
  6. Using a suitable pin punch, gently tap the dowel downwards into the crankcase until it seats.
  7. Feed the drive chain over the transmission input shaft and fit to the sprocket.
  8. Fit the drive chain to the sprocket on the oil pump.
  9. Support the oil pump drive sprocket and carefully refit the needle roller bearing.
  10. Remove needle roller bearing cdwg
    1. Needle roller bearing

    2. Oil pump drive sprocket

  11. Refit the washer and fixings as noted for removal. Tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
  12. Oil Pump fixings (B00533_1)
    1. Oil pump

    2. Fixings

    3. Washer

  13. Refit the oil pump drive chain guide. Install new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
  14. Oil pump chain guide cdpk
    1. Oil pump drive chain guide

    2. Fixings

  15. Install a new O-ring to the coolant inlet elbow and position the elbow to the water pump inlet. Fit a new bolt and tighten to 12 Nm.
  16. Coolant inlet elbow cdpg_1
    1. Coolant inlet elbow

    2. Fixing

  17. Install three new O-rings to the coolant outlet pipe and position the pipe through the crankcase. Locate the pipe to the water pump outlet. Install a new fixing and tighten to 12 Nm.
  18. Coolant Outlet Pipe (cdph_3)
    1. Coolant outlet pipe

    2. Fixing

  19. Install a new O-ring to the oil pick-up and refit the oil pick-up. Fit new bolts and tighten to 12 Nm.
  20. Oil Pick Up (chyc_1)
    1. Oil pick-up

    2. Fixings

  21. Install two new O-rings to the oil transfer pipe and refit the oil transfer pipe. Fit new bolts and tighten to 12 Nm.
  22. Oil transfer pipe (chyf_1)
    1. Oil transfer pipe

    2. Fixings

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Sump - Install L Series

Clutch - Install L Series

Exhaust - Installation L Series

Radiator - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Heat Exchanger

The heat exchanger is used to transfer heat from the engine oil into the coolant.

Filtered oil is delivered to the heat exchanger via an opening (4) where it is circulated through the heat exchanger core. Coolant is pumped through spigot (1) into the heat exchanger core to cool the oil. The cooled oil then exits the heat exchanger (3) and flows to the main oil gallery. The coolant then flows out of the heat exchanger (2) and through the rest of the cooling system.

Heat Exchanger_flow_C*3/C*7_L0457_1
  1. Coolant in

  2. Coolant out

  3. Oil out

  4. Oil in

An additional benefit of the heat exchanger is that, as the engine coolant reaches its operating temperature more quickly than the engine oil, the oil is heated by the engine coolant at lower engine temperatures; this allows the engine oil to reach its optimum operating temperature more quickly, thereby helping to improve engine oil life, reduce exhaust emissions and reduce engine wear.

Heat Exchanger - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)

warning
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.

Warning - Hot Engine oil

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the engine oil will be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot oils may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, do not touch hot oil.

Warning - General - Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil

warning
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contamination which can cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and avoid skin contact.The engine oil and filter must be replaced in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.
note
Prior to disassembly of the coolant hoses, note the orientation and position of the hose clips to help ensure that they are returned to the same positions and orientation on assembly.
  • Position the motorcycle on level ground on the side stand.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Radiator - Remove L Series

Exhaust - Removal L Series

  1. Noting their orientation, disconnect the coolant hoses from the heat exchanger using service tool T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers.
  2. Remove the three fixings from the heat exchanger and withdraw it from the crankcase.
  3. Heat Exchanger LG1 (B00526_2)
    1. Heat exchanger

    2. Fixings

    3. Hose clips

    4. Coolant hoses

  4. Remove and discard the O ring from the lower crankcase.

Heat Exchanger - Inspection

  1. Check the heat exchanger body for corrosion and/or damage.

Heat Exchanger - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit a new heat exchanger O-ring to the lower crankcase.
  2. Fit the heat exchanger to the crankcase and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm.
  3. Retighten fixing 1 to 10 Nm.
  4. Heat Exchanger Seq LG1 (B00526_3)

    Tightening Sequence

  5. Fit the coolant hoses to the heat exchanger in the orientation noted during removal.
  6. Using service tool T3880207 - Hose Clip Pliers, fit the coolant hose clips in the orientation noted during removal.
  7. Heat Exchanger LG1 (B00526_2)
    1. Heat exchanger

    2. Fixings

    3. Hose clips

    4. Coolant hoses

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Exhaust - Installation L Series

Radiator - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The low oil pressure warning light switch is located in the upper crankcase, behind the cylinder head.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

  1. Disconnect the electrical connection to the switch.
  2. Remove the switch and collect the copper washer.
  3. Low Pressure Warning Switch (L0625_1)
    1. Electrical connection

    2. Low oil pressure warning light switch

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Incorporating a new copper washer, fit the switch and tighten to 13 Nm.
  2. Refit the electrical connection.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Engine Remove and Install

Engine - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Purge Valve - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series

Radiator - Remove L Series

Exhaust - Removal L Series

Engine Remove LG1; LGX

  1. If required, drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
  2. Remove the two fixings and remove the gear change bracket and side stand switch from the frame.
  3. Note the routing of the alternator regulator/rectifier harness for installation. Release the grey alternator regulator/rectifier electrical connection and route the harness back to the engine.
  4. Disconnect the harness from the following components:
  5. * ignition coils
    * fuel rail (injectors)
    * coolant temperature sensor
    * secondary air injection valve.
  6. Remove and discard the lock nut securing the engine ground lead to the crankcase. Remove the engine ground lead.
  7. Disconnect the engine subharness from the main harness.
  8. Ground Lead LG1_Subharness (ckxw)
    1. Engine subharness connector

    2. Engine ground lead

  9. Disconnect the gear position sensor from the main harness.
  10. Detach the MAP sensor hose (engine end) from its four way connector.
  11. Detatch MAP hose from 4 way connector clhj_1
    1. MAP sensor hose (throttle body removed for clarity)

    2. Four way connector

  12. Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum free play in the chain (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
  13. Place a support beneath the engine and ensure that the frame is still adequately and securely supported.
  14. note
    The frame is fitted with two frame adjuster sleeves, located on the right hand side of the frame in the upper and lower crankcase bolt positions.
  15. Remove the lower crankcase bolt, washer and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
  16. Remove the upper crankcase bolt, washer and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
  17. Using service tool T3880166, loosen the frame adjusters and unscrew them fully to allow clearance between the frame and engine.
  18. Remove the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
  19. caution
    When removing/installing the frame to cylinder head left hand mounting bolt, power/air tools must not be used. Hand tools must only be used.Damage to the cylinder head threads can occur if power/air tools are used.
  20. Remove the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt.
  21. Remove the right hand side front cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
  22. Remove the left hand side front cylinder head bolt and lock nut. Discard the lock nut.
  23. LG1 Engine Fixings (RHS)
    1. Lower crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)

    2. Upper crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)

    3. Right hand side rear cylinder head bolt

    4. Right hand side front cylinder head bolt

    LG1 Engine Fixings_1 (LHS)
    1. Left hand side front cylinder head bolt

    2. Left hand side rear cylinder head bolt

    3. Upper crankcase bolt

    4. Lower crankcase bolt

    caution
    To prevent damage to components, lower the engine very carefully.
  24. Lower the engine sufficiently to allow the drive chain to be detached from the front sprocket.
  25. Remove the engine.

Engine - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Engine Install LG1; LGX

  1. Position the engine beneath the frame.
  2. Make sure the alternator regulator/rectifier harness is routed as noted during removal.
  3. Raise the engine, looping the drive chain over the output sprocket as it is raised.
  4. caution
    Unless the following engine mounting bolt installation/tightening sequence is precisely followed, severe frame damage can occur.
  5. Align the engine to the frame.
  6. Loosely assemble the left hand side front cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
  7. Loosely assemble the right hand side front cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
  8. Thoroughly clean the threaded part of the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt and smear the first four threads with a proprietary copper based grease
  9. Loosely assemble the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt.
  10. Loosely assemble the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt and a new lock nut.
  11. Using service tool T3880166 tighten the upper crankcase frame adjuster to 3 Nm.
  12. Loosely assemble the upper crankcase bolt, washer and a new lock nut.
  13. Using service tool T3880166 tighten the lower crankcase frame adjuster to 3 Nm.
  14. Loosely assemble the lower crankcase bolt, washer and a new lock nut.
  15. Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the upper crankcase bolt to 48 Nm.
  16. Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the lower crankcase bolt to 48 Nm.
  17. Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the left hand side front cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
  18. Tighten the left hand side rear cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
  19. Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the right hand side front cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
  20. Whilst holding the lock nut, tighten the right hand side rear cylinder head bolt to 48 Nm.
  21. LG1 Engine Fixings (RHS)
    1. Lower crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)

    2. Upper crankcase bolt (and frame adjuster)

    3. Right hand side rear cylinder head bolt

    4. Right hand side front cylinder head bolt

    LG1 Engine Fixings_1 (LHS)
    1. Left hand side front cylinder head bolt

    2. Left hand side rear cylinder head bolt

    3. Upper crankcase bolt

    4. Lower crankcase bolt

  22. Attach the MAP sensor hose (engine end) to its four way connector.
  23. Detatch MAP hose from 4 way connector clhj_1
    1. MAP sensor hose (throttle body removed for clarity)

    2. Four way connector

  24. Reconnect the gear position sensor to the main harness.
  25. Reconnect the engine subharness to the main harness.
  26. Reconnect the engine ground lead to the crankcase with a new lock nut and tighten to 10 Nm.
  27. Ground Lead LG1_Subharness (ckxw)
    1. Engine subharness connector

    2. Engine ground lead

  28. Reconnect the following components to the main harness:
  29. * ignition coils
    * fuel rail (injectors)
    * coolant temperature sensor
    * secondary air injection valve.
  30. Reconnect the grey alternator regulator/rectifier electrical connection.
  31. Refit the gear change bracket and side stand switch to the frame with two fixings and tighten to 24 Nm.
  32. Set the drive chain adjustment (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
  33. If drained, refill the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Exhaust - Installation L Series

Radiator - Install L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series

Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Purge Valve - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Fuel and Exhaust System and Engine Management

Exploded Views

Exploded View - Airbox

Exploded View - Airbox

Exploded View - Secondary Air Injection

Exploded View - Secondary Air Injection

Exploded View - Engine Management

Exploded View - Engine Management System

Exploded View - Evaporative System

Exploded View - EVAP System

Exploded View - Exhaust System

Exploded VIew - Exhaust System

Exploded View - Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors

Exploded View - Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors

Exploded View - Fuel Tank

Exploded View - Fuel Tank

Exploded View - Fuel Tank Bodywork

Exploded View - Fuel Tank Bodywork

Fuel Diagnostics

Pin Point Tests

Link to Diagnostics Chapter

Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.

Removal and Installation - Fuel and Air Components

Fuel Tank - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.
warning
Never drain fuel from the tank using non-approved, non-professional standard fuel handling equipment. A fire causing destruction of property and injury to persons may result from use of non-approved fuel handling equipment.

Fuel Tank Removal - Quick Release Tank Bag

warning
For models fitted with an accessory quick release tank bag only:The fuel must be drained from the fuel tank before removal.The fuel filler cap will be loose after removing the accessory tank bag quick release ring.A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.
notice
For models fitted with an accessory quick release tank bag only:The quick release ring must be removed before removing the fuel tank. Please refer to the relevant accessory fitting instruction for details.Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, drain the fuel from the fuel tank.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

Fuel Tank Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Unclip and remove the ignition barrel shroud from the fuel tank.
  2. Fuel Tank Front Panel_1 (cktz)
    1. Ignition barrel shroud

  3. Remove the rear and side fixings from the fuel tank bodywork.
  4. Fuel Tank Rear Fixing (ckuf)
    1. Fuel tank bodywork

    2. Rear fixing

    3. Side fixing (right hand side shown)

  5. Remove the front fixings from the fuel tank bodywork.
  6. Fuel Tank Front Fixings (cktx)
    1. Front fixings

  7. Flex the fuel tank bodywork sides out in the areas shown below and lift clear of the fuel tank.
  8. LG1 Fuel Tank Flex

    Fuel tank flex positions

  9. Unclip the twist grip position sensor harness connector from the fuel tank bracket.
  10. Twist Grip Position Sensor LG1 (ckyk)
    1. Twist grip position sensor main harness connector

    2. Twist grip position sensor connector

  11. Release and discard the two fixings and remove the immobiliser module from its bracket.
  12. Immobiliser_1 (ckum)
    1. Immobiliser module

    2. Fixings

  13. Release the three fixings and remove the immobiliser bracket from the frame. Allow to rest to one side.
  14. Immobiliser Bracket_1 (ckul)
    1. Immobiliser bracket

    2. Fixings

  15. Unclip the left hand switch housing connector A (2) and the right hand switch housing connector (1) from the fuel tank.
  16. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  17. Fuel Tank LH Connections (ckuc)
    1. Right hand switch housing connector

    2. Left hand switch housing connector A

    3. Left hand switch housing connector B

    4. Fuse box 2

    5. Ignition switch connector

  18. Release the two fixings and remove the harness bracket from the frame and allow to rest to one side.
  19. Fuel Tank LH Bracket (ckub)
    1. Fixings

    2. Harness bracket

  20. Remove the two front fixings and flanged sleeves from the fuel tank.
  21. Fuel Tank Front Fixings (ckty)
    1. Fixing (right hand side shown)

    2. Flanged sleeve

  22. Remove the lower fuel tank bracket fixings.
  23. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper fuel tank bracket fixings.
  24. Fuel tank rear bracket (ckue)
    1. Upper bracket fixing (left hand side shown)

    2. Lower bracket fixing (left hand side shown)

    3. Fuel tank rear bracket

  25. Tilt the fuel tank and bracket assembly rearwards to allow access to the fuel tank electrical connectors and hoses.
  26. Fuel Pump Connectors (cktw)
    1. Fuel level sensor electrical connector

    2. Fuel pump electrical connector

    3. Fuel tank

    4. Fuel hose

  27. Disconnect the fuel pump and fuel level sensor electrical connectors.
  28. warning
    If the fuel rail is dismantled without first reducing pressure, fuel may escape causing clothing and components to be coated with fuel.This would represent a serious fire hazard which could lead to burn injuries and damage to property.
    note
    Because fuel stored in the fuel rail will be at 3.5 bar pressure, it is essential that the fuel pressure is reduced before any dismantling of the fuel rail takes place. To reduce pressure, briefly crank the engine with the fuel pump disconnected.When disconnected, the fuel tank is self-sealing but a small amount of fuel may dribble from the hose.
  29. Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  30. Have an assistant reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first, and crank the engine to reduce pressure in the fuel rail.
  31. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
  32. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  33. Ease the latch away from the connector until the release buttons are exposed.
  34. Fuel line double check clip cekp_1
    1. Locked position

    2. Unlocked position

  35. Disconnect the fuel hose by squeezing the sides of the connector and pulling the hose free from its spigot on the fuel pump plate.
  36. note
    Before disconnection, note the position of the two breather hoses so that they can be returned to the same locations when refitting the tank.
  37. Disconnect the two breather hoses from near the rear of the fuel tank and note their position for installation.
  38. Remove the upper bracket fixings and remove the fuel tank and bracket assembly from the motorcycle.
  39. If required, remove the pivot fixings and remove the bracket from the fuel tank. Discard the lock nut.
  40. note
    If fitting a new fuel tank, the barrel lock must be removed from the original fuel cap and fitted to the new one (see Fuel Cap Lock - Removal, Fuel Cap Lock - Installation).

Fuel Tank - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Fuel Tank Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, assemble the fuel tank bracket to the fuel tank and secure with a bolt and new lock nut. Tighten the lock nut to 8 Nm.
  2. Align the fuel tank and bracket assembly to the frame and loosely fit the two upper bracket fixings.
  3. Fuel tank rear bracket_upperfixing (ckud)
    1. Fuel tank bracket

    2. Bracket upper fixing (right hand side shown)

  4. Tilt the fuel tank rearwards and refit the breather hoses as noted during removal.
  5. Refit the fuel pump and fuel level sensor electrical connectors.
  6. note
    The fuel hose has different coloured connectors on each end, to aid orientation. The grey end must be fitted to the fuel tank, the orange end must be fitted to the fuel rails.
  7. Reconnect the fuel feed hose by gently pushing inwards until the hose engages with a click.
  8. Slide the double check latch down (towards the spigot) until the release buttons are covered. If the latch will not slide into position, then the fuel hose is not fully home on its spigot and must therefore be refitted correctly.
  9. Fuel Pump Connectors (cktw)
    1. Fuel level sensor electrical connector

    2. Fuel pump electrical connector

    3. Fuel tank

    4. Fuel hose

  10. Lower the fuel tank and align the two front fixing holes.
  11. Install the two front fixings and flanged sleeves. Tighten to 9 Nm.
  12. Fuel Tank Front Fixings (ckty)
    1. Fixing (right hand side shown)

    2. Flanged sleeve

  13. Loosely fit the two lower bracket fixings.
  14. Tighten the right hand side upper bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
  15. Tighten the right hand side lower bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
  16. Tighten the left hand side upper bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
  17. Tighten the left hand side lower bracket fixing to 12 Nm.
  18. Fuel tank rear bracket (ckue)
    1. Upper bracket fixing (left hand side shown)

    2. Lower bracket fixing (left hand side shown)

    3. Fuel tank rear bracket

  19. Refit the harness bracket to the frame with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
  20. Fuel Tank LH Bracket (ckub)
    1. Fixings

    2. Harness bracket

  21. Reclip the left hand switch housing connector A (2) and the right hand switch housing connector (1) to the fuel tank.
  22. Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  23. Fuel Tank LH Connections (ckuc)
    1. Right hand switch housing connector

    2. Left hand switch housing connector A

    3. Left hand switch housing connector B

    4. Fuse box 2

    5. Ignition switch connector

  24. Refit the immobiliser bracket to the frame with three fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
  25. Immobiliser Bracket_1 (ckul)
    1. Immobiliser bracket

    2. Fixings

  26. Refit the immobiliser module with two new fixings and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
  27. Immobiliser_1 (ckum)
    1. Immobiliser module

    2. Fixings

  28. Reattach the twist grip position sensor harness connector to the fuel tank bracket.
  29. Twist Grip Position Sensor LG1 (ckyk)
    1. Twist grip position sensor main harness connector

    2. Twist grip position sensor connector

  30. Flex the fuel tank bodywork sides out slightly at the positions shown below and refit the fuel tank bodywork to the fuel tank.
  31. LG1 Fuel Tank Flex

    Fuel tank flex positions

  32. Install the two front fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
  33. Fuel Tank Front Fixings (cktx)
    1. Front fixings

  34. Refit the two bodywork side fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
  35. Refit the fuel tank bodywork rear fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
  36. Fuel Tank Rear Fixing (ckuf)
    1. Fuel tank bodywork

    2. Rear fixing

    3. Side fixing (right hand side shown)

  37. Make sure the clips and rubber grommet are fitted and install the ignition barrel shroud to the front of the fuel tank.
  38. Fuel Tank Front Panel_1 (cktz)
    1. Ignition barrel shroud

  39. Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, refill the fuel tank with the fuel previously removed.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Check for Fuel Leaks

  • Start the engine and check carefully for fuel leaks. Rectify as necessary.

Seat - Install L Series

Fuel Pressure Checking

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.

Fuel pressure is checked using service tool T3880001.

Fuel Pressure Checking 3880001

T3880001 - Fuel Pressure Gauge

  1. Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Removal) and place on a suitable support, close to the motorcycle.
  2. Using the service tool T3880123, carefully connect the fuel pump connection on the main harness to the fuel tank.
  3. Select the fuel pressure gauge adapter marked B from service tool T3880001.
  4. warning
    Always use the correct fuel pressure gauge adapter. Use of an incorrect adapter will result in a fuel leak. A fuel leak can result in a fire causing damage to property and injury to persons.
  5. Connect the adapter hose to the fuel pump plate outlet as shown in the illustration below.
  6. Throttle Body Balancing cdve_3
    1. Adaptor hose B

    2. Fuel pump plate outlet

    3. T3880123 - Extension Cable

  7. Connect the fuel hose to the adaptor hose.
  8. Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the adaptor hose as shown below by pushing the gauge spigot into the adapter until a click can be heard.
  9. Fuel Pressure Checking cdvr_2
    1. Adaptor hose

    2. Fuel pressure gauge

    note
    To release the fuel pressure gauge from the adapter, slide the outer ferrule downwards. This will allow the gauge to spring upwards from the adapter.
  10. Ensure the gauge is visible to the side of the motorcycle.
  11. Temporarily reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the terminals to 4.5 Nm.
  12. Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure reading on the gauge.
  13. note
    The fuel pressure should be 3.5 bar nominally.
  14. When fuel pressure checking is complete, disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
  15. Disconnect the fuel pressure gauge adapter and wiring extension.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Fuel Cap Lock - Removal

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

A new filler cap is supplied without the barrel lock. Therefore, the barrel in the original filler cap will need to be removed and fitted to the filler cap.

  1. Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Removal).
  2. Drain the fuel tank into a suitable fuel proof container.
  3. Open the fuel cap on the original fuel tank.
  4. Remove the screws shown in the illustration below, then remove the fuel filler cap.
  5. Fuel Filler Cap LG1 (cfls_2)
    1. Screws

    2. Filler cap

    note
    When removing the lock housing and sealing ring, the four sealing ring springs will become loose.Note the position and orientation of the lock housing, sealing ring and springs for installation.
  6. Remove the screws, then carefully remove the lock housing and sealing ring from the fuel cap and collect the four springs.
  7. Fuel Filler Cap LG1 (cflk_2)
    1. Screws

    2. Lock housing

    3. Sealing ring

  8. Remove the O-ring from the fuel cap.
  9. Filler cap lock barrel O-ring (cfll)
    1. O-ring

  10. Remove the two washers (one washer is behind the other).
  11. Filler cap lock barrel shims (cflm)
    1. Washers

  12. Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver, release the locking device for the barrel lock and push the barrel out of the fuel cap.
  13. Filler cap lock barrel retainer (cfln.svg)
    1. Locking device

    2. Barrel lock

  14. If still attached, remove the barrel lock seal.
  15. Filler cap lock barrel (cflo.svg)
    1. Seal

    2. Barrel lock

Fuel Cap Lock - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Insert the key into the barrel lock.
  2. Key in Lock Barrel (cflp_2)
    1. Key

    2. Barrel lock

  3. Align the locking device on the barrel to the small slot in the upper left hand side of the housing, as indicated in the illustration below.
  4. Fuel Lock Barrel (cflq_3)
    1. Slot

    2. Housing

    3. Locking device

  5. Push the barrel lock half way into the fuel cap.
  6. Turn the lock clockwise until the key is vertical in the fuel cap.
  7. key in barrel_fuel cap (ckwa)
    note
    An audible click can be heard when the lock is pushed fully into the fuel cap.
  8. Push the barrel fully into the fuel cap.
  9. Fit the two washers to the fuel cap.
  10. Fit the O-ring to the fuel cap.
  11. Fit the lock housing, sealing ring and springs as noted during removal and secure with the screws.
  12. Test the lock for normal operation.
  13. Fit the filler cap to the fuel tank and secure with the screws shown in the illustration below. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm.
  14. Fuel Filler Cap LG1 (cfls_2)
    1. Screws

    2. Filler cap

  15. Fit the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank - Installation).
  16. Refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.

Fuel Pump Assembly - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.
note
The fuel pump and fuel filter is a sealed for life unit and must be replaced as a complete assembly.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

  • Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, drain the fuel from the fuel tank.

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

  1. Invert the fuel tank and place on a protective surface to prevent paint damage.
  2. Remove the fixings securing the fuel pump mounting plate to the fuel tank.
  3. Fuel Pump Plate (chxo_5)
    1. Mounting plate

    2. Fixings

  4. Lift the fuel pump assembly and manoeuvre it from the fuel tank aperture.
  5. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector and remove the fuel pump and filter assembly.
  6. Fuel Pump and Filter Assembly - Removal cegz
    1. Fuel level sensor electrical connector

  7. Noting its orientation, remove and discard the sealing ring from the fuel pump assembly.
  8. Fuel pump sealing ring ccxh_1
    1. Fuel pump assembly

    2. Sealing ring location

Fuel Pump Assembly - Installation

  1. Install a new sealing ring into the fuel pump assembly, with the seal lip facing uppermost, and ensure that it is correctly seated.
  2. Fuel pump sealing ring - Installation cdva
    1. Sealing ring

    2. Seal lip

  3. Taking care to ensure the sealing ring is not damaged or dislodged, manoeuvre the fuel pump assembly into the fuel tank aperture.
  4. Reconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector and locate the fuel pump and filter assembly.
  5. Ensure the locating peg on the fuel pump assembly is located in the cut out on the mounting plate and the offset hole is positioned as shown below.
  6. Fuel Pump Plate (chxo_4)
    1. Offset hole position

    2. Locating peg

  7. In the sequence shown below, tighten the mounting plate fixings to 9 Nm.
  8. Fuel Pump Plate Sequence (chxo_3)

    Pump Mounting Plate Torque Sequence

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

  • Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling, refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained earlier.

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Fuel Level Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.
note
The fuel level sensor is located inside the fuel tank on the right hand side.Access to the fuel level sensor is through the aperture for the fuel pump.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Press the three locking tabs inwards to remove fuel level sensor from the bracket.
  2. LG1 Fuel Level Sender
    1. Bracket (inside fuel tank)

    2. Locking tabs

  3. Carefully manoeuvre the fuel level sensor out of the fuel tank.

Fuel Level Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.
  1. Align the three locking tabs into the holes in the bracket and push to secure.
  2. Make sure the fuel level sensor is held securely.
  3. LG1 Fuel Level Sender
    1. Bracket (inside fuel tank)

    2. Locking tabs

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Airbox - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the two rear fixings and flanged sleeves.
  2. Airbox Rear Fixing_1 (ckvq)
    1. Airbox

    2. Fixings

  3. Loosen the clamp at the front of the airbox.
  4. Airbox Clamp_1 (ckvn)
    1. Airbox

    2. Clamp

  5. Move the airbox rearwards and upwards and remove the breather hose and secondary air injection hose from the front of the airbox.
  6. Remove the airbox. Note the position of the rubber seal and clamp for installation.

Airbox - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Make sure the blank is fitted to the underside of the airbox and the clip is positioned towards the centreline.
  2. Airbox Spigot LG1; LGX
    1. Airbox

    2. Blank

    3. Clip

  3. Make sure the rubber seal and clamp are fitted to the airbox as noted during removal.
  4. Position the airbox to the motorcycle and refit the secondary air injection hose and breather hose to the airbox.
  5. Push the airbox forwards on to the throttle body and align the two rear fixing holes.
  6. Install the two rear fixings and flanged sleeves and tighten to 6 Nm.
  7. Airbox Rear Fixing_1 (ckvq)
    1. Airbox

    2. Fixings

  8. Tighten the airbox clamp to 1.5 Nm.
  9. Airbox Clamp_1 (ckvn)
    1. Airbox

    2. Clamp

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Air Filter - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the nine fixings and separate the airbox upper from the airbox.
  2. Airbox Top_1 (ckvs)
    1. Airbox upper

    2. Fixings

  3. Remove the air filter from the airbox.
  4. Air Filter_1 (ckvp)
    1. Air filter

    2. Seal

    3. Airbox

Air Filter - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Install the air filter into the airbox.
  2. Check the condition of the seal and, if necessary, replace.
  3. Air Filter_1 (ckvp)
    1. Air filter

    2. Seal

    3. Airbox

  4. Fit the airbox upper to the airbox and secure with nine fixings. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
  5. Airbox Top_1 (ckvs)
    1. Airbox upper

    2. Fixings

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Throttle Body - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

  1. Disconnect the throttle actuator motor multiplug.
  2. Throttle Body_1 (ckvx)
    1. Throttle body

    2. Throttle actuator motor multiplug

    3. Fixings

  3. Remove the four fixings and washers securing the throttle body to the inlet manifold and remove the throttle body.
  4. Remove and discard the inlet manifold seal.

Throttle Body - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting

caution
Never use lubricants when fitting throttle bodies onto transition pieces, evaporative hoses (EVAP) or manifold absolute pressure hoses (MAP) on to spigots.When dried, the lubricant may block spigots and/or restrictors. A blocked spigot and/or restrictor will cause the engine to operate inefficiently, and a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) to be recorded.
  1. Ensure the mating surfaces of the throttle body and inlet manifold are clean.
  2. Fit a new seal to the inlet manifold.
  3. Throttle body seal_1 (ckvy)
    1. Inlet manifold

    2. Seal

  4. Install the throttle body to the inlet manifold and secure with four fixings and washers. tighten to 8 Nm.
  5. Connect the multiplug to the throttle actuator motor.
  6. Throttle Body_1 (ckvx)
    1. Throttle body

    2. Throttle actuator motor multiplug

    3. Fixings

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Inlet Manifold - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Purge Valve - Remove L Series

Inlet Manifold Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Unclip the harness from the inlet manifold moulding, noting the routing of the harness and the position of the clips for installation.
  2. Remove the MAP sensor hose and purge valve hose from the inlet manifold moulding.
  3. Inlet Manifold LG1_1 (ckxx)
    1. MAP sensor hose

    2. Inlet manifold moulding

    3. Purge valve hose

  4. Remove the three fixings and remove the fuel rail assembly from the inlet manifold.
  5. Disconnect the intake air temperature sensor from the engine sub harness.
  6. Remove the intake air temperature sensor from the inlet manifold moulding.
  7. Remove the tie bar fixing from the inlet manifold moulding.
  8. Inlet Manifold Lower LG1_1 (ckxy)
    1. Tie bar fixing

    2. Inlet manifold moulding

    3. Intake air temperature sensor

  9. Remove the six fixings and remove the inlet manifold moulding. Discard the three seals.
  10. Inlet manifold moulding fixings LG1 (ckyr_1)
    1. Inlet manifold moulding

    2. Fixings

  11. Remove the four fixings and remove the inlet manifold casting from the cylinder head. Discard the three seals.
  12. Inlet manifold casting fixings LG1 (ckyq_1)
    1. Inlet manifold casting

    2. Fixings

Inlet Manifold - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Inlet Manifold Install LG1; LGX

  1. Install new seals to the inlet manifold casting and fit the casting to the cylinder head. Refit the fixings and tighten to 8 Nm in the sequence shown below. Tighten the fixings a second time in the same sequence to 8 Nm.
  2. Inlet manifold casting sequence LG1 (ckyq)

    Inlet manifold casting tightening sequence

  3. Make sure the mating faces of the inlet manifold casting and inlet manifold moulding are clean and free from debris.
  4. Install new seals to the inlet manifold moulding and refit the moulding to the inlet manifold casting. Tighten the fixings 8 Nm to in the sequence shown below.
  5. Inlet manifold moulding sequence LG1 (ckyr)

    Inlet manifold moulding tightening sequence

  6. Retighten fixings 1 and 2 to 8 Nm.
  7. Install the tie bar fixing and tighten to 8 Nm.
  8. Check the condition of the intake air temperature sensor rubber washer and replace if necessary.
  9. Make sure the threads of the intake air temperature sensor are clean and apply Threebond 1360.
  10. Install the intake air temperature sensor to the inlet manifold moulding and tighten to 1 Nm.
  11. Reconnect the intake air temperature sensor to the engine subharness.
  12. Inlet Manifold Lower LG1_1 (ckxy)
    1. Tie bar fixing

    2. Inlet manifold moulding

    3. Intake air temperature sensor

  13. Refit the fuel rail assembly to the inlet manifold casting and tighten the fixings to 4 Nm.
  14. If the restrictor in the MAP hose has been removed, refit the restrictor (see Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Hose Restrictor).
  15. Reconnect the MAP sensor hose and purge valve hose to the inlet manifold moulding.
  16. Inlet Manifold LG1_1 (ckxx)
    1. MAP sensor hose

    2. Inlet manifold moulding

    3. Purge valve hose

  17. Reclip the harness to the inlet manifold moulding as noted during removal.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Purge Valve - Install L Series

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Secondary Air Injection

Secondary Air System - Description (ckyb_1)

System Purpose and Operation

The secondary air injection system is an aid to reducing levels of pollutants in the exhaust gases. It does this by introducing a small amount of air into each exhaust port as the exhaust valve opens. The introduced air helps promote further combustion of the fuel mixture in the exhaust system after it has left the combustion chamber.

At certain specific engine speeds (determined by the factory programming of the engine management system), the secondary air injection control valve is opened by the ECM and allows an air feed into the secondary air system where, each time a pair of exhaust valves open, the exhaust gases in the exhaust port create a depression which causes reed valves in the secondary air injection system to open. When open, the depression in the exhaust port draws air from the control valve, through the open reed valves, into the exhaust port. This air promotes secondary combustion of the exhaust gases in the ports and the header system.

At other engine speeds, the system is disabled by closing the control valve in the system. This allows an oxygen sensor to control air to fuel ratios. If air was fed to the exhaust system when the oxygen sensor was operational, the incoming air would cause inaccuracies in the readings sensed by the oxygen sensor (which requires access to raw combustion gases) which would lead to rough running.

Secondary Air Injection Solenoid Valve - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Release the hoses attached to the valve.
  2. Disconnect the solenoid valve multiplug.
  3. SAI Removal (ckuz)

    Harness shown removed for clarity

    1. Solenoid valve

    2. Reed valve cover fixings

    3. Solenoid valve bracket

    4. ABS modulator bracket

    5. Reed valve covers

  4. Gently pull the valve to detach it from the bracket.

Secondary Air Injection Solenoid Valve - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the solenoid valve to the bracket.
  2. Reconnect the multiplug.
  3. Refit the hoses to the valve.
SAI Removal (ckuz)

Harness shown removed for clarity

  1. Solenoid valve

  2. Reed valve fixings

  3. Solenoid valve bracket

  4. ABS modulator bracket

  5. Reed valves

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

ABS Modulator - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Release the spring clips and detach the secondary air injection feed hoses from the reed valves on the camshaft cover.
  2. note
    Note that the mounting bracket for the secondary air injection solenoid valve is secured by the fixings for the left hand reed valve cover. The ABS mounting bracket is secured by the fixings for the right hand reed valve cover.
  3. Release the bolts securing the valve covers to the camshaft cover.
  4. SAI Removal (ckuz)

    Harness shown removed for clarity

    1. Solenoid valve

    2. Reed valve cover fixings

    3. Solenoid valve bracket

    4. ABS modulator bracket

    5. Reed valve covers

  5. Ease the valve covers from the valves.
  6. Detach the valves from the camshaft cover.
  7. Remove reeds cdqz_2
    1. Reed valves

Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Inspection

  1. Check for cracks, bending or other damage to the reed valves. Replace as necessary.
  2. Check for cracks or other damage to the reed valve limiting plates. Replace as necessary.
  3. Clean any carbon build up on the reed valve assemblies, reed valve cover and the camshaft cover.
  4. Check for damage to the seal areas on the reed valve assemblies. Replace as necessary.
  5. Make sure the reed valve limiting plates are fitted as shown in the illustration below.
  6. Reed valve inspection clcu
    1. Reed valve limiting plates

    2. Reed valves

Secondary Air Injection Reed Valves - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit the reed valves to the camshaft cover.
  2. Remove reeds cdqz_2
    1. Reed valves

  3. Refit the valve covers, and the brackets for the secondary air injection solenoid and ABS modulator, as noted for removal. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
  4. SAI Removal (ckuz)

    Harness shown removed for clarity

    1. Solenoid valve

    2. Reed valve cover fixings

    3. Solenoid valve bracket

    4. ABS modulator bracket

    5. Reed valve covers

  5. Refit the secondary air injection feed hoses to the reed valves.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

ABS Modulator - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Hose Restrictor

note
Do not use P80 lubricant on the restrictor or MAP hose.

The MAP hose restrictor is fitted to the flared end (inlet manifold end) of the MAP hose to the depth shown.

MAP Hose Restrictor (L_1 MAP Restrictor)
  1. MAP hose

  2. Restrictor

Removal and Installation - Engine Management Components

Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Engine ECM Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Note the position and routing of the harness.
  2. Release the diagnostic connector from its locating tang.
  3. Remove the starter solenoid from the engine ECM tray and rest to one side.
  4. Release the fixing and remove the ambient air pressure sensor and rest to one side.
  5. Tilt the alarm electrical connector towards the rear and slide rearwards to release from the battery tray.
  6. Unclip the rear light connector from the battery tray.
  7. Disconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
  8. Remove the two relay blocks and rest to one side, noting the position of each block for installation. The rear block has blue tape to identify.
  9. Remove the fuse box from the engine ECM tray.
  10. LG1 Underseat_1 (ckxh)
    1. Accessory USB connector

    2. Relays

    3. Ambient air pressure sensor

    4. Rear light connector

    5. Alarm connector

    6. Fuse box

    7. Fall detection switch

    8. Starter solenoid

  11. Move the harness and seat lock cables clear of the engine ECM tray, noting their position for installation.
  12. Unclip the accessory USB connector from the engine ECM tray.
  13. Release the two fixings and raise the engine ECM tray from the battery tray. Unclip the ECM tray from the rear and remove from the battery tray.
  14. Disconnect the three engine ECM harness connectors and remove the engine ECM.

Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Engine ECM Install LG1; LGX

  1. Install the engine ECM and reconnect the three electrical connectors.
  2. Refit the engine ECM tray with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
  3. LG1 Battery Tray_1 (ckxg)

    Harness not shown for clarity

    1. Engine ECM tray

    2. Rear fixing

    3. Centre fixings

    4. Engine ECM tray fixings

    5. Side fixings

    6. Battery tray

  4. Reroute the harness and seat lock cable over the engine ECM tray as noted during removal.
  5. Reclip the accessory USB connector to the engine ECM tray.
  6. Refit the fuse box to the engine ECM tray.
  7. Refit the relay blocks to the engine ECM tray in the positions as noted during removal.
  8. Reconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
  9. Refit the starter solenoid to the battery tray.
  10. Reclip the alarm and rear light connectors to the battery tray.
  11. Refit the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
  12. LG1 Underseat_1 (ckxh)
    1. Accessory USB connector

    2. Relays

    3. Ambient air pressure sensor

    4. Rear light connector

    5. Alarm connector

    6. Fuse box

    7. Fall detection switch

    8. Starter solenoid

  13. Refit the diagnostic connector to its locating tang.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Immobiliser Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove and discard the rear fixing from the ABS modulator bracket.
  2. ABS Modulator_1 (ckuq)
    1. ABS modulator

    2. ABS modulator multiplug

    3. ABS modulator rear fixing

    4. Brake line unions

  3. Remove and discard the two fixings and remove the ABS modulator and bracket assembly from the frame.
  4. ABS Modulator_front fixings_1 (ckus)
    1. Fixings

    2. ABS modulator bracket

  5. Manoeuvre the ABS modulator to the left hand side to gain access to the immobiliser electrical connector.
  6. Unclip the immobiliser electrical connector from the ABS modulator bracket.
  7. Disconnect the immobiliser from the main harness. Feed the harness through the frame, noting the routing for installation.
  8. Immobiliser Connector LG1
    1. Immobiliser electrical connector

    2. ABS modulator

  9. Remove the two fixings and remove the immobiliser/TPMS module.
  10. Immobiliser_1 (ckum)
    1. Immobiliser

    2. Fixings

Immobiliser Control Module - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Immobiliser Install LG1; LGX

  1. Route the immobiliser harness through the frame as noted during removal.
  2. Secure the immobiliser with two fixings and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
  3. Reconnect the immobiliser to the main harness.
  4. Immobiliser Connector LG1
    1. Immobiliser electrical connector

    2. ABS modulator

  5. Make sure the two rubber grommets are fitted to the frame and one is fitted to the ABS modulator bracket.
  6. Align the ABS modulator and bracket to the frame and secure with two flanged sleeves and two new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
  7. ABS Modulator_front fixings_1 (ckus)
    1. Fixings

    2. ABS modulator bracket

  8. Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
  9. ABS Modulator_1 (ckuq)
    1. ABS modulator

    2. ABS modulator multiplug

    3. ABS modulator rear fixing

    4. Brake line unions

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Twist Grip - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Handlebar End Weights - Removal L Series

    note
    The anti-tamper fixings on the twist grip housing must not be loosened or removed.If the anti-tamper screws have been loosened or removed any warranty claims for the twist grip housing will not be honoured.
  1. Release the fixings and remove the clamp for the twist grip housing from the handlebar.
  2. Twist grip clamp L0422
    1. Anti-tamper fixings

    2. Fixings

    note
    Note the position and orientation of the twist grip to its housing for installation.
  3. Slide the twist grip assembly off the handlebar.

Twist Grip - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Slide the twist grip onto the handlebar and align it to the twist grip position sensor as noted for removal.
  2. Fit the twist grip clamp. Ensure the locating lug fits into its hole on the handlebar.
  3. Twist grip clamp alignment L0421
    1. Locating lug

    2. Hole

    3. Twist grip clamp

  4. Fit and fixings and tighten, upper one first, to 2.5 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Handlebar End Weights - Installation L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Twist Grip Position Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank Bodywork Remove LG1; LGX

Twist Grip - Removal L Series

Twist Grip Position Sensor Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Detach the twist grip position sensor connection from the right hand side of the fuel tank.
  2. Disconnect the twist grip position sensor from the main harness.
  3. Twist Grip Position Sensor LG1 (ckyk)
    1. Twist grip position sensor main harness connector

    2. Twist grip position sensor connector

    note
    Note the routing of the twist grip harness for installation.
  4. Remove the rubber band that secures the right hand switch cube harness, right hand side front direction indicator harness and twist grip position sensor harness. Note its position for installation.
  5. Route the twist grip harness out of the frame to the twist grip.
  6. note
    Note the orientation of the twist grip position sensor for installation.
  7. Slide the twist grip position sensor off the handlebar.

Twist Grip Position Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Twist Grip Position Sensor Install LG1; LGX

  1. Slide the twist grip position sensor onto the handlebar in the orientation noted for removal.
  2. Route the twist grip harness to the main harness as noted for removal.
  3. Connect the harness to the main harness then attach the connector to its bracket on the fuel tank.
  4. Twist Grip Position Sensor LG1 (ckyk)
    1. Twist grip position sensor main harness connector

    2. Twist grip position sensor connector

  5. Refit the rubber band around the right hand switch cube harness, right hand side front direction indicator harness and twist grip position sensor harness as noted during removal.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Twist Grip - Installation L Series

Fuel Tank Bodywork Install LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

note
The intake air temperature sensor harness is identified by red tape.
  1. Press the wire locking device fully in and disconnect the harness from the intake air temperature sensor.
  2. Remove the intake air temperature sensor from the inlet manifold moulding.
  3. Air Temp Sensor LG1 (ckye)
    1. Intake air temperature sensor

    2. Electrical connector

    3. Red tape identifier

Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
The intake air temperature sensor harness is identified by red tape.
  1. Check the condition of the rubber washer and replace if necessary.
  2. Make sure the threads of the sensor are clean and apply Threebond 1360.
  3. Install the intake air temperature sensor to the inlet manifold moulding and tighten to 1 Nm.
  4. Refit the harness to the intake air temperature sensor.
  5. Air Temp Sensor LG1 (ckye)
    1. Intake air temperature sensor

    2. Electrical connector

    3. Red tape identifier

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Coolant Temperature Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

Throttle Body - RemoveLG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1; LL2

Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Coolant Temperature Sensor Remove - LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Disconnect the coolant temperature sensor from the main harness, noting its routing in between ignition coil 1 and injector 1 harness connector.
  2. Coolant Temp Sensor Harness LG1_1 (ckyf)
    1. Ignition coil 1

    2. Coolant temperature harness connector

    3. Injector 1 harness connector

  3. Disconnect the bypass hose from the cylinder head spigot.
  4. Remove the rubber cover and using a suitable 19 mm slotted socket, remove the coolant temperature sensor from the cylinder head, noting the routing of the harness for installation.
  5. Coolant Temp Sensor LG1_1 (ckyg)
    1. Bypass hose

    2. Coolant temperature sensor

Coolant Temperature Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit the coolant temperature sensor into the cylinder head and tighten to 18 Nm and route the harness as noted during removal. Refit the rubber cover.
  2. Refit the bypass hose to the cylinder head spigot.
  3. Coolant Temp Sensor LG1_1 (ckyg)
    1. Bypass hose

    2. Coolant temperature sensor

  4. Reconnect the coolant temperature sensor to the main harness, routing the harness as noted during removal.
  5. Coolant Temp Sensor Harness LG1_1 (ckyf)
    1. Ignition coil 1

    2. Coolant temperature harness connector

    3. Injector 1 harness connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

  1. Release the fixing and detach the MAP sensor from the bracket.
  2. Disconnect the map sensor multiplug and the MAP sensor hose. Remove the MAP sensor.
  3. MAP Sensor LG1 (ckyj)
    1. MAP sensor

    2. Fixing

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Reconnect the MAP sensor multiplug.
  2. Refit the MAP sensor hose to the MAP sensor.
  3. Fit the sensor to the bracket, tightening the fixing to 5 Nm.
  4. MAP Sensor LG1 (ckyj)
    1. MAP sensor

    2. Fixing

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Ambient Air Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Release the fixing securing the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray.
  2. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the sensor.
  3. Air Pressure LG1 (ckyd)
    1. Ambient air pressure sensor

    2. Fixing

    3. Electrical connector

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Ambient Air Install LG1; LGX

  1. Reconnect the electrical connector to the ambient air pressure sensor.
  2. Fit the sensor to the battery tray and tighten its fixing to 3 Nm.
  3. Air Pressure LG1 (ckyd)
    1. Ambient air pressure sensor

    2. Fixing

    3. Electrical connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Fall Detection Switch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

  1. Remove and discard the fixings securing the fall detection switch to the engine ECM tray.
  2. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fall detection switch.
  3. Fall Detect LG1 (ckyh)
    1. Fall detection switch

    2. Fixings

    3. Electrical connector

Fall Detection Switch - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Connect the electrical connector to the fall detection switch.
  2. Fit the fall detection switch to the engine ECM tray and tighten the new fixings to 3 Nm.
  3. Fall Detect LG1 (ckyh)
    1. Fall detection switch

    2. Fixings

    3. Electrical connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Gear Position Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series

note
The gear position sensor electrical connection is situated in between the crankcase and the alternator regulator/rectifier.
  1. Disconnect the gear position sensor from the main harness.
  2. Remove the fixings and remove the gear position sensor.
  3. Gear Position Sensor LG1 (ckyi)
    1. Gear position sensor

    2. Fixings

Gear Position Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Refit the gear position sensor and tighten the fixings to 5 Nm.
  2. Gear Position Sensor LG1 (ckyi)
    1. Gear position sensor

    2. Fixings

    note
    The gear position sensor electrical connection is situated in between the crankcase and the alternator regulator/rectifier.
  3. Reconnect the gear position sensor to the main harness.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Crankshaft Position Sensor

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The alternator stator and crankshaft position sensor are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Removal and Installation - Exhaust System Components

Exhaust System - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Hot Exhaust

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust components may be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot components may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, always allow the hot parts to cool before working on the exhaust system.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Radiator - Remove L Series

  1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor from the main harness and remove the rubber bands. Note the routing of the harness and position of the rubber bands for installation.
  2. O2 Sensor Connection LG1 (ckys_1)
    1. Oxygen sensor electrical connector

    2. Rubber band

    3. Coolant tee piece

  3. If required, remove the oxygen sensor from the exhaust.
  4. O2 Sensor LG1 (ckyt)
    1. Oxygen sensor

  5. Support the exhaust and remove the two rear fixings and washers.
  6. Exhaust Rear LG1 (ckyn)

    Right hand side shown, left hand side similar

    1. Fixing

    2. Washer

  7. Remove and discard the six header lock nuts.
  8. Header Lock Nuts LG1 (ckyp)
    1. Exhaust header

    2. Lock nuts

  9. Lower the rear of the exhaust and then remove the exhaust from the cylinder head. Collect the flanged sleeves from the rear mounts.

Exhaust System - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
caution
Do not install the exhaust system or run the engine without the exhaust heat shields fitted. Components protected by the exhaust heat shields may suffer severe damage or a fire if the motorcycle is operated without the heat shields being fitted.
  1. Align the exhaust with the cylinder head and loosely fit six lock nuts.
  2. Header Lock Nuts LG1 (ckyp)
    1. Exhaust header

    2. Lock nuts

  3. Make sure the flanged sleeves and grommets are fitted to the two rear exhaust mounts.
  4. Fit the exhaust to the two rear mounts and secure with two fixings and two washers.
  5. Exhaust Rear LG1 (ckyn)

    Right hand side shown, left hand side similar

    1. Fixing

    2. Washer

  6. Tighten the cylinder head lock nuts to 15 Nm in the sequence shown below.
  7. Exhaust header tightening sequence

    Exhaust Header Tightening Sequence

  8. Tighten the two rear mount fixings to 19 Nm.
  9. If required, refit the oxygen sensor to the exhaust and tighten to 25 Nm.
  10. O2 Sensor LG1 (ckyt)
    1. Oxygen sensor

  11. Reroute the oxygen sensor harness as noted during removal and reconnect to the main harness.
  12. Secure the oxygen harness to the coolant hose with two rubber bands.
  13. O2 Sensor Connection LG1 (ckys_1)
    1. Oxygen sensor electrical connector

    2. Rubber band

    3. Coolant tee piece

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Radiator - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Caution - Hot Exhaust

caution
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust components can be hot.Always allow the hot components to cool before working on the exhaust system.Contact with the hot components could cause minor to moderate burns to exposed skin.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Removal - LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor from the main harness and remove the rubber bands. Note the position of the rubber bands for installation.
  2. O2 Sensor Connection LG1 (ckys_1)
    1. Oxygen sensor electrical connector

    2. Rubber band

    3. Coolant tee piece

  3. Remove the oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust header.
  4. O2 Sensor LG1 (ckyt)
    1. Oxygen sensor

Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Oxygen Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Installation - LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Insert the oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 1 into the exhaust header. Tighten to 25 Nm.
  2. O2 Bank 1 sensor 1_TP0518
    1. Oxygen sensor bank sensor 1

  3. Reroute the oxygen sensor harness as noted during removal and reconnect to the main harness.
  4. Secure the oxygen harness to the coolant hose with two rubber bands.
  5. O2 Sensor Connection LG1 (ckys_1)
    1. Oxygen sensor electrical connector

    2. Rubber band

    3. Coolant tee piece

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Evaporative System Components

Evaporative Emissions Control System

Certain Markets Only

Some models in certain markets are fitted with a system to control the evaporation of fuel vapour to the atmosphere.

A carbon filled canister absorbs vapour while the engine is not running. When the engine is started, the vapour is returned to the engine and burnt.

There are two distinct phases to the system's operation: engine off and engine running. These two conditions are explained overleaf.

Component Locations

EVAP Locations LG1

Carbon Filled Canister - under the airbox.

Purge Control Valve - attached to the bracket mounted on the inlet manifold (electronically controlled by the engine ECM).

EVAP Locations LL1

Carbon Filled Canister - attached to the rear of the fuel tank.

Purge Control Valve - attached to the bracket mounted on the left hand side fuel tank bracket (electronically controlled by the engine ECM).

EVAP System (ckym_1)
  1. Breather hose

  2. Carbon filled canister

  3. Purge valve

  4. Purge hose to inlet manifold

Evaporative Emissions Control System - Engine Off

When the engine is stationary, any pressure increase in the fuel tank due to a rise in ambient temperature will cause the fuel vapour to pass down the breather hose (1) to a carbon filled canister (2) which stores the vapour.

Once in the canister, vapour cannot enter the engine because the purge valve (3) is closed.

EVAP Engine Off (ckym_3)
  1. Breather hose

  2. Carbon filled canister

  3. Purge valve (closed)

  4. Purge hose to inlet manifold

Evaporative Emissions Control System - Engine Running

When the engine is running, a vacuum is applied to the purge hose (4) from the inlet manifold.

At certain times, the ECM opens the purge valve. The vacuum applied to the purge hose (4) now begins to draw stored vapour from the carbon filled area of the canister and returns it to the inlet manifold for burning in the engine.

In order to control the speed at which the vapour is purged from the canister, the engine management system shuttles the purge control valve between the open and closed positions.

EVAP Engine Running (ckym_2)
  1. Breather hose

  2. Carbon filled canister

  3. Purge valve (open under engine ECM control)

  4. Purge hose to inlet manifold

Evaporative Canister - Removal

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

note
Note the position, orientation and routing of all hoses connected to the evaporative cannister for installation.

EVAP Canister Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the fuel tank hose from the evaporative canister.
  2. EVAP Canister_2 (ckvu)
    1. Fuel tank hose

    2. Evaporative canister

  3. Remove and discard the cable tie securing the evaporative canister to the frame.
  4. Disconnect the purge valve hose and drain hose from the evaporative cannister.
  5. EVAP Canister_1 (ckvt)
    1. Evaporative canister

    2. Purge valve hose

    3. Drain hose

    4. Evaporative canister bracket

  6. Remove the evaporative canister from the grommet in the bracket.
  7. If required, remove the drain hose noting the routing for installation.

Evaporative Canister - Installation

Warning - General - Fuel

warning
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of fuel and fuel containers. A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel not handled or stored correctly.

Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting

caution
Never use lubricants when fitting throttle bodies onto transition pieces, evaporative hoses (EVAP) or manifold absolute pressure hoses (MAP) on to spigots.When dried, the lubricant may block spigots and/or restrictors. A blocked spigot and/or restrictor will cause the engine to operate inefficiently, and a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) to be recorded.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

EVAP Canister Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, route the drain hose as noted during removal.
  2. Make sure the purge valve hose is routed as noted during removal.
  3. Refit the evaporative canister to the bracket, aligning the spigot to the grommet. Secure the canister to the frame with a new cable tie.
  4. Refit the purge valve hose and drain hose to the evaporative canister.
  5. EVAP Canister_1 (ckvt)
    1. Evaporative canister

    2. Purge valve hose

    3. Drain hose

    4. Evaporative canister bracket

  6. Refit the fuel tank hose to the evaporative canister. Make sure the hose routes underneath the airbox fixing boss.
  7. EVAP Canister_2 (ckvu)
    1. Fuel tank hose

    2. Evaporative canister

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Purge Control Valve - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

note
Note the routing of the purge control valve fly lead for installation.Note the position of the purge control valve hoses for installation.

Purge Valve Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the purge control valve.
  2. Disconnect the evaporative canister hose and inlet manifold hose from the purge control valve.
  3. Remove the bracket fixing and remove the purge control valve and bracket from the inlet manifold.
  4. Purge Valve_1 (ckvw)
    1. Purge control valve electrical connector

    2. Purge control valve

    3. Bracket fixing

    4. Hoses

  5. If required, remove the fixing and separate the bracket from the purge valve.

Purge Control Valve - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting

caution
Never use lubricants when fitting throttle bodies onto transition pieces, evaporative hoses (EVAP) or manifold absolute pressure hoses (MAP) on to spigots.When dried, the lubricant may block spigots and/or restrictors. A blocked spigot and/or restrictor will cause the engine to operate inefficiently, and a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) to be recorded.

Purge Valve Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, position the purge control valve to its mounting bracket ensuring that the locating tab locates correctly into the bracket. Secure with the fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
  2. Position the purge control valve and mounting bracket to the inlet manifold. Secure with the fixing and tighten to 8 Nm.
  3. Connect the hoses as noted during removal.
  4. Connect the purge control valve electrical connector as noted during removal.
  5. Purge Valve_1 (ckvw)
    1. Purge control valve electrical connector

    2. Purge control valve

    3. Bracket fixing

    4. Hoses

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Evaporative Hose (EVAP) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) - Fitment

Notice - Transition Pieces, Map/ Evap Hoses - DO NOT Use Lubricants When Fitting

notice
Never use lubricants when you fit throttle bodies onto transition pieces, or evaporative (EVAP) hoses or Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) hoses onto spigots.When dried, the lubricant may block the spigots and restrictors. A blocked spigot or restrictor will cause the engine to operate inefficiently, and a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) to be recorded.

EVAP and MAP hoses fitment LG1 LGX LL1

notice
Make sure the hoses are pushed fully onto the spigots during installation.

Evaporative Hose (EVAP)

  1. Fit the EVAP hose to the right hand spigot.
  2. EVAP hose to inlet manifold ckxx_2
    1. EVAP hose

    2. Spigot housing

    3. MAP hose

    4. Inlet manifold (throttle body removed for clarity)

MAP Hoses

  1. Assemble the six components of the MAP sensor hose assembly as shown in the illustration below.
  2. MAP Hoses clhm
    1. Hose, to inlet manifold

    2. Hose, to MAP sensor

    3. Four way connector

    4. Drain hose

    5. Blanking cap

    6. Drain hose plug

  3. Check the position of the breather hose clamp. If required, reposition so the clamp lugs are pointing to the right hand side of the motorcycle.
  4. Breather hose clamp clhp
    1. Clamp

    2. Breather hose

    notice
    When fitting the MAP hose assembly to the spigot on the inlet manifold, make sure the blanking cap on the four way connector is pointing to the left hand side of the motorcycle.The hose for the MAP sensor must be from the top of the four way connector.
  5. Attach the MAP sensor and the purge valve hoses to the spigots on the inlet manifold.
  6. MAP hose to spigot clhj
    1. Hose, to inlet manifold

    2. Hose, to MAP sensor

    3. Four way connector

    4. Drain hose

    5. Blanking cap

Cooling

Exploded View - Cooling System

Exploded View - Cooling System

Coolant

Before VIN AG0784, a year-round, Hybrid Organic Acid Technology (known as Hybrid OAT or HOAT) coolant was installed in the cooling system when the motorcycle left the factory. It is coloured green, contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol based antifreeze, and has a freezing point of -35°C (-31°F).

notice
Triumph HD4X Hybrid OAT coolant must not be mixed with Triumph D2053 OAT coolant.If the Triumph HD4X Hybrid OAT coolant is drained, fully flush the cooling system through before you fill the cooling system with the Triumph D2053 OAT coolant.

From VIN AG0784, Triumph D2053 OAT coolant is installed in the cooling system when the motorcycle leaves the factory. It is coloured orange, contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol based antifreeze, and has a freezing point of -38°C (-36.4°F).

Triumph D2053 OAT coolant, as supplied by Triumph, is premixed and does not need to be diluted prior to filling or topping up the cooling system.

Always change the coolant at the intervals specified in the Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Warning Coolant - General Safety

warning
D2053 OAT coolant contains corrosion inhibitors and antifreeze suitable for aluminium engines and radiators. Always use the coolant in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.Coolant contains toxic chemicals that are harmful to the human body.Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe irritation. Wear protective gloves, clothing and eye protection when handling coolant. If coolant is inhaled, remove the person to fresh air and keep comfortable for breathing. In case of doubt or persistent symptoms, seek medical attention.If coolant gets on your skin, flush with water immediately. Remove contaminated clothing.If coolant gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. If coolant is swallowed, rinse the mouth with water and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. KEEP COOLANT OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
notice
The antifreeze used in the coolant mixture contains a corrosion inhibitor that helps prevent damage to the cooling system and engine.Without this inhibitor, the coolant would corrode the metals and cause blockages in the cooling system that could lead to engine overheating and damage. Always use the antifreeze listed in the Specification section and never use a methanol based antifreeze as this does not contain the required corrosion inhibition properties.
notice
If hard water is used in the cooling system, it will cause scale accumulation in the engine and radiator and considerably reduce the efficiency of the cooling system.Reduced cooling system efficiency may cause the engine to overheat and cause severe damage.

Radiator Hoses

Check the radiator hoses for cracks or deterioration, and hose clamps for tightness in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.

Coolant Replacement - Drainage

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Prior to disassembly of the coolant hoses, note the orientation and position of the hose clips to help ensure that they are returned to the same positions and orientation on assembly.Use service tool T3880207 for removal and installation of the coolant hose constant tension hose clips.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Paddock stand (Unordered List)

  • Position the motorcycle on level ground and place on a paddock stand.

Radiator Cowls - Remove LG1; LGX; LL1

Warning - Cooling - Cap Removal (scalding)

warning
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
  1. Release the fixing and remove the coolant pressure cap.
  2. Rad Cap LG1
    1. Coolant pressure cap

  3. Position a container to collect the displaced coolant.
  4. Loosen the hose clip then release the bottom hose from the radiator and allow the coolant to drain.
  5. Rad Hoses LG1
    1. Hose clips

    2. Top hose

    3. Bottom hose

  6. Remove the drain bolt from the coolant outlet tube, located next to the heat exchanger and allow the coolant to drain.
  7. Coolant Drain LG1
    1. Drain bolt

Coolant Replacement - Filling

  1. Incorporating a new sealing washer, refit the drain bolt to the coolant outlet tube and tighten to 10 Nm.
  2. Reconnect the bottom hose. Ensure the hose clip is positioned as noted for removal.
  3. note
    During filling, squeezing the bottom hose with both hands will help to pump coolant around the system and remove trapped air.
  4. Slowly add coolant mixture to the system, through the filler opening in the radiator, until the system is full.
  5. If the system has filled correctly and fully, there should be coolant visible through the radiator filler opening.
  6. If necessary, top up the system through the filler and refit the coolant pressure cap to the radiator filler neck. Tighten the fixing to 1 Nm.
  7. With the aid of an assistant, lean the motorcycle fully over to the right hand side, and then the left hand side, to release air trapped in the cooling system. Repeat as necessary.
  8. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
  9. Start the motorcycle and allow to run for approximately 20 to 30 seconds. Briefly raise the engine speed several times to allow any air to be expelled from the system.
  10. Stop the engine. Check and top up the coolant level as necessary.
  11. With the aid of an assistant, lean the motorcycle fully over to the right hand side, and then the left hand side, to release air trapped in the cooling system.
  12. Start the motorcycle. Briefly raise the engine speed several times to allow any air to be expelled from the system.
  13. Allow the engine to run until the cooling fan operates.
  14. Stop the motorcycle and allow the engine to cool.
  15. warning
    Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the cooling system is hot and also under pressure. Contact with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
  16. Check and top up the coolant level as necessary.
  17. Check the expansion tank level and top up if necessary.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Radiator Cowls - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Coolant Pressure Cap and Coolant System Testing

Inspection and Testing

warning
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
warning
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported. This will help prevent it from falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Allow the engine temperature to cool for at least 30 minutes.
  2. Remove the coolant pressure cap.
  3. Check the condition of the upper and lower seals of the coolant pressure cap.
  4. Coolant Pressure Cap (cdbu.svg)
    1. Lower seal

    2. Upper seal

    3. Spring

    note
    If there is any sign of damage or deterioration replace the cap.
  5. Pressure test the cap and cooling system to the blow off pressure of 1.1 bar as described below using service tool T3880147. If the cap opens at a lower pressure or fails to open at 1.1 bar, replace the cap.
  6. note
    It is recommended to carry out coolant pressure cap and cooling system pressure tests consecutively.

Coolant Pressure Cap Test

Coolant Pressure Cap and Coolant System Testing cgwp_1
  1. Hand held pump

  2. Bayonet type connector

  3. Pressure cap test adaptor 44 mm - Adaptor B

  4. Pressure cap test adaptor 46 mm - Adaptor A

  5. Pressure cap test adaptor 44 mm - Adaptor C (Not Pictured)

  1. Select pressure cap test adaptor C - T3880453 and securely fasten to the pressure cap.
  2. Carefully connect the hand pump to the adaptor ensuring an air tight seal is maintained.
  3. Coolant Pressure Cap and Coolant System Testing cgwq_5
    1. Pressure cap

    2. Test adaptor

    3. Hand held pump

  4. Pressure test the coolant cap to the blow off pressure. If the coolant cap opens at a lower pressure, fails to open at the correct pressure or the seal leaks, replace the cap.

Coolant System Pressure Test

  1. Select the bayonet type adaptor and securely fasten to the radiator.
  2. Carefully connect the hand pump to the bayonet connector ensuring an air tight seal is maintained.
  3. Coolant System Testing (cgwr.svg)
    1. Radiator filler

    2. Bayonet type connector

    3. Hand held pump

  4. Pressurise the cooling system to the operating pressure, using the hand pump taking care not to exceed the maximum cap pressure.
  5. Hold the pressure for a minimum of 10 minutes, whilst visually inspecting the external components of the coolant system for leaks.
  6. Remove the engine oil filler cap/dipstick and check for contamination of the engine oil caused by coolant escaping into the engine sump.
  7. note
    If the engine oil is contaminated further exploratory investigation will be required.If the engine oil is contaminated rectify the cause of the problem and then renew the oil and filter.
  8. Depressurise the coolant test kit using the pressure release valve.
  9. Coolant Pressure Test - cgwr_1
    1. Radiator filler

    2. Bayonet type connector

    3. Hand held pump

    4. Pressure release valve

  10. Refit the coolant pressure cap.
  11. Fill the coolant to the maximum mark (see Coolant Replacement - Filling).

Radiator - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Prior to disassembly of the coolant hoses, note the orientation and position of the hose clips to help ensure that they are returned to the same positions and orientation on assembly.For models fitted with the constant tension hose clips, use service tool T3880207 for their removal and installation.
warning
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Radiator Cowls - Remove LG1; LGX; LL1

Clutch Cable - Remove L Series

Radiator Remove LG1; LGX

    note
    Note the routing of the harness for the horn for installation.
  1. Disconnect the horn's two electrical connectors and detach the harness from the cooling fan cowl, noting the position of the clips and routing of the harness.
  2. Release the fixing and remove the horn.
  3. Horn Fixing (B02004)
    1. Fixing

    2. Horn

    note
    Note the routing of the harness for the cooling fan for installation.
  4. Follow the routing of the harness for the cooling fan and disconnect it from the main harness.
  5. Release the hose clip and disconnect the bypass hose from the radiator. Discard the clip.
  6. Bypass Hose LG1
    1. Hose clip

    2. Bypass hose

  7. Loosen the hose clips then detach the top and bottom hoses from the radiator.
  8. Rad Hoses LG1
    1. Hose clips

    2. Top hose

    3. Bottom hose

  9. Release the radiator lower mounting.
  10. Rad Lower Fixing LG1 (L0410_1)
    1. Fixing

    2. Radiator lower mounting

    note
    Note the position of the rubber air deflector and its retaining plate in relation to the radiator's upper mounting bolt for installation.
  11. Release the fixing securing the radiator to the frame. Slide the radiator towards the right hand side of the motorcycle to release the radiator from the bracket pin. Collect the retaining plate for the air deflector.
  12. Rad Top Mount LG1
    1. Fixing

    2. Retaining plate

    3. Bracket pin

  13. Remove the radiator.

Radiator and Cooling Fan Inspection

Radiator

Caution - Radiator Damage using pressure wash

caution
Using high pressure water, such as from a pressure-washer, can damage the radiator fins and impair the radiator's efficiency.Do not obstruct or deflect airflow through the radiator by installing unauthorised accessories in front of the radiator or behind the cooling fan. Interference with the radiator airflow can lead to overheating and consequent engine damage.
  1. Check the radiator for stone damage.
  2. Check the radiator core for damage to fins or obstructions to air flow.
  3. Clean off any obstructions with a stream of low-pressure water.
  4. caution
    To avoid overheating and consequent engine damage, replace the radiator if the cores are blocked or if the fins are badly deformed or broken.
  5. Rectify any damage.

Cooling Fan

Caution - Cooling - Fan - fingers loose clothing trapped

caution
The cooling fan is switched on and off by the Engine Control Module in response to a signal received from the coolant temperature sensor. To prevent injury, never place loose clothing, fingers or hands near the cooling fan.Failure to follow the advice above could result in minor to moderate injury.

The motorcycle is fitted with a thermostatically controlled electric fan situated behind the radiator. When the fan operates with the motorcycle stationary or at slow speed, cool air is drawn through the radiator from the front of the motorcycle.

  1. Check that the cooling fan spins freely and without tight spots.
  2. Check the cooling fan blades for signs of heat distortion.
  3. Rectify as necessary.

Radiator - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Radiator Install LG1

  1. Align the radiator to the frame and lower mounting.
  2. Position the rubber air deflector and its retaining plate to the upper mountings as noted for removal.
  3. Fit the upper mounting fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
  4. Fit and tighten the lower mounting fixing to 6 Nm.
  5. Reconnect the top and bottom hoses. Ensure the hose clips are positioned as noted for removal and secure with the hose clips.
  6. Rad Hoses LG1
    1. Hose clips

    2. Top hose

    3. Bottom hose

  7. Connect the bypass hose to the radiator and secure with a new hose clip.
  8. Bypass Hose LG1
    1. Hose clip

    2. Bypass hose

  9. Route the harness for the cooling fan as noted for removal (ensure connectors are pushed through the air deflector) and connect to the main harness.
  10. Fit the horn to the radiator and tighten its fixing to 9 Nm.
  11. Horn Fixing (B02004)
    1. Fixing

    2. Horn

  12. Route the harness as noted during removal and connect the horn's two electrical connectors.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch Cable - Install L Series

Radiator Cowls - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Coolant Pump

note
The oil pump and water pump are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated. For additional information, refer to Oil Pump (see Oil and Coolant Pump - Removal and Oil and Coolant Pump - Installation).

Thermostat - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Prior to disassembly of the coolant hoses, note the orientation and position of the hose clips to help ensure that they are returned to the same positions and orientation on assembly.Use service tool T3880207 for their removal and installation.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series

    warning
    Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with the pressurised coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
  1. Detach the top hose from the thermostat housing, noting the position of the clip for installation.
  2. Release the fixings securing the thermostat housing to the cylinder head.
  3. Remove the thermostat housing and the bracket. Discard the O-ring.
  4. Thermostat Fixings LG1
    1. Thermostat housing

    2. Fixings

    3. Coolant expansion tank bracket

  5. Remove the thermostat from the cylinder head.
  6. Thermostat LG1
    1. Thermostat

    2. Bleed valve

Thermostat - Inspection

  1. Inspect the thermostat at room temperature. If the thermostat is open, it must be replaced.
  2. To check the thermostat is opening at the correct temperature, suspend the thermostat in a suitable container of water and raise the temperature of the water until the thermostat opens.
  3. Measure the water temperature with an accurate thermometer.
  4. * Refer to the coolant specifications section for the correct thermostat opening temperature.
  5. If the temperature at which thermostat opening takes place is incorrect, replace the thermostat.

Thermostat - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the thermostat into the cylinder head. Ensure the bleed valve is uppermost as shown below.
  2. Thermostat LG1
    1. Thermostat

    2. Bleed valve

  3. Fit a new O-ring to the thermostat housing groove.
  4. Thermostat housing O-ring cash
    1. O-ring groove

  5. Refit the thermostat housing and bracket to the cylinder head,
  6. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
  7. Thermostat Fixings LG1
    1. Thermostat housing

    2. Fixings

    3. Coolant expansion tank bracket

  8. Reconnect the top hose. Ensure the hose clip is positioned as noted for removal.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series

Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Cooling - Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when engine is hot

warning
Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the coolant inside the cooling system will be hot and may also be under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
  1. Remove the coolant expansion tank cap from the coolant expansion tank.
  2. Release the fixings and remove the coolant expansion tank cover and coolant expansion tank.
  3. Coolant Expansion Tank LG1
    1. Coolant expansion tank cap

    2. Coolant expansion tank

    3. Fixings

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Expansion Tank Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

  1. Position the coolant expansion tank onto the frame and brackets.
  2. Refit the cover and secure the tank and cover with three fixings and washers. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  3. Coolant Expansion Tank LG1
    1. Coolant expansion tank cap

    2. Coolant expansion tank

    3. Fixings

  4. Check and adjust the coolant level as necessary (see Coolant Level Inspection and Coolant Level Adjustment).
  5. Refit the coolant expansion tank cap.

Front Suspension and Steering

Exploded View - Front Forks, Bottom Yoke and Steering Head Bearings

Exploded View - Front Forks

Exploded View - Handlebars and Upper Yoke

Exploded View - Handlebars

Fork Inspection

warning
Riding the motorcycle with defective or damaged suspension can cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident. Never ride with damaged or defective suspension.

Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching of the slider surface or for oil leaks.

If any damage or oil leakage is found, strip and repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.

Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:

  • Place the motorcycle on level ground

  • While holding the handlebars and applying the front brake, pump the forks up and down several times.

If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as described in this section or consult an authorised Triumph dealer.

Front Fork Oil Seal - Clean

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Clean the area around the dust seal then carefully detach the dust seal from the fork outer tube.
  2. Wipe away any visible dirt or water from the oil seal.
  3. note
    T3880215 - Fork Seal Cleaner, 35-45 mm forks has two cleaning hooks. The one with the OIL SEAL text is for the oil seal, the other cleaning hook is for the dust seal.When cleaning the oil seal with service tool T3880215 it is possible that a small amount of fork oil may seep out.
  4. Clean service tool T3880215
  5. Fit service tool T3880215 to the fork inner tube. Make sure that the cleaning hook, with the text OIL SEAL below it, is pointing towards the oil seal.
  6. Oil seal clean tool ckpd
    1. Cleaning hook

    2. OIL SEAL text

    3. Oil seal location

  7. Slide the cleaning hook carefully under the seal lip. Rotate service tool T3880215 360° in the direction shown then remove the cleaning hook from the oil seal.
  8. Seal clean rotation ckpd_2

    Direction of Rotation

  9. Slide service tool T3880215 down to use the other cleaning hook to clean the dust seal. Rotate service tool T3880215 360° in the direction shown then remove the cleaning hook from the dust seal.
  10. Dust seal clean ckpd_1

    Direction of Rotation

    1. Dust seal

    2. Cleaning hook

  11. With hand pressure only, press the dust seal into position in the outer tube.

Front Fork - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Front Fork Remove LG1; LGX

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Raise and Support the Front of the Motorcycle

  • Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.

  1. Detach and support the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Removal).
  2. Detach the front ABS wheel speed sensor (and its harness if necessary) from the right hand fork leg (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal).
  3. warning
    Never allow the brake calipers to hang on the brake hoses as this may damage the hoses. A damaged brake hose can cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  4. Remove the front direction indicators (see Front Direction Indicators - Removal).
  5. Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Removal).
  6. Remove the front mudguard (see Front Mudguard - Removal).
  7. caution
    Before loosening, cover the fork top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from becoming damaged by the tool.
    note
    If the forks are to be dismantled, loosen the fork top caps.
  8. Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
  9. Loosen the lower yoke pinch bolts.
  10. Front Forks_1 (ckwn)
    1. Upper yoke pinch bolt (left hand side shown)

    2. Lower yoke pinch bolts

    caution
    Care must be taken when removing the forks, to ensure that the outer surfaces do not become scratched.
  11. Using a downward, twisting action, withdraw the forks from the yokes. Retrieve the direction indicator brackets.

Front Fork - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Fork Install LG1; LGX

  1. Install the forks into the yokes, refitting the direction indicator brackets in between the two yokes, and make sure the manufacturer's labels are facing outwards on each fork leg.
  2. Position the forks within the yokes so that the lip of the outer tube, not the top cap, is 39.50 mm +/- 0.5 mm above the flat/machined surface on the underside of the upper yoke.
  3. Fork setting dimension LG1 (ckwk)

    Fork pull through measurement

  4. Tighten the lower yoke pinch bolts as follows:
  5. * tighten the upper bolt to 22 Nm
    * tighten the lower bolt to 22 Nm
    * re-tighten the upper bolt to 22 Nm.
  6. Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts, upper fixings first, to 26 Nm.
  7. caution
    Before tightening, cover the fork top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from becoming damaged by the tool.
  8. If the forks have been dismantled, tighten the fork top caps to 35 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Mudguard - Install L Series

Front Wheel - Install L Series

Front Direction Indicators - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Sidestand (Unordered list)

  • Lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on the side stand.

Fork Oil Change - Oil Draining

  1. Remove the fork (see Front Fork - Removal).
  2. note
    The left hand and right hand fork leg assemblies differ internally.
  3. Disassemble the following items from the fork leg:
  4. * For the left hand fork leg, remove the top cap and joint rod assembly and remove the spring (see Left Hand Front Fork - Disassembly).
    * For the right hand fork leg, remove the top cap, spring spacer, washer and spring (see Right Hand Front Fork - Disassembly).
  5. Holding the inner and outer tubes together, invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all the oil.

Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling

The oil level is measured from the upper surface of the fork outer tube, with the fork fully compressed with the spring removed.

Fork oil level measurement cbyf_1

Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed)

Fork Oil Level Chart

warning
The method for oil refilling and oil level setting is the same for both fork legs, however, the left hand and right hand fork assemblies differ internally and require different oil levels to be set.Any variation from the figures quoted in the fork oil level chart could result in an unsafe riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Fork Leg

Oil Level*

Oil Volume

Oil Grade

Left Hand

125 mm

560 cc

Showa SS47G

Right Hand

115 mm

475 cc

*Fork fully compressed with the spring removed.

  1. Fill the fork with the specified fork oil until the oil level passes the side holes in the fork inner tube.
  2. Fork oil filling
    1. Hole (one of two shown)

    2. Fork inner tube

  3. Pump the fork outer tube several times to expel any trapped air then fully compress the fork and support it in an upright position. Leave the fork for a few minutes to allow the oil level to stabilise.
  4. Refer to the oil level chart and set the scale on service tool T3880160 to the specified level.
  5. Fork oil filling cbyg_1 svg
    1. T3880160 - Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator

    2. Adjuster plate

    3. Scale area

    4. Hole (zero position)

    note
    Zero level on the tool is set at the small exit hole in the side of the scale tube, NOT AT THE END TIP. Do not attempt to block this side hole as this will cause the final fluid level to be incorrect.
  6. Insert the scale end of the tool into the fork inner tube.
  7. Hold the tool adjuster plate level with the upper surface of the fork outer tube and draw fluid into the syringe until fluid flow ceases (empty the syringe if the body becomes full before fluid flow stops).
  8. The fluid level in the fork is now set to the height set on the tool scale. Check the tool scale setting and repeat the process if incorrectly set.
  9. note
    The left hand and right hand fork assemblies differ internally.
  10. Assemble the following items to the fork leg:
  11. * For the left hand fork leg, install the spring and the top cap and joint rod assembly (see Left Hand Front Fork - Assembly).
    * For the right hand fork leg, install the spring, washer, spring spacer and top cap (see Right Hand Front Fork - Assembly).

Left Hand Front Fork - Disassembly

    caution
    When securing the fork in service tool T3880171, take care not to over tighten the clamp as this will cause the fork tube to distort beyond repair.
  1. Using a soft jawed vice, clamp the service tool T3880171 such that the fork can be mounted vertically.
  2. With the top cap facing upwards, very gently clamp the fork inner tube into service tool T3880171.
  3. caution
    Before loosening, cover the top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from tool damage.
  4. Carefully unscrew the top cap from the fork outer tube.
  5. Fork Top Cap, cjqh_1
    1. Top cap

    2. Fork outer tube

    warning
    The fork top cap and joint rod assembly is under pressure from the fork spring. As the last few threads of the assembly are unscrewed, keep the assembly pushed firmly into the tube to prevent it being forcibly expelled as the threads release. To prevent injury, always wear eye, face and hand protection when removing the top cap and joint rod assembly.
  6. Remove the fork assembly from service tool T3880171 and transfer to a soft jawed vice.
  7. Forks in vice_1 (ckwm_1)
    1. Front fork assembly

    2. Soft jaws

  8. Hold the fork inner tube fully into the fork outer tube. Using service tool T3880367 unscrew and remove the fork top cap and joint rod assembly from the fork inner tube.
  9. Top cap/damper assembly removal, cjqi_1
    1. T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm

    2. Top cap

    3. Joint rod

    4. Fork outer tube

  10. If removal of the top cap is required, loosen the locknut and unscrew the top cap from the joint rod. If necessary remove the O-ring joint seal from the top cap assembly.
  11. Fork top cap and joint rod assy LG1_1 (ckwl)
    1. Fork top cap

    2. Lock nut

    3. Joint rod

    note
    The spring has a smaller coil diameter at its upper end. Note the orientation of the spring before removal.
  12. Remove the spring.
  13. Fork Spring (cjrk_1.svg)
    1. Spring

    2. Fork outer tube

  14. Invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all oil.
  15. With the fork still inverted, very gently clamp the fork outer tube into service tool T3880171.
  16. Ease the dust seal out of the outer tube.
  17. Fork Dust Seal, ceto_2
    1. Dust seal

    2. Inner tube

  18. Carefully ease the circlip out from the top of the outer tube.
  19. Front Fork Circlip cetn_1
    1. Circlip

  20. Compress the fork then pull the inner tube sharply out of the outer tube. Repeat this procedure until the upper bush and seal are forced out of position and the inner and outer tube can be separated.
  21. Carefully slide the upper bush off the fork inner tube. Discard the upper bush.
  22. note
    Note the orientation of the oil seal and dust seal for installation.
  23. Slide the lower bush, washer, oil seal, circlip and dust seal off the fork inner tube. Discard the lower bush, oil seal, circlip and dust seal.
  24. Fork bushes and seals
    1. Upper bush

    2. Lower bush

    3. Washer

    4. Oil seal

    5. Circlip

    6. Dust seal

    7. Fork inner tube

Right Hand Front Fork - Disassembly

    caution
    When securing the fork in service tool T3880171, take care not to over tighten the clamp as this will cause the fork tube to distort beyond repair.
  1. Using a soft jawed vice, clamp the service tool T3880171 such that the fork can be mounted vertically.
  2. With the top cap facing upwards, very gently clamp the fork inner tube into service tool T3880171.
  3. caution
    Before loosening, cover the top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from tool damage.
  4. Carefully unscrew the top cap from the fork outer tube.
  5. Fork Top Cap, cjqh_1
    1. Top cap

    2. Fork outer tube

  6. Loosen the lock nut, unscrew and remove the top cap. If necessary, remove the O-ring seal from the top cap assembly.
  7. Invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Pump the fork assembly to remove all oil.
  8. Return the fork to the clamping tool.
  9. warning
    While compressing the fork spring always wear protective equipment for the face and eyes and never stand directly above or look directly down on the fork. If the spring compressor should dislodge or detach, the resulting release of spring tension could cause parts to fly off resulting in injury to the user.
  10. Fit service tool T3880067 over the spring spacer. Position the two adjustable arms to the spring spacer. Screw in the arms until they positively engage in the spring spacer holes.
  11. Using service tool T3880067, manually compress the fork spring and remove the split collar from below the damper lock nut.
  12. Compress the fork spring, cgyh_1
    1. Damper lock nut

    2. T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor

    3. Split collar

  13. Remove service tool T3880067 from the spring spacer.
  14. note
    The spring has a smaller coil diameter at its upper end. Note the orientation of the spring before removal.
  15. Remove the spring spacer, washer and spring.
  16. Fork spring, washer and spring spacer, cdno_3
    1. Spring spacer

    2. Washer

    3. Spring

    4. Damper rod

  17. Invert the fork and very gently clamp the fork outer tube into service tool T3880171.
  18. Ease the dust seal out of the outer tube.
  19. Fork Dust Seal, ceto_2
    1. Dust seal

    2. Inner tube

  20. Carefully ease the circlip out from the top of the outer tube.
  21. Front Fork Circlip cetn_1
    1. Circlip

  22. Compress the fork then pull the inner tube sharply out of the outer tube. Repeat this procedure until the upper bush and seal are forced out of position and the inner and outer tube can be separated.
  23. Carefully slide the upper bush off the fork inner tube. Discard the upper bush.
  24. note
    Note the orientation of the oil seal and dust seal for installation.
  25. Slide the lower bush, washer, oil seal, circlip and dust seal off the fork inner tube. Discard the lower bush, oil seal, circlip and dust seal.
  26. Fork bushes and seals
    1. Upper bush

    2. Lower bush

    3. Washer

    4. Oil seal

    5. Circlip

    6. Dust seal

    7. Fork inner tube

  27. If removal of the damping cylinder is required, unscrew the damping cylinder bolt from the bottom of the fork. Discard the sealing washer.
  28. Slide the damping cylinder out of the fork inner tube. Collect the centering collar from the lower end of the damping cylinder.
  29. Damping cylinder (ccuy.svg)
    1. Damping cylinder

Front Fork - Inspection

  1. Thoroughly clean and examine all components for damage, wear, scoring, corrosion. The condition of the bushes and damper rod piston ring (where fitted) is very important. Renew the components as necessary.
  2. Always renew the damper rod bolt sealing washer (where fitted), oil seal, dust seal and seal circlip every time the fork is dismantled.
  3. Always renew the bushes if the fork inner and outer tubes have been separated.

Left Hand Front Fork - Assembly

Warning - Suspension - Front forks have precision machined parts

warning
The front forks comprise of many precision machined parts. Total cleanliness must be observed at all times and assembly must take place in a dirt/dust-free environment. Dirt ingress may cause damage to the fork parts, leading to incorrect operation, instability, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. Lubricate the oil seal, upper and lower bushes for the inner tube with clean fork oil.
  2. Install service tool T3880642 to the fork inner tube. Ensure the tool is not damaged and that it covers the bush groove fully.
  3. Front Fork inner tube and seal guide tool (ccup_4.svg)
    1. Fork inner tube

    2. T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector

  4. Slide a new dust seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
  5. Slide the circlip and a new oil seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
  6. Slide the washer and a new lower bush onto the inner tube.
  7. Remove service tool T3880642 from the fork inner tube.
  8. Fit a new upper bush to the fork inner tube.
  9. Fork bushes and seals
    1. Upper bush

    2. Lower bush

    3. Washer

    4. Oil seal

    5. Circlip

    6. Dust seal

    7. Fork inner tube

  10. Insert the fork inner tube assembly into the fork outer tube.
  11. Using the narrow end of service tool T3880003, guide the lower bush, washer and oil seal into place.
  12. Front fork oil seal
    1. T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer

    2. Oil seal

    3. Fork inner tube

    4. Fork outer tube

  13. Secure the oil seal in position with the circlip, ensuring it is correctly located in its groove.
  14. Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
  15. Invert service tool T3880003 and, using hand pressure only, push the dust seal squarely into the outer tube.
  16. Front fork dust seal
    1. T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer

    2. Dust seal

  17. Return the fork to an upright position, with the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in service tool T3880171.
  18. Refill the fork with new oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling).
  19. Fit the spring into the fork inner tube as noted during removal.
  20. Fork Spring (cjrk_1.svg)
    1. Spring

    2. Fork outer tube

  21. If removed, fit a new O-ring to the top cap.
  22. If removed, screw the top cap fully onto the joint rod.
  23. Hold the top cap while tightening the lock nut to 20 Nm.
  24. note
    When fitting the fork top cap and joint rod assembly, care must be taken not to damage the top ring of the joint rod assembly.
  25. With the fork fully compressed use service tool T3880367 to fit the fork joint rod assembly to the inner tube.
  26. Top cap/damper assembly removal, cjqi_1
    1. T3880367 - Wrench, Damper Cylinder, 33mm

    2. Top cap

    3. Joint rod

    4. Fork outer tube

  27. Remove the fork from service tool T3880171 and transfer to a soft jawed vice.
  28. Forks in vice_1 (ckwm_1)
    1. Front fork assembly

    2. Soft jaws

  29. With the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in the vice, tighten the joint rod assembly to 90 Nm using a torque wrench fitted with a suitable crow foot spanner adapter (see Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches).
  30. Lubricate the O-ring on the top cap with a smear of clean fork oil then screw the top cap fully into the fork outer tube.
  31. caution
    Before tightening, cover the top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from tool damage.
  32. Tighten the top cap to 35 Nm.
  33. note
    It is much easier to tighten the top cap when the fork has been refitted.

Right Hand Front Fork - Assembly

Warning - Suspension - Front forks have precision machined parts

warning
The front forks comprise of many precision machined parts. Total cleanliness must be observed at all times and assembly must take place in a dirt/dust-free environment. Dirt ingress may cause damage to the fork parts, leading to incorrect operation, instability, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
note
If the damping cylinder has not been removed, omit steps 1 to 3.
  1. Fit the centering collar to the lower end of the damping cylinder.
  2. Fit the damping cylinder to the fork inner tube.
  3. Clean the threads of the damping cylinder bolt and fit a new sealing washer. Prevent the cylinder from turning while tightening the damping cylinder securing bolt to 20 Nm.
  4. Lubricate the oil seal, upper and lower bushes for the inner tube with clean fork oil.
  5. Install service tool T3880642 to the fork inner tube. Ensure the tool is not damaged and that it covers the bush groove fully.
  6. Front Fork inner tube and seal guide tool (ccup_4.svg)
    1. Fork inner tube

    2. T3880642 - Fork Seal Guide/Protector

  7. Slide a new dust seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
  8. Slide the circlip and a new oil seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
  9. Slide the washer and a new lower bush onto the inner tube.
  10. Remove service tool T3880642 from the fork inner tube.
  11. Fit a new upper bush to the fork inner tube.
  12. Fork bushes and seals
    1. Upper bush

    2. Lower bush

    3. Washer

    4. Oil seal

    5. Circlip

    6. Dust seal

    7. Fork inner tube

  13. Insert the fork inner tube assembly into the fork outer tube.
  14. Using the narrow end of service tool T3880003, guide the lower bush, washer and oil seal into place.
  15. Front fork oil seal
    1. T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer

    2. Oil seal

    3. Fork inner tube

    4. Fork outer tube

  16. Secure the oil seal in position with the circlip, ensuring it is correctly located in its groove.
  17. Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
  18. Invert service tool T3880003 and, using hand pressure only, push the dust seal squarely into the outer tube.
  19. Front fork dust seal
    1. T3880003 - Front Fork Seal Installer

    2. Dust seal

  20. Return the fork to an upright position, with the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in service tool T3880171.
  21. Refill the fork with new oil (see Fork Oil Change - Oil Refilling).
  22. Position the fork assembly as for compression of the fork spring during disassembly.
  23. Make sure that the damper rod lock nut is screwed fully onto the threads of the damper rod.
  24. Fit the spring, washer and spring spacer into the fork inner tube as noted during removal.
  25. Fork spring, washer and spring spacer, cdno_3
    1. Spring spacer

    2. washer

    3. Spring

    4. Damper rod lock nut

  26. Attach service tool T3880085 to the threads of the damper rod and pull the damper upwards.
  27. warning
    While compressing the fork spring always wear protective equipment for the face and eyes and never stand directly above or look directly down on the fork. If the spring compressor should dislodge or detach, the resulting release of spring tension could cause parts to fly off resulting in injury to the user.
  28. Fit service tool T3880067 over the spring spacer. Position the two adjustable arms to the spring spacer. Screw in the arms until they positively engage in the spring spacer holes.
  29. note
    An assistant may be required to install the split collar and top cap.
  30. Using service tool T3880067, manually compress the fork spring and with the aid of an assistant, fit the split collar below the damper lock nut.
  31. Compress the fork spring, cgyh_1
    1. Damper lock nut

    2. T3880067 - Fork Spring Compressor

    3. Split collar

  32. Remove service tool T3880085 from the damper rod.
  33. Fit a new O-ring to the top cap.
  34. Screw the top cap fully onto the damper rod.
  35. Compress the fork spring using service tool T3880067 and with the aid of an assistant, hold the top cap while tightening the damper rod lock nut to 20 Nm.
  36. Remove service tool T3880067 from the spring spacer.
  37. Lubricate the O-ring on the top cap with a smear of clean fork oil then screw the top cap fully into the outer tube.
  38. caution
    Before tightening, cover the top cap with a suitable masking tape to protect its anodized finish from tool damage.
  39. Tighten the top cap to 35 Nm.
  40. note
    It is much easier to tighten the top cap when the fork has been refitted.
  41. Refit the fork assembly (see Front Fork - Installation).

Handlebars - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork or frame. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Mirrors - Remove L Series

Front Master Cylinder - Remove L Series

Handlebar End Weights - Removal L Series

Twist Grip - Removal L Series

  1. Release the fixings securing the right hand switch housing to the handlebar.
  2. RH Switch Housing LG1_1 (ckwr)
    1. Fixings

    2. Right hand switch housing

  3. Release the fixings and remove the clamp from the clutch lever assembly. Without disconnecting the clutch cable, lay the lever aside.
  4. Clutch Lever Fixings_1 (ckwj)
    1. Clutch lever

    2. Fixings

  5. Release the two fixings and remove the left hand grip from the handlebar. Collect the two washers.
  6. LH Grip (B01883)
    1. Fixing (one of two shown)

  7. Release the fixings securing the left hand switch housing to the handlebar.
  8. LH Switch Housing LG1_1 (ckwq)
    1. Left hand switch housing

    2. Fixings

  9. Support the handlebars and remove the handlebar clamp bolts.
  10. Handlebarclamp_1 (ckwp)
    1. Handlebar clamp

    2. Fixings

  11. Remove the clamp and the handlebars.

Handlebars - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the handlebars on to the upper yoke, fit the clamp and the fixings. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
  2. Rotate the handlebars so that the alignment mark on the handlebar aligns with the handlebar clamp split line.
  3. LG1 Handlebar Align
    1. Alignment mark

    2. Split line

  4. Tighten the handlebar clamp fixings, front ones first, to 26 Nm.
  5. Align the left hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the hole in the handlebar. Fit the two screws and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
  6. LH Switch Housing LG1_1 (ckwq)
    1. Left hand switch housing

    2. Fixings

  7. Refit the left hand grip with two fixings and washers, and tighten to 3 Nm.
  8. Locate the clutch lever assembly to the handlebar and fit the clamp.
  9. Align the clutch lever split line with the alignment mark on the handlebar. Tighten the clamp fixings, upper one first, to 9 Nm.
  10. Clutch Lever Fixings_1 (ckwj)
    1. Clutch lever

    2. Fixings

  11. Align the right hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the hole in the handlebar. Fit the two fixings and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
  12. RH Switch Housing LG1_1 (ckwr)
    1. Fixings

    2. Right hand switch housing

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Twist Grip - Installation L Series

Handlebar End Weights - Installation L Series

Front Master Cylinder - Install L Series

Mirrors - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Handlebar End Weights - Removal

note
Handlebar end weights are not fitted to models that have accessory handguards installed.
  1. Release and discard the fixings and remove the handlebar end weights.
Handlebar end weights_1 (ckwo)
  1. Fixing

  2. End weight

Handlebar End Weights - Installation

note
Handlebar end weights are not fitted to models that have accessory handguards installed.
  1. Install the handlebar end weights with new fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
Handlebar end weights_1 (ckwo)
  1. Fixing

  2. End weight

Upper Yoke - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Instruments - Remove L Series

Clutch Cable - Remove L Series

Upper Yoke Remove LG1; LGX

    note
    Note the routing of the harnesses through the upper yoke wire guides for installation.
  1. Release the fixings securing the handlebar clamp to the upper yoke, detach the clamps and release the handlebar.
  2. Handlebarclamp_1 (ckwp)
    1. Handlebar clamp

    2. Fixings

  3. As an assembly, raise the handle bars until clear of the upper yoke. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the upper yoke centre nut is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
  4. Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
  5. warning
    If the lower yoke fixings are also loosened, the forks will no longer support the weight of the motorcycle.Do not loosen the lower yoke fixings as, in this condition, the motorcycle could topple over causing damage and/or risk of injury.
    caution
    Care must be taken when removing the upper yoke centre nut, to ensure that the centre nut and upper yoke do not become scratched. Protect the surfaces with a suitable cloth or tape to prevent scratching.
  6. Remove the upper yoke centre nut.
  7. LG1 Top Nut
    1. Upper yoke centre nut

  8. Ease the upper yoke from the forks and remove from the motorcycle.
  9. If required, release the four fixings and remove the instruments bracket from the upper yoke.

Upper Yoke - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Upper yoke install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, refit the instruments bracket to the upper yoke with four fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
  2. Refit the upper yoke and tighten the upper yoke centre nut to 90 Nm.
  3. Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts, upper fixings first, to 26 Nm.
  4. Locate the handlebar assembly in the upper yoke. Fit the handlebar clamp and bolts.
  5. Align the handlebar alignment mark with the front split line of the left hand side.
  6. Tighten the front clamp bolts to 26 Nm, then the rears.
  7. LG1 Handlebar Align
    1. Alignment mark

    2. Split line (left hand side)

  8. Reroute the harnesses through the upper yoke wire guides as noted during removal.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Clutch Cable - Install L Series

Instruments - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Headlight - Remove L Series

Lower Yoke Remove LG1; LGX

    caution
    Care must be taken when removing the headstock top nut, to ensure that the top nut and headstock do not become scratched. Protect the surfaces with a suitable cloth or tape to prevent scratching.
  1. Remove the upper yoke centre nut.
  2. LG1 Top Nut
    1. Upper yoke centre nut

  3. As an assembly, raise the upper yoke and handle bars until clear of the steering stem. Rest the assembly forward of the steering stem such that access to the adjustment nuts is unrestricted. Ensure the master cylinder remains in an upright position.
  4. Using service tool T3880023, remove the lock nut and tab washer. Discard the tab washer.
  5. Headstock Bearing Adjustment, cdbo1
    1. Adjuster nut

    2. Lock nut

    3. T3880023 - 50 mm Socket

  6. Using service tool T3880750, remove the adjuster nut.
  7. T3880750 and wrench (loosen)
    1. T3880750 - Headstock Service Tool

    2. Proprietary wrench

    3. Adjuster nut

  8. Remove the lower yoke from below the frame headstock.
  9. warning
    Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause eye and soft tissue injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
  10. Using a suitable drift, evenly and progressively drive the bearing races from the frame headstock.
  11. Remove the inner race and dust seal from the lower yoke using a press or puller.

Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Lower Yoke Install LG1; LGX

  1. Fit a new dust seal to the steering stem on the lower yoke.
  2. Lower yoke LG1_1
    1. Steering stem

    2. Dust seal

    caution
    Protect the threads of the lower yoke when using a press or puller as damaged threads may mean replacing the yoke completely.
  3. Press a new lower bearing inner race onto the steering stem of the lower yoke.
  4. Lower Yoke LG1_2
    1. Bearing

    2. Lower yoke

    3. Press bed

  5. Evenly and progressively drive a new complete upper bearing into the frame headstock.
  6. Lubricate the lower bearing using a heavy duty, lithium based, NLGI 2 specification grease such as Castrol SpheerolTM LCX 222.
  7. Drive a new lower outer bearing into the frame headstock.
  8. Lubricate the upper bearing using a heavy duty, lithium based, NLGI 2 specification grease such as Castrol SpheerolTM LCX 222.
  9. Insert the lower yoke to the frame, fit the upper bearing and race, and retain with the adjuster nut.
  10. Ensure that the threads on the steering stem are free from grease and adjust the headstock bearings (see Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment).
  11. Locate the upper yoke to the steering stem. Install but do not fully tighten the upper yoke centre nut at this stage.
  12. Fit the forks (see Front Fork - Installation).
  13. Tighten the upper yoke centre nut to 90 Nm.
  14. Check that no free play exists in the headstock bearings. Adjust as necessary (see Steering Head Bearing - Check and Steering Head Bearing - Adjustment).

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Headlight - Install L Series

Instruments - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Rear Suspension and Swinging Arm

Exploded View - Rear Suspension Unit

Exploded View - Rear Suspension Unit

Exploded View - Swinging Arm

Exploded View - Swinging Arm

Rear Suspension Unit

Warning - Suspension - Contents under Pressure, Never Disassemble the RSU

warning
Contents under pressure. Never attempt to open this rear suspension unit. Never attempt to service this rear suspension unit. Never incinerate, puncture, or disassemble this rear suspension unit. Opening this rear suspension unit may result in severe injuries or even death.

RSU warning symbol and text

SafetyIcon.danger_pressurised container

The rear suspension units are sealed units and do not have any internally user serviceable parts.

Rear Suspension Spring Preload Adjustment

The spring preload adjuster is located at the bottom of the rear suspension unit.

Rear adjuster settings are counted from one, with position one being with the adjuster turned fully clockwise. Position one gives the minimum amount of spring preload. There are seven adjuster positions in total. Position seven gives the maximum amount of spring preload.

RSU Preload Adjustment
  1. Spring preload adjuster ring

A. Anticlockwise direction

B. Clockwise direction

To change the rear suspension spring preload setting:

  • Locate the C spanner supplied in the tool kit.

  • Insert the C spanner into the slots of the spring preload adjuster ring.

  • Turn the spring preload adjuster ring anticlockwise (shown as direction A in the diagram) towards the left hand side of the motorcycle to increase spring preload.

  • Turn the spring preload adjuster ring clockwise (shown as direction B in the diagram) towards the right hand side of the motorcycle to decrease spring preload.

Rear Suspension Settings

The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with all the suspension settings set at the Solo Riding setting as shown in the suspension settings table. The Solo Riding suspension settings provide a comfortable ride and good handling characteristics for general, solo riding.

The details shown in the suspension settings table are only a guide. Setting requirements may vary for rider and passenger weight and personal preferences.

Spring Preload Settings

Loading Condition

Spring Preload1

Solo Riding

1

Solo Riding with Accessories/Loading (not exceeding limits)

1

Rider and Passenger

7

Rider and Passenger with Accessories/Loading (not exceeding limits)

7

1 Position 1 is minimum (fully clockwise) and position 7 is maximum (fully anticlockwise).

Rear Suspension Unit - Removal

Warning - Hot Exhaust

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust components may be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot components may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, always allow the hot parts to cool before working on the exhaust system.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

RSU Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the two push release plastic rivets securing the rear suspension unit guard to the rear hugger. Remove the rear suspension unit guard.
  2. Rear RSU Guard LG1_1 (ckwi)
    1. Rear suspension unit guard

    2. Plastic rivets

  3. Remove the two fixings and remove the rear hugger and chain guard.
  4. Rear Hugger LG1_1 (ckwb)
    1. Rear hugger and chain guard

    2. Fixings

  5. Remove the fixing, flanged sleeve and plate from the drive chain rubbing strip.
  6. Chain rubbing strip rear LG1_1 (ckwt)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

    3. Flanged sleeve

    4. Plate

  7. Remove the front fixing and remove the drive chain rubbing strip from the swinging arm.
  8. Chain rubbing strip front LG1_1 (ckvz)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

  9. Position a suitable block to support the swinging arm.
  10. Remove the upper rear suspension unit fixing and discard the lock nut.
  11. Remove the lower fixing, discard the lock nut and remove the rear suspension unit.
  12. RSU Fixings_1 (ckwy)
    1. Upper fixing

    2. Rear suspension unit

    3. Lower fixing

Rear Suspension Unit Lower Mounting Bearing Replacement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Caution - General - When using a press

caution
Crushing injuries to the hand, arms or unprotected parts of the body is possible when using a press.Objects such as bearings may break-up or shatter when using a press causing damage and injury.Always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection.Failure to follow the advice above could result in minor to moderate injury.

Removal

  1. Remove the bearing sleeve and seals. Discard the seals.
  2. Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearing.
  3. RSU Lower Bearing

    Trident model shown, Tiger Sport and Daytona 660 models similar

    1. Bearing sleeve

    2. Seals

    3. Needle roller bearing

Installation

notice
The drag link bearings are "dry fit" bearings. Do not apply grease or other forms of lubrication to the bearings during installation. Apply a thin layer of multi-purpose NLGI 2 specification grease to the bearing sleeve and seals.When inserting new bearings, always press against the marked or shielded side and always fit new bearing seals.Make sure that the bearing bore is fully clean and free from contamination before you install new bearings.
  1. Install the new bearing using a suitable press.
  2. Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeve.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Suspension Unit Upper Mounting Bush Replacement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Warning - General - When using a press

warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
LG1 RSU Upper Bearing
  1. Rear suspension unit upper mounting

  2. Bush

Removal

  1. Using a suitable press, remove the upper mounting bush.

Installation

caution
When installing the upper mounting bush, ensure bush is pressed in by its outer sleeve.Pressing the bush in by its inner sleeves will cause irreparable damage to the bush.
note
Ensure that the upper mounting bore is clean and free of debris before installing a new bush.
  1. Install the new bush using a suitable press.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Suspension Unit - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

RSU Install LG1; LGX

  1. Refit the rear suspension unit to the motorcycle and refit the fixings with new lock nuts.
  2. RSU Fixings_1 (ckwy)
    1. Upper fixing

    2. Rear suspension unit

    3. Lower fixing

  3. Raise the swinging arm as high as the slack in the linkage units will allow. This will ensure the rear suspension unit and rear suspension linkages are sat in their correct seating position. Support with a suitable block.
  4. If required, tighten the drag link and rocker centre fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
  5. Tighten the rocker pivot fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
  6. Tighten drag link lower fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
  7. Drag and Drop Links LG1_1 (ckwu)
    1. Drag link lower fixing

    2. Drag link

    3. Drag link and rocker centre fixing

    4. Rocker

    5. Rocker pivot fixing

  8. Tighten the rear suspension unit lower fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
  9. Tighten the rear suspension unit upper fixing to 48 Nm whilst holding the lock nut.
  10. If removed, refit the left hand control plate and tighten the fixings to 24 Nm.
  11. Check the condition of the drive chain rubbing strip and replace if necessary.
  12. Install the drive chain rubbing strip to the swinging arm and install the front fixing.
  13. Chain rubbing strip front LG1_1 (ckvz)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

  14. Install the plate, flanged sleeve and fixing to the drive chain rubbing strip. Tighten the front and rear fixings to 4 Nm.
  15. Chain rubbing strip rear LG1_1 (ckwt)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

    3. Flanged sleeve

    4. Plate

  16. Refit the rear hugger and chain guard with two fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
  17. Rear Hugger LG1_1 (ckwb)
    1. Rear hugger and chain guard

    2. Fixings

  18. Refit the rear suspension unit guard to the rear hugger and secure with the two plastic rivets.
  19. Rear RSU Guard LG1_1 (ckwi)
    1. Rear suspension unit guard

    2. Plastic rivets

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Drag Link and Rocker - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Remove the two fixings and remove the left hand control plate.
  2. Remove the lower drag link fixing and discard the lock nut.
  3. Remove the rocker pivot fixing and discard the lock nut.
  4. Remove the drag link and rocker assembly.
  5. If required, remove the drag and rocker centre fixing and discard the lock nut. Separate the drag link and rocker.
  6. Drag and Drop Links LG1_1 (ckwu)
    1. Drag link lower fixing

    2. Drag link

    3. Drag link and rocker centre fixing

    4. Rocker

    5. Rocker pivot fixing

Drag Link Bearing Replacement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series

Warning - General - When using a press

warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
LG1 Drag Link Bearings
  1. Drag link

  2. Seals

  3. Needle roller bearings

  4. Bearing sleeve

Removal

  1. Remove the drag link bearing sleeve and seals. Discard the seals.
  2. Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearings.

Installation

note
The drag link bearings are 'dry fit' bearings and grease or other forms of lubrication should not be used during installation. However, a thin smear of multi-purpose NLGI 2 specification grease should be added to the bearing sleeve and seals.Service tool T3880368 - Bearing Installer is required to install the new bearings to the correct depth.Insert bearings with the marked or shielded side facing outwards and always fit new bearing seals.Ensure that the bearing bore is clean and free of debris before installing new bearings.
  1. Install the new bearings (marked side facing outwards) to the correct depth using service tool T3880368 and a suitable press.
  2. Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeves.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series

Rocker Bearing Replacement

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series

Warning - General - When using a press

warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
LG1 Drop Link Bearings
  1. Drop link

  2. Seals

  3. Needle roller bearings

  4. Bearing sleeve (drag link mounting)

Removal

  1. Remove the drop link bearing sleeves and seals. Discard the seals.
  2. Using a suitable press, remove the needle roller bearings.

Installation

note
The drop link bearings are 'dry fit' bearings and grease or other forms of lubrication should not be used during installation. However, a thin smear of multi-purpose NLGI 2 specification grease should be added to the bearing sleeve and seals.Service tool T3880368 - Bearing Installer is required to install the new bearings to the correct depth.Insert bearings with the marked or shielded side facing outwards and always fit new bearing seals.Ensure that the bearing bore is clean and free of debris before installing new bearings.
  1. Install the new bearings (marked side facing outwards) to the correct depth using service tool T3880368 and a suitable press.
  2. Fit new bearing seals and carefully insert the bearing sleeves.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series

Drag Link and Rocker - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
The fixings for the drag link and rocker are tightened during installation of the rear suspension unit. See Rear Suspension Unit - Installation.
  1. If required, refit the drag link and rocker centre fixing with a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
  2. Refit the drag link and rocker assembly to the swinging arm and secure with the rocker pivot fixing and a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
  3. Refit the drag link lower fixing with a new lock nut. Do not tighten at this stage.
Drag and Drop Links LG1_1 (ckwu)
  1. Drag link lower fixing

  2. Drag link

  3. Drag link and rocker centre fixing

  4. Rocker

  5. Rocker pivot fixing

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Swinging Arm - Removal

Warning - Hot Exhaust

warning
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust components may be hot to the touch. Contact with the hot components may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, always allow the hot parts to cool before working on the exhaust system.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Raise the rear of the motorcycle and support under the frame and engine.Support the swinging arm to allow for removal of the rear wheel and rear suspension unit.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Exhaust - Removal L Series

Rear Mudguard - Removal LG1; LGX

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

Drag and Drop Links - Removal L Series

Swinging Arm Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the harness conduit from the swinging arm and remove the cable ties. Note the routing of the harness for installation and position the harness to one side.
  2. Swinging Arm LH Side_1 (ckxc)
    1. Fir tree clips

    2. Harness conduit

    3. Harness

    4. Cable ties

  3. Remove the swinging arm pivot covers from the frame.
  4. SwingArm Pivot Cover_1 (ckyc)
    1. Swinging arm pivot cover (left hand side shown)

  5. Remove the nut and washer from the swinging arm spindle.
  6. Swinging Arm Pivot Bolt_1 (ckyu)
    1. Nut

    2. Swinging arm spindle

  7. Partially withdraw the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side, to allow access to the frame adjuster sleeve located on the left hand side of the frame.
  8. Engage service tool T3880104 in the slots of the frame adjuster sleeve and rotate anticlockwise to loosen the sleeve fully.
  9. Swing Arm Adjuster_1 (ckwz)
    1. Frame adjuster sleeve

    2. T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench

    caution
    Care must be taken when removing the swinging arm, not to damage any brake hoses or electrical harnesses that are routed in close proximity to the swinging arm.
  10. Support the swinging arm and remove the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side of the motorcycle.
  11. Remove the swinging arm clear of the motorcycle and drive chain.

Swinging Arm - Inspection

  1. Check all swinging arm bearings for damage, pitting, and cracks. Replace as necessary.
  2. Check the swinging arm for damage. Replace as necessary.
  3. Check all bearing seals for damage, splits etc. Replace as necessary.
  4. Check the drive chain rubbing strip for wear and damage. Replace as necessary.

Swinging Arm - Disassembly

  1. Remove the bush, bearing sleeve and seal from the left hand side.
  2. Remove the bush, bearing sleeve and seal from the right hand side.
  3. Remove the right hand side needle roller bearing by drifting through from the left.
  4. Remove the spacer tube.
  5. Remove the left hand side needle roller bearing by drifting through from the right.
  6. LG1 Swinging Arm Bearings
    1. Bush

    2. Sleeve

    3. Seal

    4. Needle roller bearing

    5. Spacer tube

Swinging Arm - Assembly

    LG1 Swinging Arm Bearings
    1. Bush

    2. Sleeve

    3. Seal

    4. Needle roller bearing

    5. Spacer tube

  1. Install the spacer tube, needle roller bearings (marked faces outwards), seals, sleeves and bushes into the swinging arm in the order shown above. Use new seals throughout.

Swinging Arm - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
caution
Care must be taken when positioning the swinging arm, not to damage any brake hoses or electrical harnesses that are routed in close proximity to the swinging arm.

Swinging Arm Install LG1; LGX

  1. Position the swinging arm to the frame ensuring the drive chain is in position on the rubbing strip.
  2. Refit the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side such that it will support the swinging arm, but not pass all the way through the frame adjuster sleeve. This will allow service tool T3880104 to engage in the slot in the frame adjuster sleeve.
  3. Using service tool T3880104, tighten the frame adjuster sleeve to 6 Nm.
  4. Swing Arm Adjuster_1 (ckwz)
    1. Frame adjuster

    2. T3880104 - Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench

  5. Fully insert the swinging arm spindle.
  6. Fit the washer and a new lock nut and tighten to 110 Nm.
  7. Refit the swinging arm pivot covers.
  8. Route the harness to the swinging arm as noted during removal.
  9. Refit the conduit with the two fir tree clips and fit two new cable ties.
  10. Swinging Arm LH Side_1 (ckxc)
    1. Fir tree clips

    2. Harness conduit

    3. Harness

    4. Cable ties

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Drag and Drop Links - Installation L Series

Exhaust - Installation L Series

Rear Mudguard - Installation LG1; LGX

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Brakes

Exploded Views

Exploded View – Front Brake Caliper and Brake Discs

Exploded View - Front Brake Calipers and Discs

Exploded View - Front Brake Master Cylinder

Exploded View - Front Brake Master Cylinder

Exploded View – Rear Brake Caliper and Brake Disc

Exploded View - Rear Brake Caliper

Exploded View - Rear Brake Master Cylinder

Exploded View - Rear Brake Master Cylinder

Exploded View - ABS System

Exploded View - ABS System

Braking System Maintenance and Safety

Braking System Maintenance Safety Precautions

warning
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb moisture from the air. The absorbed moisture will greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid causing a reduction in braking efficiency. Replace brake fluid in line with the Scheduled Maintenance chart. If this important maintenance item is neglected, a dangerous riding condition could result.Do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork as this will damage any painted or plastic surface. Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container and never use fluid from an unsealed container or from one that has been previously opened. Do not mix different brands or types of fluid. Check for fluid leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints. Check regularly for brake hose damage.FAILURE TO OBSERVE ANY OF THE ABOVE WARNINGS MAY REDUCE BRAKING EFFICIENCY LEADING TO LOSS OF MOTORCYCLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT.
warning
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the fluid in either brake fluid reservoir, consult your authorised Triumph dealer before riding.If the brake lever or pedal feels soft when it is applied, or if the lever/pedal travel becomes excessive, there may be air in the brake lines or the brake may be defective. It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle under such conditions and you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the Specifications section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Failure to change the brake fluid at the interval specified in the Scheduled Maintenance chart may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Never use mineral-based grease in any part of the braking system or in any area where contact with the braking system is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders. Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders.If this warning is ignored, a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result.
warning
A magnetised brake disc and/or a magnetised ABS pulser ring may cause problems with the ABS sensor which will illuminate the ABS warning light and disable the ABS.To prevent these parts becoming magnetised, we strongly recommend that magnets, and items that contain magnets, must not be stored near or placed on brake discs or ABS pulser rings.This includes parts fitted to motorcycles, parts removed during motorcycle service and new parts in dealer stores.Examples of items that may contain magnets, are listed below:∙Alternator rotor∙Magnetic fuel tank bags∙Audio speakers∙Magnetic dial test indicator stand∙Magnetic parts tray.If the ABS is not functioning, the brake system will continue to function as a non-ABS braking system. Do not continue to ride for longer than is necessary with the indicator light illuminated. Ride with extreme caution when performing diagnostic troubleshooting on a non-functioning ABS system. In this situation braking too hard can cause the wheels to lock resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Changing Brake Fluid

Brake fluid must be changed every two calendar years, irrespective of the mileage the motorcycle has covered in that time.

Bleeding the Front Brakes

Brake Fluid Replacement - Routine Maintenance

Braking performance reduces as brake fluid ages, Repeated stops cause brake fluid to heat and cool rapidly reducing braking performance.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture over a period of time and becomes contaminated as it ages.

Therefore brake fluid should be replaced at specified intervals as instructed in the routine maintenance schedule, see Brake Fluid - Renew.

Brake Bleeding - Description

Brake Bleeding

When removing or replacing brake components and the brake line is opened air will enter as fluid escapes.

If the brake bleed procedure is not carried out air can become trapped in the brake fluid.

A consequence of air being trapped in the brake system is that the brake can feel soft/spongy and the performance of the brakes will be reduced.

Bleeding The Brakes - General Warning, Cautions and Notes

warning
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb moisture from the air. Only use new DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container, do not mix different brands of brake fluid and never use brake fluid from an unsealed container or from one that has been previously opened.Any absorbed moisture will greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid.Moisture in the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Do not allow dirt or debris to enter the braking system when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Always maintain absolute cleanliness as this will adversely affect the brake fluid's properties.Contaminated brake fluid may cause a reduction in brake performance leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
During bleeding, do not allow the brake fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the reservoir.If the fluid level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and the sequence of bleeding must be repeated.Trapped air in the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Check for fluid leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints. Leaks around fittings and joints may allow air to enter the brake system.Air entering the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
caution
Do not attempt to maintain brake fluid pressure by securing the brake lever to the handlebar or the brake pedal using a band or strap.Banding or strapping the brake lever or pedal may deform the piston seals in the caliper.Lever or pedal travel that is increased or reduced may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.Close the brake reservoir and wash any spilled brake fluid immediately with warm soapy water. Spilled brake fluid, if left, will damage painted and plastic surfaces.
caution
Pressure applied to the brake lever or caliper pistons during the bleeding process must be applied and removed smoothly and slowly. It must take a minimum of five seconds between lever positions (from fully released to stop).Failure to follow these instructions can allow air to be drawn in to the system through the bleed screw threads.
note
An additional technician is required to monitor the fluid level and operate the brake lever or pedal when bleeding the brakes.The bleed screws should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pulling the brake lever or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.

Front Brake Bleed Procedure Table

The following table indicates the procedure to follow when carrying out repairs or replacement of the following brake components.

Brake Bleed Procedure Table

When replacing/fitting the

Bleed the brakes as follows:

ABS Modulator

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Back bleed master cylinder

Brake master cylinder bleed1

Bleed brake caliper(s)

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

Master Cylinder

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Back bleed master cylinder

Brake master cylinder bleed1

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

-

Brake Caliper(s)

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Bleed brake caliper(s)

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

-

-

Brake Hose/line(s)

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Brake master cylinder bleed1

Bleed brake caliper(s)

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Front Brake Lever Setting

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

-

1 For models with a front brake master cylinder bleed screw only.

Front Brake Lever Setting

note
Note the rider's preferred span and ratio settings of the brake lever adjusters in order that they can be returned to the same position when the bleeding operation is complete.
  1. Note the rider's setting of the brake lever adjuster.
  2. Set the brake lever adjuster to position No. 1.
  3. Once the bleeding operation is complete, reset the brake lever adjuster to the rider's preferred setting as noted prior to setting the maximum adjustment.
Brake lever adjuster cjev
  1. Adjuster wheel

  2. Arrow mark

Front Brake Fluid Cap Removal

  1. Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a level position.
  2. Front brake reservoir, kabi_3
    1. Front reservoir upper level

    2. Front reservoir lower level

    3. Screws

  3. Remove the screws from the brake reservoir cover.
  4. Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
  5. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the reservoir. Replace if necessary.

Master Cylinder Back Bleed

  1. Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
  2. Front brake caliper mounting bolts (ckwv)
    1. Brake pad retaining pin

    2. Brake caliper fixings

  3. Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
  4. Being careful not to damage the brake pad material, use the metal plate against the brake pads to push the caliper pistons in evenly and apply pressure to the system.
  5. warning
    During bleeding, do not allow the brake fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the reservoir.If the fluid level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and the sequence of bleeding must be repeated.Trapped air in the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  6. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until no more air appears in the reservoir.
  7. Refit the front brake caliper (see Front Brake Caliper - Installation).

Front Brake Caliper Bleed

  1. Remove the rubber cap from the bleed nipple on the right hand caliper.
  2. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed nipple.
  3. Front brake bleed, HD front caliper bleed
    1. Bleed nipple

    2. Bleed tube

    3. Container

  4. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
  5. note
    The bleed screws should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pulling the brake lever or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.
  6. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
  7. Briefly open and close the caliper bleed screw slightly as per the note.
  8. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
  9. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever another five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
  10. Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake lever.
  11. Leave the bleed screw slightly open and slowly release the brake lever.
  12. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake lever another five times, closing the bleed screw on the final application.
  13. Repeat steps 4 to 11 until no more air appears in the bleed tube.
  14. Tighten the bleed screw to the 6 Nm.
  15. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
  16. Repeat front brake caliper bleed for the left hand caliper.
  17. Remove the transparent bleed tube.

Final Bleed Procedure

  1. Repeat the bleed procedure as detailed in Front Brake Caliper Bleed.
  2. If brake lever travel is unacceptably high, repeat the front brake bleed procedure.
  3. If the brake lever travel is acceptable, refit the front brake reservoir cover and tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm.
  4. warning
    Always return the lever adjuster to the original setting. Operating the motorcycle with lever settings which are unfamiliar may lead to loss of control or an accident.
  5. Check that the brakes operate correctly. Rectify as necessary.
  6. warning
    It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Front Brake Caliper Conditioning

    warning
    Make sure no damage is made to the brake pad material when moving the brake pads.Allowing the brake pads to come into contact with each other or sharp objects may cause the material to crack or break.Damage to the brake pads may result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. On the right hand side caliper, using a suitable tool, push the caliper pistons 1-2 mm into the caliper body by forcing the brake pads apart.
  2. Operate the brake lever to pump the pistons back out until the brake pads come into contact with the brake disc.
  3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 on the same caliper until the pistons have been pushed in and out three times.
  4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the left hand side caliper.
  5. Slowly apply front brake lever to the handlebar and maintain that pressure for approximately five seconds. Slowly release the lever, and leave for 30 seconds. Repeat three times.

Brake Fluid Cap - Installation

  1. Fit the diaphragm seal into the reservoir cap and make sure that the holes for the fixings in the cap and the diaphragm seal are correctly aligned.
  2. Install the fixings into the cap and diaphragm seal assembly.
  3. Hold the assembly together and position the cap, diaphragm seal and fixings onto the reservoir.
  4. Front Brake Reservoir Fixings (kabi_4)
    1. Fixings

  5. Tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.

Bleeding the Rear Brakes

Brake Fluid Replacement - Routine Maintenance

Braking performance reduces as brake fluid ages, Repeated stops cause brake fluid to heat and cool rapidly reducing braking performance.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture over a period of time and becomes contaminated as it ages.

Therefore brake fluid should be replaced at specified intervals as instructed in the routine maintenance schedule, see Brake Fluid - Renew.

Brake Bleeding - Description

Brake Bleeding

When removing or replacing brake components and the brake line is opened air will enter as fluid escapes.

If the brake bleed procedure is not carried out air can become trapped in the brake fluid.

A consequence of air being trapped in the brake system is that the brake can feel soft/spongy and the performance of the brakes will be reduced.

notice
Always renew the brake fluid at the interval specified in the routine maintenance schedule.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.
warning
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb moisture from the air. Only use new DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container, do not mix different brands of brake fluid and never use brake fluid from an unsealed container or from one that has been previously opened.Any absorbed moisture will greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid.Moisture in the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Do not allow dirt or debris to enter the braking system when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir Always maintain absolute cleanliness as this will adversely affect the brake fluid's properties.Contaminated brake fluid may cause a reduction in brake performance leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
During bleeding, do not allow the brake fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the reservoir.If the fluid level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and the sequence of bleeding must be repeated.Trapped air in the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Check for fluid leakage around brake fittings, seals and joints. Leaks around fittings and joints may allow air to enter the brake system.Air entering the braking system may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
caution
Do not attempt to maintain brake fluid pressure by securing the brake lever to the handlebar or the brake pedal using a band or strap.Banding or strapping the brake lever or pedal may deform the piston seals in the caliper.Lever or pedal travel that is increased or reduced may a cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.Close the brake reservoir and wash any spilled brake fluid immediately with warm soapy water. Spilled brake fluid, if left, will damage painted and plastic surfaces.
caution
Pressure applied to the brake lever or caliper pistons during the bleeding process must be applied and removed smoothly and slowly. It must take a minimum of five seconds between lever positions (from fully released to stop).Failure to follow these instructions can allow air to be drawn in to the system through the bleed screw threads.
notice
An additional technician is required to monitor the fluid level and operate the brake lever or pedal when bleeding the brakes.The bleed screws should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pulling the brake lever or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.

Rear Brake Bleed Procedure Table

The following table indicates the procedure to follow when carrying out repairs or replacement of the following brake components.

Rear Brake Bleed Procedure Table

When replacing/fitting the

Bleed the brakes as follows:

ABS Modulator

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Back bleed front and rear master cylinders

Bleed brake caliper

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

Master Cylinder

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Back bleed master cylinder

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

-

Brake Caliper

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Bleed brake caliper

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

-

Brake Hose/Line(s)

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

Back bleed master cylinder

Bleed brake caliper

Final bleed procedure

Brake caliper conditioning

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

Brake Fluid Cap Removal

  1. Unscrew and remove the rear brake reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
  2. Carefully remove the diaphragm seal.
  3. Check the condition of the diaphragm seal. Replace if necessary.
  4. Rear brake reservoir, chrk_1
    1. Rear reservoir

    2. Rear reservoir upper level

    3. Rear reservoir lower level

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Back Bleed

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

    caution
    When disconnecting the brake hose from the master cylinder it is necessary to keep the open end of the hose above the height of the rear brake master cylinder.Allowing the brake hose to fall below the rear brake master cylinder height will allow an excessive amount of air to enter into the brake system. Trapped air may cause the brake lever to feel spongy and contribute to reduced braking efficiency.
    note
    Note the position of the rear brake caliper for installation.
  1. Remove the brake caliper and carrier assembly.
  2. Rear Caliper Align_1 (ckvh)
    1. Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity

    2. Swinging arm slot

    3. Caliper carrier groove

    warning
    Make sure no damage is made to the brake pad material when moving the brake pads.Allowing the brake pads to come into contact with each other or sharp objects may cause the material to crack or break.Damage to the brake pads may result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  3. Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
  4. Being careful not to damage the brake pad material, use the metal plate against the brake pads to push the caliper pistons in evenly.
  5. Push the pistons into the caliper to apply pressure to the system.
  6. Position the rear brake caliper and carrier to the swinging arm as noted prior to removal. Align the groove in the carrier with the boss on the swinging arm.
  7. Rear Caliper Align_1 (ckvh)
    1. Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity

    2. Swinging arm slot

    3. Caliper carrier groove

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Rear Brake Caliper Bleed

  1. Remove the rubber cap from the caliper bleed screw.
  2. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed screw.
  3. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable container containing new brake fluid.
  4. Bleeding the Rear Brakes, (cbgk2)
    1. Bleed screw

    2. Spanner

    3. Bleed tube

    notice
    The bleed screw should only be opened by a small angle, just enough to allow system pressure to drop. When pulling the brake pedal or pushing the caliper pistons in, some resistance should be felt indicating that the screw is not opened too much.
  5. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
  6. Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake pedal.
  7. Close the bleed screw.
  8. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times, maintaining pressure on the final application.
  9. Open the bleed screw slightly to allow fluid to flow out but to still feel resistance in the brake pedal.
  10. Leave the bleed screw slightly open and slowly release the brake pedal.
  11. Slowly apply and slowly release pressure to the brake pedal five times.
  12. Close the bleed screw.
  13. Repeat steps 4 to 11 until no more air appears in the bleed tube/container.
  14. With the brake pedal still applied tighten the bleed screw to 6 Nm.
  15. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
  16. Remove the transparent bleed tube.

Rear Brake Final Bleed Procedure

  1. Repeat the bleed procedure as detailed in Rear Caliper Bleed .
  2. If brake pedal travel is unacceptably high, bleed the rear brake as detailed in Rear Master Cylinder Back Bleed.
  3. If brake pedal travel is acceptable, refit the rear brake reservoir cover.

Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes.The fault must be checked and rectified by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Brake Caliper Conditioning

  1. Using a suitable tool, push the rear brake caliper pistons 1-2 mm into the caliper body by forcing the brake pads apart.
  2. Rear Brake Back Bleed LG1 (ckwx)
    1. Brake pad

    2. Brake caliper

  3. Operate the brake pedal to pump the pistons back out until the brake pads come into contact with the brake disc.
  4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on the caliper until the pistons have been pushed in and out three times.
  5. Slowly apply the rear brake pedal to the stop and maintain that pressure for approximately five seconds. Slowly release the pedal, and leave for 30 seconds. Repeat three times.

Brake Fluid Cap Installation

    caution
    To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.Close the brake reservoir and wash any spilled brake fluid immediately with warm soapy water. Spilled brake fluid, if left, will damage painted and plastic surfaces.
  1. Check the condition of the brake fluid cap sealing diaphragm. Replace the diaphragm if necessary.
  2. Refit the rear brake reservoir cap.
  3. Rear brake reservoir, chrk_1
    1. Rear reservoir

    2. Rear reservoir upper level

    3. Rear reservoir lower level

Brake Pads Wear

Front and rear brake pad wear is automatically compensated for and has no effect on brake lever or pedal action.

Front Brake Discs - Wear

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Wear

  1. Replace any brake disc if it is worn beyond the service limit or exceeds the disc run-out limit.
Table

Front Brake Disc Thickness

Standard

4.5 mm

Service Limit

4.0 mm

Table

Front Brake Disc Run-out

Service Limit:

0.25 mm

Measure disc run out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.

Front Discs (gaeb)
  1. Disc

  2. Dial gauge

Rear Brake Disc - Wear

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or that exceeds the disc run-out limit.

Rear Brake Disc Thickness

Standard

5.5 mm

Service Limit

5.0 mm

Rear Brake Disc Run-out

Service Limit

0.25 mm

Measure brake disc run-out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.

Rear Brake Disc Wear Check, ciaq
  1. Disc

  2. Dial gauge

Breaking-in New Brake Pads and Discs

After replacement brake discs and/or pads have been fitted to the motorcycle, we recommend a period of careful breaking-in that will optimise the performance and longevity of the discs and pads. The recommended distance for breaking in new pads and discs is 200 miles (300 km).

After fitting new brake discs and/or pads avoid extreme braking, ride with caution and allow for greater braking distances during the breaking-in period.

Front ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement

  1. Using feeler gauges, measure the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring.
  2. Air gap measurement
    1. ABS sensor (front sensor shown)

    2. Shim

    3. Pulser ring

    4. Fixing

  3. Rotate the wheel and repeat the measurement in several places to ensure the pulser ring is not distorted or bent. Renew a damaged pulser ring.
  4. Adjust the air gap using the correct shim to achieve an air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm.
  5. Shims are available in the following sizes:
  6. * shims - 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm.
  7. If necessary, remove the wheel speed sensor, fit the correct thickness shim and refit the wheel speed sensor and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  8. Repeat the air gap measurement. Readjust as necessary.

Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement

Air Gap Measurement

caution
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad lining material. Always use a levering tool made from a soft material which will not cause damage to the load bearing surfaces.
  1. Using feeler gauges, measure the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring.
  2. Rear ABS Air Gap

    ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Air Gap Measurement

  3. Rotate the wheel and repeat the measurement in several places to ensure the pulser ring is not distorted or bent. Renew a damaged pulser ring.
  4. Adjust the air gap using the correct shim to achieve an air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm.
  5. note
    Shims are available in the following sizes, 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 1.5 mm, and 2.0 mm.
  6. If necessary, remove the wheel speed sensor, fit the correct thickness shim and refit the wheel speed sensor and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  7. Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation (cguu_2)
    1. Fixing

    2. ABS sensor

    3. Shim

  8. Repeat the air gap measurement. Re-adjust as necessary.

ABS Diagnostics

Pin Point Tests

Link to Diagnostics Chapter

Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.

Removal and Installation - Front Brake Components

Front Brake Pads - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Brakes - Unsupported brake lines

warning
Do not allow a brake component to hang unsupported on the brake hose or line.Brake hoses or lines that are not supported may become damaged or bent.Bent or damaged brake hoses or lines lead to reduced braking efficiency causing loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. Loosen the brake pad retaining pin.
  2. Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
  3. Front brake caliper mounting bolts (ckwv)
    1. Brake pad retaining pin

    2. Brake caliper fixings

  4. Remove the brake pad retaining pin and remove the brake pads from the caliper. Take care not to lose the brake pad retainer from the mounting bracket or the anti-rattle spring from the brake caliper.
  5. Front brake pads cjvb
    1. Brake caliper

    2. Outer brake pad

    3. Inner brake pad

    4. Anti-rattle spring

    5. Brake pad retainer

    6. Brake pad retaining pin

note
Complete the installation of the brake pads to one caliper (see Front Brake Pads - Installation) before removing the pads from the other caliper.

Front Brake Pads - Inspection

  • Check the brake pad anti-rattle spring, brake pad retainer and retaining pin. Renew any component which shows signs of damage or corrosion.

Front Brake Pads - Installation

Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material

warning
Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.The ABS calibration is optimised for use with the friction material provided on brake pads supplied by Triumph.The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as differing friction material specifications will affect the performance of the ABS, potentially causing loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness

warning
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph are specifically designed for use with the brake calipers fitted to your motorcycle. The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as these may have a reduced carrier plate thickness when compared with the Triumph genuine parts. Brake pads with an incorrect carrier plate thickness can potentially become dislodged from the caliper body as they wear, leading to brake failure, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Caution - Brakes - lever against brake disc

caution
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad lining material as this will damage these components. Always use a levering tool made from a soft material which will not cause damage to the load bearing surfaces. Brake fluid will be displaced as the caliper pistons are compressed. To prevent body damage, ensure that the displaced fluid does not come into contact with any part of the bodywork.
  1. If new brake pads are being installed, push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Keep an eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
  2. Ensure the brake pad retainer is correctly fitted to the mounting bracket and the anti-rattle spring is securely clipped onto the caliper body.
  3. warning
    Do not apply more than a minimum coating of grease to the pad retaining pin. Excess grease may contaminate the brake pads, hydraulic seals and brake discs causing reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  4. Lubricate the brake pad retaining pin with a thin smear of proprietary high temperature copper based grease.
  5. Fit the brake pads to the brake caliper with their friction material surfaces facing each other. Locate the brake pad upper ends in the mounting bracket retainer then align them with the caliper body and insert the retaining pin.
  6. Slide the brake caliper onto the brake disc, ensuring the brake pads pass either side of the brake disc, fit the fixings and tighten to 21 Nm.
  7. Tighten the brake pad retaining pin to 18 Nm.
  8. Front brake caliper mounting bolts (ckwv)
    1. Brake pad retaining pin

    2. Brake caliper fixings

  9. Pump the brake lever to correctly position the caliper pistons.
  10. warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident. Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given in the general information section (see Brakes).
    caution
    To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  11. Check the front brake fluid level and top up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
  12. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Front Brake Caliper - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  1. Disconnect the brake hose at the front caliper and place the free end of the hose in a suitable container to collect the brake fluid. Discard the two sealing washers.
  2. note
    If removing the brake pads, loosen the brake pad retaining pin.
  3. Remove the caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
  4. Front brake caliper mounting bolts (ckwv)
    1. Brake pad retaining pin

    2. Brake caliper fixings

  5. If required, remove the brake pads (see Front Brake Pads - Removal).

Front Brake Caliper - Disassembly

Warning - Brakes - Fingers inside caliper openings

warning
To prevent injury, never place fingers or hands inside the caliper opening when removing the pistons. Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using compressed air. Eye, face and skin damage will result from direct contact with compressed air.
  1. Separate the caliper and mounting bracket.
  2. Cover the brake caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth and, using either compressed air or by reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever, eject both pistons from the caliper at the same time.
  3. Front Caliper disassembly
    1. Dust seals

    2. Piston seals

    3. Pistons

    warning
    Ensure the seal grooves in the caliper bores are not damaged during the removal of the seals. Damage to the seal grooves may allow brake fluid to leak past the seals resulting in a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  4. Extract the dust seals and piston seals, taking care not to damage the brake caliper bores.
  5. Check the pistons, caliper and mounting bracket for signs of damage, paying particular attention to the caliper bores and pistons. If damage is present, renew the worn component or the complete caliper assembly.

Front Brake Caliper - Inspection

Warning Brakes - Caliper Seals

warning
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal from the caliper.An effective hydraulic seal can only be made if new components are used.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion, scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
  2. Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond the service limit. Renew as necessary.

Front Brake Caliper - Assembly

  1. If all components are serviceable, obtain a piston seal kit and reassemble the caliper as follows:
  2. warning
    Always renew caliper seals after removal of the pistons. An effective hydraulic seal can only be made if new seals are fitted.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
    warning
    Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
  3. Ensure all components are clean, then fit the new seals to their grooves in the caliper bores.
  4. Lubricate the fluid seals, caliper bore and the outside of the pistons with clean DOT 4 brake fluid.
  5. Ease the pistons squarely back into the bores, taking care not to displace the seals.
  6. warning
    Never use mineral based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders. Damage caused by contact with mineral based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  7. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with a suitable silicone based brake grease then reassemble the bracket and caliper. Ensure the pin gaiters are correctly located on both the bracket and caliper.
  8. front brake caliper assembly cfgg_2
    1. Caliper sliding pin

    2. Caliper bracket sliding pin

Front Brake Caliper - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Front Brake Caliper Install - LG1; LGX

  1. If removed, fit the brake pads (see Front Brake Pads - Installation).
  2. Slide the brake caliper onto the brake disc, ensuring the brake pads pass either side of the brake disc, fit the fixings and tighten to 21 Nm.
  3. If removed, tighten the brake pad retaining pin to 18 Nm.
  4. Front brake caliper mounting bolts
    1. Brake pad retaining pin

    2. Brake caliper fixings

  5. Connect the brake hose to the caliper incorporating new sealing washers on each side of the brake hose union.
  6. Tighten the brake hose union to 25 Nm.
warning
Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid.The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids may reduce the efficiency of the braking system.

Notice - Do not spill brake fluid

notice
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  • Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container.

  • Bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes).

  • Check the brakes for correct operation. Rectify any faults as necessary.

Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes.The fault must be checked and rectified by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Front Brake Disc - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Brakes - Renewing Brake Discs in Pairs

warning
Do not renew front brake discs individually. Discs must always be renewed in pairs even if one of a pair is serviceable.A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
note
The fixings securing the right hand brake disc to the wheel also secure the ABS pulser ring. Note the orientation of the brake discs and the ABS pulser ring for installation.
  1. Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Removal).
  2. Support the wheel on blocks as illustrated to avoid damage to the wheel centre.
  3. Front Wheel Supported on Blocks (ceii_2.svg)
    1. Wheel

    2. Support blocks

  4. Remove and discard the five fixings and remove the brake disc.
  5. Repeat for the other disc.
  6. Collect the ABS pulser ring from the right hand brake disc.

Front Brake Disc - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the right hand brake disc and ABS pulser ring to the wheel as noted during removal.
  2. Fit new fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
  3. Fit the other disc in the same way.
  4. Refit the front wheel (see Front Wheel - Installation).
  5. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS pulser ring (see Front ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
  6. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Front Brake Master Cylinder - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.

Front Master Cyl Remove - LG1; LGX

  1. Note the setting of the brake lever adjuster to make sure it is returned to the same position when the overhaul operation is complete.
  2. note
    One of the brake calipers will require removing and the pistons pushed out to back bleed the master cylinder as part of the brake bleeding procedure, see Bleeding the Front Brakes.
  3. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and slide the caliper off the brake disc.
  4. Front brake caliper mounting bolts (ckwv)
    1. Caliper mounting bolts

    2. Brake pad retaining pin

  5. Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
  6. caution
    When disconnecting the brake hose from the master cylinder it is necessary to keep the open end of the hose above the handlebars.Allowing the brake hose to fall below the handlebar height will allow an excessive amount of air to enter into the brake system. Trapped air may cause the brake lever to feel spongy and contribute to reduced braking efficiency.
  7. Noting its orientation for installation, disconnect the brake hose, discard the washers and allow the brake fluid to drain from the master cylinder outlet into a suitable container.
  8. note
    Note the position of the brake light switch and bracket for installation.
  9. Release the fixing and remove the brake light switch and bracket.
  10. Front brake switch and bracket, L0378
    1. Brake light switch

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

  11. Remove the pivot lock nut and bolt securing the brake lever to the master cylinder, and remove the lever.
  12. Release the clamp screws from the handlebar to remove the master cylinder.

Front Brake Master Cylinder - Disassembly

  1. Detach the rubber boot from the lever end of the cylinder.
  2. Remove the circlip from beneath the boot.
  3. Master cylinder circlip (ceqt.svg)
    1. Circlip

  4. Remove the piston set from the master cylinder bore noting the relative position of the seals and piston components.
  5. Master cylinder exploded (cequ.svg)
    1. Master cylinder

    2. Spring and piston assembly

    3. Circlip

    4. Rubber boot

Front Brake Master Cylinder - Inspection

  1. Check the following for wear, damage, cracks or deterioration:
  2. * Cylinder bore
    * Rubber boot
    * Spring
    * Piston
    * Pivot bolt.
  3. Always renew the piston and seal set if the cylinder is dismantled.
  4. Check that the two ports in the master cylinder bore are not blocked.
  5. Front Brake Master Cylinder - Inspection (ceqq.svg)
    1. Ports

Front Brake Master Cylinder - Assembly

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid

warning
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
  1. Lubricate the piston and cylinder with new, clean brake fluid.
  2. warning
    Ensure that the piston and piston seal are fitted facing the same way as noted during removal. A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result from incorrect assembly of the master cylinder.
  3. Fit the new piston set into the master cylinder and retain with a new circlip.
  4. Refit the master cylinder boot.

Front Brake Master Cylinder - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Front Master Cyl Install

  1. Locate the master cylinder to the handlebars and position the clamp with the UP arrow pointing upwards.
  2. Align the master cylinder/clamp split line with the alignment mark on the handlebar.
  3. Front master cylinder alignment (L0379_1)
    1. UP arrow

    2. Alignment mark

  4. Tighten the clamp bolts, upper first and then the lower to 12 Nm.
  5. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum mark.
  6. Allow the brake fluid to flow through the master cylinder until fluid just starts to flow at the front brake hose union, collect any escaping fluid.
  7. Connect the brake hose to the master cylinder incorporating new sealing washers. Tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
  8. Refit the brake light switch and bracket to the master cylinder as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 2 Nm.
  9. Front brake switch and bracket, L0378
    1. Brake light switch

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

  10. Position the brake lever ensuring that the pivot boss is correctly aligned to the pushrod. Fit and tighten the pivot bolt to 1 Nm, and the lock nut to 6 Nm.
  11. warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.
  12. Fill and bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes).
  13. warning
    Always return the lever adjuster to the original setting noted during removal. Operating the motorcycle with lever settings which are unfamiliar may lead to loss of control or an accident.
  14. Reset the brake lever adjuster to the original setting.
  15. Examine the system for correct operation and fluid leaks. Rectify as necessary.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

  • Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Removal and Installation - Rear Brakes Components

Rear Brake Pads - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Before removing the brake pads, note the relationship of the pads to the caliper and ensure that, on assembly, they are fitted in the same way.
LG1 Rear Brake Pads_1 (ckww)
  1. Anti-rattle spring

  2. Rear brake caliper

  3. Brake pad retaining pin

  4. Brake pads

  1. Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
  2. Remove the brake pad retaining pin and remove the brake pads. Note the position of the anti-rattle spring
  3. For inspection and replacing the anti-rattle spring, remove the caliper (see Rear Brake Caliper - Removal).

Rear Brake Pads - Inspection

  1. Check the friction material of each brake pad for signs of contamination and measure its thickness. If the friction material of either pad is contaminated or has worn beyond the service limit, renew both pads as a set.
  2. Rear Brake Pad Wear DV (L0225)
    1. Friction material thickness (service limit 1.5 mm)

    2. Brake pads

  3. Check the retaining pin. Renew any component which shows signs of damage or corrosion.
  4. Check the caliper body slides easily on the mounting bracket pins and check there is no sign of leakage from the piston seal. Rectify any problems before installing the brake pads.

Rear Brake Pads - Installation

Warning - Brakes - Pad Friction Material

warning
Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.The ABS calibration is optimised for use with the friction material provided on brake pads supplied by Triumph.The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as differing friction material specifications will affect the performance of the ABS, potentially causing loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - Pad Carrier Plate Thickness

warning
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph are specifically designed for use with the brake calipers fitted to your motorcycle. The use of proprietary brands of brake pads is not recommended as these may have a reduced carrier plate thickness when compared with the Triumph genuine parts. Brake pads with an incorrect carrier plate thickness can potentially become dislodged from the caliper body as they wear, leading to brake failure, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  1. Make sure the anti-rattle spring is located as noted during removal.
  2. If fitting new pads, use hand pressure to compress the caliper piston fully into its bore. Keep an eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
  3. Fit the brake pads to the caliper in the positions noted during removal.
  4. warning
    Do not apply more than a minimum coating of grease to the pad retaining pins. Excess grease may contaminate the brake pads, hydraulic seals and discs causing reduced braking efficiency and an accident.
  5. Lubricate the pad retaining pin using a minimum amount of proprietary high temperature brake grease.
  6. Install the brake pad retaining pin and tighten to 18 Nm.
  7. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
  8. Pump the brake pedal to correctly position the caliper pistons.
  9. Check the brake fluid level in the rear reservoir and top-up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
  10. warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.
  11. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Rear Brake Caliper - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  1. Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
  2. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

  3. Disconnect the rear brake hose at the caliper and place the free end of the hose in a suitable container to collect the brake fluid. Discard the sealing washers.
  4. note
    Note the position of the rear brake caliper for installation.
  5. Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
  6. Remove the brake pads (see Rear Brake Pads - Removal).
  7. Remove the brake caliper and carrier assembly.
  8. Rear Caliper Align_1 (ckvh)
    1. Caliper carrier

    2. Swinging arm slot

    3. Caliper carrier groove

Rear Brake Caliper - Disassembly

The following items can be replaced on the rear brake caliper:

  • Anti-rattle spring

  • Piston, piston seal and dust seal

  • Bleed screw

  • Bleed screw boot.

  1. Release the two bolts and remove the caliper from the carrier.
  2. Rear Caliper and Carrier_1 (ckxm)
    1. Caliper carrier

    2. Anti-rattle spring

    3. Bolts

  3. Remove the anti-rattle spring.
  4. Cover the caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth and, using either compressed air, or by reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever, eject the piston from the caliper.
  5. warning
    Ensure the seal grooves in the caliper bore are not damaged during the removal of the seals. Damage to the seal grooves may allow brake fluid to leak past the seals resulting in a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  6. Extract the dust seal and piston seal, taking care not to damage the caliper bore.

Rear Brake Caliper - Inspection

Warning Brakes - Caliper Seals

warning
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal from the caliper.An effective hydraulic seal can only be made if new components are used.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion, scoring and damage. Renew as necessary.
  2. Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond the service limit. Renew as necessary.

Rear Brake Caliper - Assembly

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning - Brakes - caliper bores - Scratched

warning
Ensure that the caliper bores do not become scratched during piston removal and assembly. Ensure that the pistons remain square to their bores during fitment otherwise damage to the caliper could result. Loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.

Warning - Brakes - Clean and lubricate internal brake components with DOT 4 fluid

warning
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
  1. Fit new seals to the caliper. Apply brake fluid to the outside of the caliper piston and fluid seal.
  2. Rear Caliper Piston and Seals_B00805
    1. Caliper

    2. Piston seal

    3. Dust seal

    4. Piston

    warning
    Ensure that the piston does not tip during assembly as this could damage the caliper.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
  3. Carefully push the piston into the caliper by hand.
  4. If removed, install the anti-rattle spring into the caliper carrier.
  5. Assemble the caliper onto the carrier. Tighten the rear bolt to 22 Nm and the front bolt to 29 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Brake Caliper - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Position the caliper and carrier assembly to the swinging arm as noted for removal. Align the boss on the carrier with the slot on the swinging arm.
  2. Rear Caliper Align_1 (ckvh)
    1. Caliper carrier

    2. Swinging arm slot

    3. Caliper carrier groove

  3. Fit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
  4. Fit the brake pads (see Rear Brake Pads - Installation).
  5. Connect the brake hose to the caliper incorporating new washers on each side of the union bolt.
  6. Tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
  7. Position the wheel speed sensor and bracket to the caliper carrier with its shim between the sensor and caliper carrier. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  8. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

    warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.
  9. Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container.
  10. Bleed the rear brake (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes).
  11. The air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring must be between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap (see Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
  12. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Rear Brake Disc - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Removal).
  2. Support the wheel on blocks to avoid damage to the wheel centre.
  3. Remove and discard the four screws and remove the ABS pulser ring and brake disc.
  4. Rear Wheel LG1_1 (ckxz)
    1. Brake disc

    2. Fixing

    3. ABS pulser ring

    note
    The fixings securing the rear brake disc to the wheel also secure the ABS pulser ring. Note the orientation of the brake disc and the ABS pulser ring for installation.

Rear Brake Disc - Inspection

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Brake Disc Wear

Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or that exceeds the disc run-out limit.

Rear Brake Disc Thickness

Standard:

5.5 mm

Service Limit:

5.0 mm

Rear Brake Disc Run-out

Service Limit:

0.25 mm

Measure disc run-out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.

Rear Brake Disc run out check (rear disc runout.svg)
  1. Disc

  2. Dial gauge

Rear Brake Disc - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the brake disc and ABS pulser ring to the rear wheel as noted during removal.
  2. Use service tool T3880172 to align the pulser ring and brake disc.
  3. Pulser Ring Alignment_1 (ckxi)
    1. Pulser ring

    2. Brake disc

    3. T3880172 - Pulser Ring Alignment Tool

  4. Install new fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
  5. Remove the service tool T3880172.
  6. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).
  7. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS pulser ring (see Rear ABS Sensor Air Gap Measurement).
  8. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Rear Brake Master Cylinder - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Master Cyl Remove - LG1; LGX

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
note
The brake caliper will require removing and the pistons pushed out to back bleed the master cylinder as part of the brake bleeding procedure, see Bleeding the Rear Brakes.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

    warning
    Make sure no damage is made to the brake pad material when moving the brake pads.Allowing the brake pads to come into contact with each other or sharp objects may cause the material to crack or break.Damage to the brake pads may result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  1. Using a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
  2. caution
    When disconnecting the brake hose from the master cylinder it is necessary to keep the open end of the hose above the height of the rear brake master cylinder.Allowing the brake hose to fall below the rear brake master cylinder height will allow an excessive amount of air to enter into the brake system. Trapped air may cause the brake lever to feel spongy and contribute to reduced braking efficiency.
  3. Noting its orientation for installation, disconnect the brake hose from the master cylinder, discard the washers and allow the brake fluid to drain from the master cylinder outlet into a suitable container.
  4. Remove and discard the rear master cylinder reservoir fixing and support the reservoir.
  5. Remove the two fixings and remove the right hand control plate and rear brake master cylinder assembly.
  6. note
    Note the routing of the rear brake switch harness for installation.
  7. Disconnect the rear brake switch from the main harness.
  8. Remove the two fixings and remove the rear brake switch and bracket from the control plate, noting the routing for installation. Position the brake switch and bracket to one side.
  9. Rear brake master cylinder and control plate_1 (ckxk)
    1. Fixings

    2. Rear brake switch bracket

    note
    Note the position and orientation of the clevis pin and clip for installation.
  10. Remove the clip and clevis pin at the lower end of the brake push rod.
  11. Remove the two fixings and remove the master cylinder from the control plate.
  12. Rear brake master cylinder and control plate_2_1 (ckxl)
    1. Fixings

    2. Clevis pin

    3. Clip

  13. Disconnect the reservoir hose from the master cylinder if required and collect any brake fluid.

Rear Master Cylinder - Disassembly

  1. Remove the dust boot from the cylinder and pushrod.
  2. Remove the circlip retaining the pushrod to the cylinder.
  3. Remove the pushrod and piston set from the master cylinder bore noting the relative position of the seals and piston components.
  4. Rear Master Cylinder Breakdown LG1
    1. Rear brake master cylinder

    2. Piston set

    3. Push rod

    4. Circlip

    5. Dust boot

    6. Brake switch plate

    7. Clip

    8. Clevis pin

Rear Master Cylinder - Inspection

  1. Visually inspect the master cylinder bore for wear, scratches or corrosion. Replace as necessary.
  2. Check the piston and cylinder bore for damage, wear or deterioration. Replace as necessary. Always renew the piston seals if the cylinder has been dismantled.
  3. Examine the pushrod for bends and damage. Replace as necessary.

Rear Master Cylinder - Assembly

Warning Brakes - Mineral based grease

warning
Never use mineral-based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral-based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master cylinders.Damage caused by contact with mineral-based grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and master cylinders.A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is ignored.

Rear Master Cylinder Assembly LG1; LGX

  1. Clean the master cylinder bore, piston and seals, with new brake fluid.
  2. Ensure all ports are clear of obstruction.
  3. warning
    Ensure that the piston and piston seal are fitted facing the same way as noted during removal. A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result from incorrect assembly of the master cylinder.
  4. Install the spring and piston set together.
  5. Apply a small amount of brake grease to the push rod.
  6. Install the push rod in the master cylinder and retain with a new circlip.
  7. Refit the dust boot.
  8. Rear Master Cylinder Breakdown LG1
    1. Rear brake master cylinder

    2. Piston set

    3. Push rod

    4. Circlip

    5. Dust boot

    6. Brake switch plate

    7. Clip

    8. Clevis pin

  9. If the push rod and brake switch plates have been disassembled, set the brake switch plate (A) to 39 mm and the push rod free length (B) to 91 mm, as shown below.
  10. Push rod setting_1 (ckxj)

    Push rod and brake switch plate setting dimensions

  11. Tighten the lock nuts to 17 Nm.

Rear Brake Master Cylinder - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.

Rear Master Cyl Install - LG1; LGX

  1. If required, refit the reservoir hose to the rear brake master cylinder.
  2. Align the rear brake pedal to the master cylinder push rod and secure with the clevis pin and clip as noted during removal.
  3. Secure the rear master cylinder to the control plate and tighten the fixings to 16 Nm.
  4. Rear brake master cylinder and control plate_2_1 (ckxl)
    1. Fixings

    2. Clevis pin

    3. Clip

  5. Refit the rear brake switch and bracket assembly to the control plate and loosely install the fixings. Make sure the routing of the harness is as noted during removal. Position the rear brake switch until it engages with the brake switch plate. The gap between the brake switch bracket and the brake switch plate should be 0.6 mm.
  6. Rear Brake Switch Setting LG1
    1. Brake switch bracket

    2. Brake switch plate

    3. Rear master cylinder

    4. Brake switch

  7. Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
  8. Rear brake master cylinder and control plate_1 (ckxk)
    1. Fixings

    2. Rear brake switch bracket

  9. Fit the right hand control plate to the frame and tighten its fixings to 24 Nm.
  10. Reconnect the rear brake switch to the main harness.
  11. Refit the brake fluid reservoir with a new fixing and tighten to 3 Nm.
  12. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum mark.
  13. Allow the brake fluid to flow through the master cylinder until fluid just starts to flow at the rear brake hose union, collect any escaping fluid.
  14. Incorporating new washers, fit the brake hose to the master cylinder. Ensuring correct orientation of the brake hose, tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
  15. warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.
  16. Fill and bleed the rear brake system (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes).
  17. Install the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Installation)

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

  • Check the brakes for correct operation. Rectify any faults as necessary.

Warning Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes.The fault must be checked and rectified by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.

Removal and Installation - ABS Components

ABS Modulator - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall resulting in motorcycle damage, serious injury or death.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

warning
Before the disassembly of any brake lines in the ABS hydraulic circuit, always mark their position so that they can be returned to the same position when assembled.If the brake lines are incorrectly assembled the performance of the ABS system will be seriously compromised, leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Do not allow the brake hard lines to become bent or kinked during ABS modulator removal. If the brake lines are bent or kinked the performance of the ABS system will be seriously compromised, leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
Make sure you do not damage the brake pad material when you move the brake pads.If the brake pads to come into contact with each other or sharp objects, the material can crack or break.Damage to the brake pads may result in reduced braking efficiency Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
notice
The ABS ECM is an integral part of the ABS modulator.Do not remove the ECM from the ABS modulator.If a new ECM is required, repair is by replacement of the ABS modulator and ECM as an assembly only.
notice
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.

ABS Modulator Remove - LG1; LGX; LL1

Front Brake Caliper

  1. Remove one of the front caliper mounting fixings and slide the brake caliper off the brake disc.
  2. LG1 Front Caliper_2 (ckwv_1)
    1. Fixings

    2. Caliper

  3. Use a suitable flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads. Pump the front brake lever slowly until the plate is held by the brake pads. Do not allow the pistons to fall out.
  4. Pull the front brake lever towards the handlebar until a small amount of pressure is felt. Cable tie the brake lever to this position.
  5. Secure brake lever B02429_2
    1. Brake lever

    2. Cable tie

Rear Brake Caliper

  1. Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
  2. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

  3. Remove the rear wheel see Rear Wheel - Removal
  4. notice
    Note the position of the rear brake caliper for installation.
  5. Detach the brake caliper from its carrier assembly.
  6. Using a suitable a flat metal plate approximately 2 mm thick and 30 to 50 mm wide (for example a gasket scraper) between the brake pads, pump the rear brake pedal until the plate is held by the brake pads.

ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM

  1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ABS modulator.
  2. Remove the union bolts and carefully disconnect the four brake lines from the ABS modulator, collecting any brake fluid. Discard the sealing washers.
  3. Remove and discard the rear fixing from the ABS modulator bracket.
  4. ABS Modulator_1 (ckuq)
    1. ABS modulator

    2. ABS modulator multiplug

    3. ABS modulator rear fixing

    4. Brake line unions

  5. Remove and discard the two fixings and remove the ABS modulator and bracket assembly from the frame.
  6. ABS Modulator_front fixings_1 (ckus)
    1. Fixings

    2. ABS modulator bracket

  7. If required, remove the anti-rotation moulding from the ABS modulator.
  8. If required, remove and discard the fixings and remove the ABS modulator from the bracket.
  9. ABS Modulator_2_1 (ckxt)
    1. Anti-rotation moulding

    2. ABS modulator

    3. Bracket

    4. Fixings

ABS Modulator - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Do not spill brake fluid

caution
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
  1. If required, fit the anti-rotation moulding to the ABS modulator.
  2. If required, position the ABS modulator onto its bracket. Fit new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
  3. ABS Modulator_2_1 (ckxt)
    1. Anti-rotation moulding

    2. ABS modulator

    3. Bracket

    4. Fixings

  4. Make sure the two rubber grommets are fitted to the frame and one is fitted to the ABS modulator bracket.
  5. Align the ABS modulator and bracket to the frame and secure with two flanged sleeves and two new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
  6. ABS Modulator_front fixings_1 (ckus)
    1. Fixings

    2. ABS modulator bracket

  7. Install a flanged sleeve and new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
  8. Incorporating new washers to either side of the unions, fit the brake lines to the ABS modulator as noted for removal. Tighten the brake line unions to 25 Nm.
  9. ABS Modulator_1 (ckuq)
    1. ABS modulator

    2. ABS modulator multiplug

    3. ABS modulator rear fixing

    4. Brake line unions

    warning
    Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident.Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

FWSS Remove LG1; LGX

note
Note the routing of the front ABS wheel speed sensor harness and its retaining clips for installation.The front ABS wheel speed sensor multiplug is identified as the white connector located next to the immobiliser module.
  1. Disconnect the front ABS wheel speed sensor multiplug.
  2. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Connection LG1 (ckum_1)
    1. Front wheel speed sensor multiplug

  3. Detach the wheel speed sensor harness from its three clips on the front brake hose and the wire guide behind the lower yoke.
  4. Release the fixing and remove the sensor. Collect the shim from between the sensor and fork leg.
  5. Front WSS_1 (ckxf)
    1. Front ABS wheel speed sensor

    2. Fixing

Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

RWSS Remove - LG1; LGX

    note
    Note the routing of the harness and its retaining clips for installation.
  1. Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation. Collect the shim from in between the sensor and the caliper carrier.
  2. Release the harness from the three clips and two wire guides.
  3. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

    Swingarm RH Side_2 (ckxb)
    1. Clips

    2. Wire guides

    3. Swinging arm

  4. Detach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor multiplug from its bracket on the battery tray and disconnect from the main harness.

Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Check the condition of the shim before use. Do not use a shim which is bent or damaged.

FWSS Install LG1; LGX

  1. Position the wheel speed sensor to the fork leg with its shim between the sensor and fork leg. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  2. Front WSS_1 (ckxf)
    1. Front ABS wheel speed sensor

    2. Fixing

  3. Route the sensor harness along the front brake hose as noted for removal. Secure with the three clips.
  4. Route the sensor harness through the wire guide behind the lower yoke and through the frame as noted during removal.
  5. Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug and secure the harness to the clip behind the bracket. Any slack in the harness must be positioned behind the headstock area.
  6. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Connection LG1 (ckum_1)
    1. Front wheel speed sensor multiplug

  7. Install the fuel tank bodywork (see Fuel Tank - Installation)

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
Check the condition of the shim before use. Do not use a shim which is bent or damaged.

RWSS Install LG1; LGX

  1. Refit the rear wheel speed sensor, shim and bracket with the fixing, routing the harness through the two wire guides and three clips as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  2. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

    Swingarm RH Side_2 (ckxb)
    1. Clips

    2. Wire guides

    3. Swinging arm

  3. Connect the wheel speed sensor multiplug and secure to its bracket on the battery tray.
  4. Refit the right hand side panel (see Side Panels - Installation)

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Front ABS Pulser Ring - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The procedure for installing the front ABS pulser ring is described in front brake disc installation (see Front Brake Disc - Installation).

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Front ABS Pulser Ring - Inspection

  1. Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser ring as necessary.

Front ABS Pulser Ring - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
note
The fixings securing the ABS pulser ring to the wheel also secure the right hand brake disc. Note the orientation of the brake disc and the ABS pulser ring for installation.

The procedure for removing the front ABS pulser ring is described in front brake disc removal (see Front Brake Disc - Removal).

Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The procedure for removing the rear ABS pulser ring is described in rear brake disc removel (see Rear Brake Disc - Removal).

Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Inspection

  1. Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser ring as necessary.

Rear ABS Pulser Ring - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The procedure for installing the rear ABS pulser ring is described in rear brake disc installation (see Rear Brake Disc - Installation).

Warning - Brakes - Dangerous to operate with defective brakes

warning
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout

ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout

Wheels and Tyres

Exploded View - Front Wheel

Exploded View - Front Wheel

Exploded View - Rear Wheel

Exploded View - Rear Wheel

Tyres

This model is fitted with tubeless tyres, valves and wheel rims. Use only tyres marked 'TUBELESS' and tubeless valves on rims marked 'SUITABLE FOR TUBELESS TYRES'.

warning
Do not install tube-type tyres on tubeless rims. The bead will not seat and the tyres could slip on the rims, causing rapid tyre deflation that may result in a loss of vehicle control and an accident. Never install an inner tube inside a tubeless tyre. This will cause friction inside the tyre and the resulting heat build-up may cause the tube to burst resulting in rapid tyre deflation, loss of vehicle control and an accident.
Tyre Tubeless marking cfhb-01

Typical Tyre Marking -Tubeless Tyre

Wheel Tubeless marking cfha-01

Typical Wheel Marking -Tubeless Tyre

warning
Inner tubes must only be used on motorcycles fitted with spoked wheels and with tyres marked 'TUBE TYPE'.Some brands of approved tyres marked 'TUBELESS' may be suitable for use with an inner tube. Where this is the case, the tyre wall will be marked with text permitting the fitment of an inner tube (see illustration below).Use of an inner tube with a tyre marked 'TUBELESS', and NOT marked as suitable for use with an inner tube, or use of an inner tube on an alloy wheel marked 'SUITABLE FOR TUBELESS TYRES' will cause deflation of the tyre resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Tyres (Tube_tyre_marking.svg)

Typical Tyre Marking - Tubeless Tyre Suitable For Use With An Inner Tube

Tyre Inflation Pressures

Tyres - Inflation Pressures Warning

warning
Incorrect tyre inflation will cause abnormal tread wear and instability problems that may lead to loss of control and an accident.Under inflation may result in the tyre slipping on, or coming off the rim. Overinflation will cause instability and accelerated tread wear.Both conditions are dangerous as they may cause loss of control leading to an accident.

Tyres - Inflation Pressures Off-Road Warning

warning
Tyre pressures which have been reduced for off-road riding will impair on-road stability. Always make sure that the tyre pressures are set as described in the Specification section for on-road use.Operation of the motorcycle with incorrect tyre pressures may cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Correct inflation pressure will provide maximum stability, rider comfort and tyre life. Always check tyre pressures before riding when the tyres are cold. Check tyre pressures daily and adjust if necessary. See the Specification section for details of the correct inflation pressures.

Tyre Wear/Wheel Inspection

Warning - Tyre Safety Fragment

warning
Operation with excessively worn tyres is hazardous and will adversely affect traction, stability and handling which may lead to loss of control and an accident.When tubeless tyres, used without a tube, become punctured, leakage is often very slow. Always inspect tyres very closely for punctures. Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or other sharp objects. Operation with punctured or damaged tyres will adversely affect motorcycle stability and handling which may lead to loss of control or an accident.Check the rims for dents or deformation. Operation with damaged or defective wheels or tyres is dangerous and loss of motorcycle control or an accident could result.Always consult your authorised Triumph dealer for tyre replacement, or for a safety inspection of the tyres.

Tyre Wear

As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more susceptible to puncture and failure. It is estimated that 90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread life (90% worn). It is false economy and unsafe to use tyres until they are worn to their minimum.

All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the tyre becomes worn down as far as the top of a tread wear indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must be replaced.

Tyre Wear_Wheel Inspection (gafj.svg)
  1. Tread wear indicator

Attention must also be paid to the legal limits for tread wear, which differ from country to country. Tyres that have worn to the legal limit in the country or region in which the motorcycle is operated must be replaced, even if tread wear has not yet reached the level of the tread wear indicators.

In accordance with the scheduled maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth.

Mud and Snow/Dual Purpose Tyres (if fitted)

The use of mud and snow/dual purpose tyres may result in reduced motorcycle stability. If the stability or handling characteristics of the motorcycle (with the mud and snow/dual purpose tyres fitted) begins to change adversely, then check the tyre tread depth. It is recommended that mud and snow/dual purpose tyres are replaced earlier than normal tyres and before they are worn near to the minimum allowable tread depth, see https://www.triumphmotorcycles.co.uk/owners/your-triumph#tyres.

Wheel Inspection

Inspect wheels for cracks, splits and kerb damage. Always replace wheels that are suspected of having become damaged.

Minimum Recommended Tread Depth

Tyres - Min Rec Tread Depth Warning

warning
Riding with excessively worn tyres is hazardous and will adversely affect traction, stability and handling which may lead to loss of control and an accident.When tubeless tyres, used without a tube, become punctured, leakage is often very slow. Always inspect tyres very closely for punctures. Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or other sharp objects. Riding with punctured or damaged tyres will adversely affect motorcycle stability and handling which may lead to loss of control or an accident.Check the rims for dents or deformation. Riding with damaged or defective wheels or tyres is dangerous and may lead to loss of control and an accident.Always consult your authorised Triumph dealer for tyre replacement, or for a safety inspection of the tyres.

In accordance with the periodic maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth specified in the table below:

Under 80 mph (130 km/h)

2 mm (0.08 in)

Over 80 mph (130 km/h)

Front 2 mm (0.08 in)

Rear 3 mm (0.12 in)

Important Tyre Information

All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively tested in a range of riding conditions to ensure that the most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on each model. It is essential that approved tyre combinations are used when purchasing replacement tyres as the use of non-approved tyres or approved tyres in non-approved combinations may lead to motorcycle instability. A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.

warning
The ABS computer operates by comparing the relative speed of the front and rear wheels. Use of non-recommended tyres can affect wheel speed and cause the ABS function not to operate, potentially leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident in conditions where the ABS would normally function.
warning
Always check tyre pressures before riding when the tyres are cold. Operation with incorrectly inflated tyres may affect handling leading to loss of control and an accident.
warning
Operation with excessively worn or damaged tyres will adversely affect handling and control leading to loss of control or an accident.
warning
Inner tubes must only be used on motorcycles fitted with spoked wheels and with tyres marked 'TUBE-TYPE' unless marked otherwise.Use of an inner tube with a tyre marked 'TUBELESS' without appropriate marking and/or on an alloy wheel can lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively tested in a range of riding conditions to ensure that the most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on each model. It is essential that approved tyre combinations are used when purchasing replacement tyres as the use of non-approved tyres or approved tyres in non-approved combinations may lead to motorcycle instability. A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
warning
If a tyre or inner tube sustains a puncture, the tyre and inner tube must be replaced together. Failure to replace a punctured tyre and inner tube together, or operation with a repaired tyre or inner tube can lead to instability, loss of motorcycle control or an accident.If tyre or inner tube damage is suspected, such as after striking the kerb, ask your authorised Triumph dealer to inspect the tyre both internally and externally and to also inspect the inner tube. Remember, tyre damage may not always be visible from the outside. Operation of the motorcycle with damaged tyres could lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.When replacing a 'TUBE-TYPE' tyre on a spoked wheel, always inspect the rim tape (rim protection band) to ensure that it is correctly protecting the tube from the spoke threads. A damaged rim tape may lead to rapid tyre deflation causing loss of control and an accident.
warning
Do not install tube-type tyres on tubeless rims. The bead will not seat and the tyres could slip on the rims, causing tyre deflation that may result in a loss of motorcycle control and an accident.Do not install an inner tube inside a tubeless tyre unless it is clearly marked on the side wall that you can do so. This may cause instability and excessive heat build-up may cause the tube to burst resulting in rapid tyre deflation, loss of vehicle control and an accident.
warning
The use of tyres other than those listed at your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet, at www.triumph.co.uk, may adversely affect handling leading to loss of motorcycle control or an accident. Use the recommended tyre options only in the combinations listed at your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk. Do not mix tyres from different manufacturers or tyres from the same manufacturer but from another option.
warning
Accurate wheel balance is important for safe, stable handling of the motorcycle. Do not remove or change any wheel balance weights. Incorrect wheel balance may cause instability leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.When wheel balancing is required, such as after tyre replacement, see your authorised Triumph dealer.Only use self-adhesive weights. Clip-on weights will damage the wheel and tyre potentially resulting in tyre deflation, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
warning
When replacement tyres are required, consult your authorised Triumph dealer who will arrange for the tyres to be fitted according to the tyre manufacturer’s instructions.When tyres are replaced, allow time for the tyre to seat itself to the rim (approximately 24 hours). During this seating period, ride cautiously as an incorrectly seated tyre could cause loss of motorcycle control or an accident. Initially, the new tyre will not produce the same handling characteristics as the worn tyre and the rider must allow adequate riding distance (approximately 100 miles/160 km) to become accustomed to the new handling characteristics.After both 24 hours and 100 miles (160 km), the tyre pressures should be checked and adjusted and the tyre examined for correct seating and rectified as necessary.Use of a motorcycle when not accustomed to its handling characteristics, with incorrect tyre pressures or an incorrectly seated tyre is dangerous and may lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Front Wheel - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Remove the front wheel speed sensor (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal).
  2. Detach and support the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Removal).
  3. note
    It is not necessary to disconnect the brake hoses.
    warning
    Do not allow the calipers to hang on the brake hoses as this may damage the hoses.Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading to loss of control and an accident.
  4. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
  5. Loosen both pinch bolts at the lower end of the left hand fork.
  6. Release and remove the wheel spindle.
  7. Remove the wheel and the wheel spacers.
  8. Front Wheel Spindle_1 (ckvf)
    1. Fork pinch bolts

    2. Wheel spindle

    3. Wheel spacers (left hand shown)

  9. Place the wheel on wooden blocks.
  10. warning
    Do not allow the wheel to rest on either brake disc as this may damage the disc and could lead to an accident.
    caution
    To prevent wheel and bearing damage, observe absolute cleanliness and ensure there is no dirt ingress to the wheel bearings while the wheel is removed.
  11. Thoroughly clean all components and inspect for wear or damage.

Front Wheel - Inspection

  1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings (see Front Wheel Bearings - Removal).

Front Wheel - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Lightly smear the wheel spacers with grease and locate in the hubs.
  2. Position the wheel between the forks ensuring the spacers remain in position on both sides.
  3. Refit the wheel spindle from the left hand side and tighten to 65 Nm.
  4. Lower the motorcycle to the ground and position the front wheel up against a fixed surface. Bounce the front suspension numerous times to allow the left hand fork to float to its natural position on the wheel spindle.
  5. note
    Do not lean on the motorcycle or compress the front suspension prior to tightening the fork pinch bolts.
  6. Tighten the fork pinch bolts to 22 Nm.
  7. Front Wheel Spindle_1 (ckvf)
    1. Fork pinch bolts

    2. Wheel spindle

    3. Wheel spacers (left hand shown)

  8. Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake discs.
  9. Refit the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Caliper - Installation).
  10. Refit the front wheel speed sensor (see Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation).

Rear Wheel - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Wheel Remove Fragments LG1

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Mudguard - Removal LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the fixing and remove the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket and position to one side, noting the routing for installation.
  2. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

    Swingarm RH Side_2 (ckxb)
    1. Clips

    2. Wire guides

    3. Swinging arm

  3. Raise and support the rear of the motorcycle to allow removal of the rear wheel.
  4. warning
    If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust system will be hot. Before working on or near the exhaust system, allow sufficient time for the exhaust system to cool as touching any part of a hot exhaust system could cause burn injuries.
  5. Remove the nut from the rear wheel spindle.
  6. Rear Wheel Nut LG1 (ckvk_1_1)
    1. Rear wheel spindle nut

  7. Support the wheel and withdraw the wheel spindle.
  8. warning
    Do not allow the caliper to hang on the brake hose as this may damage the hose.Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading to loss of control and an accident.
  9. Noting its position, release the brake caliper and carrier from the slot on the swinging arm and roll the wheel forward until the chain can be detached from the rear sprocket.
  10. Tie the rear brake caliper aside.
  11. Withdraw the wheel and collect the flanged spacer from the right hand side and the plain spacer from the left hand side.
  12. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive sprocket uppermost.
  13. If required, remove the final drive (see Final Drive - Removal).
  14. Reposition the wheel on wooden blocks with the rear brake disc uppermost.
  15. If required, remove the rear brake disc (see Rear Brake Disc - Removal).

Rear Wheel - Inspection

  1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings (see Rear Wheel Bearing - Removal).

Rear Wheel - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Wheel Install LG1 LGX

  1. Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake disc.
  2. If removed, refit the brake disc (see Rear Brake Disc - Installation).
  3. Refit the final drive assembly (see Final Drive - Installation).
  4. Position the wheel within the swinging arm and refit the chain to the final drive sprocket.
  5. Position the rear brake caliper and carrier to the swinging arm as noted prior to removal. Align the groove in the carrier with the boss on the swinging arm.
  6. Rear Caliper Align_1 (ckvh)
    1. Caliper carrier, wheel shown removed for clarity

    2. Swinging arm slot

    3. Caliper carrier groove

  7. Refit the wheel spacers, flanged spacer to the right hand side (flange facing outwards) and plain spacer to the left.
  8. Rear Wheel Spacer_1 (ckvj)
    1. Wheel spacer (right hand shown)

  9. Lift the rear wheel into position, aligning the wheel, caliper carrier and swinging arm.
  10. warning
    Check that the spacers are still correctly positioned. Incorrectly fitted wheel spacers will cause a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
    note
    The fitting and tightening of the wheel spindle nut is included in the Rear Mudguard - Installation section.
  11. Fit the wheel spindle with the threaded end facing to the left.
  12. Refit the rear wheel speed sensor and bracket with the fixing, routing the harness as noted during removal. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
  13. Swingarm RH Side_1 (ckxa)
    1. Rear wheel speed sensor

    2. Bracket

    3. Fixing

    4. Clips

    5. Wire guide

    Swingarm RH Side_2 (ckxb)
    1. Clips

    2. Wire guides

    3. Swinging arm

Rear Wheel Install Fragments LG1; LGX

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Mudguard - Installation LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Front Wheel Bearings - Removal

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Wheel - Remove L Series

    caution
    Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake discs, as this may damage the discs. Support the wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake discs are raised above the ground.
  1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake discs.
  2. Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip.
  3. warning
    Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause eye and soft tissue injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
    caution
    To prevent wheel damage and to aid bearing removal, always apply force evenly on both sides of the bearing to prevent it from tipping and becoming stuck. Application of uneven force will lead to difficulty in removing the bearing and to a damaged wheel.
  4. Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the wheel, drift out the wheel bearings. Collect the centre sleeve.
  5. Front Wheel Bearings - Removal (cdgd.svg)

    Wheel Bearing Removal

Rear Wheel Bearing - Removal

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

    caution
    Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this may damage the disc. Support the wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake disc is raised above the ground.
  1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake disc.
  2. Remove and discard the seals and the bearing circlip.
  3. warning
    Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause eye and soft tissue injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
    caution
    To prevent wheel damage and to aid bearing removal, always apply force evenly on both sides of the bearing to prevent it from tipping and becoming stuck. Application of uneven force will lead to difficulty in removing the bearing and to a damaged wheel.
  4. Using a suitable pin punch, through the centre of the wheel, drift out the wheel bearings. Collect the centre sleeve.
  5. Rear Wheel Bearing Removal (gaeo.svg)

    Rear Wheel Bearing Removal

Wheel Bearings - Inspection

  1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings.

Front Wheel Bearing - Installation

note
Refer to the chart below for the correct tool and tool face when inserting bearings. Bearings are inserted by means of a draw-bolt acting on the insertion tool. A support tool is located on the opposite side of the wheel to the insertion tool and as the bolt is tightened, the bearing is drawn into the wheel. Insert bearings with the marked or shielded side facing outwards and always fit a new bearing circlip and seals.

Bearing insertion tool

Support tool

Left bearing

service tool T3880053

Small face to bearing

service tool T3880065

Large face to wheel

Right bearing

service tool T3880053

Small face to bearing

service tool T3880065

Large face to wheel

  1. Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the method described above.
  2. Front wheel bearing Installation, cesq_1
    1. T3880053 - Wheel Bearing Extraction Kit

    2. T3880065 - Bearing Installer

  3. Fit a new circlip.
  4. Lubricate and fit new seals to the front wheel. Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Wheel - Install L Series

Rear Wheel Bearing - Installation

note
Refer to the chart below for the correct tool and tool face when inserting bearings. Bearings are inserted by means of a draw-bolt acting on the insertion tool. A support tool is located on the opposite side of the wheel to the insertion tool and as the bolt is tightened, the bearing is drawn into the wheel. Insert bearings with the marked or shielded side facing outwards and always fit a new bearing circlip and seals.

Bearing insertion tool

Support tool

Left bearing

service tool T3880070

Small face to bearing

service tool T3880065

Large face to wheel

Right bearing

service tool T3880070

Small face to bearing

service tool T3880065

Large face to wheel

  1. Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the method described above.
  2. Rear Wheel Bearing installation, cdxh

    T3880070 - Bearing Installer

  3. Fit a new circlip.
  4. Lubricate and fit new seals to the rear wheel. Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Final Drive

Exploded View - Final Drive

Exploded View - Final Drive

Final Drive Chain

For safety and to prevent excessive wear, the drive chain must be checked, adjusted and lubricated in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements. Checking, adjustment and lubrication must be carried out more frequently for extreme conditions such as salty or heavily gritted roads.

If the drive chain is badly worn or incorrectly adjusted (either too loose or too tight) the drive chain could jump off the sprockets or break.

warning
Never neglect chain maintenance.A drive chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets could catch on the engine sprocket or lock the rear wheel.Failure to follow the advice above may lead to loss of motorcycle control which could result in serious injury or death.
notice
We recommend that the drive chain lubrication is done with the rear wheel off the ground so that it is free to rotate.Adjust the drive chain with the motorcycle in an upright position, resting on its wheels and with no additional weight on it.

Drive Chain Replacement

Rivet link type

Removal of the swinging arm is not required for drive chain replacement, the drive chain can be split for removal from the motorcycle. The following instructions for the replacement of rivet link type drive chains requires the use of service tool T3880027.

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Support the motorcycle on a stand so the rear wheel is clear of the ground.
  2. Insert the hollow chain cutting tail piece into the tool body so its larger diameter end is facing towards the large pressure screw as shown.
  3. Drive Chain Replacement (cdqk_1)
    1. T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit

    2. Large pressure screw

    3. Chain cutting tail piece

  4. Position the chain to the tool ensuring that the chain link pin which is to be removed is aligned with the holes in the chain cutting tail piece and the large pressure screw. Tighten the large pressure screw by hand to grip the chain.
  5. Drive Chain Replacement (cdqm_1)
    1. T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit

    2. Large pressure screw

    3. Chain

    4. Chain cutting tail piece

  6. Insert the small pressure screw into the larger pressure screw as shown below, until the cutting pin on the small pressure screw contacts the link pin. Ensure that the cutting pin is centralised on the link pin to be removed.
  7. Drive Chain Replacement (cdql_1)
    1. T3880027 - Chain Link Tool Kit

    2. Small pressure screw

  8. Retain the tool body then tighten the small pressure screw until the link pin is pressed out from the chain.
  9. Repeat steps 3 to 5 on the remaining chain link pin.
  10. Remove the tool and separate the two ends of the chain.
  11. Remove the chain cutting tail piece from the body.
  12. caution
    The replacement chain is supplied in a split condition, complete with a link kit to join the two ends.
    caution
    The component parts of the new link kit are coated with a special grease which must not be removed. Removal of this special grease will severely reduce the service life of the chain.
  13. Use the old drive chain to pull the new chain into position as follows: Temporarily attach the end of the new chain to a free end of the old chain using the old connector link. Carefully pull the other end of the old chain to pull the new chain around the sprockets.
  14. caution
    Do not use the new connector link as the special grease on it may be removed.
  15. Using the new link supplied with the chain kit, join the two ends of the chain. Ensure that the O-rings are positioned as shown below and the link plate is fitted with its markings facing outwards.
  16. New link for new chain camw
    1. O-rings

    2. Link

    3. Link plate

  17. Insert the riveting tail piece into the tool body so its larger diameter end is facing towards the large pressure screw as shown.
  18. caution
    The service tool T3880027 includes two link plate holders, one is for riveted link plates (marked PH5060R), the other is for link plates retained by a spring clip (marked PH4060C). The holder for riveted link plates has a shallow groove to allow for chain link clearance, the holder for clipped link plates has a deep groove to allow for chain link clearance.
  19. Insert the link plate holder (marked PH5060R) into the large pressure screw.
  20. Drive Chain Replacement (cdqn_1)
    1. Tool body

    2. Large pressure screw

    3. Link plate holder (marked PH5060R)

    4. Riveting tail piece

  21. Position the tool to the chain. Ensure the link plate holder is correctly located in the large pressure screw.
  22. Chain link riveting, cdqo2
    1. Tool body

    2. Link plate holder (marked PH5060R)

    3. Link plate

    4. Link

    5. Large pressure screw

  23. Locate the split link pins such that the pins will enter the groove in the link plate holder when the link plate is pressed on to the link.
  24. Drive Chain Replacement (Chain tool_1)
    1. Link plate holder

    2. Link plate

    3. Chain link

    4. Link plate holder groove

  25. Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure screw until the link plate is pressed fully onto the link.
  26. Back off the pressure screw, slide the tool assembly to one side and check that the split link is correctly assembled.
  27. Remove the link plate holder from the tool. Do not remove the riveting tail piece from the tool
  28. Insert the flare pin into the large pressure screw.
  29. Drive Chain Replacement (cdqn_2)
    1. Tool body

    2. Large pressure screw

    3. Riveting tail piece

    4. Flair pin

  30. Locate one of the split link pins into the riveting tail piece and screw the large pressure screw in until the flare pin contacts the split link end. Ensure the split link pin is centrally located on the flare pin.
  31. Retain the tool body and tighten the large pressure screw until the split link end is riveted-over.
  32. Drive Chain Replacement (cdqn_4)
    1. Tool body

    2. Large pressure screw

    3. Flare pin

  33. Back off the large pressure screw and rivet the remaining split link pin as described above.
  34. Remove the tool from the chain and check that both the split link pins are correctly riveted as shown below.
  35. Rivets correct or wrong cana
    1. Correct riveting

    2. Insufficient riveting

    3. Excessive riveting

    4. Riveting off-centre

warning
If either split link pin is not correctly riveted, the split link must be removed and replaced with a new link. Never operate the motorcycle with an incorrectly riveted split link as the link could fail resulting in an unsafe riding condition leading to loss of control and an accident.

Front Sprocket - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  • Position the motorcycle on the side stand.

Front Sprocket Cover - Remove L Series

  1. Bend back the front sprocket lock washer.
  2. Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front and rear brakes hard.
  3. Loosen the front sprocket nut.
  4. Front Sprocket (abni_LG1)
    1. Nut

    2. Lock washer

    3. Front sprocket

  5. Remove the front sprocket nut and discard the lock washer.
  6. Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum free play in the drive chain.
  7. note
    Note the orientation of the front sprocket for installation.
  8. Disengage the front sprocket from the drive chain and slide it off the output shaft.

Front Sprocket - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit the front sprocket, as noted during removal, and engage it with the drive chain.
  2. Fit a new lock washer engaging it with the output shaft splines, and fit the sprocket nut hand tight.
  3. Front Sprocket (abni_LG1)
    1. Nut

    2. Lock washer

    3. Front sprocket

  4. Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front and rear brakes hard.
  5. Tighten the front sprocket nut to 85 Nm.
  6. Secure the front sprocket nut in position by bending the lock washer down to contact one of the nut flats.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Front Sprocket Cover - Install L Series

Final Drive - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

    caution
    Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this may damage the disc. Support the wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake disc is raised above the ground.
  1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive sprocket uppermost.
  2. Gently lever the drive flange from the wheel hub.
  3. Final Drive Removal, cdxe_1
    1. Drive flange

  4. Remove the cush drive rubbers.
  5. Cush Drive, cdxg_1
    1. Cush drive

Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings - Disassembly

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

  1. Remove and discard the seal.
  2. Sprocket carrier seal cjej_1
    1. Sprocket carrier

    2. Seal

  3. Remove and discard the bearing circlip.
  4. Final drive bearing circlip cjej
    1. Sprocket carrier

    2. Circlip

    warning
    Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a hammer and drift. Use of a hammer and drift can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause eye and soft tissue injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
    caution
    To prevent sprocket carrier damage and to aid bearing removal, always apply force evenly on both sides of the bearing to prevent it from 'tipping' and becoming stuck. Application of uneven force will lead to difficulty in removing the bearing and to a damaged drive flange.
  5. Turn the sprocket carrier over, and use a pin punch to drift out the ball bearing.
  6. Final drive bearing removal cjek
    1. Sprocket carrier

    2. Ball bearing

Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive - Inspection

  1. Check the cush drive rubbers for deterioration and cracks.
  2. Inspect the sprocket teeth for wear, damage and chips.
  3. Check the wheel and drive flange for wear, cracks and damage.

Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings - Assembly

Warning - General - When using a press

warning
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as bearings frequently break-up under load and the debris caused during break-up may cause damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
  1. Position the ball bearing, marked side facing outwards, to the drive flange.
  2. Using a suitable press, fully insert the ball bearing into the sprocket carrier.
  3. Fit a new circlip.
  4. Install a new seal, marked side facing outwards, to the sprocket carrier.
  5. Lubricate the seal’s knife-edge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.
  6. Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel hub.
  7. Fit the spacer to the wheel hub as noted for removal.
  8. Refit the sprocket carrier to the wheel.

Final Drive - Installation

  1. Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel.
  2. Refit the drive flange to the wheel.
  3. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel - Installation).

Rear Sprocket - Removal

Caution - Wheels - Do not rest on brake disc

caution
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this may damage the disc. Support the wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake disc is raised above the ground.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

  1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive chain sprocket uppermost.
  2. note
    If the studs for the rear sprocket become loose or removed, they must be replaced.
  3. Evenly and progressively, remove and discard the rear sprocket lock nuts.
  4. note
    Note the orientation of the rear sprocket for installation.
  5. Remove the rear sprocket.
  6. LG1 Rear Sprocket
    1. Lock nut

    2. Sprocket

Rear Sprocket - Installation

Caution - Wheels - Do not rest on brake disc

caution
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this may damage the disc. Support the wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake disc is raised above the ground.
  1. If necessary, replace any rear sprocket studs that have been loosened or removed as follows:
  2. * Remove and discard any of the studs that have become loose.
    * Fit new studs and tighten to 30 Nm.
    Rear sprocket stud height Stud height_1
    1. Studs (three of six shown)

  3. Fit the rear sprocket to the sprocket carrier as noted for removal.
  4. Fit new lock nuts, evenly and progressively tighten to 55 Nm.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Wheel - Remove L Series

Drive Chain Rubbing Strip Remove LG1 LGX

  1. Remove the fixing, flanged sleeve and plate from the drive chain rubbing strip.
  2. Chain rubbing strip rear LG1_1 (ckwt)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

    3. Flanged sleeve

    4. Plate

  3. Remove the front fixing and remove the drive chain rubbing strip from the swinging arm.
  4. Chain rubbing strip front LG1_1 (ckvz)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

Drive Chain Rubbing Strip - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Drive Chain Rubbing Strip Install LG1 LGX

  1. Install the drive chain rubbing strip to the swinging arm and install the front fixing.
  2. Chain rubbing strip front LG1_1 (ckvz)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

  3. Install the plate, flanged sleeve and fixing to the drive chain rubbing strip. Tighten the front and rear fixings to 4 Nm.
  4. Chain rubbing strip rear LG1_1 (ckwt)
    1. Drive chain rubbing strip

    2. Fixing

    3. Flanged sleeve

    4. Plate

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Wheel - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Frame and Bodywork

Exploded View - Frame and Fixings

Exploded View - Frame and Fixings

Exploded View - Front Mudguard

Exploded View - Front Mudguard

Exploded View - Rear Mudguard

Exploded View - Rear Mudguard

Exploded View - Rear Bodywork

Exploded View - Rear Bodywork

Exploded View - Footrests

Exploded View - Footrests

Exploded View - Grab Handles - Applicable Markets Only

Exploded View - Grab Handles

Exploded View - Ignition Switch and Lock Set

Exploded View - Igntion Switch and Lockset

Exploded View - Seat

Exploded View - Seat

Exploded View - Side Panels

Exploded View - Side Panels

Exploded View - Saree Guard - Applicable Markets Only

Exploded View - Saree Guard

Exploded View - Side Stand

Exploded View - Side Stand

General Frame Inspection

Inspect the frame, bodywork and footrests for accident and other damage. Check all fixings for security. If any faults are found, rectify as necessary. If any faults with the frame are found, the frame must be replaced. Repairs to the frame are not permitted.

warning
The frame must not be modified in any way.Any modification to the frame, for example: welding or drilling, may weaken the structure causing an unsafe riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Warning Accident -Dealer Referral

warning
If the motorcycle is involved in an accident or collision, it must inspected by a competent person with the specialist knowledge and technical understanding of motorcycles, such as an authorised Triumph dealer. before it is ridden again.

Models With a Side Stand Fitted

Check the operation of the side stand to make sure it is securely held in the retracted position by the spring. Rectify any faults.

warning
If the return spring is faulty, the side stand could extend whilst the motorcycle is being ridden.This will cause an unsafe riding condition, which could lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Models With a Centre Stand Fitted

Check the operation of the centre stand to make sure it is securely held in the retracted position by the spring. Rectify any faults.

warning
If the return spring is faulty, the centre stand will not be held in the retracted position whilst the motorcycle is being ridden.This will cause an unsafe riding condition, which could lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Seat - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Caution - Seat Care

caution
To prevent damage to the seats or seat covers, care must be taken not to drop the seats. Do not lean the seats against the motorcycle or any surface which may damage the seats or seat covers. Instead, place the seats, with the seat cover facing upwards, on a clean, flat surface which is covered with a soft cloth.Do not place any item on the seats which may cause damage or staining to the seat covers.

Seat Remove LG1

  1. Insert the ignition key into the seat lock and turn it anticlockwise. This will release the seat from its lock and allow it to be slid rearwards for complete removal from the motorcycle.
  2. Seat Lock (ckuo)
    1. Seat lock

Seat - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Seat Install LG1

  1. Align the two locating holes at the front of the seat with the locating tangs on the fuel tank brackets.
  2. Engage the seat tongue with the seat tongue locating position on the motorcycle.
  3. Seat Fitment (ckun)
    1. Seat

    2. Seat lock peg

    3. Seat lock

    4. Seat tongue

    5. Seat tongue locating position

  4. Align the seat lock peg to the lock and press down, engaging the seat lock. An audible click can be heard when the seat is fully engaged in its lock.
  5. warning
    To prevent detachment of the seat during riding, after fitting always grasp the seat and pull firmly upwards. If the seat is not correctly secured it will detach from the lock. A loose or detached seat could cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  6. Grasp the seat and pull firmly upwards to ensure that it is securely retained.

Mirrors - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Left and Right - Same Procedure

note
Follow the same procedure for both left and right hand sides.
note
The right mirror arm and lock nut has a left hand thread.The left mirror arm and lock nut has a right hand thread.
  1. Slide the rubber cover from the lock nut.
  2. Make a note of the lock nut position on the thread of the mirror arm.
  3. Loosen the lock nut and separate the mirror arm from the mirror boss.
  4. Mirrors LG1 (mirror_lg1)
    1. Mirror arm

    2. Rubber cover

    3. Lock nut

    4. Mirror boss

Mirrors - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
warning
If the mirror fixing is too loose, the mirror may blow back at speed. This will result in a loss of vision to the rear of the motorcycle. It is dangerous to ride a motorcycle without sufficient rearward vision.
note
The right mirror arm and lock nut has a left hand thread.The left mirror arm and lock nut has a right hand thread.
  1. Position the locknut as noted during removal onto the thread of the mirror arm.
  2. Fit the mirror boss to the handlebar clamp and tighten to 17 Nm.
  3. Mirrors LG1 (mirror_lg1)
    1. Mirror arm

    2. Rubber cover

    3. Lock nut

    4. Mirror boss

  4. Fit the mirror arm into the mirror boss. Tighten by hand until the lock nut makes contact with the mirror boss, do not tighten fully at this stage.
  5. Loosen the mirror arm one full turn.
  6. Position the mirror arm to give rear visibility in the riding position and tighten the lock nut by hand.
  7. caution
    Use an open ended spanner to counter-hold the mirror boss as the mirror lock nut is tightened. Failure to counter-hold the boss will cause damage to the thread and the mirror to become loose.
  8. Counter-hold the mirror boss and tighten the mirror lock nut to 17 Nm.
  9. Slide the rubber cover over the lock nut.

Front Mudguard - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Front Mudguard Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the four fixings securing the front mudguard assembly to the front forks and remove the mudguard assembly.
  2. Front Mudguard (ckve)
    1. Front mudguard assembly

    2. Fixings (right hand side shown)

  3. If required, remove the four screws to separate the centre moulding from the side mouldings.
  4. Front Mudguard_1 (ckvd)
    1. Left hand side moulding

    2. Right hand side moulding

    3. Centre moulding

    4. Screws

Front Mudguard - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Front Mudguard Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, position the side mouldings to the centre moulding and secure with four screws. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
  2. Front Mudguard_1 (ckvd)
    1. Left hand side moulding

    2. Right hand side moulding

    3. Centre moulding

    4. Screws

  3. Position the front mudguard assembly to the front forks and install the four fixings. Tighten to 6 Nm.
  4. Front Mudguard (ckve)
    1. Front mudguard assembly

    2. Fixings (right hand side shown)

Rear Mudguard - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

  1. Remove the rear wheel spindle nut.
  2. Remove the fixings from the rear hanger cover.
  3. Read Mudguard Arm Cover (ckwg_2_1)
    1. Rear hanger cover

    2. Fixings

  4. Remove the lock nut and upper fixing and support the rear mudguard assembly. Collect the rear hanger cover and discard the lock nut.
  5. Rear Mudguard Inner Fixing_1 (ckwf_1)
    1. Fixing and lock nut (rear wheel removed for clarity)

  6. Cut the cable tie, disconnect the rear subharness and remove the rear mudguard assembly.
  7. If required, remove the rear direction indicators (see Rear Direction Indicators - Removal).
  8. If required, remove the rear licence plate light (see Rear Licence Plate Light - Removal).
  9. If the spray guard needs to be removed, first remove and discard the two rear fixings.
  10. Rear Mudguard Fixings_2_1 (ckwe)
    1. Fixings

  11. Remove the three underside fixings and remove the spray guard, collecting the indicator mounting bracket, indicator mount and three flanged sleeves.
  12. If required, remove the two fixings and remove the harness cover from the licence plate hanger arm, noting the routing of the rear subharness for installation.
  13. Rear Mudguard Fixings_1_1 (ckwd)
    1. Spray guard

    2. Fixings

    3. Harness cover

    4. Fixings

Rear Mudguard - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. If required, route the sub harness as noted during removal and install the harness cover to the rear licence plate hanger arm with two fixings. Tighten to 1 Nm.
  2. Rear Mudguard Subharness_1 (ckwh)
    1. Main harness

    2. Rear subharness

    3. Rear harness slack

    4. Cable tie

  3. Make sure the two captive nuts are fitted to the spray guard.
  4. If required, refit the spray guard to the hanger arm with the three flanged sleeves, indicator mount and indicator mounting bracket. Secure with three fixings and tighten to 6 Nm.
  5. Rear Mudguard Fixings_1_1 (ckwd)
    1. Spray guard (rear wheel removed for clarity)

    2. Fixings

    3. Harness cover

    4. Fixings

  6. Install two new fixings to the rear of the spray guard. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  7. Rear Mudguard Fixings_2_1 (ckwe)
    1. Fixings

  8. If required, refit the rear licence plate light (see Rear Licence Plate Light - Installation).
  9. If required, refit the rear direction indicators (see Rear Direction Indicators - Installation).
  10. Reconnect the rear subharness to the harness and secure with a cable tie. Ensure the routing of the subharness remains as explained in step 1.
  11. Install the rear mudguard assembly and rear hanger cover to the swinging arm and loosely assemble the one upper fixing and a new lock nut.
  12. Rear Mudguard Inner Fixing_1 (ckwf_1)
    1. Fixing and lock nut(rear wheel removed for clarity)

  13. Loosely assemble the three fixings and wheel spindle nut to the rear hanger cover and rear mudguard assembly.
  14. Read Mudguard Arm Cover (ckwg_2_1)
    1. Rear hanger cover

    2. Fixings

  15. Torque the upper fixing whilst holding the lock nut to 3 Nm.
  16. Rear Mudguard Inner Fixing_1 (ckwf_1)
    1. Fixing and lock nut (rear wheel removed for clarity)

  17. Tighten the outer fixings in the sequence below to 3 Nm.
  18. Rear Mudguard Sidearm Tightening Sequence (ckwg_4_1)

    Tightening sequence

  19. Tighten the upper fixing whilst holding the lock nut to 32 Nm.
  20. Rear Mudguard Inner Fixing_1 (ckwf_1)
    1. Fixing

  21. Tighten the outer fixings in the sequence below to 32 Nm.
  22. Rear Mudguard Sidearm Tightening Sequence (ckwg_4_1)

    Tightening sequence

    note
    Make sure the wheel spindle is fully inserted before tightening the wheel spindle nut.
  23. Make sure the wheel spindle is fully inserted before tightening the wheel spindle nut. Tighten the wheel spindle nut to 110 Nm.
  24. Rear Wheel Nut LG1 (ckvk_1_1)
    1. Rear wheel spindle nut

  25. Lower the motorcycle to the ground.
  26. Check and, if necessary, adjust the chain (see Drive Chain Free Movement - Adjustment).
  27. warning
    It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes and you must have your authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
  28. Check the operation of the rear brake.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Final Drive Chain Guard - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.
  1. Remove the two fixings securing the rear hugger and chain guard to the swingarm.
  2. Manoeuvre the rear hugger and chain guard rearwards to detach the two locating slots from the retaining grommets.
  3. Final Drive Chain Guard_TP0416
    1. Rear hugger and chain guard

    2. Fixing (left hand side)

    3. Fixing location (right hand side)

    4. Retaining tangs

    5. Retaining grommet (left hand side)

Final Drive Chain Guard - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle Including locking devices

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle - including DO NOT support on non integral parts

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.Do not support the motorcycle on any ancillary component, the exhaust system or any other non structural parts of the motorcycle frame.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.Failure to follow the advice above could result in serious injury or death.

Note to be used in service manual with stabilise warning

notice
Renew locking devices where specified, refer to Fixings.Before tightening a fixing using a crow foot spanner adapter, refer to Use of Crow Foot Spanner Adapters with Torque Wrenches.Observe all torque wrench tightening procedures, refer to Tightening Procedures.
  1. Position the two locating slots at the front end of the rear hugger and chain guard onto the retaining grommets.
  2. Make sure the two retaining tangs on the rear suspension unit guard are in the locating holes on the rear hugger and chain guard.
  3. Fit the two fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
  4. Final Drive Chain Guard_TP0416
    1. Rear hugger and chain guard

    2. Fixing (left hand side)

    3. Fixing location (right hand side)

    4. Retaining tangs

    5. Retaining grommet (left hand side)

Battery Tray - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Side Panels - Removal LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Rear Light - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

Rear Panels Remove L Series

Battery Tray Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Note the position and routing of the harness.
  2. Remove the starter solenoid from the engine ECM tray and rest to one side.
  3. Release the fixing and remove the ambient air pressure sensor and rest to one side.
  4. Tilt the alarm electrical connector towards the rear and slide rearwards to release from the battery tray.
  5. Unclip the rear light connector from the battery tray.
  6. Disconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
  7. Remove the two relay blocks and rest to one side, noting the position of each block for installation. The rear block has blue tape to identify.
  8. Remove the fuse box from the engine ECM tray.
  9. LG1 Underseat_1 (ckxh)
    1. Accessory USB connector

    2. Relays

    3. Ambient air pressure sensor

    4. Rear light connector

    5. Alarm connector

    6. Fuse box

    7. Fall detection switch

    8. Starter solenoid

  10. Release the two fixings and remove the engine ECM tray from the battery tray.
  11. Unclip the accessory USB connector from the engine ECM tray.
  12. Disconnect the three engine ECM harness connectors and remove the engine ECM.
  13. Remove and discard the two side fixings from the battery tray.
  14. Remove the two centre fixings and the rear fixing and washer from the battery tray.
  15. LG1 Battery Tray_1 (ckxg)

    Harness not shown for clarity

    1. Engine ECM tray

    2. Rear fixing

    3. Centre fixings

    4. Engine ECM tray fixings

    5. Side fixings

    6. Battery tray

  16. Remove the two front fixings from the battery tray and alternator regulator/rectifier bracket.
  17. Battery Tray Front Fixings_1 (ckws)

    Some parts removed for clarity

    1. Fixings

    2. Battery tray

    3. Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket

  18. Unclip the seat lock cable and remove the battery tray, noting the position of the harness for installation.

Battery Tray - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Battery Tray Install LG1:LGX

  1. Align the battery tray to the frame and alternator regulator/rectifier bracket and position the harness as noted during removal.
  2. Secure the battery tray to the alternator regulator/rectifier bracket with two fixings. Tighten to 5 Nm.
  3. Battery Tray Front Fixings_1 (ckws)

    Some parts removed for clarity

    1. Fixings

    2. Battery tray

    3. Alternator regulator/rectifier bracket

  4. Locate the seat lock cable to the battery tray and position the harness as noted during removal.
  5. Install the two centre fixings and the rear fixing and washer to the battery tray. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  6. Install two new side fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
  7. Install the engine ECM and reconnect the three electrical connectors.
  8. Reclip the accessory USB connector to the engine ECM tray.
  9. Refit the engine ECM tray with two fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
  10. LG1 Battery Tray_1 (ckxg)

    Harness not shown for clarity

    1. Engine ECM tray

    2. Rear fixing

    3. Centre fixings

    4. Engine ECM tray fixings

    5. Side fixings

    6. Battery tray

  11. Refit the fuse box to the engine ECM tray.
  12. Refit the relay blocks to the engine ECM tray in the positions as noted during removal.
  13. Reconnect the fall detection switch electrical connector.
  14. Refit the starter solenoid to the battery tray.
  15. Reclip the alarm and rear light connectors to the battery tray.
  16. Refit the ambient air pressure sensor to the battery tray and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
LG1 Underseat_1 (ckxh)
  1. Accessory USB connector

  2. Relays

  3. Ambient air pressure sensor

  4. Rear light connector

  5. Alarm connector

  6. Fuse box

  7. Fall detection switch

  8. Starter solenoid

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Panels Install L Series

Rear Light - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Side Panels - Install LG1; LGX

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Side Stand - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Raise and support the motorcycle.
  2. warning
    Wear hand, eye and face protection when unhooking the stand spring. Take great care to minimise the risk of personal injury and loss of components.
    note
    The side stand is held in the up position by spring tension.
  3. With the side stand in the up position, unhook the spring from the side stand and remove it from the motorcycle.
  4. Sidestand_1 (ckup)
    1. Pivot pin

    2. Circlip

    3. Spring

    4. Side stand

  5. Remove and discard the circlip securing the pivot pin.
  6. Remove the pivot pin and remove the side stand.

Side Stand - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit the side stand to the motorcycle.
  2. Insert the pivot pin and install a new circlip.
  3. Sidestand_1 (ckup)
    1. Pivot pin

    2. Circlip

    3. Spring

    4. Side stand

    warning
    Wear hand, eye and face protection when fitting the stand spring. Take great care to minimise the risk of personal injury and loss of components.
  4. With the side stand in the up position, hook the spring onto the upper plate then carefully hook it onto the side stand lug.
  5. Check the operation of the side stand before riding the motorcycle. Ensure the spring holds the stand securely in the retracted position.

Side Panels - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Side Panels Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the central fixings and lock nuts. Discard the lock nuts.
  2. Remove the rear fixings and washers.
  3. SidePanelRH_1 (ckvm)
    1. Central fixing

    2. Lock nut

    3. Side panel

    4. Rear fixing

    5. Washer

  4. Ease the front of the side panel away from the motorcycle, releasing the front clip and the spigot from the rubber grommet. Note their position for installation. Raise the side panel to release the locating slot from the frame.
  5. On the left hand side panel, rotate the seat lock cable end 180 degrees and release it from the seat lock assembly and bracket, noting the position of the cable in the bracket locating feature for installation.
  6. SidePanel LH (LH side panel LG1)
    1. Seat lock cable end

    2. Spigot

    3. Side panel

    4. Clip

    5. Locating slot

Side Panels - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Side panels Install LG1; LGX

  1. Ensure the rubber grommets and plastic clips are in place as noted during removal.
  2. For the left hand side panel, install the seat lock cable to the seat lock assembly and bracket. Make sure the cable is located in the bracket locating feature as noted during removal.
  3. Align the side panel locating slot to the frame locating tang. Press the spigots into the rubber grommets and make sure the plastic clips are locked in place.
  4. SidePanel LH (LH side panel LG1)
    1. Seat lock cable end

    2. Spigot

    3. Side panel

    4. Clip

    5. Locating slot

  5. Install the central fixings with new lock nuts. Install the rear fixings and washers. Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
SidePanelRH_1 (ckvm)
  1. Central fixing

  2. Lock nut

  3. Side panel

  4. Rear fixing

  5. Washer

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Rear Panels - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Light - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

Rear Panels Remove LG1; LGX

  1. If required, remove the screws securing the rear infill panels to the rear undertray.
  2. Rear Panels_1 (ckvi)
    1. Rear undertray

    2. Rear infill panel

    3. Screw

Rear Panels - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Panels Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, fit the rear infill panels to the rear undertray and secure with two screws. Tighten to 1 Nm.
  2. Rear Panels_1 (ckvi)
    1. Rear undertray

    2. Rear infill panel

    3. Screw

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Light - Installation LG1; LGX; LL1

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Radiator Cowl - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Left and Right - Same Procedure

note
Follow the same procedure for both left and right hand sides.

Rad Cowl Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove and discard the two fixings securing the radiator cowl to the radiator.
  2. RadCowl_1 (ckvg)
    1. Radiator cowl (right hand side shown)

    2. Fixings

  3. Remove the radiator cowl and collect the flanged sleeves, noting their orientation for installation.
  4. Unclip the horn harness from the left hand side radiator cowl, noting the routing for installation.

Radiator Cowl - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rad Cowl Install LG1; LGX

  1. Clip the horn harness to the left hand side radiator cowl as noted during removal.
  2. Install the flanged sleeves to the radiator cowls as noted during removal and align the radiator cowl to the radiator.
  3. RadCowl_1 (ckvg)
    1. Radiator cowl (right hand side shown)

    2. Fixings

  4. Install two new fixings and tighten to 2.5 Nm.

Electrical

Exploded Views

Exploded View - Battery, Horn and Wiring

Exploded View - Harness

Exploded View - Front Direction Indicators

Exploded View - Front Direction Indicators

Exploded View - Rear Direction Indicators

Exploded View - Rear Direction Indicators

Exploded View - Headlight

Exploded View - Headlights

Exploded View - Rear Lights

Exploded View - Rear Lights

Exploded View - Instruments

Exploded View - Instruments

Exploded View - Starter Motor and Alternator

Exploded View - Starter Motor and Alternator

Battery, Fuses and Relays

Battery

warning
Under some circumstances, the battery can give off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.The battery contains sulphuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear protective clothing and a face shield.If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water immediately.If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.If electrolyte is swallowed, drink large quantities of water and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.KEEP ELECTROLYTE OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
warning
The battery contains harmful materials. Always keep children away from the battery whether or not it is fitted in the motorcycle.Do not attach jump leads to the battery, touch the battery cables together or reverse the polarity of the cables as any of these actions may cause a spark which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.

Battery Disposal

Should the battery ever require replacement, the original battery must be handed to a recycling agent who will ensure that the dangerous substances from which the battery is manufactured do not pollute the environment.

Battery Maintenance

Factory commissioned battery - battery maintenance

The battery is a sealed type and does not require any maintenance other than checking the voltage and routine recharging such as during storage.

It is not possible to adjust the electrolyte level in the battery.

note
The charge level in the battery must be maintained to maximise the battery life.

With normal use of the motorcycle, the charging system will keep the battery charged. If the motorcycle is unused, the battery will gradually discharge due to battery self discharge and the continuous current drain for the clock and the engine control module memory.

The rate of battery discharge can be greatly increased by the addition of electrical security systems or other accessories.

Allowing a battery to discharge, or leaving it discharged over a period of time, causes sulphation of the lead plates within the battery.

Sulphation is a normal chemical reaction inside the battery and over a period of time sulphate will crystallise on to the lead plates making charging difficult or impossible. The result is a permanently damaged battery, which would not be covered by the motorcycle warranty.

Keeping a battery at full charge reduces the chance of it freezing in cold conditions. Allowing a battery to freeze can cause serious internal damage to the battery.

When leaving the motorcycle standing for more than a few days, regularly check the battery voltage using a digital multimeter. Should the battery voltage fall below 12.8 V, charge the battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger - see latest Parts Catalogue for part number information. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery charger.

For extended periods of storage (beyond two weeks) the battery should be removed and the battery voltage checked regularly and charged when below 12.8 V.

Battery Already in Service

Factory commissioned battery - battery already in service

note
Before carrying out the following procedure the battery must be disconnected and removed from the motorcycle.

Use the guidelines in the table below for charging. Always verify the battery condition before charging, and 30 minutes after charging.

note
A fully charged battery should read 12.8 volts or higher after the battery has been off the charger for 30 minutes or more.

Table of Battery Charging Times

State of charge

Voltage

Action

Charge time (using BatteryMate 150-9)

100%

12.8 V - 13.0 V

None. Check at 4 months from date of delivery

None required

75% - 100%

12.5 V - 12.8 V

Charge and check in 4 months from date of last check

3 - 6 hours

50% - 75%

12.0 V - 12.5 V

Needs charge

5 - 11 hours

25% - 50%

11.5 V - 12.0 V

Needs charge

At least 13 hours

0% - 25%

11.5 V or less

Needs recovery using BatteryMate 150-9. Retest after recovery

20 hours

Battery Commissioning and Charging

New Battery

In order to correctly and safely commission a new battery, the battery commissioning procedure listed below must be carefully followed. This is the only battery commissioning procedure that Triumph recommends. The procedure is designed to ensure that the battery is at its best when fitted to the motorcycle, and will provide the best possible performance and reliability.

Failure to comply with this procedure may lead to reduced battery performance and/or shorten the life of the battery.

warning
The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.The battery contains sulphuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear protective clothing and a face shield.If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water immediately.If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.If electrolyte is swallowed, drink large quantities of water and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.KEEP ELECTROLYTE OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
  1. Check the battery carefully for damage.
  2. caution
    Ensure the electrolyte container part number matches the battery part number to be filled. Battery life will be greatly reduced if the incorrect volume (either too little or too much) of acid is added to the battery.
  3. Read the instructions and warnings delivered with the battery.
  4. Place the battery on a flat level surface and remove the sealing foil.
  5. Remove the battery sealing strip from the electrolyte container and save for later in this procedure. Place the sealing strip on a clean surface, with the upper side facing downwards to avoid contamination of the sealing strip. Do not break the seal on the electrolyte container.
  6. Place the electrolyte container on the battery and fill the battery according to the manufacturers instructions.
  7. After starting to fill the battery with electrolyte, allow the battery to stand for 30 minutes with the filling container in place.
  8. Check that all of the electrolyte has drained from the container. Do not remove the container at this point. If the container has not completely drained, tap the sides of the container to start the electrolyte flowing again.
  9. After the electrolyte has drained into the battery, allow the battery to stand with the electrolyte container in place for a further 2 hours.
  10. Remove the electrolyte container carefully, and dispose of immediately.
  11. Place the sealing cap strip LOOSELY over the filling holes of the battery.
  12. Charge the battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery Charger.
  13. caution
    The caps must be fitted (after charging) within two hours of filling the battery with acid. Leaving the battery open to the atmosphere for longer than is necessary will start to reverse the chemical reaction which takes place within the battery, greatly reducing the battery’s service life.
  14. After charging is complete, press down firmly with both hands to seat the caps (do not use tools or force the caps into position).
  15. Disconnect the charger and allow the battery to stand for 1 hour before fitting to the motorcycle.
  16. Fit the battery to the motorcycle, positive (red) lead first.

Battery - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Battery terminals

warning
Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the motorcycle frame as this may cause a short circuit or spark, which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.

Battery Disconnection - Rider Configurable Modes

The riding modes allow the rider to adjust the throttle response (MAP), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and Traction Control (TC) settings to suit differing road conditions and rider preference.

Before disconnecting the battery or removing a fuse, note and record the rider’s settings. Once the fuse has been refitted or the battery reconnected the rider’s settings should be reset as noted.

warning
If the battery has been disconnected or the fuses removed for any reason advise the rider to confirm the original mode settings have been correctly set. Failure to reset the motorcycle to the rider’s preferred rider mode settings and subsequently being ridden may cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

  1. Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead first.
  2. Remove the battery strap.
  3. Battery Install/Remove
    1. Negative (black) terminal

    2. Battery

    3. Battery strap

    4. Positive (red) terminal

    5. Battery insert

  4. Remove the battery insert.
  5. Remove the battery.

Battery - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Warning - Battery terminals

warning
Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the motorcycle frame as this may cause a short circuit or spark, which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.

Battery Reconnection - Rider Configurable Modes

note
Once the battery has been reconnected the rider’s configuration settings should be reset as noted prior to the battery being disconnected.
warning
If the battery has been disconnected or the fuses removed for any reason advise the rider to confirm the original mode settings have been correctly set. Failure to reset the motorcycle to the rider’s preferred rider mode settings and subsequently being ridden may cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

Battery Install LG1 LGX

  1. Place the battery into the battery tray and install the battery insert.
  2. Reattach the battery strap.
  3. note
    The battery positive and negative leads are to be connected to the vertical face of the battery terminals.The battery positive lead routes underneath the diagnostic connector cable and clips to the Engine ECM moulding.
  4. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first, routing the positive lead underneath the diagnostic connector cable, and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
  5. Make sure the battery positive (red) lead is clipped to the engine ECM tray.
  6. LG1 Battery Positive Routing
    1. Battery positive terminal

    2. Battery positive lead

    3. Retaining feature on engine ECM moulding

    4. Diagnostic connector cable

  7. Apply a light coat of grease to the terminals to prevent corrosion.
  8. Cover the positive terminal with the protective cap.
  9. Battery Install/Remove
    1. Negative (black) terminal

    2. Battery

    3. Battery strap

    4. Positive (red) terminal

    5. Battery insert

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Install L Series

Fuse Identification

warning
Always replace blown fuses with new ones of the correct rating (as specified on the fuse box cover) and never use a fuse of higher rating. Use of an incorrect fuse could lead to an electrical problem, resulting in motorcycle damage, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

The riding modes allow the rider to adjust the throttle response (MAP), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and Traction Control (TC) settings to suit differing road conditions and rider preference.

Before disconnecting the battery or removing a fuse for any reason, note and record the rider’s settings. Once the fuse has been refitted or the battery reconnected the rider’s settings should be reset as noted.

warning
If the battery has been disconnected or the fuses removed for any reason advise the rider to confirm the original mode settings have been correctly set. Failure to reset the motorcycle to the rider’s preferred rider mode settings and subsequently being ridden may cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.

A blown fuse is indicated when all of the systems protected by that fuse become inoperative. When checking for a blown fuse, refer to the fuse identification table to establish which fuse has blown.

The fuse boxes are located underneath the seat.

To allow access to the fuse boxes, the seat must be removed (see Seat - Removal).

note
Numbers shown in the following illustration correspond to the position numbers in the fuse identification table.

Fuse Box 1

Main Fuses

Fuse Box 1

Position

Circuit Protected

Rating (Amps)

1

Cooling Fan

15

2

Instruments

15

3

Engine Management System (EMS)

15

4

Position Lighting

5

5

Engine Control Unit (ECU)

5

6

Ignition

7.5

7

ABS Solenoid

20

8

Fuel Pump

10

9

ABS Pump

25

Fuse Box 2

Fuse Box no.2

Fuse Box 2

Position

Circuit Protected

Rating (Amps)

1

ABS ECU

2

2

Diagnostics

2

Relays

Identification and Location

The relays are located underneath the seat. To gain access to the relays, remove the seat (see Seat - Removal).

Relays (LG1_Relays)
  1. Cooling fan

  2. Main beam

  3. Fuel pump

  4. Engine management relay (EMS)

  5. Horn

  6. Starter motor

Electrical Diagnostics

Pin Point Tests

Link to Diagnostics Chapter

Select the relevant diagnostics chapter.

Lighting Adjustment and Bulb Replacement

Headlight

Warning - Headlights - Adjust road speed

warning
Adjust road speed to suit the visibility and weather conditions in which the motorcycle is being operated.Make sure that the head light beam is adjusted to illuminate the road surface sufficiently far ahead without dazzling oncoming traffic. An incorrectly adjusted headlight may impair visibility causing an accident.

Warning - Headlights - Do not adjust headlight when moving

warning
Never attempt to adjust a headlight beam when the motorcycle is in motion.Any attempt to adjust a headlight beam when the motorcycle is in motion may result in loss of control and an accident.

Caution - Headlight - Do not cover the headlight lens

caution
Do not cover the headlight or lens with any item likely to obstruct air flow to, or prevent heat escaping from, the headlight lens.Covering the headlight lens during operation with items of clothing, luggage, adhesive tape, devices intended to alter or adjust the headlight beam or non genuine headlight lens covers will cause the headlight lens to overheat and distort, causing irreparable damage to the headlight assembly.Damage caused by overheating is not considered a manufacturing defect and will not be covered under warranty.If the headlight must be covered during use - such as taping of the headlight lens required during closed‑course conditions - the headlight must be disconnected.

Headlight Vertical Adjustment

Headlight Adjust LG1; LGX

note
Check and correct the tyre pressures prior to adjusting the headlight.
  1. Switch the headlight dipped beam on.
  2. Loosen the headlight pivot lock nut sufficiently to allow restricted movement of the headlight.
  3. Adjust the position of the headlight to give the required beam setting.
  4. Tighten the mounting fixings to 26 Nm.
  5. Recheck the headlight beam setting.
  6. Switch the headlight off when the beam setting is satisfactorily set.
  7. headlight fixing_1 (ckui)
    1. Headlight Assembly

    2. Pivot bolt

LED Headlight Unit - Replacement

The LED headlight unit is a sealed, maintenance free unit. The headlight unit must be replaced in the event of the failure of the headlight or position light. See Headlights - Removal.

Rear Light Bulb Replacement - LED

The LED rear light units are sealed, maintenance free LED units. The rear light units must be replaced in the event of the failure of the rear lights.

Direction Indicators - US and Canada Markets Only

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
Direction Indicators - Bulb Replacement (celc_2_OHB.svg)
  1. Direction indicator lens

  2. Fixing

  1. Release the fixing and remove the lens to gain access to the bulb for replacement.

LED Direction Indicators - All Markets Except US and Canada

The LED direction indicators are sealed for life units and must be replaced in the event of a failure.

LED Rear Licence Plate Light

The LED rear licence plate light unit is a sealed, maintenance free LED unit. The rear licence plate light unit must be replaced in the event of the failure.

Removal and Installation - Electrical Components

Instruments - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Instruments Removal LG1; LG2; LH2

  1. Loosen, but do not remove, the headlight pivot fixings.
  2. headlight fixing_1 (ckui)
    1. Headlight Assembly

    2. Pivot bolt

  3. Tilt the headlight forwards in order to gain access to the instruments fixings.
  4. Headlight tilt (T3368)
    1. Headlight

  5. Remove the instruments shroud from the instruments bracket by pressing the sides of the shroud to release the retaining clips and pulling it downwards clear of the instruments bracket. Disconnect the instruments electrical connector.
  6. Instrument shroud removal (T3369)
    1. Instruments bracket

    2. Instruments shroud

  7. Remove the three fixings and washers and remove the instruments from the bracket.
  8. Instruments Fixings (LG1 Instruments_1)
    1. Instruments

    2. Fixings

Instruments - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Instruments Install LG1

  1. Install the instruments to the instruments bracket with three fixings and washers. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  2. Instruments Fixings (LG1 Instruments_1)
    1. Instruments

    2. Fixings

  3. Reconnect the instruments electrical connector and install the instruments shroud.
  4. Instruments Shroud Install (T3369_1)
    1. Instruments bracket

    2. Instruments shroud

  5. Raise the headlight to the desired position and tighten the lock nut to 26 Nm.
  6. headlight fixing_1 (ckui)
    1. Headlight Assembly

    2. Pivot bolt

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Ignition Switch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Ignition Switch Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  2. Fuel Tank LH Connections (ckuc)
    1. Right hand switch housing connector

    2. Left hand switch housing connector

    3. Left hand switch housing connector

    4. Fuse box 2

    5. Ignition switch connector

  3. Remove the sheared bolts then remove the ignition switch.
  4. Ignition barrel_1 (ckuj)
    1. Sheared bolts

    2. Ignition switch

Ignition Switch - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Ignition Switch Install LG1; LGX

  1. Fit the ignition switch to the frame.
  2. Fit new shear bolts and tighten to 16 Nm.
  3. Ignition barrel_1 (ckuj)
    1. Shear bolts

    2. Ignition switch

  4. Reconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
  5. Fuel Tank LH Connections (ckuc)
    1. Right hand switch housing connector

    2. Left hand switch housing connector

    3. Left hand switch housing connector

    4. Fuse box 2

    5. Ignition switch connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Headlights - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Headlights Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Support the headlight assembly and remove the headlight pivot fixings.
  2. headlight fixing_1 (ckui)
    1. Headlight Assembly

    2. Pivot bolt

  3. Remove the three fixings and remove the headlight assembly rear cover.
  4. Headlight Connection_1 (ckuh)
    1. Headlight assembly rear cover

    2. Electrical connector

    3. Fixings

  5. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the headlight from the harness, noting the routing of the harness for installation.
  6. If required, remove the two fixings and washers to remove the headlight brackets from the headlight.
  7. Headlight Connection_2 (ckug)
    1. Headlight

    2. Headlight bracket, left hand side

    3. Headlight bracket, right hand side

    4. Fixings

Headlights - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Headlight Install LG1; LGX

  1. If required, ensure the rubber grommets are fitted to the headlight brackets. Position the brackets to the headlight and secure with two fixings and washers and tighten to 3 Nm.
  2. Headlight Connection_2 (ckug)
    1. Headlight

    2. Headlight bracket, left hand side

    3. Headlight bracket, right hand side

    4. Fixings

  3. Reconnect the electrical connector and position the harness as noted during removal. Install a new cable tie to secure the harness.
  4. Headlight Routing_1 (ckuk)
    1. Headlight assembly rear cover

    2. Harness

    3. Cable tie

  5. Install the headlight assembly rear cover to the headlight and secure with three fixings. Tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
  6. Headlight Connection_1 (ckuh)
    1. Headlight assembly rear cover

    2. Electrical connector

    3. Fixings

  7. Position the headlight to the lower yoke and install the pivot bolt and lock nut. Adjust the headlight to the correct height and tighten the lock nut to 26 Nm.
  8. headlight fixing_1 (ckui)
    1. Headlight Assembly

    2. Pivot bolt

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Rear Light - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Light Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Disconnect the rear light electrical connector from the harness.
  2. Rear Light Connection_1 (ckwc)
    1. Rear light electrical connector

  3. Support the rear light and release the two rear light fixings and two scrivets. Remove the rear light and rear undertray as an assembly.
  4. Rear Light (ckts)
    1. Rear light

    2. Fixings

    3. Scrivets

    4. Rear undertray assembly

  5. Release the two fixings and remove the rear light from the undertray assembly.
  6. Rear Light (cktt)
    1. Rear light

    2. Fixings

    3. Rear undertray assembly

Rear Light - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Light Install LG1; LGX

  1. Fit the rear light to the rear undertray assembly with two fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
  2. Rear Light (cktt)
    1. Rear light

    2. Fixings

    3. Rear undertray assembly

  3. Install the rear undertray and rear light assembly to the motorcycle, aligning the two locating slots to the rubber grommets. Secure with two rear fixings and two scrivets and tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
  4. Rear Light (ckts)
    1. Rear light

    2. Fixings

    3. Scrivets

    4. Rear undertray assembly

  5. Reconnect the rear light electrical connector to the harness.
  6. Rear Light Connection_1 (ckwc)
    1. Rear light electrical connector

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Front Direction Indicators - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Front Indicator Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the direction indicator fixing.
  2. Loosen the direction indicator bracket fixing and lower the bracket in order to access the cable.
  3. Front Direction Indicator (cktn)
    1. Direction indicator

    2. Fixing

    3. Direction indicator bracket fixing

    4. Direction indicator bracket

  4. Disconnect the direction indicator electrical connectors and feed the cable up to the direction indicator, noting the routing for installation.
  5. Remove the direction indicator.

Front Direction Indicators - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Front Indicator Install LG1; LGX

  1. Install the direction indicator to the bracket and route the cable around the top of the bracket as noted during removal.
  2. Front Direction Indicator (cktm)

    Right hand direction indicator shown, left hand similar (upper yoke shown removed for clarity)

    1. Direction indicator cable

    2. Bracket

    3. Direction indicator

    4. Fork leg

  3. Install the direction indicator fixing but do not tighten.
  4. Raise the bracket up to align with the upper yoke and tighten the bracket fixing to 3 Nm.
  5. Tighten the direction indicator fixing to 3 Nm.
  6. Route the cable down to the electrical connectors as shown.
  7. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
  8. RH Direction Indicator Routing (cktv)

    Right hand direction indicator cable routing

    1. Fork leg

    2. Direction indicator cable

    3. Front brake hose

    4. Right hand switch housing cable

    5. Cable tie

    6. Rubber band

    7. Twist grip position sensor cable

    LH Direction Indicator Routing (cktp)

    Left hand direction indicator routing

    1. Fork leg

    2. Direction indicator cable

    3. Cable tie

    4. Instruments cable

    5. Left hand switch housing cable

    RH Direction Indicator Routing (cktu_1)

    Right hand direction indicator routing

    1. Rubber band

    2. Front brake hose

    3. Right hand switch housing cable

    4. Clutch cable

    5. Right hand direction indicator connectors

    6. Twist grip position sensor cable

    LH Direction Indicator Routing (ckto)

    Left hand direction indicator routing

    1. Headstock rubber guide

    2. Headlight cable

    3. Left hand switch housing cable

    4. Instruments cable

    5. Rubber band

    6. Left hand direction indicator connectors

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

  • Check the operation of the direction indicators, rectify as necessary.

Rear Direction Indicators - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Indicator Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Remove the rear direction indicator fixings and raise the rear direction indicators and support moulding as an assembly.
  2. Rear Indicator LG1 (cktr_2)
    1. Rear direction indicator (right hand side shown)

    2. Fixing

    3. Support bracket (right hand side shown)

  3. Disconnect the rear licence plate light electrical connector. Unclip and move the connector holder to gain access to the direction indicator connectors.
  4. Noting the position and routing of the wiring, disconnect both direction indicator connectors and remove the direction indicators and support brackets from the support moulding.
  5. Rear Indicator Connectors LG1 (cktq_1)
    1. Left rear direction indicator

    2. Left rear direction indicator connectors

    3. Rear licence plate light

    4. Rear licence plate light connector

    5. Right rear direction indicator

    6. Right rear direction indicator fixings

    7. Rear licence plate light fixings

    8. Left hand support bracket

    9. Right hand support bracket

Rear Direction Indicators - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Indicator Install LG1; LGX

  1. Position the direction indicators and support brackets to the support moulding and reconnect the electrical connectors as noted during removal.
  2. Reconnect the rear licence plate light connector and reposition the connector holder as noted during removal.
  3. Rear Indicator Connectors LG1 (cktq_1)
    1. Left rear direction indicator

    2. Left rear direction indicator connectors

    3. Rear licence plate light

    4. Rear licence plate light connector

    5. Right rear direction indicator

    6. Right rear direction indicator fixings

    7. Rear licence plate light fixings

    8. Left hand support bracket

    9. Right hand support bracket

  4. Install the support moulding and direction indicators to the rear mudguard and secure with two fixings. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  5. Rear Indicator LG1 (cktr_2)
    1. Rear direction indicator (right hand side shown)

    2. Fixing

    3. Support bracket (right hand side shown)

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

  • Check the operation of the rear indicators and the licence plate light. Rectify if necessary.

Rear Licence Plate Light - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Rear Direction Indicators - Removal LG1; LGX; LL1

Rear Direction Indicators - Removal L Series

Rear Licence Plate Light Remove LG1; LGX

  1. Disconnect the rear licence plate electrical connector.
  2. Release the two fixings and remove the rear licence plate light from the support moulding.
  3. Rear Indicator Connectors LG1 (cktq_1)
    1. Left rear direction indicator

    2. Left rear direction indicator connectors

    3. Rear licence plate light

    4. Rear licence plate light connector

    5. Right rear direction indicator

    6. Right rear direction indicator fixings

    7. Rear licence plate light fixings

Rear Licence Plate Light - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Rear Licence Plate Light Install LG1; LGX

  1. Align the rear licence plate light to the support moulding and secure with two fixings. Tighten to 0.5 Nm.
  2. Reconnect the rear licence plate electrical connector.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Rear Direction Indicators - Installation L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Side Stand Switch - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series

Side Stand Switch Remove LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

    caution
    Note the routing and the retaining clips of the side stand switch harness for installation.
  1. Disconnect the side stand switch electrical connector from the engine sub harness at the rear of the starter motor and feed it down to the side stand switch.
  2. Side stand switch connector LG1 (T3443_1)
    1. Side stand switch electrical connector

    2. Side stand switch harness

  3. Release the fixings and remove the gear change bracket from the frame.
  4. Release the fixings and remove the side stand switch from the gear change bracket. Discard the fixings.
  5. Gear Change Bracket LG1
    1. Gear change bracket

    2. Fixings

    3. Side stand switch

Side Stand Switch - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Side Stand Switch Install LG1; LGX

  1. Fit the side stand switch to the gear change bracket tighten the new fixings to 7 Nm.
  2. Fit the gear change bracket to the frame and tighten the fixings to 24 Nm.
  3. Gear Change Bracket LG1
    1. Gear change bracket

    2. Fixings

    3. Side stand switch

  4. Route the side stand switch harness and reconnect to the engine sub harness as noted for removal.
  5. Side stand switch connector LG1 (T3443_1)
    1. Side stand switch electrical connector

    2. Side stand switch harness

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Starter Motor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Fuel Tank - Remove L Series

Airbox - Remove L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Removal L Series

Purge Valve - Remove L Series

Throttle Body - Remove L Series

Inlet Manifold - Removal - LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LL1

  1. Disconnect the low oil pressure warning light switch.
  2. Ease the boot from the starter cable terminal and then release the cable bolt.
  3. Detach the cable from the starter motor.
  4. note
    Note the position of the mounting bracket for the crankshaft position sensor multiplug for installation.
  5. Release the fixings securing the starter to the crankcase.
  6. Starter motor fixings ciah
    1. Fixings

    2. Starter motor

    3. Multiplug, crankshaft position sensor

  7. Ease the starter motor from the upper crankcase.

Starter Motor - Inspection

  1. Ensure the starter turns freely and without binding.
  2. Check the starter O-ring for damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary.

Starter Motor - Installation

  1. Fit a new O-ring to the starter motor.
  2. Lubricate the starter motor O-ring with a small amount of petroleum jelly.
  3. Fit the starter motor to the upper crankcase with the multiplug for the crankshaft position sensor as noted for removal. Ensure that the O-ring does not become damaged during installation.
  4. Starter motor fixings ciah
    1. Fixings

    2. Starter motor

    3. Multiplug, crankshaft position sensor

  5. Fit and tighten the starter motor bolts to 10 Nm.
  6. Refit the starter cable and secure with the bolt. Tighten to 3 Nm.
  7. Refit the starter cable boot.
  8. Connect the low oil pressure warning light switch.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Inlet Manifold - Install - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Body - Install L Series

Purge Valve - Install L Series

Coolant Expansion Tank - Installation L Series

Airbox - Install L Series

Fuel Tank - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Alternator Rotor - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Alternator Cover - Remove L Series

  1. Withdraw the starter idler gear and shaft, noting the fitted position of the components.
  2. Starter idler gear L0346
    1. Idler gear

    2. Idler shaft

    caution
    Do not use tools to tighten service tool T3880375. Tighten the tool by hand only. Over-tightening of the tool will lead to damage to the alternator rotor.
  3. To remove the rotor, clean the alternator rotor to remove all traces of oil, and fit service tool T3880375 to the rotor as shown below. Retain the tool to prevent the crankshaft from rotating and remove the centre bolt from the crankshaft.
  4. Alternator rotor centre bolt cdwv_3
    1. Rotor

    2. T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder

  5. With the bolt removed, locate the spigot from the larger of the two thrust pads supplied with service tool T3880365 to the crankshaft.
  6. Alternator rotor thrust pad cdwv_1
    1. Thrust pad

    note
    Ensure that the thrust pad does not fall out during assembly of the tool.
  7. Assemble service tool T3880174 to the threaded centre section of the rotor.
  8. Hold the centre ofservice tool T3880174 to prevent rotation then tighten the draw-bolt in the centre of the tool to release the taper seating of the rotor from the crankshaft.
  9. Alternator rotor removal cdwv
    1. Rotor

    2. T3880174 - Alternator Housing Puller

  10. Withdraw the rotor and tool as an assembly and then separate the tool from the rotor. Collect the Woodruff key and the tool thrust pad from the crankshaft.

Alternator Rotor - Installation

  1. Refit the Woodruff key to the crankshaft.
  2. Assemble the rotor to the keyway on the crankshaft, ensuring the Woodruff key remains in position.
  3. caution
    Do not use tools to tighten service tool T3880375. Tighten the tool by hand only. Over-tightening of the tool will lead to damage to the alternator rotor.
  4. Refit the service tool T3880375 to prevent the crankshaft from rotating, ensuring the rotor is free from oil and the tool is not over-tightened.
  5. Tighten the rotor retaining bolt to 120 Nm.
  6. Alternator rotor centre bolt cdwv_3
    1. Rotor

    2. T3880375 - Alternator Rotor Holder

  7. Remove the service tool T3880375.
  8. Lubricate the idler gear shaft with new engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
  9. Fit the starter idler gear and shaft to the crankcase.
  10. Starter idler gear L0346
    1. Idler gear

    2. Idler shaft

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Alternator Cover - Install L Series

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Alternator Stator - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Alternator Cover - Remove L Series

Alternator Stator and Rotor Note

note
If the alternator stator needs to be replaced, the crankshaft position sensor will also be replaced as they are one assembly.
    note
    Note the routing of the stator harness for installation.
  1. Remove and discard the fixings securing the crankshaft position sensor to the alternator cover.
  2. Remove and discard the fixing securing the cable bracket to the alternator cover.
  3. Remove and discard the fixings securing the stator to the alternator cover and remove the stator.
  4. Alt Stator LG1_1 (ckxv)
    1. Fixings

    2. Crankshaft position sensor

    3. Cable bracket

    4. Alternator stator

Alternator Stator - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Locate the stator and crankshaft position sensor to the engine cover.
  2. Apply silicone sealer to the cable grommet (at the factory, ThreeBond 1215 is used) and align the cable to the exit slot.
  3. Fit the cable retainer bracket and tighten the new fixings to 6 Nm.
  4. Tighten the alternator stator new fixings to 12 Nm.
  5. Tighten the crankshaft position sensor new fixings to 6 Nm.
  6. Alt Stator LG1_1 (ckxv)
    1. Fixings

    2. Crankshaft position sensor

    3. Cable bracket

    4. Alternator stator

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Alternator Cover - Install L Series

Alternator Regulator/Rectifier - Removal

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.

The alternator regulator/rectifier is located in between the rear suspension unit and the gearbox.

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Seat - Remove L Series

Battery - Remove L Series

Reg Rec Remove LG1; LGX; LL1

    note
    Note the position of the two electrical connectors for installation.
  1. Disconnect the two electrical connectors, noting their position for installation.
  2. Release the fixings and remove the regulator/rectifier from its bracket
  3. RegRec_1_1 (ckya_1)
    1. Electrical connectors

    2. Regulator/Rectifier

    3. Fixings

    4. Mounting bracket

Alternator Regulator/Rectifier - Installation

Warning - General - Stabilise Motorcycle

warning
Make sure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported.A correctly supported motorcycle will help prevent it from falling.An unstable motorcycle may fall, causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
  1. Fit the regulator/rectifier to its bracket and tighten its fixings to 9 Nm.
  2. Reconnect the two electrical connectors as noted for removal.
  3. RegRec_1_1 (ckya_1)
    1. Electrical connectors

    2. Regulator/Rectifier

    3. Fixings

    4. Mounting bracket

Perform the following operations

Perform the following operations:

Battery - Install L Series

Seat - Install L Series

Circuit Diagrams

Glossary of Circuit Diagram Symbols

The following is a description of the symbols and information found in the circuit diagrams for this model.

note
Wire colours and connector pin references shown in the illustrations below are examples and may differ from those contained in circuit diagrams for this model.

Components with a Fly lead and an In-line Connector

Component with fly lead and in line connector

The illustration shows an example of a component with a fly lead and an in-line connector.

The component is represented by a white box, with fly lead wires leading to an in-line connector (shaded grey). Information provided with the component includes:

  • The component name - located above the component.

  • A function reference for each terminal - located inside the component, adjacent to the connecting wire (provided in English only).

  • Wire colour references - located on each wire.

  • An in-line connector name - located above the in-line connector.

  • A component and pin number reference - located on each wire entering the in-line connector.

In the above example, the component and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:

M71

Component reference for the front brake switch

M

Identifies the mating connector (component side only)

-

Separator

1, 2, 3

Connector pin number reference

Components with an Integral Connector

Component - built in connector

The illustration shows an example of a component with an integral connector.

The component is identified by a white box, with a grey shaded area representing the integral connector. Information provided with the component includes:

  • The component name - located above the component.

  • A function reference for each terminal - located inside the component, adjacent to the connecting wire (provided in English only).

  • Wire colour references - located on each wire.

  • A component and pin number reference - located on each wire entering the integral connector.

In the above example, the component and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:

M01

Component reference for the instruments

-

Separator

24, 25

Connector pin number reference

Components with Multiple Integral Connectors

Components with multiple connectors

The illustration shows an example of a component with multiple integral connectors.

The multiple integral connectors can be identified by separated grey shaded areas (as shown), or by a grey shaded area that is divided into multiple sections by black line(s).

The above example shows an engine ECM with three integral connectors, connectors A, B and C. The component, connector and pin number references can be interpreted as follows:

E02

Component reference for the engine ECM

A, B, C

Connector reference

-

Separator

9, 28, 33

Connector pin number reference

Fuse Boxes

Fuse box

The illustration shows an example of a fuse box.

A fuse is a device which protects a circuit in the event of a fault. The fuse will 'blow' should a short circuit occur, protecting that circuit from further damage.

Information provided with the fuse box includes:

  • The fuse box name - located above the fuse box.

  • A fuse number/location reference for each fuse - located above the fuse.

  • A fuse rating (in Amps) for each fuse - located inside the fuse.

  • A fuse box, terminal number and terminal block reference - located on each wire entering the fuse box.

In the above example, the fuse box, terminal number and terminal block references can be interpreted as follows:

F

Reference code for a fuse box

2

Denotes the type of fuse box:

1 = Fuse box 1 (Main fuse)

2 = Fuse box 2 (Individual circuit protection)

3

Indicates the number of fuses contained in the fuse box

-

Separator

1, 2, 3

Connector terminal number reference

A or B

Terminal block reference A (power in) or B (power out)

Relays

A relay is effectively an electromagnetic switch. To close the relay contacts and complete the circuit, an electromagnet in the relay is energised which causes the relay contacts to close, making the circuit complete.

Relays are used when the electrical current is too great for a mechanical switch, usually when the switching must be done quickly to prevent arcing across the switch contacts. If a mechanical switch were used, the mechanical switch contacts would quickly burn away.

Relays Connected with a Single Socket Connector

Relay

The illustration above shows an example of a relay connected to the wiring harness with a single socket relay connector.

A pin diagram of a typical single socket relay connector is shown below.

CTE: 399-00326

Information provided on the circuit diagram for relays with a single socket harness connector includes:

  • The relay name - located above the relay.

  • A relay and terminal number reference - located on each wire entering the relay connector terminals.

In the above example, the relay and terminal number reference can be interpreted as follows:

R

Indicates the component is a relay

04

Reference number for the relay (cooling fan relay in the example shown)

-

Separator

1, 2, 3, 5

Connector terminal number reference

Relays connected with a Dual Socket Connector

Dual socket relay

The illustration above shows an example of a relay connected to the wiring harness with a dual socket relay connector.

A dual socket relay connector provides sockets for two individual relays, socket A and socket B. A pin diagram of a typical dual socket relay connector is shown below.

CTE: 310-00149

Information provided on the circuit diagram for relays with a dual socket harness connector includes:

  • The names of the relays connected to sockets A and B - located above the relay.

  • A dual relay and terminal number reference - located on each wire entering the relay connector terminals.

In the above example, the relay and terminal number reference can be interpreted as follows:

R

Indicates the component is a relay

04

Reference number for the relay connected to socket A (cooling fan relay in the example shown)

03

Reference number for the relay connected to socket B (fuel pump relay in the example shown)

-

Separator

A or B

Socket reference (socket A or socket B)

In the example above, all references show socket A. This indicates that the component shown is the cooling fan relay.

1, 2, 3, 5

Connector terminal number reference for the socket/relay identified

Ring Terminals

Ring terminal

The illustration shows the symbol used to identify a ring terminal (commonly used as ground points).

A ring terminal reference is provided on the wire entering the terminal.

Shielded Wires

Shielded wires symbol

The illustration shows the symbol used to identify wires that are shielded against electromagnetic interference.

Examples of components that have shielded wires include:

  • ABS wheel speed sensors

  • Immobiliser antenna

  • Throttle position sensor

  • USB socket

The wire shielding is typically connected to ground.

Splices

Splice

The illustration shows an example of a splice.

A splice is a hard cable joint where two or more cables are joined in the wiring harness. A splice is a potential source of both open and short circuits.

A splice reference code is provided at the nearest convenient location to the splice symbol.

Twisted Wires

Twisted wires symbol

The illustration shows the symbol used to indicate a pair of wires that are twisted together, such as CAN circuit wires.

Starter Motor Grounding

Starter motors fitted to Triumph motorcycles are connected to ground through the mating faces of the starter motor body and the crankcase.

Table - Wiring Colour Codes -Triumph Wiring

Key To Wiring Colour Codes

Code

Wiring Colour

B

Black

U

Blue

N

Brown

G

Green

S

Slate/Grey

O

Orange

K

Pink

R

Red

P

Purple

W

White

Y

Yellow

LG

Light Green

LU

Light Blue

Main Wiring Harness Electrical Connectors

The table below shows the connector pin diagrams for each electrical connector on the main wiring harness for this model.

Sumitomo: 6189-8067

Sumitomo: 6189-7106_7107

E02A - Engine ECM connector A

E02B - Engine ECM connector B

Sumitomo: 6189-7106_7107

Molex; 51115-1611

E02C - Engine ECM connector C

E04 - Diagnostic connector

Sumitomo: 6187-2801

Sumitomo: 6189-0593

E05 - Crankshaft position sensor

E06 - Fuel pump

Sumitomo: 6189-0552

Sumitomo: 6189-0030

E07 - Fuel level sensor

E09 - Purge valve

TE: 282190-1

Sumitomo: 6189-6905

E10 - Coolant temperature sensor

E11 - Fuel injector 1

E12 - Fuel injector 2

E13 - Fuel injector 3

Sumitomo: 6189-4442

Sumitomo: 6189-4442

E15 - Gear position sensor

E16 - Oxygen sensor, bank 1 sensor 1

Hulane: 309402001TFB

Sumitomo: 6189-2451

E17 - Side stand switch

E19 - Cooling fan 1

TE: 282190-1

Furukawa: FW-C-2F-B

E20 - Intake air temperature sensor

E21 - Ignition coil 1

E22 - Ignition coil 2

E23 - Ignition coil 3

TE: 282079-2

Sumitomo: 6189-0030

E25 - Oil pressure sensor

E37 - Secondary air injection

Sumitomo: 6189-6907

Yazaki: 7283-1968-30

E38 - Manifold absolute pressure sensor

E39 - Ambient air pressure sensor

E47 - Throttle body

TE: 174357-2

CTE: 399-00308

E48 - Triumph shift assist

F19 - Fuse box 1

TE: 2066046-2 [Fuse Box 2]

Molex: 5266-0411

F22 - Fuse box 2

H03 - Rear light subharness

Sumitomo: 6187-3272

Sumitomo: 6188-0696

F32 - Fuse box 3

H05 - Engine subharness

Furukawa: FB-1MC

TE: 4-1437290-0

H10 - Sub harness ground

M01 - Instruments

Sumitomo: 6188-4914

Sumitomo: 6195-0051

M02A - Left handlebar switch housing connector A

M02B - Left handlebar switch housing connector B

Kingfont: P-9007-N2B10101

Aptiv: 12162144

M04A - Front left direction indicator connector A

M04B - Front left direction indicator connector B

M07 - Headlight

TE: 172320-2

Sumitomo: 6195-0051

M11A - Horn connector A

M11B - Horn connector B

M13 - Ignition switch

Sumitomo: 6188-0779

Kingfont: P-9007-N2B10101

M14A - Right handlebar switch housing connector A

M19A - Front right direction indicator connector A

M19B - Front right direction indicator connector B

Sumitomo: 6187-3272

CTE: 304-00494

M26 - Rear brake switch

M28 - Starter solenoid

TE: 2822393-1

JST: 03R-JWPF-VKLE-S

M36 - Alarm

M37 - Rear light

Furukawa: QLW-A-B3F-B

Sumitomo: 6180-6182

M48A - Regulator rectifier connector A

M51 - Fall detection switch

Sumitomo: 6180-2451

TE: *-2112780-*

M57 - Front ABS wheel speed sensor

M58 - Rear ABS wheel speed sensor

M59 - ABS modulator

Sumitomo: 6188-0696

Sumitomo: 6187-2802

M68 - Immobiliser/TPMS ECM

M70 - USB socket

JST: 04R-JWPF-VSLE-S

Sumitomo: 6189-7042

M72 - Bluetooth module

M73 - Twist grip position sensor

CTE: 399-00326

R04 - Cooling fan relay

R03 - Fuel pump relay

R05 - Horn relay

R11 - Dip beam relay

R09 - Starter motor relay

R07 - Engine management system relay

R12 - Main beam relay

Power Distribution

01 POWER DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT

Starter Motor Circuit

02 STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

Ignition Circuit

03 IGNITION CIRCUIT

ABS Circuit

04 ABS CIRCUIT

Brake Circuit

05 BRAKE CIRCUIT

Engine Management – ECM Power and Ground

06 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – ECM POWER AND GROUND

Engine Management – Pressure Sensors

07 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – PRESSURE SENSORS

Engine Management – Temperature Sensors

08 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Engine Management – Switches

09 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – SWITCHES

Engine Management – Position Sensors

10 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – POSITION SENSORS

Engine Management – Level Sensor

11 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – LEVEL SENSOR

Engine Management – Fuel Injection Components

12 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – FUEL INJECTION COMPONENTS

Engine Management – Throttle Control

13 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – THROTTLE CONTROL

Engine Management – Cooling Fan

14 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – COOLING FAN

Engine Management – Fuel Pump

15 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CIRCUIT – FUEL PUMP

Instruments Circuit

16 INSTRUMENTS CIRCUIT

Lighting Circuit - Front

17 LIGHTING CIRCUIT - FRONT

Lighting Circuit - Rear

18 LIGHTING CIRCUIT - REAR

Lighting Circuit - Indicators

19 LIGHTING CIRCUIT - INDICATORS

Communication Networks Circuit

20 COMMUNICATION NETWORK CIRCUIT

Horn Circuit

21 HORN CIRCUIT

Immobiliser Circuit

22 IMMOBILISER CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Connector Circuit

23 DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR CIRCUIT

Accessories Circuit

24 ACCESSORIES CIRCUIT

Heated Accessories Circuit

25 HEATED ACCESSORIES CIRCUIT

Alarm Circuit

26 ALARM CIRCUIT

Rider Information Circuit

27 RIDER INFORMATION CIRCUIT

Ground Circuit - Front

28 GROUND CIRCUIT – FRONT

Ground Circuit - Middle

29 GROUND CIRCUIT – MIDDLE

Ground Circuit - Rear

30 GROUND CIRCUIT - REAR

Diagnostics

General Information

Calibration Downloading General Information

caution
The calibration download procedures detailed in the flow charts provided in the following chapters must be followed precisely. Failure to precisely follow the procedures may result in permanent damage to the component receiving the calibration download.
caution
When downloading a calibration, always ensure the calibration selected is correct for your model and region. Failure to select the correct calibration may result in permanent damage to the component receiving the calibration download.
caution
When downloading an engine ECM calibration, always ensure the correct calibration is selected for your fuel type. Engine damage may result if a calibration for an incorrect fuel type is installed.
note
Before starting a download, make sure the battery voltage is at least 12.8 Volts. An approved motorcycle battery charger should be connected to maintain battery charge during download.The headlight fuse may be removed prior to starting a download to prevent the headlight draining the battery. Refer to the label on the fuse box cover for the fuse location.Ensure the ignition and engine Start/Stop switches are set to the positions detailed at the beginning of each download process flowchart.Once the calibration download has been started, do not switch the ignition or engine Start/Stop switches to a different position unless instructed to do so by the Triumph Diagnostic Tool/download process flow chart. Do not disconnect the diagnostic interface during the calibration download.During a calibration download, multiple files are downloaded and the progress bar displayed will repeatedly rise from 0% to 100% as each file is downloaded. Always wait for the Verifying Download screen to appear to confirm that the full calibration has downloaded successfully and click the Finish button to end the process. Do not click the Cancel button while the download is still in progress.

Instrument Calibration Downloads

Following an instrument calibration download, the following items (if fitted) may return to their factory default settings. Before starting an instrument calibration download, record the settings of each item where applicable so that the settings can be restored after the download has finished.

  • Time/date

  • Distance/time to next service

  • TPMS instrument display (enabled/disabled)

  • All riding mode settings

  • Self cancelling indicators (enabled/disabled).

Downloading Sequence - Calibration Downloads to Multiple ECMs

When planning to download a calibration, check each of the motorcycle’s ECMs for out of date calibrations and make sure all ECMs are updated as necessary. Where calibration updates are available for more than one ECM, the ECMs should be updated in the following order.

  1. Keyless ECM
  2. Chassis ECM
  3. Suspension ECM
  4. Headlight ECM
  5. Blind spot radar ECM
  6. Instruments
  7. Engine ECM

Electronic Control Module (ECM) Connectors

Electronic Control Module (ECM) Electrical Connectors

Connector - Pre Diagnosis Checks - Generic

Note the following connector related information before you start any diagnosis:

notice
A major cause of hidden electrical faults can be traced to faulty electrical connectors.

For example:

  • Dirty/corroded terminals

  • Damp terminals

  • Broken or bent cable pins within multiplugs.

For example, the ABS electronic control module (ABS modulator/ECM) relies on the supply of accurate information to enable it to monitor and control the brake system. One dirty terminal will cause an excessive voltage drop resulting in an incorrect signal to the ECM.

If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to clear by simply disconnecting and reconnecting an electrical connector, examine each disconnected connector for the following.

Before Disconnection:

  • If testing with a voltmeter, the voltage across a connector battery supply and ground pins should be virtually battery volts with a small deviation allowable for usual voltage drop within wiring circuits. If there is a noticeable change, suspect faulty/dirty connections. Refer to the circuit diagram within this Service Manual for pin numbers.

When Disconnecting a Connector:

  • Check for a security device that must be released before the connector can be separated. For example: barb, hook and eye and so on.

When Inspecting a Connector:

  • Check that the individual pins have not been bent.

  • Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion.

  • Check cables for security.

  • Check cable pin joints for damage.

When Connecting a Connector:

  • Make sure there is no contamination around the connector/seal.

  • Push together squarely to make sure that the terminals are not bent or incorrectly located.

  • Push the two halves together positively.

Instruments Management System Overview

Odometer Reset

This model is equipped with an odometer that allows the recorded odometer value to be reset to zero during the PDI check.

In the event of replacement this functionality will also allow a new set of instruments to be programmed with the motorcycle’s existing odometer value.

note
Motorcycles with the odometer reset functionality enabled will display the Set/Reset Odometer option in the chassis diagnostics menu.If the odometer has recorded more than 120 miles (200 km) or previously been reset the option will not be available and the buttons will be greyed out.

Triumph Motorcycles LTD. would like to emphasise the importance of following the correct process whilst using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool to SET/RESET the odometer.

caution
This operation can only be performed once and cannot be undone.Check the new value is correct before proceeding.

When setting or resetting the odometer value ensure:

  • The CORRECT odometer value is displayed in the Set Odometer box before pressing the Set or Reset button.

  • DO NOT press the Set or Reset buttons before entering the correct odometer value. Once pressed the option to set or reset the odometer will no longer be available.

  • REMEMBER, pressing the set or reset buttons will lock the odometer and no further programming will be allowed.

odo_reset_4

To Set/Reset the Odometer always refer to Set/Reset Odometer in the Chassis Diagnostics chapter of the Triumph Diagnostic User Guide.

Instrument Calibration Download Flow Chart

Instrument Calibration Download
note
If the download fails to complete, restart the download using manual model selection.

System Diagnostics

Diagnostic Tool Connection

Diagnostic Tool Connection L*1

  1. To connect the Triumph diagnostic interface to the motorcycle, remove the seat (see Seat - Removal) and release the diagnostic connector from its location on the battery tray.
  2. Diagnostic Connector LG1
    1. Diagnostic connector

  3. Plug the Triumph diagnostic interface directly into the diagnostic connector.
  4. System Diagnostic tool

    T3880057 - Triumph Diagnostic Interface

  5. When the diagnostic session is completed, disconnect the Triumph diagnostic interface.
  6. Refit the diagnostic connector to its location and refit the seat (see Seat - Installation).

Systems Diagnostics

The management systems on this model have on-board diagnostic features which allows service technicians to retrieve stored data from the relevant electronic control module (ECM) using Triumph diagnostic software. Full details of the Triumph diagnostic software operation and how to interpret the results are given in the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.

The software allows the user to retrieve data associated with the system sensors and actuators, test various component functions, read build data and make minor adjustments to the set-up of the system.

To connect to the Triumph diagnostic tool see Diagnostic Tool Connection.

The DTCs are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a five digit code.

When the system detects a fault, it begins to count the number of times the fault occurs before confirming the fault and storing a fault code. A confirmed fault may be indicated by the effected system(s) simply becoming inoperative, or by the illumination of a system warning light and/or instrument warning message.

Similarly, if a fault clears, the Instruments also records this fact and will extinguish any warning lights or instrument messages and restore normal operation to the affected system, when sufficient no-fault ignition switch cycles have taken place. Any fault codes will remain in the memory until the required number of no-fault ignition switch cycles have taken place. The number of ignition switch cycles required to restore normal operation will always be less than the number required to remove a DTC from the memory.

DTCs can be removed at any time using the Triumph diagnostic tool.

Engine ECM

Engine ECM

The on-board diagnostic system has two stages to fault detection. When a fault is detected, the DSM (Diagnostic Status Manager) raises a flag to indicate that a fault is present and increments a counter. The counter checks the number of instances that the fault is noted. For example, if there is a fault in the crankshaft position sensor, the counter will increment its count each time the crankshaft turns through 360°, provided the fault is still present.

When the count begins, the fault is detected but not confirmed. If the fault continues to be detected and the count reaches a predetermined threshold, the fault becomes confirmed. If the fault is an emissions related fault or a serious malfunction affecting engine performance, a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and freeze-frame data will be logged in the ECM's memory and the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) on the motorcycle instrument panel is illuminated. Once a fault is confirmed, the number of warm-up cycles made by the engine is counted. If the fault clears, the warm-up cycle counter will extinguish the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) at a predetermined count, and erase the DTC and freeze-frame data from the ECM memory at another (higher) count.

A single warm-up cycle is deemed to have taken place when the following criteria have been met:

  • The coolant temperature must be raised to 72°C or more.

  • The coolant temperature must have risen by 23°C or more from its start temperature, when 72°C is reached.

  • A controlled power down sequence must take place.

note
When a fault has been rectified, the MIL will remain illuminated until sufficient non-fault warm-up cycles have taken place to turn it off. The MIL will be immediately extinguished if, after first rectifying the fault, the DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that caused the MIL illumination is erased from the ECM memory using the Triumph diagnostic software.
note
In some cases, when a fault is detected, the engine management system will revert to a limp-home mode. In this mode, the engine will still function though the performance and fuel economy may be marginally affected. In some cases, the rider may not notice any appreciable difference from normal operation.

Service Symbol

Service Symbol/General Warning Symbol

Service Mode spanner_D_seriesThe service symbol will illuminate for five seconds after the motorcycle start up sequence as a reminder that a service is due in approximately 60 miles (100 km). The service symbol will illuminate permanently when the mileage is reached, it will remain permanently illuminated until the service interval is reset using the Triumph Diagnostic tool.

Service Mode spanner_D_seriesThe general warning symbol will flash if an ABS or engine management fault has occurred and the ABS and/or MIL warning lights are illuminated. Rectify the fault and clear the diagnostic trouble codes using the Triumph Diagnostic tool.

Link to DTC Index

To view the engine ECM DTC index see Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.

ABS ECM

ABS ECM

warning
The ABS warning light will illuminate when the rear wheel is driven at high speed for more than 30 seconds when the motorcycle is on a stand, or driven on a dynamometer. This reaction is normal.When the ignition is switched off and the motorcycle is restarted, the warning light will illuminate until the motorcycle reaches a speed exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) when it will go off.Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) C1612 will remain stored in the ABS ECM memory for 40 ignition cycles before being deleted.

Under normal operation, the ABS warning light will flash after the ignition is switched on and until the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). The ABS performs a self check and if no faults are found the flashing light is extinguished. If a trouble code is stored the ABS warning light will stay illuminated and the ABS will not function, however the brakes will operate as a non-ABS braking system. If the ABS warning light does not extinguish, or illuminates whilst the motorcycle is being ridden.

Dependant on the DTC stored, the ABS ECM will act in one of two ways:

  1. Inhibit ABS operation immediately, irrespective of the ABS operating mode;

  2. Allow the ABS operation to complete before inhibiting the ABS.

Once the ABS ECM has inhibited ABS function, the ECM will act in one of three ways:

  1. Allow the ABS to resume operation if the fault clears;

  2. Allow ABS operation after an ignition cycle if the fault clears;

  3. Inhibit the ABS function until the fault is rectified and the DTC erased.

ABS DTC Link

To view the ABS ECM DTC index see Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.

CAN errors

CAN Errors

The diagnostic trouble codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a five digit fault code (DTC) followed by a four digit code (Failure Type).

CAN DTC Index ink

To view the CAN Errors DTC index see Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors. The index has links to the relevant pin point tests.

Further Diagnosis

Pinpoint Tests

Pin point tests, if used correctly, help to diagnose a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble code has been stored.

Before Starting Pinpoint Tests:

  1. Delete the stored DTCs.
  2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
  3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed to the relevant pinpoint test.

After Completion of Pinpoint Tests:

  1. Delete the stored DTCs.
  2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
  3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed to the relevant pinpoint test.
  4. If a DTC is stored, there is a further fault. Read the stored DTC and refer to the relevant pinpoint test.

Pinpoint Tests

Pinpoint Tests - Engine ECM

Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine

The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.

Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - Engine - LG1; LGX; LL1

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Fault Description

Number of no-fault cycles before turning off MIL

Number of no-fault cycles before DTC is erased

MIL illuminated when fault is logged

Pinpoint test page number

P0030

Oxygen sensor heater open circuit or short to ground - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0030, P0032 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0032

Oxygen sensor heater short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0030, P0032 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0053

Oxygen sensor heater resistance - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0068

Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with throttle position sensor

3

40

Yes

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P0069

Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with ambient pressure sensor

3

40

Yes

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P0105

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

3

40

Yes

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P0107

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P0110

Intake air temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

3

40

Yes

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor

P0111

Intake air temperature sensor signal out of range

3

40

Yes

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor

P0112

Intake air temperature sensor short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor

P0115

Engine coolant temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

3

40

Yes

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P0117

Engine coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P011B

Engine coolant temperature sensor correlation error with intake air temperature sensor

3

40

Yes

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P0120

Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0121

Throttle position sensor 1 signal out of range

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0122

Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0125

Engine coolant temperature sensor signal low - not reaching temperature required for closed loop fuel control

3

40

Yes

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P0130

Oxygen sensor open circuit or short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor

P0131

Oxygen sensor short circuit to ground - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor

P0133

Oxygen sensor circuit slow response - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0133 - Oxygen Sensor 1

P0134

Oxygen sensor circuit no activity detected - bank 1 sensor 1

3

40

Yes

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0171

System too lean - bank 1

3

40

Yes

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0172

System too rich - bank 1

3

40

Yes

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0201

Injector 1 circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction

P0202

Injector 2 circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction

P0203

Injector 3 circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction

P0220

Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0221

Throttle position sensor 2 signal out of range

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0222

Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0300

Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected

3

40

Yes

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0301

Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected

3

40

Yes

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0302

Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected

3

40

Yes

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0303

Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected

3

40

Yes

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0315 (European markets only)

Crankshaft position not adapted

3

40

Yes

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted

P0335

Crankshaft sensor circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted

P0351

Ignition coil 1 malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction

P0352

Ignition coil 2 malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction

P0353

Ignition coil 3 malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction

P0412

Secondary air injection short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve

P0443

Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

P044F

Secondary air injection short circuit to battery positive

3

40

Yes

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve

P0459

Purge valve short circuit to battery positive

3

40

Yes

P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

P0460

Fuel level sensor circuit malfunction

0

40

No

P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction

P0500

Vehicle speed sensor - Wheel speed sensor fault

3

40

Yes

P0500 - Vehicle speed sensor malfunction

P050C

Engine coolant temperature sensor signal high - too warm for cold start conditions

3

40

Yes

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P0506

Idle control system RPM lower than expected

3

40

Yes

P0506 - Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected

P0507

Idle control system RPM higher than expected

3

40

Yes

P0507 - Engine Idle Higher Than Expected

P0560

System voltage - battery circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction

P06A4

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage low

3

40

Yes

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5V Sensor Circuit D

P06A5

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage high

3

40

Yes

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5V Sensor Circuit D

P06A6

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage out of range

3

40

Yes

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A

P06A7

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage out of range

3

40

Yes

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B

P06A8

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage out of range

3

40

Yes

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C

P06A9

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage out of range

3

40

Yes

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5V Sensor Circuit D

P06B8

EEPROM Error

0

40

No

P06B8 - EEPROM Error

P0606

ECM internal error

0

0

Yes

P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error

P0642

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage low

3

40

Yes

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A

P0643

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage high

3

40

Yes

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A

P0652

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage low

3

40

Yes

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B

P0653

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage high

3

40

Yes

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B

P0698

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage low

3

40

Yes

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C

P0699

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage high

3

40

Yes

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C

P0704

Clutch switch 1 input circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction

P0914

Gear position sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor

P0915

Gear position sensor signal error - correlation error with vehicle speed

3

40

Yes

P0915 - Gear Position Sensor

P0917

Gear position sensor short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

3

40

Yes

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor

P1105

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 pipe malfunction

3

40

Yes

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P1135

Traction Control prevented due to ABS malfunction

3

40

Yes

P1135 - Traction Control Disabled Due To Malfunction

P1231

Fuel pump relay short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay

P1232

Fuel pump relay short circuit to battery Voltage

3

40

Yes

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay

P1520

Unmatched ABS module

3

40

Flashing

P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module

P1521

CAN fault - lost communication with ABS module or ABS system status error

3

40

Yes

P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error

P1552

Cooling fan relay short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay

P1553

Cooling fan relay short circuit to battery positive or over temp

3

40

Yes

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay

P1576

Brake switch 1 correlation error with brake switch 2

3

40

Yes

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches

P1577

Brake switch 2 correlation error with brake switch 1

3

40

Yes

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches

P1604

ECM tamper detected - return to Triumph

0

0

Yes

P1604 - Engine ECM Tamper Detected - Return To Triumph

P1605

ECM locked by the tune lock function

Only if tune lock is unlocked

N/A

Flashing

P1605 - Engine ECM Locked By The Calibration Lock Function

P1607

ECM ride by wire internal error

3

40

Yes

P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error

P1608

ECM ride by wire internal error

3

40

Yes

P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error

P1614

Instrument ID incompatible

Only if Instrument ID Matching

N/A

Flashing

P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible Or Instruments Locked By Calibration Lock Function

P1631

Fall detection circuit short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch

P1632

Fall detection circuit short circuit to battery positive

3

40

Yes

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch

P1650

CAN fault - lost communication with Immobiliser ECM

0

40

No

P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM

P1659

Ignition power supply malfunction

3

40

Yes

P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction

P1685

Main relay circuit malfunction

3

40

Yes

P1685 - Main Relay Circuit Malfunction

P1690

CAN Fault

3

40

Yes

P1690 - CAN Fault

P1695

CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel

0

40

No

P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel

P1702

Shift force sensor circuit low voltage

3

40

Yes

P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)

P1703

Shift force sensor circuit high voltage

3

40

Yes

P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)

P2100

Throttle actuator control motor open circuit

3

40

Yes

P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit

P2102

Throttle actuator control internal motor relay does not operate

3

40

Yes

P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control

P2103

Throttle actuator control internal motor relay operates continually

3

40

Yes

P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control

P2111

Throttle valve drive error (stuck open)

3

40

Yes

P2111, P2119 - Throttle Valve Drive Error

P2119

Throttle valve drive error

3

40

Yes

P2111, P2119 - Throttle Valve Drive Error

P2120

Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1

P2121

Twist grip position sensor 1 signal out of range

3

40

Yes

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1

P2123

Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive

3

40

Yes

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1

P2125

Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to ground or open circuit

3

40

Yes

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2

P2126

Twist grip position sensor 2 signal out of range

3

40

Yes

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2

P2128

Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive

3

40

Yes

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2

P2135

Throttle position sensor 1 correlation error with throttle position sensor 2

3

40

Yes

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P2138

Twist grip position sensor 1 correlation error with twist grip position 2

3

40

Yes

P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2

P2226

Ambient air pressure sensor circuit open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

3

40

Yes

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor

P2228

Ambient air pressure sensor circuit short circuit to ground

3

40

Yes

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor

P0030, P0032 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0030, P0032, Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault Code - CM8; CR8; CS8; DP5; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC; YE1; YF1; YM1; YN1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0030

Oxygen sensor heater open circuit or short to ground - bank 1 sensor 1

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0032

Oxygen sensor heater short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0030, P0032, Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - PB1, PJ1, L*1, PV1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A08

- EMS relay pin 5

OK

Disconnect oxygen sensors and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4

- Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C22 to Engine ECM pin A08

OK

Renew oxygen sensor, proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

Check adaption status.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0030, P0032, P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram_LG1; LGX; LL1

Oxygen Sensor PPT (Oxygen sensor LG1)
  1. Oxygen Sensor

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Engine ECM Connector C

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 - Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Fault Code - PB1,PJ1, CS7, L*1; PV1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0053

Oxygen sensor heater resistance - bank 1 sensor 1

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0134

Oxygen sensor circuit no activity detected - bank 1 sensor 1

P0171

System too lean - bank 1

P0172

System too rich - bank 1

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Test L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

-Oxygen sensor pin 3

-Oxygen sensor pin 4

-EMS relay pin B05

-Engine ECM pin C22

OK

Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check sensor resistance:

- Oxygen sensor pin 3 to 4

13 to 18.5 Ohms

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C22 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity:

-Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3

-Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4

-Engine ECM pin A21 to oxygen sensor pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

Check adaption status.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0030, P0032, P0053, P0134, P0171, P0172 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram_LG1; LGX; LL1

Oxygen Sensor PPT (Oxygen sensor LG1)
  1. Oxygen Sensor

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Engine ECM Connector C

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Fault Code - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

note
For Fault Code P0068, carry out the actions as listed in the action column for P0068.Only carry out the Camshaft Timing Check/Adjust if all the previous checks listed for P0068 do not clear the fault code.

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0068

Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with throttle position sensor

Check for air leak at the throttle body/transition piece to cylinder head face.

Check for trapped, twisted and damaged MAP sensor hose(s).

Check for air leak at the MAP sensor hoses.

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Camshaft Timing Check/Adjust, as described in the service manual

P0069

Manifold absolute pressure sensor correlation error with ambient pressure sensor

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0107

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 short circuit to ground

P0105

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

P1105

Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 pipe malfunction

Check connection/condition of pipes from MAP sensors to throttle body.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105 , P1106 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin C29

- MAP sensor pin 1, 2, 3

OK

Disconnect MAP sensors and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C29 to Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin C29 to Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B18 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C29 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable for continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to MAP sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B23 to MAP sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C29 to MAP sensor pin 2

OK

Renew relevant MAP pressure sensor, proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0068, P0069, P0107, P0105, P1105, P1106 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1 LGX

MAP Sensor Circuit H7 (Map sensor H7)
  1. MAP Sensor

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Engine ECM Connector C

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Fault Code - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0110

Intake air temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 volt sensor supply

View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0111

Intake air temperature sensor signal out of range

P0112

Intake air temperature sensor short circuit to ground

Disconnect engine ECM and sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 6:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Test - L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A07

- Engine ECM pin A17

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 7

2

Check resistance value:

- Engine ECM pin A17 to ground (Temperature dependent - see below)

OK

Proceed to test 6

Open circuit

Disconnect air temperature sensor and proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Disconnect air temperature sensor and proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A17 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin A07 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2

- Ground to sensor pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin A21

- Engine ECM pin A17 to Engine ECM pin B12

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

5

Check sensor resistance:

- Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2 (Temperature dependent - see below)

OK

Proceed to test 7

Faulty

Renew air temperature sensor, proceed to test 7

6

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A17 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 7

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

7

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Resistance Data

Resistance Data

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1 PV1

If engine is warm, remove the sensor and allow time to cool to ambient temperature prior to test.

Ambient Temperature

Resistance Value

80ºC

200 to 400 Ohms

20ºC

2.35 to 2.65 K Ohms

-10ºC

8.50 to 10.25 K Ohms

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0110, P0111, P0112 - Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1 LGX

Intake air temperature sensor LG1
  1. Inlet Air Temperature Sensor

  2. Engine Subharness Connector (Subharness Side)

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Engine ECM Connector B

  5. Engine Subharness Connector (Main Harness Side)

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P011B

Engine coolant temperature sensor correlation error with intake air temperature sensor

View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available

View and note diagnostic software sensor data

Make sure the sensor connector is secure

Disconnect ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1

P0115

Engine coolant temperature sensor open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

P0117

Engine coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground

P0125

Engine coolant temperature sensor signal low - not reaching temperature required for closed loop fuel control

P050C

Engine coolant temperature sensor signal high - too warm for cold start conditions

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Pinpoint Test - L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B20

- Engine ECM pin B12

- Engine ECM pin A07

- Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 1

- Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B20 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B20 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B20 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B20 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin A07 to sensor pin 2

- Coolant Temperature Sensor pin 2 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

4

Check resistance value:

- Engine ECM pin B20 to ground

Temperature dependent see Resistance Data below

OK

Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Disconnect temp sensor and proceed to test 5

5

Check sensor resistance:

- Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2

Temperature dependent see Resistance Data below

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Renew temp sensor, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Resistance Data

Resistance Data

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Resistance Data - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Resistance data under typical conditions:

Temperature

Resistance Value

Warm engine

200 to 400 Ohms

Cold engine: 20°C ambient

2.35 to 2.60 K Ohms

Cold engine: -10°C ambient

8.50 to 10.20 K Ohms

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P011B, P0115, P0117, P0125, P050C - Coolant Temperature Sensor - Circuit diagram - LG1; LGX

Coolant Temp Sensor LG1 EU5
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Coolant Temperature Sensor

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PWC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0120

Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit

View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data.

Make sure the throttle position sensor connector is secure. Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0121

Throttle position sensor 1 signal out of range

P0122

Throttle position sensor 1 short circuit to ground

P0220

Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive or open circuit

P0221

Throttle position sensor 2 signal out of range

P0222

Throttle position sensor 2 short circuit to ground

P2135

Throttle position sensor 1 correlation error with throttle position sensor 2

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Pinpoint Test - L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A20

- Engine ECM pin A38

- Engine ECM pin A26

- Engine ECM pin A32

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A26 to ground

- Engine ECM pin A38 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A32 to throttle position sensor connector pin 5

- Engine ECM pin A38 to throttle position sensor connector pin 4

- Engine ECM pin A20 to throttle position sensor connector pin 3

- Engine ECM pin A26 to throttle position sensor connector pin 6

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A26 to Engine ECM pin A32

- Engine ECM pin A26 to Engine ECM pin A38

- Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A38

OK

Renew throttle position sensor, proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0120, P0121, P0122, P0220, P0221, P0222, P2135 - Throttle Position Sensor - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Throttle Position Sensor PPT (throttle position sensor LG1)
  1. Throttle Position Sensor

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault - PB1,PJ1, L*1 PV1; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0130

Oxygen sensor open circuit or short circuit to battery positive - bank 1 sensor 1

Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 4:

P0131

Oxygen sensor short circuit to ground - bank 1 sensor 1

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C32

OK

Disconnect oxygen sensors and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C32 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C32 to oxygen sensor pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C32

OK

Renew oxygen sensor and proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

Check adaption status.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Oxygen Sensor PPT (Oxygen sensor LG1)
  1. Oxygen Sensor

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Engine ECM Connector C

P0133 - Oxygen Sensor 1

P0133 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC; YE1; YF1; YM1; YN1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0133

Oxygen sensor 1 circuit slow response - bank 1 sensor 1

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0133 - Oxygen Sensor Circuit Slow Response - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

-Oxygen sensor pin 1

-Oxygen sensor pin 2

-EMS relay pin B05

-Engine ECM pin C22

OK

Disconnect oxygen sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C22 to ground

Check sensor resistance:

- Oxygen sensor pin 1 to 2

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

-Engine ECM pin C22 to oxygen sensor pin 3

-Engine ECM pin A08 to oxygen sensor pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

Check adaption status.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0130, P0131 - Oxygen Sensor - Bank 1 Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Oxygen Sensor PPT (Oxygen sensor LG1)
  1. Oxygen Sensor

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Engine ECM Connector C

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Fault - H*8, L*1, PB1, PJ1, PV1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0201

Injector 1 circuit malfunction

View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Make sure the relevant injector connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0202

Injector 2 circuit malfunction

P0203

Injector 3 circuit malfunction

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C23

- Engine ECM pin C6

- Engine ECM pin C7

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 7

2

Check resistance value:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1)

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2)

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3)

3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms

Proceed to test 3

Open circuit

Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Disconnect relevant injector and proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit to ground:

- Engine ECM pin C23 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C6 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C7 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 7

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

4

Check cable continuity:

- EMS relay pin 5 to relevant injector pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C23 to injector 1 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C6 to injector 2 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C7 to injector 3 pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 6

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

5

Check cable for short circuit to supply:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1)

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2)

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23 (injector 1)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6 (injector 2)

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7 (injector 3)

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

6

Check relevant injector resistance:

- Injector pin 1 to injector pin 2

11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms

Proceed to test 7

Faulty

Renew relevant injector, proceed to test 7

7

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0201, P0202, P0203 - Injector Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fuel injectors LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector C

  3. Fuel Injectors

  4. Engine Management System Relay

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0300

Random/Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected

View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available

Make sure the relevant fuel injector and coil connectors are secure.

Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1

P0301

Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected

P0302

Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected

P0303

Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected- Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cables and terminal integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked:

P0301

- Engine ECM pin C23

- Fuel injector 1 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B33

P0302

- Engine ECM pin C6

- Fuel injector 2 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B22

P0303

- Engine ECM pin C7

- Fuel injector 3 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B11

All

- EMS relay pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 9

2

Check cable for short circuit to ground integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked:

P0301

- Engine ECM pin C23 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B33 to ground

P0302

- Engine ECM pin C6 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B22 to ground

P0303

- Engine ECM pin C7 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B11 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9

3

Check cable for short circuit to supply for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked:

P0301

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C23

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B33

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B33

P0302

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C6

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin B22

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B22

P0303

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C7

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin B11

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B11

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9

4

Check cable continuity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals/cables listed to be checked:

P0301

- EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 1 pin 2

- EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 1 pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C23 to fuel injector 1 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B33 to ignition coil 1 pin 1

P0302

- EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 2 pin 2

- EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 2 pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C6 to fuel injector 2 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B22 to ignition coil 2 pin 1

P0303

- EMS relay pin 5 to fuel injector 3 pin 2

- EMS relay pin 5 to ignition coil 3 pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C7 to fuel injector 3 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B11 to ignition coil 3 pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 9

5

Check fuel injector resistance value integrity for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals listed to be checked:

P0301

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C23

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C23

P0303

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C6

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C6

P0303

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM pin C7

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin C7

OK

11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms

Proceed to test 7

Faulty

Disconnect relevant fuel injector and proceed to test 6

6

Check relevant fuel injector resistance:

- Fuel injector pin 1 to fuel injector pin 2

OK

11.4 Ohms to 12.6 Ohms

Proceed to test 9

Faulty

Renew relevant fuel injector, proceed to test 9

7

Check coil resistance value for the relevant fault code, P0300 will require all terminals listed to be checked:

P0301

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B33

-Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B33

P0302

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B22

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B22

P0303

- Engine ECM pin A8 to Engine ECM B11

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM B11

OK

1.2 Ohms to 1.6 Ohms

Proceed to test 9

Faulty

Disconnect relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 8

8

Check relevant ignition coil resistance:

- Ignition coil pin 1 to ignition coil pin 2

OK

1.2 Ohms to 1.6 Ohms

Proceed to test 9

Faulty

Renew relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 9

9

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 - Cylinder Misfire Detected - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Engine Misfire LG1
  1. Engine Management System Relay

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

  3. Engine ECM Connector B

  4. Engine ECM Connector C

  5. Fuel Injector 3

  6. Fuel Injector 2

  7. Fuel Injector 1

  8. Ignition Coil 3

  9. Ignition Coil 2

  10. Ignition Coil 1

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Fault - LG1; LGX; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0315

Crankshaft position not adapted.

See Crankshaft Position Adaption (European Markets Only).

P0335

Crankshaft sensor circuit malfunction

View and note diagnostic software freeze frame data if available

Ensure sensor is fitted correctly and connector is secure

Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Pinpoint test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check terminal and cable integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B17

- Engine ECM pin B16

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to

test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B17 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B16 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B16 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B17 to sensor pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B17 to Engine ECM pin B16

OK

Renew crankshaft sensor, proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

5

Check crank toothed wheel:

- Damage to teeth - magnetic debris contamination

OK

Proceed to test 6

Faulty

Clean/renew toothed wheel, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0315, P0335 - Crankshaft Position Not Adapted - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Crank sensor LG1
  1. Crankshaft Position Sensor

  2. Engine Subharness Connector (Subharness Side)

  3. Engine Subharness Connector (Main Harness Side)

  4. Engine ECM Connector B

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0351

Ignition coil 1 malfunction

View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Make sure relevant ignition coil connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0352

Ignition coil 2 malfunction

P0353

Ignition coil 3 malfunction

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - L*1, HG8, HJ8, HK8, HL8

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B33

- Engine ECM pin B22

- Engine ECM pin B11

- EMS relay pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 7

2

Check resistance value:

Engine ECM pin A08 to

- Engine ECM pin B33 (ignition coil 1)

- Engine ECM pin B22 (ignition coil 2)

- Engine ECM pin B11 (ignition coil 3)

Engine ECM pin A21 to

- Engine ECM pin B33 (ignition coil 1)

- Engine ECM pin B22 (ignition coil 2)

- Engine ECM pin B11 (ignition coil 3)

3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms

Proceed to test 3

Open circuit

Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Disconnect relevant ignition coil and proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B33 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B22 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B11 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

4

Check cable continuity:

- EMS relay pin 5 to relevant ignition coil pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B33 to ignition coil 1 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B22 to ignition coil 2 pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B11 to ignition coil 3 pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

5

Check relevant ignition coil resistance:

- Ignition coil pin 1 to ignition coil pin 2

3.0 Ohms to 4.2 Ohms

Proceed to test 6

Faulty

Renew relevant ignition coil, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0351, P0352, P0353 - Ignition Coil Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

LG1 series Ignition coils
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Ignition Coils

  4. Engine Management System Relay

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Fault - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0412

Secondary air injection short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Ensure SAI valve connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P044F

Secondary air injection short circuit to battery positive

Disconnect engine ECM and SAI valve and proceed to pinpoint test 5:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B02

- EMS Relay pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 7

2

Check resistance value:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B02

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B02

18 Ohms to 24 Ohms

Proceed to test 3

Open circuit

Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Disconnect SAI valve and proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B02 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 7

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

4

Check cable continuity:

- EMS relay pin 5 to SAI valve pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B02 to SAI valve pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

5

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B02

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B02

OK

Proceed to test 6

Fault still present

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

6

Check SAI valve resistance:

- SAI valve pin 1 to SAI valve pin 2

18 Ohms to 24 Ohms

Proceed to test 7

Faulty

Renew SAI valve, proceed to test 7

7

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic tool function test to visually verify operation of SAI valve.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0412, P044F, Secondary Air injection Valve - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

SAI valve LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Secondary Air Injection Valve

  4. Engine Management System Relay

P0443, P0459 - Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Fault - LG1; LGX; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0443

Purge valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data.

Ensure purge valve connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0459

Purge valve short circuit to battery positive

Disconnect the purge valve and proceed to pinpoint test 5:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Pinpoint Test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin A21

- Engine ECM pin B01

- EMS relay pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 7

2

Check resistance value:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B01

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B01

22 Ohms to 30 Ohms

Proceed to test 3

Open circuit

Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Disconnect purge valve and proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B01 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 7

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

4

Check cable continuity:

- EMS relay pin 5 to valve pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B01 to valve pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 6

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

5

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to Engine ECM pin B01

- Engine ECM pin A21 to Engine ECM pin B01

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 7

6

Check purge valve resistance:

- Valve pin 1 to valve pin 2

22 Ohms to 30 Ohms

Proceed to test 7

Faulty

Renew purge valve, proceed to test 7

7

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to visually verify operation of purge valve.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0443, P0459 - Purge Valve - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

LG1 series Purge valve
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Purge Valve

  4. Engine Management System Relay

P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction

P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0460

Fuel level sensor circuit malfunction

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C05

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C05 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C05 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B12 to sensor pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0460 - Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Fuel level sensor LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector C

  2. Fuel Level Sensor

P0500 - Vehicle speed sensor malfunction

Vehicle Speed Sensor P0500 L*1; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

Not Applicable - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Not Applicable

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

Not Applicable - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Not Applicable

P0506 - Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected

P0506 - Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0506

Idle control system RPM lower than expected

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Check for associated DTCs and perform tests as required.

Reset DTCs, if fault still present check the following:

  • Air vacuum leak (MAP sensor hoses)

  • Air restriction at air intake

  • Restriction in the exhaust system

  • Restriction in the fuel system

  • Make sure the injector connectors are secure.

  • Make sure the ignition coil connectors are secure.

P0507 - Engine Idle Higher Than Expected

P0507 - Engine Idle Higher Than Expected - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0507

Idle control system RPM higher than expected

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Check for associated DTCs and perform tests as required.

Reset DTCs, if fault still present check the following:

  • Air vacuum leak (MAP sensor hoses)

  • Leaking air intake after the throttle bodies

  • Evaporative system

  • Secondary air injection system

P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction

P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC; YK1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0560

System voltage - battery circuit malfunction

View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data.

Make sure voltage across battery is acceptable, note voltage.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin A21

- Engine EMS relay pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 3

2

With Ignition on check voltage at:

- Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin A21

Same as across battery voltage

Proceed to test 3

Less than across battery voltage

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 3

3

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0560 - System Voltage - Battery Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

LG1 System Voltage
  1. Engine Management System Relay

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0642

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage low

View and note diagnostic software 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0643

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage high

P06A6

5V Sensor Circuit A - reference voltage out of range

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A32

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A32 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A32 to throttle position sensor connector pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A20

- Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin A32 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0642, P0643, P06A6 - 5 V Sensor Circuit A - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Throttle Position Sensor PPT (throttle position sensor LG1)
  1. Throttle Position Sensor

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0652

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage low

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0653

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage high

P06A7

5V Sensor Circuit B - reference voltage out of range

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Pinpoint Test -HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check terminal and cable integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B26

Ok

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B26 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B26 to twist grip position sensor pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin B24

- Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B26 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0652, P0653, P06A7 - 5V Sensor Circuit B - Circuit Diagram -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Twist Grip Position 1 Circuit H7 (Twist grip pos 1 H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Twist Grip Position Sensor

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0698

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage low

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0699

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage high

P06A8

5V Sensor Circuit C - reference voltage out of range

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Pinpoint Test - HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check terminal and cable integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B25

Ok

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B25 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B25 to twist grip position sensor pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin B13

- Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B25 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0698, P0699, P06A8 - 5V Sensor Circuit C - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Twist Grip Position 1 Circuit H7 (Twist grip pos 1 H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Twist Grip Position Sensor

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5V Sensor Circuit D

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P06A4

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage low

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P06A5

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage high

P06A9

5V Sensor Circuit D - reference voltage out of range

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check terminal and cable integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B18

Ok

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to ambient pressure sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B18 to MAP sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Triumph shift assist sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B18 to fall detection switch pin 4

- Engine ECM pin B18 to gear position sensor pin 3

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P06A4, P06A5, P06A9, 5 v Sensor Circuit D - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

5V sensor circuit D LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Ambient Air Pressure Sensor

  4. Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

  5. Fall Detection Switch

  6. Gear Position Sensor

  7. Triumph Shift Assist (If Fitted)

  8. Engine Subharness Connector (Main Harness Side)

  9. Engine Subharness Connector (Subharness Harness Side)

P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error

P0606, P1607, P1608 - Engine ECM Internal Error - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

P0606

Engine ECM internal error

Contact Triumph service.

P1607

P1608

Engine ECM ride by wire internal error

P06B8 - EEPROM Error

P06B8 - EEPROM Error - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P06B8

EEPROM Error

View and note freeze frame data if available.

No tests available - contact Triumph service.

P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction

P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0704

Clutch switch 1 input circuit malfunction

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Test

Result

Action

1

Check terminal and cable integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A06

Ok

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A06 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A06 to left hand switch housing connector B pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A06 to A08

- Engine ECM pin A06 to A21

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0704 - Clutch Switch 1 Input Circuit Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Clutch Switch PPT (LG1 clutch switch)
  1. Left Hand Switch Housing Inline Connector

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

  3. Fuse Box 1

  4. Left Hand Switch Housing

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0914

Gear position sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure the sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P0917

Gear position sensor short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B30

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B30 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 4

- Engine ECM pin B30 to sensor pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B30 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Renew gear position sensor and contact pin and proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor - Circuit Diagram - CM8; CR8; CS8; LG1; LGX

Gear Position Sensor Circuit H7 (Gear position H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Gear Position Sensor

P0915 - Gear Position Sensor

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P0915

Gear position sensor signal error - correlation error with vehicle speed

See information below

This is a calculation error between wheel speed and engine rpm, so the calculated gear position does not match the indicated gear position.

Possible causes can include incorrect front or rear sprocket sizes, incorrect gearing or an incorrect rear ABS pulser ring.

P1135 - Traction Control Disabled Due To Malfunction

P1135 - Traction Control Disabled Due To Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1135

Traction Control disabled due to malfunction

Check that there is no other DTC linked to the ABS system or CAN communication stored.

Contact Triumph service.

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Fault - DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1231

Fuel pump relay short circuit to ground or open circuit

Check if pump runs briefly when ignition is switched on

Ensure fuel pump relay connector is secure

Disconnect Engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1

P1232

Fuel pump relay short circuit to battery positive

Disconnect fuel pump relay and proceed to pinpoint test 4

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A12

- Right hand switch housing pin 2

OK

Disconnect fuel pump relay and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit to ground:

- Engine ECM pin A12 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A12 to fuel pump relay pin 1

- Right hand switch housing pin 2 to fuel pump relay pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A12 to Right hand switch housing pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to verify operation of fuel pump.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1231, P1232 - Fuel Pump Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Fuel Pump Relay PPT (LG1 Fuel pump)
  1. Fuel Pump Relay

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

  3. Right Hand Switch Housing

P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module

P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module - Fault - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1520

Unmatched ABS

This is also identified by ABS warning light indication.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1520 - Unmatched ABS Module - Pinpoint Test- DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check ABS modulator part number is correct for the motorcycle

OK

Proceed to test 2

Incorrect

Replace ABS modulator with correct part and proceed to test 3

2

Check that the engine ECM calibration is correct for the motorcycle, using the diagnostic tool.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Incorrect

Update calibration using service tool, proceed to test 3

3

Clear fault code, check for normal operation

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error

P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1521

CAN fault - lost communication with ABS module or ABS system status error

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Make sure ABS modulator connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Engine ECM pin C24

- ABS modulator pin 2

- ABS modulator pin 10

- ABS modulator pin 11

- ABS modulator pin 18

OK

Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

OK

Disconnect ABS modulator and proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check fuse box fuse 7 integrity.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Proceed to test 4

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS pin 2 to ground

- ABS pin 11 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6

5

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS pin 11

- ABS pin 10 to ground

- Fuse box fuse 7 to ABS pin 18

- Engine ECM pin C14 to ABS pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 6

Fault still present

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1521 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With ABS Module Or ABS System Status Error - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

ABS Modulator PPT (LG1 ABS modulator)
  1. ABS Modulator

  2. Fuse Box

  3. Engine ECM Connector C

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Fault - DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1552

Cooling fan relay short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note diagnostic software 'sensor' data.

Ensure fan relay connector is secure.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P1553

Cooling fan relay short circuit to battery positive or over temp

Disconnect engine ECM and fan relay and proceed to pinpoint test 4:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A13

- Cooling fan relay pin 1

- Cooling fan relay pin 2

OK

Disconnect fan relay and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A13 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A13 to fan relay pin 1

- EMS relay pin 5 fan relay pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A13 to Engine ECM pin A08

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run diagnostic software function test to visually verify operation of cooling fan.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1552, P1553 - Cooling Fan Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Cooling fan relay LG1
  1. Cooling Fan Relay

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Fault - CG7; CM7; CN7; CR7; CS7; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1576

Brake 1 switch correlation error with brake switch 2

View and note freeze frame data if available.

Make sure the brake switches connectors are secure.

Make sure the battery voltage is greater than 10V.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P1577

Brake 2 switch correlation error with brake switch 1

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Turn ignition on, operate rear brake switch and check brake light operation.

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C14

- Engine ECM pin C26

- Ignition switch pin 8

OK

Disconnect front and rear brake switch connectors, proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

3

With brakes released, check front and rear brake switch operation:

The following should be short circuit:

- Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 7

- Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 2

The following should be open circuit:

- Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 6

- Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 1

With the front brake switch pressed the following should be short circuit:

- Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 6

The following should be open circuit:

- Front brake switch pin 8 to pin 7

With the rear brake switch pressed the following should be open circuit:

- Rear brake light switch pin 3 to pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Replace relevant brake switch, proceed to test 6

4

Re-Connect the brake switch connectors. Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C14 to front brake switch pin 6

- Engine ECM pin C26 to rear brake switch pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C14 to rear brake switch pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C14 to front brake switch pin 6

With the brake switches released:

- Engine ECM pin C26 to ignition switch pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 5

Open Circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

5

Re-Connect the brake switch connectors. With the ignition switch on, measure the following Voltages:

- Engine ECM pin C26 to ground

- Rear brake switch pin 1 to ground (with rear brake pedal depressed)

- Rear brake switch pin 2 to ground (with rear brake pedal released)

- Rear brake switch pin 3 to ground

- Front brake switch pin 8 to ground

- Front brake switch pin 7 to ground (with front brake lever released)

- Front brake switch pin 6 to ground (with front brake lever pressed)

Greater than 10V

Proceed to test 6

Less than 10V

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1576, P1577 - Brake Switches - Circuit Diagram - LG1

Brake Switches LG1
  1. Ignition Switch

  2. ABS Modulator

  3. Right Hand Switch Housing

  4. Rear Brake Switch

  5. Engine ECM Connector C

P1604 - Engine ECM Tamper Detected - Return To Triumph

P1604 - Engine ECM Tamper Detected - Return To Triumph - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1604

Engine ECM tamper detected - return to Triumph

Contact Triumph service

P1605 - Engine ECM Locked By The Calibration Lock Function

P1605 - Engine ECM Locked By The Calibration Lock Function - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1605

Engine ECM locked by the Calibration Lock function

This is also identified by a fast flashing MIL indication, and a disabled engine management system.

Unlock the engine ECM using the diagnostic software and supplied unlock code from Triumph service.

P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible Or Instruments Locked By Calibration Lock Function

P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible or Instruments locked by Calibration Lock function - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1614

Instrument ID incompatible

Instrument or calibration is incorrect, causing the engine ECM to be disabled to prevent the motorcycle from being operated

This is also identified by a fast flashing MIL indication and a disabled engine management system.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1614 - Instrument ID incompatible or Instruments locked by Calibration Lock function - Pinpoint Test - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Test

Result

Action

1

Check instrument part number is correct for the motorcycle

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Replace instrument with correct part and proceed to test 3

2

Check that the calibration is correct for the motorcycle, using the diagnostic software

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Update the calibration using the diagnostic software, proceed to test 3

3

Clear fault code, check for normal operation

OK

Action complete - quit test

Short circuit

Contact Triumph service

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Fault - CG7; CM7; CN7; CR7; CS7; CT7; CX7; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1631

Fall detection circuit short circuit to ground

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Ensure switch connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P1632

Fall detection circuit short circuit to battery Voltage

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Pin point Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin A37

- Sensor pin 4, 5, 6

OK

Disconnect sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A37 to Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin A37 to Engine ECM pin B23

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 4

- Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 6

- Engine ECM pin A37 to sensor pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1631, P1632 - Fall Detection Switch - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Fall Detection Switch PPT H7 (Fall detection H7)
  1. Fall Detection Switch

  2. Engine ECM Connector A

  3. Engine ECM Connector B

P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM

P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Fault - CG7; CM7; CM8; CN7; CR7; CR8; CS7; CS8; CT7; CX7; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1650

Lost communication with Immobiliser ECM

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Make sure the immobiliser control module connector is secure.

Make sure the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Engine ECM pin C24

- Immobiliser pin 1

- Immobiliser pin 2

- Immobiliser pin 6

- Immobiliser pin 7

- Immobiliser pin 8

OK

Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

OK

Disconnect immobiliser, ignition switch and proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check fuse box fuse 6 integrity.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Proceed to test 4

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Immobiliser pin 2 to ground

- Immobiliser pin 8 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6

5

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to immobiliser pin 6

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser pin 1

- Immobiliser pin 7 to ground

- Fuse box fuse 6 to immobiliser pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 6

Fault still present

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1650 - CAN Fault - Lost communication With Immobiliser ECM - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Immobiliser control module communication LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector C

  2. Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module

  3. Fuse Box

  4. Ignition Switch

P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction

P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1659

Ignition power supply malfunction

Make sure that the engine stop switch is in the RUN position and any alarm fitted is disarmed

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check fuse box fuse 5 integrity.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Proceed to test 2

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A11 to ground

OK

Replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 5

3

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A11

- Right hand switch housing pin 1

- Right hand switch housing pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A11 to fuse box fuse 5

Note that the engine stop switch must be in the RUN position, fuse 5 must be removed and any alarm fitted must be disarmed.

OK

Replace fuse 6 and proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring, immobiliser or engine stop switch fault, replace fuse 5 and proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1659 - Ignition Power Supply Malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

ECM Supply PPT LG1 ecm supply_ 1
  1. Fuse Box 1

  2. Ignition Switch

  3. Right Hand Switch Housing Connector

  4. Engine ECM Connector A

P1685 - Main Relay Circuit Malfunction

P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1685

Main relay circuit malfunction

Note that the starter motor cannot be powered if a main relay fault exists. Make sure the EMS main relay connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Ensure ignition has been switched off for greater than 90 seconds. Identify EMS main relay on the harness.

Check that relay operates when the ignition is switched ON and the stop and run switch is in the RUN position.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Disconnect EMS main relay and engine ECM. Proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin A27 to ground

- Engine ECM pin A08 to ground

- Engine ECM pin A21 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace Fuse 5 and proceed to test 6

3

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin A27

- EMS main relay pin 1

- EMS main relay pin 2

- EMS main relay pin 3

- EMS main relay pin 5

OK

Disconnect main relay and proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check fuse box fuse 3 integrity.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Fuse blown or open circuit

Replace fuse and proceed to test 5

5

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin A08 to EMS main relay pin 5

- Engine ECM pin A21 to EMS main relay pin 5

- Engine ECM pin A27 to EMS relay pin 1

- EMS main relay pin 2 to ground

- EMS main relay pin 3 to fuse box fuse 3

OK

Replace EMS main relay and proceed to test 6

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code. Switch ignition off for longer than 90 seconds. Switch ignition on and check that the EMS main relay operates. Start engine as final check.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1685 - Main Relay Circuit malfunction - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX1

EMS Main Relay PPT (ems relay LG1)
  1. Fuse Box

  2. Engine Management System Relay

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

P1690 - CAN Fault

P1690 - Can Fault - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1690

CAN Fault

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure Instrument connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1690 - Can Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C24

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Instrument pin 3

- Instrument pin 2

- ABS module pin 2

- ABS module pin 11

- Diagnostic connector pin 6

- Diagnostic connector pin 14

- Immobiliser module pin 1

- Immobiliser module pin 6

OK

Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS control module pin 11

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS control module pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Diagnostic connector pin 14

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Diagnostic connector pin 6

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser module pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Immobiliser module pin 6

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Engine ECM pin C25

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1690 - Can Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

CAN Communication PPT (LG1 Instruments)
  1. Instruments

  2. Engine ECM Connector C

  3. Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module

  4. Diagnostic Connector

  5. ABS Control Module

P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel

P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Fault - PB1, PJ1, L*1, PV1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P1695

Lost communication with instrument panel

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Engine ECM pin C24

- Instrument pin 3

- Instrument pin 2

OK

Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Engine ECM pin C24

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1695 - CAN Fault - Lost Communication With Instrument Panel - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Instruments PPT (LG1 Instruments TFT)
  1. Instruments

  2. Engine ECM Connector C

P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist)

P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

P1702

Shift force sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

Shift force sensor voltage too low

View and note diagnostic tool 'sensor' data

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P1703

Shift force sensor short circuit to 5 volt supply

Shift force sensor voltage too high

Disconnect engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 2:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Pinpoint test - G1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B21

- Engine ECM pin B18

- Engine ECM pin B23

OK

Disconnect shift force sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B21 to Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin B23

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B21 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3

OK

Renew shift force sensor and proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P1702 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

TSA LG1
  1. Shift Force Sensor

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Engine Subharness Connector (Main Harness Side)

  4. Engine Subharness Connector (Subharness Side)

P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit

P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2100

Throttle actuator control motor open circuit

Throttle actuator short circuit to ground or short circuit to battery positive

Throttle actuator with default spring open circuit

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Make sure accelerator position sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B04

- Engine ECM pin B03

- Throttle body connector pin 1

- Throttle body connector pin 2

OK

Disconnect accelerator position sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B04 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B03 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B26 to sensor pin 5

- Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B24 to sensor pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B04 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B04 to Engine ECM pin A21

- Engine ECM pin B03 to Engine ECM pin A08

- Engine ECM pin B03 to Engine ECM pin A21

OK

Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P2100 - Throttle Actuator Control Motor Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Throttle actuator motor LG1
  1. Twist Grip Position Sensor

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Engine ECM Connector A

  4. Throttle Body

P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control

P2102, P2103 - Throttle Actuator Control - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2102

Throttle actuator control internal motor relay does not operate

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Check throttle body for mechanical malfunctions. Clear fault code and contact Triumph service if fault is still present.

P2103

Throttle actuator control internal motor relay operates continually

P2111, P2119 - Throttle Valve Drive Error

P211, P2119 - Throttle Actuator Control - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2111

Throttle valve drive error (stuck open)

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Check throttle body for mechanical malfunctions. Clear fault code and contact Triumph service if fault still present

P2119

Throttle valve drive error

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2120

Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note 'sensor' data. Note ECM sensors requiring a power supply will not be active.

Make sure the twist grip position sensor is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P2121

Twist grip position sensor 1 signal out of range

P2123

Twist grip position sensor 1 short circuit to battery positive

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B26

- Engine ECM pin B27

- Engine ECM pin B24

- Engine ECM pin B28

- Engine ECM pin B25

- Engine ECM pin B13

OK

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B25 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B26 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B27 to ground

- Engine ECM pin B28 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B26 to sensor pin 5

- Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B24 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin B25 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4

- Engine ECM pin B13 to sensor pin 6

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B26

- Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B24

- Engine ECM pin B27 to Engine ECM pin B25

- Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B25

- Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B26

- Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B24

OK

Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P2120, P2121, P2123 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Twist Grip Position 1 Circuit H7 (Twist grip pos 1 H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Twist Grip Position Sensor

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2125

Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to ground or open circuit

View and note 'sensor' data. Note ECM sensors requiring a power supply will not be active.

Make sure the twist grip position sensor is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P2126

Twist grip position sensor 2 signal out of range

P2128

Twist grip position sensor 2 short circuit to battery positive

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Pinpoint Test - L*1; HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B13

- Engine ECM pin B28

- Engine ECM pin B25

OK

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B28 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B13 to sensor pin 6

-Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4

- Engine ECM pin B25 to sensor pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B13

- Engine ECM pin B28 to Engine ECM pin B25

OK

Renew twist grip position sensor, proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P2125, P2126, P2128 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 2 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Twist Grip Position 1 Circuit H7 (Twist grip pos 1 H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Twist Grip Position Sensor

P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2

P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2138

Twist grip position sensor 1 correlation error with twist grip position sensor 2

View and note diagnostic tool freeze frame data if available.

View and note diagnostic tool sensor data.

Disconnect twist grip position sensor and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Turn the ignition on and measure the

Voltage between:

- Engine ECM pin B25 and Engine ECM pin B13

- Engine ECM pin B26 and Engine ECM pin B24

Ok - 5V DC

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 2

2

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B27 to sensor pin 3

- Engine ECM pin B28 to sensor pin 4

OK

Renew the twist grip and proceed to test 3

Open circuit

Rectify fault, proceed to test 3

3

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P2138 - Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2 - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Twist Grip Position 1 Circuit H7 (Twist grip pos 1 H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector B

  2. Twist Grip Position Sensor

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

P2226

Ambient air pressure sensor circuit open circuit or short circuit to 5 Volt sensor supply

View and note 'freeze-frame' data if available.

View and note 'sensor' data.

Make sure sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect the engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

P2228

Ambient air pressure sensor circuit short circuit to ground

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Pinpoint Test - HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin B23

- Engine ECM pin A5

- Engine ECM pin B18

- Sensor pin 1, 2, 3

OK

Disconnect ambient pressure sensor and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit to ground:

- Engine ECM pin B23 to Engine ECM pin A5

- Engine ECM pin B23 to Engine ECM pin B18

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short circuit to supply:

- Engine ECM pin B18 to Engine ECM pin A5

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for continuity:

- Engine ECM pin B23 to sensor pin 1

- Engine ECM pin A5 to sensor pin 2

- Engine ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 3

OK

Renew ambient pressure sensor and proceed to test 5

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

P2226, P2228 - Ambient Air Pressure Sensor - Circuit Diagram - CM8; CR8; CS8; LG1; LGX

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor (Baro sensor H7)
  1. Engine ECM Connector A

  2. Engine ECM Connector B

  3. Ambient Air Pressure Sensor

Pinpoint Tests - Immobiliser and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS

Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the immobiliser/TPMS control module memory when there is a confirmed fault in the system.

The codes are reported to the Triumph Diagnostic Tool as a four digit code.

The system will log the Diagnostic Trouble Codes listed below:

Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Immobiliser/TPMS - LG1; LGX; LL1

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Fault Description

Warning Light/Information

Pinpoint test

L0001

Front Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

For low battery Voltage -lo bAtt visible in the instrument display screen. the TPMS symbol in the display screen will indicate which sensor has low battery Voltage.For zero battery Voltage - Only dashes will be visible in the instrument display screen, TPMS warning light ON and the TPMS symbol in the display screen will flash ON and OFF

L0001 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

L0002

Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

L0002 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

L0003

Front Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

TPMS warning light ON and the TPMS symbol in the display screen will flash ON and OFF

L0003 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

L0004

Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

L0004 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

L0005

Front Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

L0005 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

L0006

Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

L0006 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

L0007

Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Fault

L0007 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Fault

L0008

Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful

Alarm/Immobiliser light ON

L0008 - Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful

L0001 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

note
All the fault codes for the tyre pressure monitoring system and the immobiliser system can only be viewed in the Chassis section of the Triumph diagnostic software.

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0001

or

The TPMS tyre symbol in the instrument pack will be on for 8 seconds with the 'F' symbol with 'lo bAtt' shown in the display screen

Low battery voltage

Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0002 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Battery Alert

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0002

or

The TPMS tyre symbol in the instrument pack will be on for 8 seconds with the 'R' symbol with 'lo bAtt' shown in the display screen

Low battery voltage

Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0003 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0003

Front wheel sensor unit fault alert

Note: This DTC will automatically be generated if DTC L0007 occurs

If the problem persists:

Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0004 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Fault Alert

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0004

Rear wheel sensor unit fault alert

Note: This DTC will automatically be generated if DTC L0007 occurs

If the problem persists:

Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0005 - Front Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

note
Refer to the owner's handbook for the wheel pressure sensors ID numbers.

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0005

Front wheel sensor unit loss of communication error

Low battery voltage

Wrong sensor ID number has been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module

If the problem persists:

Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID number for the front wheel pressure sensor is registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module.

Replace the front wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0006 - Rear Wheel Unit Sensor Loss of Communication

note
Refer to the owner's handbook for the wheel pressure sensors ID numbers.

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0006

Rear wheel sensor unit loss of communication error

Low battery voltage

Wrong sensor ID number has been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module

If the problem persists:

Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID number for the rear wheel pressure sensor is registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module.

Replace the rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0007 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Fault

note
Refer to the owner's handbook for the wheel pressure sensors ID numbers.

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0007

Immobiliser/TPMS control module fault

Low battery voltage

Wrong sensor ID numbers have been registered in the immobiliser/TPMS control module

Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, check that the correct ID numbers for the wheel pressure sensors are registered to the Immobiliser/TPMS control module.

If the correct IDs are registered, replace the front and rear wheel pressure sensor following the procedure described in the Triumph diagnostic tool user guide.

Record the new sensor's ID number into the owner handbook before fitting.

L0008 - Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

L0008

or

Alarm/immobiliser warning indicator light is on when the ignition switch is at the ON position (only visible on motorcycles without the accessory alarm fitted)

Invalid key: Key authentication unsuccessful

Check that the key has been registered with the immobiliser control module, if it is a new key or an additional key.

Check that there are no additional keys with a transponder chip fitted close to the ignition key and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

Test

Result

Action

1

If available, try to start the motorcycle with the second registered key:

OK

Transponder chip in the key not functioning correctly. Register a new key using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool then proceed to test 5

Faulty

Proceed to test 2

2

Check the condition of cable, connector housing and terminals for the following:

- Ignition switch

- Immobiliser control module

OK

Disconnect the ignition switch, proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check antenna coil resistance:

- Ignition switch pin 2 to ignition switch pin 7

7 Ohms to 13 Ohms

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Replace the ignition switch, register new keys and proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity:

- Ignition switch pin 2 to Immobiliser control module pin 5

- Ignition switch pin 7 to Immobiliser control module pin 10

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

L0008 - Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Immobiliser control module communication LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector C

  2. Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module

  3. Fuse Box

  4. Ignition Switch

Pinpoint Tests - ABS ECM

Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS

The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below:

note
ABS is Active means that the ABS system is completing an ABS manoeuvre.

The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.

Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Index - ABS - LG1; LGX; LL1

Fault code and description

ABS warning light Illuminated when fault is logged

ABS operation is inhibited immediately when fault is logged

ABS continues to operate if performing an ABS manouevre when fault is logged

Operation is inhibited when ABS manouevre is completed

ABS will automatically resume operation if fault clears(DTC still stored for 40 cycles)

Pinpoint Test Page Number

C1611

Front wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit

C1612

Front wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal

C1613

Rear wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit

C1614

Rear wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal

C1621

Front wheel pulser ring missing teeth

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth

C1623

Rear wheel pulser ring missing teeth

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1623 - Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth

C1631

Front wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1632

Front wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1633

Rear wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1634

Rear wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1635

Master cylinder isolation valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1636

Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

Yes

Yes

No

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1641

Front wheel speed signal error; simulated wheel lock

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock

C1643

Rear wheel speed signal error; simulated wheel lock

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock

C1651

Motor circuit fault

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually

C1652

Motor - does not run

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually

C1653

Motor - runs continually

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually

C1661

Power source voltage too low

Yes

Yes

Yes, if voltage rises above a preset threshold.

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage

C1662

Power source voltage too high

Yes

Yes

Yes, if voltage drops below a preset threshold.

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage

C1663

Power source - short term under-voltage detected

Yes

Yes

Yes, if voltage rises above a preset threshold.

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage

C1664

Power source - long term Under-voltage detected

Yes

Yes

No

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage

C1671

Incorrect tyre size detected

Yes

Yes

Yes, if after ignition cycle, no fault is detected and ABS has initialised.

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected

C1681

ABS ECM internal error

Yes

Yes

No

C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error

C1682

CAN fault - lost communication with engine ECM

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault

C1683

CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault

C1684

CAN fault - all communication lost

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault

C1690

Modulator - active pressure control malfunction

Yes

Yes

No

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction

C1691

Modulator input (master cylinder) pressure sensor malfunction

Yes

Yes

No

DTC stored for 40 cycles.

C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction

C1692

Modulator output (wheel) pressure sensor malfunction

Yes

Yes

No

C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction

C1700

ABS variant coding error

Yes

Yes

Not applicable

Not applicable

C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)

ABS Ignition supply fuse/circuit fault

ABS Warning light circuit fault

Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable continuity of the ABS ignition supply circuit: With the ignition 'ON', check voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10

Voltage greater than 10 V

Proceed to test 3

Voltage less than 10 V

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity of the ABS warning light circuit:

Reconnect the ABS ECM connector

Check voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground pin 10

Disconnect the ABS ECM connector

Voltage greater than 1.5 V

Proceed to test 4

Voltage less than 1.5 V

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity of the ABS warning light circuit: - Short ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground pin 10 together:

Turn ignition 'ON'

ABS warning light 'OFF'

Proceed to test 5

ABS warning light 'ON'

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Solenoid Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse Box 2

  2. Fuse Box 1

  3. ABS Control Module

  4. Instruments

ABS Warning Light Does Not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored)

ABS Warning Light Does Not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored) - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

ABS Warning Light OFF (No DTCs Stored)

Warning light circuit fault

ABS ECM ground circuit fault

Ensure ABS ECM connector is secure.

Ensure ABS ECM ground connection is secure.

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored) LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the ABS warning light circuit and ignition fuses - fuse 6 and fuse 7

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Replace fuse, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 4 and ground pin 10

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check cable for short to voltage: With ignition 'OFF', check voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 4 and ground

0 V

Proceed to test 4

Above 3 V

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

4

Check cable for short to ground: With ignition 'ON', check the ABS warning light circuit voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 3 and ground

Voltage greater than 1.5 V

Proceed to test 5

Voltage less than 1.5 V

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 6

5

Check cable for continuity: ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground:

OK

Proceed to test 6

Faulty

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) - Circuit Diagram - LG1

Solenoid Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse Box 2

  2. Fuse Box 1

  3. ABS Control Module

  4. Instruments

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1611

Front wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

Make sure the ABS ECM connector is secure.

Make sure the wheel speed sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 17 and ABS ECM connector pin 8

- Sensor connector pin 1

- Sensor connector pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 9

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM connector pin 8 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Proceed to test 3

3

Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor connector. Check cable for short circuit:

- Wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) and ground

OK

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM connector pin 17 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Proceed to test 5

5

Check cable for short circuit:

- Wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) and ground

OK

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

6

Check cable continuity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 8 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side)

OK

Proceed to test 7

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

7

Check cable continuity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 17 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side)

OK

Proceed to test 8

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

8

Reconnect the front wheel speed sensor connector. Check the wheel speed sensor operation:

- Connect a suitable voltage supply between 10 V and 16 V between ABS ECM connector pin 8 (negative) and pin 17 (positive), and measure the current consumption of the wheel speed sensor

1.8 mA to 16.8 mA

Proceed to test 9

Faulty

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

9

Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Resistance Data

Resistance Data

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1; PV1;HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8

Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:

Supply Voltage

Min

Typical

Max

10 - 16 V

1.8 mA

7.5 mA

16.8 mA

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Wheel sensor front LG1
  1. Front Wheel Sensor

  2. ABS Control Module

C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal

C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1612

Front wheel sensor abnormal input or dropping out

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Damaged or dirty pulser ring

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

Ensure ABS modulator connector is secure.

Ensure wheel speed sensor connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1612 - Front Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Measure the air gap of the front wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

2

Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

4

Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (see C1611 - Front Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit).

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1613

Rear wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit

Make sure the ABS ECM connector is secure.

Make sure the wheel speed sensor connector is secure.

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and ABS ECM connector pin 15

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 9

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Proceed to test 3

3

Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connector. Check cable for short circuit:

- Wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side) and ground

OK

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 15 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Proceed to test 5

5

Check cable for short circuit:

- Wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side) and ground

OK

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

6

Check cable continuity:

- ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 6 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 2 (motorcycle harness side)

OK

Proceed to test 7

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

7

Check cable continuity:

- ABS modulator/ECM connector pin 15 and wheel speed sensor connector pin 1 (motorcycle harness side)

OK

Proceed to test 8

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 9

8

Reconnect the rear wheel speed sensor connector. Check the wheel speed sensor operation:

- Connect a suitable voltage supply between 10 V and 16 V between ABS ECM connector pin 6 (negative) and pin 15 (positive), and measure the current consumption of the wheel speed sensor

1.8 mA to 16.8 mA

Proceed to test 9

Faulty

Replace the wheel speed sensor, proceed to test 9

9

Reconnect ABS modulator/ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Resistance Data

Resistance Data

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Resistance Data - PB1, PJ1, L*1; HG8;HJ8;HK8;HL8

Supply Voltage

Min

Typical

Max

10 - 16 V

1.8 mA

7.5 mA

16.8 mA

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Wheel sensor rear LG1
  1. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

  2. ABS Control Module

C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal

C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1614

Rear wheel sensor abnormal input or dropping out

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Damaged or dirty pulser ring

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1614 - Rear Wheel Sensor Incorrect or Missing Signal - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Measure the air gap of the rear wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

2

Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

4

Check the wheel speed sensor circuit (see C1613 - Rear Wheel Sensor Short Circuit To Ground or Open Circuit).

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth

C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1621

Front wheel pulser gear missing teeth

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

Damaged/incorrect wheels

Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1621 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Measure the air gap of the front wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

2

Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

4

Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/incorrect size.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1623 - Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth

C1623 - Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1623

Rear wheel pulser gear missing teeth

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

Damaged/incorrect wheels

Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1623 - Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Measure the air gap of the rear wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

2

Check the pulser ring for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

4

Check the motorcycle wheel for damage/incorrect size

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Short Circuit to Ground or Open Circuit

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1631

Front wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure.

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

C1632

Front wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

C1633

Rear wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

C1634

Rear wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open circuit

C1635

Master cylinder isolation valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

C1636

Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open circuit

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit- LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the ABS main fuse 7:

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Proceed to test 2

2

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10

OK

Replace fuse, proceed to test 5

Faulty

Rectify fault, replace fuse, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable for short to ground: With ignition 'ON', check voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10

Voltage greater than 11 V

Proceed to test 4

Voltage less than 11 V

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for continuity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored) Circuit LG1; LGX

Solenoid Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse Box 2

  2. Fuse Box 1

  3. ABS Control Module

  4. Instruments

C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock

C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1641

Front wheel speed signal error simulated wheel lock

Binding front brake

Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

An abnormal manoeuvre was performed (a very long 'wheelie' or 'stoppie with the wheel stopped)

Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

C1643

Rear wheel speed signal error simulated wheel lock

Binding rear brake

Incorrect Wheel speed sensor air gap

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

An abnormal manoeuvre was performed (a very long 'wheelie' or 'stoppie with the wheel stopped)

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1641, C1643 - Wheel Speed Signal Error; Simulated Wheel Lock - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the relevant wheel for brake bind caused by caliper or master cylinder faults, or other mechanical causes.

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4

2

Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensor between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4

4

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually - Fault -CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1651

Motor circuit fault

Make sure the ABS modulator connector is secure.

Turn the ignition ON.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

C1652

Motor does not run

C1653

Motor runs continually

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the ABS main fuse 7

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Replace fuse and proceed to test 5

2

Check the motor function:

Check that with the motorcycle stationary and the ABS ECM modulator connected, the motor does not operate

OK

Proceed to test 3

Motor runs continually

Contact Triumph service

3

Check cable continuity: With ignition 'ON', check voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 18 and ground pin 10

Voltage greater than 11 V

Proceed to test 4

Voltage less than 11 V

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for continuity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect ABS ECM harness, clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1651, C1652, C1653 - Motor – Lock; Motor Circuit Fault; Motor Does Not Run; Motor Runs Continually - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Solenoid Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse Box 2

  2. Fuse Box 1

  3. ABS Control Module

  4. Instruments

C1631, C1632, C1633, C1634, C1635, C1636, C1654 - Front or Rear Input/Output Solenoid Open/Short Circuit - Circuit Diagram - PV1

ABS motor lock_PV1
  1. ABS ECM connector

  2. Fuse box 1

  3. Ignition relay

  4. Front wheel speed sensor connector

  5. Front wheel speed sensor

  6. Rear wheel speed sensor connector

  7. Rear wheel speed sensor

  8. Diagnostic connector

  9. Battery negative connector

  10. Battery subharness connector (subharness side)

  11. Battery subharness connector (main harness side)

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1661

Power source voltage too low

Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure

Disconnect ABS ECM connector and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

C1662

Power source voltage too high

C1663

Power source - short term under-voltage detected

C1664

Power source - long term Under-voltage detected

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check the cable for continuity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 10 and ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check battery voltage: With ignition 'ON', check the voltage between:

- ABS ECM connector pin 7 and ground pin 10

Voltage greater than 11 V

Proceed to test 4

Voltage less than 11 V

Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check battery voltage: Reconnect ABS ECM connector and start the engine, check the voltage between:

- Battery positive (red) terminal and negative (black) terminal

Voltage between 11 V and 16 V

Proceed to test 5

Voltage greater than 16 V

Check the battery charging circuit. Locate and rectify fault, proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1661, C1662, C1663, C1664 - Power Source Voltage - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Solenoid Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse Box 2

  2. Fuse Box 1

  3. ABS Control Module

  4. Instruments

C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected

C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected - Fault L*1; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1671

Incorrect diameter wheels installed

Incorrect tyre pressures

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Damaged or dirty pulser ring

Ensure ABS modulator/ECM connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1671 - Incorrect Tyre Size Detected - Pinpoint Test -LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check for installation of wheels and tyres of the correct size.

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check the tyre pressures.

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check the pulser rings for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 5

4

Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensors between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap should be in between 0.74 mm and 1.36 mm.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error

C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error - Fault - L*1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1681

ABS ECM internal error

Incorrect wheel speed sensor air gap

Damaged or dirty pulser ring

Loose or incorrectly installed wheel speed sensor

Ensure ABS modulator/ECM connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1681 - ABS ECM Internal Error - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Measure the air gap of the wheel speed sensors between the sensor and the pulser ring:

- Air gap between 0.74 mm to 1.36 mm

OK

Proceed to test 1

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4

2

Check the pulser rings for damage or contamination by road grime or ferrous metal filings.

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Clean or replace the ABS pulser ring, proceed to test 4

3

Check the wheel speed sensors for correct installation, and the fixings for correct torque.

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Rectify the fault and proceed to test 4

4

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Fault - CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HF8; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PS1; PX1; PY1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1682

CAN fault - lost communication with engine ECM

Make sure ABS ECM connector is secure.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

C1683

CAN fault - lost communication with instrument panel

C1684

CAN lost fault - all communication

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 2

- ABS ECM connector pin 11

OK

Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check the cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ground

- ABS ECM pin 11 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ECM pin C25

- ABS ECM pin 11 to ECM pin C24

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Instruments pin 2

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Instruments pin 3

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Diagnostic connector pin 6

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Diagnostic connector pin 14

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Immobiliser module pin 6

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Immobiliser module pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ABS ECM pin 11

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1682, C1683, C1684 - CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

CAN Fault LG1
  1. Instruments

  2. ABS Control Module

  3. Diagnostic Connector

  4. Immobiliser

  5. Engine ECM Connector

C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction

C1690, C1691, C1692 - ABS Modulator Malfunction - Fault -CM8; CR8; CS8; DR5; DS5; HG8; HJ8; HK8; HL8; LG1; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PM1; PR1; PRC; PS1; PSC; PX1; PXC; PY1; PYC; YA1; YB1; YJ1; YK1; YL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1690

Modulator - active pressure control malfunction

Contact Triumph service

C1691

Modulator input (master cylinder) pressure sensor malfunction

C1692

Modulator output (wheel) pressure sensor malfunction

C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error

C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error Fault - DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible cause

Action

C1700

ABS variant coding error

Note the ABS build data.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1700 - ABS Variant Coding Error PPT - DR5; DS5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check ABS modulator part number is correct for the motorcycle.

OK

Proceed to test 2

Incorrect

Replace ABS modulator with correct part and proceed to test 2

2

Clear fault code, check for normal operation.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Pinpoint Tests - Instruments

Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments

The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.

Diagnostic - Trouble Codes - Index - Instruments - LG1; LGX; LL1

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Failure Type

Fault Description

Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault

Pinpoint test

C1300

18

Main Beam Relay

20

C1300 - Main Beam Relay

C1300

19

Main Beam Relay

20

C1300 - Main Beam Relay

C1302

18

Heated Grips

20

C1302 - Heated Grips

C1302

19

Heated Grips

20

C1302 - Heated Grips

C1303

18

Front Left Direction Indicator

20

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator

C1303

19

Front Left Direction Indicator

20

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator

C1304

18

Front Right Direction Indicator

20

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator

C1304

19

Front Right Direction Indicator

20

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator

C1305

18

Rear Left Direction Indicator

20

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator

C1305

19

Rear Left Direction Indicator

20

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator

C1306

18

Rear Right Direction Indicator

20

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator

C1306

19

Rear Right Direction Indicator

20

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator

C1307

16

Battery Voltage

20

C1307 - Battery Voltage

C1307

17

Battery Voltage

20

C1307 - Battery Voltage

C1308

16

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

20

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

C1308

17

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

20

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

C1309

4B

CPU Over Temperature

20

C1309 - CPU Over Temperature

C130A

03

Display Backlight Failure

20

C130A - Instrument Display

C130A

4B

Display Backlight Failure

20

C130A - Instrument Display

C130C

92

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130D

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130E

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130F

47

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C1310

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C1311

41

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

46

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

54

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

56

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

41

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

46

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

54

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

56

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1313

05

Software Update Failure

20

C1313 - Software Update Failure

C1314

49

Internal Failure

20

C1314 - Internal Failure

C1315

64

Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault

0

C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right

C1317

64

Navigation Switch Correlation Fault

40

C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down

C1318

64

Navigation Switch Correlation Fault

40

C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right

C1319

00

Instrument I.D

5

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D

C131A

00

Instrument I.D

5

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Failure Type

Fault Description

Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault

Pinpoint test

C1308

16

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

20

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

C1308

17

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

20

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

C1309

4B

CPU Over Temperature

20

C1309 - CPU Over Temperature

C130A

03

Display Backlight Failure

20

C130A - Instrument Display

C130A

4B

Display Backlight Failure

20

C130A - Instrument Display

C130C

92

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130D

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130E

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130F

47

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C1310

00

CPU Fault

20

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C1311

41

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

46

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

54

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311

56

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

41

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

46

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

54

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1312

56

Calibration Failure

20

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1313

05

Software Update Failure

20

C1313 - Software Update Failure

C1314

49

Internal Failure

20

C1314 - Internal Failure

C1319

00

Instrument I.D

5

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D

C131A

00

Instrument I.D

5

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D

C1300 - Main Beam Relay

C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1300

Relay control current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Pinpoint Test - L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the main beam relay, instruments and headlight are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Replace the main beam relay and check functionality

OK

Done

Faulty

Proceed to test 3

3

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Main Beam Relay pin 1 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity:

- Main Beam Relay pin 2 to Ground

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1300 - Main Beam Relay - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Main Beam Relay LG1
  1. Main beam relay

  2. Instruments

  3. Fuse Box 1

  4. Headlight

C1302 - Heated Grips

C1302 - Heated Grips - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1302

Heated grip current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1302 - Heated Grips - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the heated grips and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 6 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 6 to left heated grip pin 1

- Instruments pin 6 to right heated grip pin 1

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1302 - Heated Grips - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Heated Grips LG1
  1. Left heated grip

  2. Right heated grip

  3. Heated grip sub-harness connector (harness side)

  4. Instruments

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Fault - L*1; Hg8

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1303

Direction indicator current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the direction indicator and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 27 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 27 to direction indicator connector A pin 1

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1303 - Front Left Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Direction Indicators FL LG1
  1. Direction indicator connector B

  2. Direction indicator connector A

  3. Instruments

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1304

Direction indicator current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the direction indicator and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 29 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 29 to direction indicator connector A pin 1

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1304 - Front Right Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

Direction Indicators FR LG1
  1. Direction indicator connector B

  2. Direction indicator connector A

  3. Instruments

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1305

Direction indicator current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the direction indicator, rear light sub-harness and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 26 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 26 to direction indicator connector A pin 1

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1305 - Rear Left Direction Indicator - Circuit Digram - LG1; LGX

Direction Indicators RL LG1
  1. Direction indicator connector B

  2. Direction indicator connector A

  3. Rear light sub-harness (harness side)

  4. Instruments

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1306

Direction indicator current is above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the direction indicator, rear light sub-harness and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 4

2

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 28 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 28 to direction indicator connector A pin 1

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1306 - Rear Right Direction Indicator - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX

Direction Indicators RR LG1
  1. Direction indicator connector B

  2. Direction indicator connector A

  3. Rear light sub-harness (harness side)

  4. Instruments

C1307 - Battery Voltage

C1307 - Battery Voltage - Fault - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1307

Battery Voltage above or below threshold.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1307 - Battery Voltage - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the starter solenoid, battery and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Replace starter solenoid and check functionality

OK

Done

Faulty

Proceed to test 3

3

Check harness for short circuit:

Instruments pin 1 to Ground

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 1 to battery positive

- Fuse box 1 fuse 2 to alternator regulator/rectifier pin 3

- Alternator regulator/rectifier pin 3 to starter solenoid pin 2

- Battery positive to starter solenoid pin 3

OK

Contact Triumph service

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1307 - Battery Voltage - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Battery Voltage Instruments DTC LG1
  1. Fusebox 1

  2. Instruments

  3. Alternator regulator/rectifier

  4. Starter solenoid

  5. Battery positive

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage

C1308 - Ambient Light Sensor Voltage - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1; Hg8

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1308

16

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage Below Threshold

Make sure the ambient light sensor on the instruments is not covered.

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C1308

17

Ambient Light Sensor Voltage Above Threshold

C1309 - CPU Over Temperature

C1309 - CPU Over Temperature - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1;HG8

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1309

4B

CPU Over Temperature

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Allow the instruments to return to ambient (room) temperature.

Delete the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).

Test the instruments for full functionality.

Switch the heated grips (if fitted) to the maximum heat setting and allow to heat to operating temperature.

Clear fault code and retest.

if OK action complete - quit test.

Fault still present - contact Triumph Service.

C130A - Instrument Display

C130A - Display Backlight Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV!

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C130A

03

Display Backlight Failure

Contact Triumph Service.

C130A

4B

Display Over Temperature

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Allow the instruments to return to ambient (room) temperature.

Delete the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).

Test the instruments for full functionality.

Switch the heated grips (if fitted) to the maximum heat setting and allow to heat to operating temperature.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault

C130C, C130D, C130E, C130F, C1310 - CPU Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1; HG8

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C130C

92

Task Over-run Detected

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C130D

00

Restart Due To CPU Fault

C130E

00

C130F

47

C1310

00

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure

C1311, C1312 - Calibration Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1311

41

Calibration Error

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph service.

C1311

46

C1311

54

C1311

56

C1312

41

C1312

46

C1312

54

C1312

56

C1313 - Software Update Failure

C1313 - Software Update Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1313

05

Software Download Interrupted

Make sure the motorcycle battery is fully charged.

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C1314 - Internal Failure

C1314 - Internal Failure - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1314

49

Internal Electronic Failure

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right

C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Fault - L*1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1315

Left and right direction indicator buttons both active.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 33 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 8

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 32 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 10

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 33 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 10

- Instruments pin 32 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 8

OK

Contact Triumph service

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1315 - Direction Indicator Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2

Direction Indicator Correlation LR LG1
  1. Left hand switch housing connector A

  2. Instruments

C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down

C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Fault - L*1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1317

Up and down navigation buttons both active.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 25 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 22 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 5

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 25 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 5

- Instruments pin 22 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 4

OK

Contact Triumph service

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1317 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Up/Down - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Nav Switch UD LG1
  1. Left hand switch housing connector A

  2. Instruments

C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right

C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Fault - L*1

Fault Code

Possible Cause

Action

C1318

Left and right navigation buttons both active.

View and note diagnostic tool 'freeze frame' data if available.

Proceed to pinpoint test 1.

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Pinpoint Test - DR5; HF8; HG8; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check the left hand switch housing connector A and instruments are connected

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 16 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 7

OK

Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Instruments pin 23 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 6

OK

Proceed to test 4

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check the harness for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 16 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 6

- Instruments pin 23 to left hand switch housing connector A pin 7

OK

Contact Triumph service

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

C1318 - Navigation Switch Correlation Fault - Left/Right - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1

Nav Switch LR LG1
  1. Left hand switch housing connector A

  2. Instruments

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D

C1319, C131A - Instrument I.D - Fault - L*1; PB1; PJ1; PV1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

C1319

00

Instrument I.D Lock Enabled

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

If the download fails to upload or the DTC is still present.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

C131A

00

Instrument I.D Lock Active

Pinpoint Tests - CAN Errors - U Codes

Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors

The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below.

Diagnostics - Trouble Codes - Index - CAN Errors - LG1; LGX; LL1

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Failure Code

DTC Description

Failure Description

Ignition switch cycles before clearing fault

Pinpoint test

U0028

88

CAN 1 Bus Off

Bus Off

20

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Off

U0037

88

CAN 2 Bus Off

Bus Off

20

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Off

U1208

87

Frame "ID208" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1209

82

Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1"

Alive / Sequence Counter Incorrect / Not Updated

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1209

83

Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1"

Value of Signal Protection Calculation Incorrect

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1209

87

Frame "ID209" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1210

82

Frame "ID210" on network "CAN 1"

Alive / Sequence Counter Incorrect / Not Updated

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1210

87

Frame "ID210" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1518

87

Frame "ID518" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1530

87

Frame "ID530" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1540

87

Frame "ID540" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1550

87

Frame "ID550" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1570

87

Frame "ID570" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1600

56

Frame "ID600" on network "CAN 1"

Invalid / Incompatible Configuration

40

U1600 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN Circuit Fault

U1600

87

Frame "ID600" on network "CAN 1"

Missing Message

40

U1600 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN Circuit Fault

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Off

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Fault - PJ1, PV1, L*1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

U0028

88

CAN 1 Bus Off

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present contact Triumph Service.

U0037

88

CAN 2 Bus Off

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM - Connector C pin 1

- Engine ECM - Connector C pin 6

- Instrument pin 3

- Instrument pin 2

- Positive battery ring terminal

- Negative battery ring terminal

- Diagnostic connector pin 6

- Diagnostic connector pin 14

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Instruments pin 3 to battery negative and positive ring terminals

- Instruments pin 2 to battery negative and positive ring terminals

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short Circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM - Connector C pin 1 to instrument pin 3

- Engine ECM - Connector C pin 6 to instrument pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check CAN bus resistance:

- Diagnostic connector pin 6 to diagnostic connector pin 14

OK (60 Ohms +/- 1 Ohms)

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Note measured resistance, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and contract Triumph Service

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

U0028, U0037 - CAN Bus Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

CAN bus Fault LL1
  1. Engine electronic control module - Connector C

  2. Immobiliser/TPMS connector

  3. ABS modulator

  4. Connectivity modulator

  5. Diagnostic Connector

  6. Instruments

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Fault - L*1

Fault Code

Failure Type

Possible Cause

Action

U1208

87

ABS CAN 1 Circuit Fault

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1:

U1209

82

U1209

83

U1209

87

U1210

82

U1210

87

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX; LL1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- ABS ECM connector pin 2

- ABS ECM connector pin 11

OK

Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check the cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ground

- ABS ECM pin 11 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ECM pin C25

- ABS ECM pin 11 to ECM pin C24

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Instruments pin 2

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Instruments pin 3

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Diagnostic connector pin 6

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Diagnostic connector pin 14

- ABS ECM pin 2 to Immobiliser module pin 6

- ABS ECM pin 11 to Immobiliser module pin 1

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- ABS ECM pin 2 to ABS ECM pin 11

OK

Proceed to test 4

Short circuit

Rectify wiring harness fault, proceed to test 5

5

Clear fault code and test ABS to verify fault cleared.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

U1208, U1209, U1210 - ABS CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - LG1; LGX; LL1

CAN Fault LG1
  1. Instruments

  2. ABS Control Module

  3. Diagnostic Connector

  4. Immobiliser

  5. Engine ECM Connector

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine ECM CAN Circuit Fault

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Module CAN Fault - Fault - L*1; PB1

Fault Code

Failure Code

Possible Cause

Action

U1518

87

Engine ECM CAN 1 Circuit Fault

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1:

U1530

87

U1540

87

U1550

87

U1570

87

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Unit CAN Fault - Pin point Test - L*1

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C24

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Instrument pin 3

- Instrument pin 2

- ABS module pin 2

- ABS module pin 11

- Diagnostic connector pin 6

- Diagnostic connector pin 14

- Immobiliser module pin 1

- Immobiliser module pin 6

OK

Disconnect instruments and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 5

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 3

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

3

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Instrument pin 3

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Instrument pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ABS control module pin 11

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ABS control module pin 2

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Diagnostic connector pin 14

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Diagnostic connector pin 6

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser module pin 1

- Engine ECM pin C25 to Immobiliser module pin 6

OK

Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Engine ECM pin C25

OK

Proceed to test 5

Short circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 5

5

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

U1518, U1530, U1540, U1550, U1570 - Engine Control Unit CAN Fault - Circuit Diagram - L*1

CAN Communication PPT (LG1 Instruments)
  1. Instruments

  2. Engine ECM Connector C

  3. Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module

  4. Diagnostic Connector

  5. ABS Control Module

U1600 - Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN Circuit Fault

U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Fault - DR5; LG1; LGX; LJ2; LK2; LL1; PB1; PJ1; PJZ; PM1; PR1; PRB; PRC; PS1; PSB; PSC; PX1; PXB; PXC; PY1; PYB; PYC

Fault Code

Failure Code

Possible Cause

Action

U1600

56

Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module CAN 1 Circuit Fault

Make sure the diagnostic tool is using the latest software version.

Update all ECM software.

Clear fault code and retest.

If fault is still present proceed to pinpoint test 1:

U1600

87

Subheading - Pinpoint Test

Pinpoint Tests

U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - LG1; LGX

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Engine ECM pin C25

- Engine ECM pin C24

- Immobiliser pin 1

- Immobiliser pin 2

- Immobiliser pin 6

- Immobiliser pin 7

- Immobiliser pin 8

OK

Disconnect ECM and proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable for short circuit:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to ground

- Engine ECM pin C24 to ground

OK

Disconnect immobiliser, ignition switch and proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check fuse box fuse 6 integrity.

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Proceed to test 4

4

Check cable for short circuit:

- Immobiliser pin 2 to ground

- Immobiliser pin 8 to ground

OK

Proceed to test 5

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, replace relevant fuse, proceed to test 6

5

Check cable continuity:

- Engine ECM pin C25 to immobiliser pin 6

- Engine ECM pin C24 to Immobiliser pin 1

- Immobiliser pin 7 to ground

- Fuse box fuse 6 to immobiliser pin 2

OK

Proceed to test 6

Fault still present

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect harness, clear fault code and run engine.

OK

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Contact Triumph service

Subheading - Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

U1600 - TPMS CAN Fault - Pinpoint Test - Circuit - LG1; LGX

Immobiliser control module communication LG1
  1. Engine ECM Connector C

  2. Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module

  3. Fuse Box

  4. Ignition Switch

Engine Management System

Engine Management Components Overview

Eng Mngt Components Overview LG1; LGX

Engine Management Sensors

EMS Sensor Overview Circuit LG1
  1. Engine ECM

  2. Intake air temperature sensor

  3. Coolant temperature sensor

  4. Side stand switch

  5. Clutch switch

  6. Ambient air pressure sensor

  7. MAP sensor

  8. Fall detection switch

  9. Gear position sensor

  10. Triumph shift assist

  11. Crankshaft position sensor

  12. Oxygen sensor

  13. Engine subharness

  14. Engine ground subharness

  15. Side stand switch connector

  16. Left hand switch housing connector

  17. Triumph shift assist connector

  18. Crankshaft position sensor connector

  19. Oxygen sensor connector

  20. Engine ground

Engine Management Actuators

EMS Actuator Overview Circuit LG1
  1. Engine ECM

  2. Fuse box 1

  3. Cooling fan relay

  4. Cooling fan connector

  5. Cooling fan

  6. Engine management system relay

  7. Throttle actuator motor

  8. Injectors

  9. Ignition coils

  10. Secondary air injection solenoid

  11. Purge valve

  12. Engine ground

  13. Fuel pump

  14. Fuel pump relay

Engine Management System Sensors

System Sensors LG1; LGX

  • Intake air temperature sensor - situated underneath the inlet manifold. As the density of the air changes with temperature, the amount of oxygen available to ignite the fuel also changes. Changes in air temperature are compensated for by adjusting the amount of fuel injected to a level consistent with clean combustion and low emissions.

  • Ambient air pressure sensor - situated at the rear of the battery tray under the seat. The ambient air pressure sensor measures atmospheric air pressure. With this information, the amount of fuel per injection is adjusted to suit the prevailing conditions.

  • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor - situated to the left of the airbox, connected to the throttle body a hose. The MAP sensor provides information to the engine ECM which is used at shallow throttle angles (very small throttle openings) to provide accurate engine load indications to the ECM. This degree of engine load accuracy allows the ECM to make very small adjustments to fuel and ignition which would otherwise not be possible from throttle angle data alone.

  • Clutch switch - situated on the clutch lever. The clutch must be pulled in for the starter motor to operate.

  • Crankshaft position sensor - situated in the alternator cover. The crankshaft position sensor detects movement of teeth attached to the alternator rotor. The teeth give a reference point from which the actual crankshaft position is calculated. The crankshaft position sensor information is used by the engine ECM to determine engine speed and crankshaft position in relation to the point where fuel is injected and ignition of the fuel occurs.

  • Engine coolant temperature sensor - situated at the rear of the cylinder head near the thermostat housing. Coolant temperature information, received by the engine ECM, is used to optimise fueling at all engine temperatures and to calculate hot and cold start fueling requirements.

  • Oxygen sensor - situated in the exhaust header pipe system upstream of the catalytic converter. The oxygen sensor constantly feeds information to the engine ECM on the content of the exhaust gases. Based on this information, adjustments to air/fuel ratio are made.

  • Side stand switch - situated on the gear change bracket. If the side stand is in the down position, the engine will not run unless the transmission is in neutral.

  • Fall detection switch - situated under the rider’s seat, forward of the fuse box. The fall detection switch will detect if the motorcycle is on its side and will cut power to the engine ECM immediately. This prevents the engine from running and the fuel pump from delivering fuel. In the event of a fall, the switch is reset by returning the bike to an upright position and switching the ignition off then back on again.

  • Gear position sensor - situated in the lower crankcase, above the drive chain front sprocket. The gear position sensor provides the engine ECM with selected gear information. This is used to prevent the engine from starting if the transmission is in gear. The sensor also provides information to the neutral lamp in the instruments.

Sensor Locations

Sensor Locations  LG1, LGX

Engine Management System Actuators

System Actuators

In response to signals received from the sensors, the engine ECM controls and directs messages to a series of electronic and electro-mechanical actuators. The function and location of the actuators is given below.

  • Throttle actuator motor- situated within the throttle body. The throttle actuator motor opens and closes the throttle plates in the throttle body, in response to commands from the engine ECM. The throttle actuator motor is an integral part of the throttle body.

  • Canister purge valve - situated in the vapour return line between the carbon canister and the throttle body. The purge valve controls the return of vapour which has been stored in the carbon canister during the period when the engine is switched off. The valve is 'pulsed' by the engine ECM to give control over the rate at which the canister is purged.

  • Fuel Injectors - located in the fuel rail. The engine is fitted with three injectors. The spray pattern of the injectors is fixed but the length of time each injector can remain open is variable according to operating conditions. The duration of each injection is calculated by the engine ECM using data received from the various sensors in the system.

  • Ignition coils - plug-top coils are located in the camshaft cover. There are three coils fitted, one for each spark plug. The engine ECM controls the point at which the coils are switched on and off. In calculating the switch-on time, the engine ECM allows sufficient time for the coils to charge to a level where a spark can be produced. The coils are switched off at the point of ignition, the timing of which is optimised for good engine performance.

  • Engine Management System (EMS) main relay - situated under the seat. When the ignition is switched on, the EMS main relay is powered up to provide a stable Voltage supply for the engine ECM. When the ignition is turned off, the engine ECM carries out a power down sequence during which the EMS main relay remains powered by the engine ECM for one minute. The engine ECM power down sequence includes: writing the adaption data to engine ECM memory.

  • Fuel pump - located inside the fuel tank. The electric pump delivers fuel into the fuel system, via a pressure regulator, at a constant 3.5 bar pressure. The pump is run continuously when the engine is operating and is also run briefly when the ignition is first switched on to ensure that 3.5 bar is available to the system as soon as the engine is cranked. Fuel pressure is controlled by a regulator also situated inside the fuel tank.

  • Cooling fan - located behind the radiator. The engine ECM controls switching on and off of the cooling fan in response to a signal received from the coolant temperature sensor. When the coolant temperature rises to a level where the cooling effect of natural airflow is insufficient, the cooling fan is turned on by the engine ECM. When the coolant temperature falls sufficiently, the engine ECM turns the cooling fan off. The fan only becomes operational when the engine is running. It will not operate at any other time.

  • Secondary air injection solenoid - located above the camshaft cover. The secondary air injection solenoid controls airflow through the secondary air injection system.

note
In this system, the starter lockout system (clutch switch, gear position sensor, side stand switch) all operate through the engine ECM.

Engine Management System Actuator Locations

Actuator Locations LG1, LGX

Fault Finding – Non Electrical

Symptom

Possible cause(s)

Poor throttle response at low rpm

Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks

Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter

Cutting out at idle

Throttle bodies out of balance

Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter

Low fuel pressure

Weak mixture caused by air leak at the throttle body/transition piece to cylinder head face

Diagnostic software malfunctions during tune download procedure

Low battery voltage

Throttle hang-up

Incorrect closed throttle position setting

Motorcycle will start but cuts out immediately

Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel pipes to the fuel pump and filter

Low fuel pressure caused by filter blockage/leaks

Abnormally high fuel pressure

Fuel pressure regulator inoperative

Temperature gauge reads cooler than normal

Cooling system air–locked resulting in coolant temperature sensor operating in air instead of coolant

Thermostat fault

Motorcycle will not start

Check the immobiliser system for faults

Make sure that the keys, Engine ECM and Chassis ECM are all correctly paired

Engine Adaption

General Information

The engine management system fitted to this model is adaptive. This means that the system is able to learn about new or changing operating conditions. The fuelling and throttle system can continuously adapt itself without needing to constantly make major adjustments from a fixed baseline setting.

Adaptive changes can become necessary because of different fuels, changes in the region in which the motorcycle is operated (i.e. operation at high altitude where it was previously used at sea level) or because a new part may have been fitted which has slightly different characteristics to the old part. Fuelling and throttle system adaptive changes are automatic and require no intervention by rider or dealer.

Adaption Status and Range

To see if a motorcycle has fully adapted, a facility named is provided on the diagnostic tool under Engine Diagnostics - Sensor Data - Engine Adaption. The following adaption details can be examined:

Function Examined

Report Method

Range/Status Description

Closed throttle position reference status

Adapted/not adapted

N/A

Twist grip adapted

Adapted/not adapted

N/A

Idle speed control adaption status

%

N/A

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (off idle)

%

Status off idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (off idle)

%

Range off idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (idle)

%

Status idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (idle)

%

Range idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (off idle)

%

Status off idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (off idle)

%

Range off idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (idle)

%

Status idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (idle)

%

Range idle

Terminology

Where the term 'status' is used, this indicates how far the present operating parameter is from the stored (adapted) value. The nearer these figures are to zero the better as it indicates the motorcycle has adapted to its current operating conditions.

The term 'range' indicates how much (in percentage terms) of the adjustment range has been used to reach the current operating status.

Range V status

Typical Values

In a correctly adapted motorcycle, the following will be typical:

Function Examined

Read Out

Range/Status Description

Closed throttle position reference status

Adapted

N/A

Twist grip adapted

Adapted

N/A

Idle speed control adaption status

Between +100 and -100%

N/A

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (off idle)

0% +/- 10%

Status off idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (off idle)

Between +100 and -100%

Range off idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (idle)

0% +/- 10%

Status idle

Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (idle)

Between +100 and -100%

Range idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (off idle)

0% +/- 10%

Status off idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (off idle)

Between +100 and -100%

Range off idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (idle)

0% +/- 10%

Status idle

Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (idle)

Between +100 and -100%

Range idle

Forcing Adaption to Take Place

If the read out indicates that the motorcycle is not adapted, the following will force the system to make adaptions:

warning
Never start the engine or let it run for any length of time in a closed area. The exhaust fumes are poisonous and may cause loss of consciousness and death within a short time. Always operate the motorcycle in the open-air or in an area with adequate ventilation.
note
Resetting adaptions with the motorcycle connected to an exhaust extraction system may cause incorrect values to be set, causing poor engine running. Always reset the adaptions with the engine disconnected from any exhaust extraction system whilst ensuring the motorcycle is positioned in a well ventilated area.
  1. Ensure the engine is cold.
  2. WITHOUT TOUCHING THE THROTTLE, start the engine and allow it to warm up until the cooling fan comes on.
  3. Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.

Resetting the Adaptions

A reset engine adaptions facility is provided in the diagnostic tool. This function can be used to:

  • Force fast fuelling and throttle adaption.

  • Reset (erase) current adaptions.

Fast Fuelling and Throttle Adaption

To force the fuelling and throttle system to quickly adapt to the current operating conditions:

  1. Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  2. Start the engine.
  3. Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (90°C for liquid cooled models, 60°C for air cooled models).
  4. Make sure the system is in closed loop control mode.
  5. Navigate to Engine Diagnostics - Adjust.
  6. Select 'RESET ENGINE ADAPTIONS' and click 'ADJUST'.
note
This will force a fast adaption routine to take place in around five seconds. For this to happen, the engine MUST be running, it must be at normal operating temperature and in closed loop control mode. Under any other conditions fast adaption will not take place and the current adaption settings may be erased as described below.

Reset (Erase) Current Adaptions

To reset the currently stored adaptions:

  1. Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON. Do NOT start the engine.
  2. Navigate to Engine Diagnostics - Adjust.
  3. Select 'RESET ENGINE ADAPTIONS' and click 'ADJUST'.

The following adaptions will be reset:

  • Fuelling

  • Throttle

  • Twist Grip

  • Crankshaft Position (Euro 5 Motorcycles in Applicable Markets Only)

note
The following adaptions will not be reset:- Neutral Position- Gear Position- Shift Force Sensor (TSA)

To Re-Adapt

  1. Connect the diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  2. Start the engine.
  3. Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature (90°C for liquid cooled models, 60°C for air cooled models).
  4. Adapt the crankshaft position (Euro 5 Motorcycles in Applicable Markets Only).
  5. If applicable, perform a cruise control switch check as described in the Service Manual.

Fault Indications

If 'range' figures at 100% are seen, then the adjustment has reached maximum indicating a mechanical fault exists on the motorcycle. This can be due to a number of faults but possible causes will be incorrect fuel pressure, incorrectly connected oxygen sensors, faulty injectors or air leaks at the throttle bodies or airbox.

In these circumstances, locate and rectify the fault, and reset the adaptions as described above.

Crankshaft Position Adaption (European Markets Only)

Signals from the crankshaft position sensor are used by the motorcycle's engine misfire detection system. In order to accurately detect an engine misfire, the crankshaft position must be adapted to allow for manufacturing and assembly tolerances.

The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the crankshaft position fully adapted. If for any reason the crankshaft position is not adapted, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be illuminated and DTC P0315 will be stored.

In service, the crankshaft position must be re-adapted under the following conditions:

  • The MIL is illuminated and DTC P0315 is stored, indicating that the crankshaft position sensor is not adapted.

  • The crankshaft position sensor has been disturbed, removed or disconnected.

  • The crankshaft position sensor has been replaced.

  • The crankcases have been disassembled/reassembled.

  • The engine ECM has been replaced.*

  • The engine adaptions have been reset using the 'Reset Engine Adaptions' function in the Triumph diagnostic tool.*

* Under these conditions, the MIL is illuminated and DTC P0315 will be stored.

Preliminary Steps

  1. Make sure the transmission is in neutral.
  2. Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  3. Make sure the engine stop switch is in the RUN position.
  4. Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Sensor Data - Inputs.
  5. Make sure the Gear Position Status is reporting as Neutral.
  6. Navigate to Sensor Data - Gear Position Adaption.
  7. Make sure the Neutral Position Adaption Status is reporting as Adapted.
  8. Reset and re-adapt the neutral position if any of the following conditions exist:
  9. * The Neutral Position Adaption is reported as Not Adapted.
    * The Gear Position Status is not reported as Neutral when the transmission is in neutral (regardless of the current Neutral Position Adaption Status).

Neutral Position Adaption LG1; LG2; LGX; LH2; LJ2; LK2; LL1

See Neutral Position Adaption

note
If the neutral position adaption is reset and re-adapted, the ignition must be turned off for at least 60 seconds before starting the crankshaft position adaption process.

To Adapt the Crankshaft Position:

Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running

warning
Exhaust fumes are poisonous, always operate a motorcycle in the open-air or in an area with adequate ventilation.Do not operate a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation.Operating a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time.
  1. Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Function Test - Adapt the crankshaft position.
  2. Click Start.
  3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
  4. note
    The function test will check that the transmission is in neutral and that the neutral position is adapted. If these conditions are not met, the test will be aborted and you will be prompted to check the transmission and neutral adaption status.If the transmission conditions are correct, you will be prompted to start the engine and bring the engine up to the required temperature.Once the engine has reached the required temperature the test will progress automatically and you will be prompted to hold the throttle (twist grip) fully open.The test will be aborted if the throttle is not opened within 60 seconds.It is important that the throttle is held fully open during this stage of the test. The diagnostic tool will display a red light if the throttle is not in the correct position. The light will change to green when the throttle is held fully open.
  5. Hold the throttle fully open within 60 seconds of being prompted by the diagnostic tool. Do not close the throttle until instructed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
  6. note
    Upon holding the throttle open, the engine speed will increase and decrease in cycles at approximately one cycle per second. The cycles are repeated until the crankshaft position adaption is complete.Adaption is typically completed after the fourth cycle.You will be prompted to close the throttle when adaption has completed.The diagnostic tool will allow the test to operate with the throttle held open for a maximum of 10 seconds (approximately 10 cycles). If adaption is not completed in this time, the test will stop and you will be prompted to close the throttle and turn the ignition OFF. Note any on-screen messages and investigate the cause before attempting to restart the test.
  7. Close the throttle when prompted by the diagnostic tool.
  8. Note the results of the adaption and follow the on-screen instructions.
  9. Click Finish.
  10. Turn the ignition OFF as prompted by the diagnostic tool and wait for 60 seconds for the Engine ECM to fully power down.

Final Steps

Successful crankshaft position adaption can be verified as follows:

  1. Turn the ignition ON.
  2. Navigate to ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS - Read DTCs.
  3. Check that DTC P0315 has cleared.
  4. Check that the MIL light goes out when the engine is started.
note
The presence of other DTCs may cause the MIL light to remain illuminated. Where this is the case, rectify and erase any other stored DTCs as necessary.

Trouble Shooting

Symptom

Possible Causes

Action

Test is aborted immediately after clicking Start.

Transmission is not in neutral.

Neutral position is not adapted.

Neutral position adaption is in a state of error.

Check the transmission is in neutral.

Reset the neutral position adaption.

Start the engine and allow the neutral position to adapt.

Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test.

Test is aborted after the engine has reached the required temperature.

The throttle was not held open within 60 seconds of the engine reaching the required temperature.

Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test.

Make sure the throttle is held open within 60 seconds of being instructed to do so by the diagnostic tool.

Crank adaption failed.

Throttle was held fully open for 10 seconds before the diagnostic tool displayed an instruction to close the throttle.

Ignition was not turned off for 60 seconds after adapting the neutral position.

Turn the ignition off for at least 60 seconds before restarting the crankshaft position adaption test.

Crank adaption failed.

The diagnostic tool displayed an instruction to close the throttle at the expected time (after the forth engine revving cycle).

Adaption has completed abnormally.

Mechanical fault.

Crankshaft position signal out of range.

Crankshaft trigger wheel out of tolerance.

Investigate potential mechanical faults.

Contact Triumph Service.

Gear Position Sensor Diagnosis

This model is fitted with a hall effect gear position sensor that provides a constant voltage output ranging from 0.5 to 4.5 Volts. The output voltage is used to determine which gear is currently engaged.

Voltage Characteristics

The gear position is determined by the following voltage ranges:

Gear

Minimum Voltage

Maximum Voltage

1

0.5 V

0.7 V

N

0.9 V

1.1 V

2

1.3 V

1.5 V

3

2.0 V

2.2 V

4

2.8 V

3.0 V

5

3.5 V

3.7 V

6

4.3 V

4.5 V

The sensor voltage can be read using the Triumph diagnostic tool.

Further Diagnostics

Refer to P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor for details of pinpoint tests relating to diagnostic trouble codes P0914 and P0917.

Neutral Position Adaption

The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the neutral position fully adapted.

The neutral position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:

Refer to Neutral Position Adaption.

Neutral Position Adaption

The neutral position adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the gearbox and gear position sensor. The motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the neutral position fully adapted.

The neutral position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:

  • If a gear position sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P0914 and P0917, see P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor).

  • The gear position sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.

Adaption Reset

The Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaptions.

To reset the Neutral Position adaptions:

  1. Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  2. Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
  3. Check and erase any stored DTCs.
  4. Select ADJUST TUNE then select Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset.
  5. Click Start.
  6. The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
  7. The neutral position will now be reported as Not Adapted.

Re-Adaption

Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running

warning
Exhaust fumes are poisonous, always operate a motorcycle in the open-air or in an area with adequate ventilation.Do not operate a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation.Operating a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time.

To re-adapt the neutral position:

  1. Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
  2. Start the engine.
  3. note
    For successful and accurate adaption, The engine must be at normal idle speed and the gear change pedal must be in its normal rested position. During adaption, do not raise the engine speed and do not touch or move the gear change pedal.
  4. The neutral position will adapt shortly after engine start provided the above conditions are met.
  5. The adaption status can be confirmed by selecting GEAR POSITION ADAPTION STATUS on the Triumph diagnostic tool.
  6. Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.

Triumph Shift Assist System (if fitted)

System Description

The Triumph Shift Assist (TSA) system enables the rider to change gears without the use of the clutch. The system uses signals from the Shift Force Sensor Diagnosis (if fitted) (located on the gear change linkage) and the Gear Position Sensor Diagnosis to detect when a shift force is applied to the gear change pedal. Engine torque is then adjusted to facilitate a smooth, clutch free gear change.

System Operation

  • The Triumph shift assist system allows clutch free shifts for the majority of gear changes. However, it is recommended that the clutch is used for gear changes at slow riding speeds, or when riding in slow traffic.

  • The clutch must be used when selecting any gear from neutral, and also when selecting neutral from any other gear.

  • To ensure a smooth gear change, use a positive pedal force to select the next gear then release the pedal. Do not hold the pedal in its upper or lower positions.

  • Clutch free Up shifts are disabled by the system at engine speeds lower than 1,500 revolutions per minute (rpm) to prevent stalling.

  • At maximum engine speeds, clutch free up shifts are allowed by the system, but clutch free down shifts are disabled to prevent engine over speed.

  • The Triumph shift assist system is disabled if the motorcycle is traveling at its limited top speed. The system is automatically re-enabled when the motorcycle slows down from its limited top speed.

  • Engine torque is reduced when changing gear at high engine loads.

  • A throttle 'blip' is applied when changing gear at low engine loads.

  • Engine torque is returned to normal control when the gear change is complete.

TSA Operation Graph

Malfunction Action

  • If a Triumph shift assist malfunction occurs, the system will be inhibited and the Transmission Warning symbol will be illuminated on the instrument panel.

  • All Triumph shift assist related malfunctions must be rectified before the system can be re-enabled.

  • If the malfunction is related to the gear position sensor, the neutral position and gear position adaption must be reset and re-adapted before the system can enabled.

  • If the malfunction is related to the shift force sensor, the shift force sensor adaption must be reset and re-adapted before the system can enabled.

  • The Transmission Warning symbol will continue to be displayed until each adaption is completed successfully.

Shift Force Sensor Diagnosis (if fitted)

The shift force sensor is used to detect when a force is applied to the gear change pedal.

Voltage Characteristics

The sensor output voltage changes as follows during normal operation:

Sensor State

Voltage

At rest

2.5 V

In compression (up shift)

2.5 V to 0.5 V

In tension (down shift)

2.5 V to 4.5 V

The sensor voltage can be read using the Triumph diagnostic tool.

Further diagnostics

Refer to P1702, P1703 - Shift Force Sensor Circuit (Triumph Shift Assist) for details of pinpoint tests relating to diagnostic trouble codes P1702 and P1703.

Adaption

If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the shift force sensor fully adapted.

If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, the shift force sensor must be adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.

The shift force sensor adaption must be reset and the sensor re-adapted under the following conditions:

Refer to Shift Force Sensor Adaption (if fitted).

Shift Force Sensor Adaption (if fitted)

The shift force sensor adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the shift force sensor.

If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with the shift force sensor fully adapted.

If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, the shift force sensor must be adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.

The shift force sensor adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:

Adaption Reset

The Shift Force Sensor Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous shift force sensor adaptions.

To reset the shift force sensor adaption:

  1. Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  2. Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
  3. Check and erase any stored DTCs.
  4. Select ADJUST TUNE then select Shift Force Sensor Adaption Reset.
  5. Click Start.
  6. The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
  7. The Shift Force Sensor Adaption Status will now be reported as Not Adapted.

Re-Adaption

Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running

warning
Exhaust fumes are poisonous, always operate a motorcycle in the open-air or in an area with adequate ventilation.Do not operate a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation.Operating a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time.
note
If necessary, the neutral position can be re-adapted simultaneously with the shift force sensor re-adaption (see Neutral Position Adaption).

To re-adapt the shift force sensor:

  1. Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
  2. Start the engine.
  3. note
    For successful and accurate adaption, The engine must be at normal idle speed and the gear change pedal must be in its normal rested position. During adaption, do not raise the engine speed and do not touch or move the gear change pedal.
  4. The shift force sensor will adapt shortly after engine start provided the above conditions are met.
  5. The adaption status can be confirmed by selecting TRIUMPH SHIFT ASSIST ADAPTION STATUS on the Triumph diagnostic tool.
  6. Turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.

Gear Position Adaption

Gear position adaption is required to allow for manufacturing tolerances of the gearbox and gear position sensor.

If Triumph Shift Assist is fitted as standard, the motorcycle is delivered from the factory with each gear position fully adapted.

If the Triumph Shift Assist has been fitted as an accessory, each gear position must be fully adapted as part of the accessory kit installation process.

Gear position adaption must be reset and re-adapted under the following conditions:

  • If a gear position sensor malfunction occurs (DTC P0914 and P0917, see P0914, P0917 - Gear Position Sensor).

  • The gear position sensor has been removed or disconnected for any reason.

Adaption Reset

The Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset function provided in the Triumph diagnostic tool will erase all previous Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaptions.

To reset the Gear Position/Neutral Position adaptions:

  1. Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool and turn the ignition ON.
  2. Select ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS.
  3. Check and erase any stored DTCs.
  4. Select ADJUST TUNE then select Gear Position/Neutral Position Adaption Reset.
  5. Click Start.
  6. The software will confirm that the adaption has been successfully reset.
  7. The neutral position and each gear position will now be reported as Not Adapted.

Re-Adaption

Warning - General - Confined Area Engine Running

warning
Exhaust fumes are poisonous, always operate a motorcycle in the open-air or in an area with adequate ventilation.Do not operate a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation.Operating a motorcycle in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time.
warning
Do not start the motorcycle and engage gears while it is parked on its centre stand. Do not attempt to adapt the gear positions with the motorcycle parked on its centre stand.Should the motorcycle fall off its centre stand while the rear wheel is in motion, the motorcycle would accelerate rapidly. This could result in serious injury or death as well as causing damage to the motorcycle and other property.

To re-adapt the gear positions:

  1. Ensure the transmission is in neutral.
  2. Start the engine and allow the neutral position to adapt (see Neutral Position Adaption).
  3. warning
    When riding the motorcycle the rider must always wear a safety helmet, eye protection, gloves, boots, trousers (close fitting around the knee and ankle) and a brightly coloured jacket. Brightly coloured clothing will considerably increase a rider's visibility to other operators of road vehicles. Although full protection is not possible, wearing correct protective clothing can reduce the risk of injury when riding.
    note
    A suitable safe place should be found to carry out the road test.The Transmission Warning symbol is illuminated on the instrument display.
  4. Road test the motorcycle as follows:
  5. * Ride the motorcycle smoothly at low engine speeds, changing up through each gear in turn.
    * Fully close the throttle and use the clutch at each gear change.
    * As soon as each gear engages, allow the gear change pedal to return to its normal resting position. Do not rest your foot on the pedal as any movement of the pedal can cause incorrect adaption.
    * When each gear change is complete, release the clutch and ride normally using gentle acceleration. Avoid rapid acceleration or deceleration as this will prevent adaption.
    * The gear position will adapt a few seconds after each gear change is completed.
    * When all gear positions have successfully adapted, the Transmission Warning symbol will turn off.
    * After completing the road test, turn the ignition OFF for at least 60 seconds to allow the adaption settings to be stored in ECM memory.
    * The gear position adaption status can be confirmed using the Triumph diagnostic tool.

Engine ECM Calibration Download Flow Chart

Key ignition download flow chart

Engine ECM Calibration Download
caution
If the download fails to complete, turn the ignition OFF and allow the motorcycle to power down (approximately one minute). Restart the download using Manual Model Selection.

Replacement Engine ECM Setup

Replacement Engine ECM Setup

Immobiliser System

Immobiliser System

System Description

This model is fitted with an electronic immobiliser system to help protect it against theft. This system has to be paired with the engine ECM and the ignition key which contains a transponder chip. If all the components are correctly paired, the immobiliser will allow the engine to start. The Triumph diagnostic tool is the only way these components can be paired.

In addition, the system has an on-board diagnostic function. This ensures that, should a malfunction occur in the immobiliser system, a malfunction code is stored in the chassis ECM memory. This stored data can then be recovered using the Triumph diagnostic tool (see Systems Diagnostics).

System Components and Operation

  • Transponder chip - situated inside the ignition key. The chip is activated by the antenna coil when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

  • Antenna coil - situated around the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and the transponder chip is activated, the signal from the chip is sent to the immobiliser/TPMS control module.

  • Immobilise/TPMS Control Module - situated on the right hand side of the frame. This control module communicates with the transponder chip in the key and the engine ECM and will only allow the engine to start if a matching signal is received.

  • Alarm/immobiliser warning indicator light - situated in the instrument pack. The light will flash on and off for 24 hours to show that the engine immobiliser is on. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the immobiliser and the indicator light will be off. If the indicator light remains on it indicates that the immobiliser has a malfunction that requires investigation. If an accessory alarm is fitted, the immobiliser indicator light will only illuminate when the conditions described in the accessory alarm instructions are met.

Keys

When the motorcycle is delivered from the factory it is supplied with two keys. Keys can be deleted or added to the immobiliser system using the Triumph diagnostic tool. A maximum of four keys can be added to the system.

To ensure the immobiliser system functions correctly note the following:

  • Do not put any magnetic materials on the same key ring as the motorcycle key.

  • Do not put any other ignition key with a transponder chip fitted near the motorcycle key when in use.

  • Do not modify the immobiliser system.

  • Do not submerge the key in water or any other fluid.

  • Do not drop or strike the key against hard material.

Diagnostics

To fully diagnose the immobiliser system it is necessary to check for fault codes in the immobiliser control module using the Triumph diagnostic tool (see Systems Diagnostics).

Further Diagnosis

The diagnostic trouble code tables, if used correctly, help to pinpoint a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble code has been stored (see Systems Diagnostics).

Immobiliser Components Overview

Immobiliser Overview LG1; LGX

Immobiliser Overview Circuit LG1
  1. Immobiliser

  2. Ignition switch connector

  3. Ignition switch

  4. Engine ground sub harness

  5. Engine ground

Immobiliser System Components Location

Immobiliser - Components Location LG1, LGX

ABS Management System

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

System Description

This model is fitted with an electronic anti-lock brake system which is designed to prevent the wheels from locking or skidding by reducing braking effort to the front or rear brake caliper as required.

The system consists of a hydraulic modulator and ECM assembly mounted to a bracket beneath the fuel tank, a front wheel speed sensor mounted to the front fork, and a rear wheel speed sensor mounted to the rear brake caliper carrier.

Both front and rear wheels have a pulser ring mounted on to the brake discs.

The front and rear master cylinders are connected via lines to the modulator and from the modulator the lines connect to the brake calipers.

The front and rear brake circuits operate as separate systems. The front and rear brakes are not connected in any way inside the modulator.

The ABS modulator ECM continuously calculates the front and rear wheel speeds, and from these inputs the ECM calculates the estimated motorcycle speed, wheel deceleration/acceleration, the wheel speed difference and the wheel slip (skid) rate. This is calculated by comparing the calculated wheel speeds with the calculated vehicle speed, so that if one wheel speed deviates significantly from the other two readings, this wheel is calculated to be slipping (skidding).

Under braking, if the modulator detects that either wheel is about to slip, due to the brake force exceeding the available traction between the tyre and road surface (the wheel will begin to slip or 'skid'), the ECM very rapidly releases and reapplies the brake pressure to prevent the wheel from slipping.

This is felt through the brake pedal or lever as a rapid 'pulsing'.

If the rider reduces braking effort, or traction increases (so that traction exceeds braking force, the wheel will rotate once more) the wheel will no longer lock up. The ABS system will detect this and stop controlling brake pressure, and return to its monitoring state.

ABS Management Components Overview

ABS Mngt Components Overview LG1; LGX

ABS Overview Circuit LG1
  1. Fuse box 2

  2. Fuse box 1

  3. Diagnostic connector

  4. Front ABS wheel speed sensor

  5. Front ABS wheel speed sensor connector

  6. Rear ABS wheel speed sensor

  7. Rear ABS wheel speed sensor connector

  8. Engine ground

  9. ABS modulator

ABS Component Locations

ABS component locations

Starter and Charger Diagnostics

Starting Circuit

All Triumph models are equipped with an electric start system.

This system consists of a starter relay, starter motor, starter switch, side stand switch, engine stop switch, clutch switch and the sprag clutch.

The starter motor is connected to the starter relay and the battery by heavy duty cables in order to supply the large currents required by the motor to start the engine.

When the starter button is pressed, the relay is energised, which then allows current to the starter motor.

The starter motor will not operate unless the clutch lever is pulled in. Also, the starter will not operate if the side stand is down, unless the transmission is in neutral. If the starter motor does not operate, the following basic checks must be carried out before further diagnosis is performed:

  • Check the engine stop switch is in the 'RUN' position.

  • Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.

  • Check the frame and engine ground connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.

  • Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.

  • Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.

  • Using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool, check the operation of the neutral switch or gear position sensor (if fitted), side stand and clutch switches.

note
The engine will not crank if the instruments, ABS ECM, or immobiliser/keyless ECM (if fitted)/chassis ECM (if fitted) are disconnected.

Rectify any defects as necessary.

General Fault Finding – Starter Motor and Relay

Symptom

Possible cause(s)

Starter relay does not click, starter motor does not turn

Battery discharged or defective

Blown main or starter relay fuse

Defective starter relay wiring or starter switch

Check that the side stand, transmission and clutch lever are positioned for engine starting i.e. transmission in neutral, clutch lever pulled in and the side stand down

Defective alarm system - ensure any alarm fitted is working correctly

Starter motor turns slowly

Battery discharged or defective

Loose, corroded or dirty battery connections

Loose, corroded or dirty starter motor or starter relay connections

Defective starter motor

Loose, corroded or dirty battery ground connections

Starter relay clicks but engine does not turn over

Battery discharged or defective

Crankshaft does not turn due to engine defect

Defective starter motor

Starter cable open circuit

Defective starter relay

Starter motor turns but engine does not turn over

Starter motor or starter ring gear

Diagnosis – Starter Circuit

note
Prior to carrying out the diagnosis, ensure the battery voltage is 12 - 13.5 V, the immobiliser system (if fitted) is functioning correctly, the transmission is in neutral and the clutch lever is pulled fully to the handlebar.
Starter flow_in all languages

Diagnosis - Alternator/Charging Circuit

The charging system consists of an alternator, a rectifier/regulator assembly and the battery.

The alternator is made up of two parts, the stator, which is mounted to the crankcase or the engine cover, and the rotor, mounted to the end of the crankshaft.

The stator is an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into 3 phases. The rotor is a series of magnets mounted in the engine flywheel, which are arranged so as to be positioned around the outside of the stator coils.

As the engine rotates the alternator produces an AC (alternating current) voltage in each of the three phases of the alternator, typically of around 35 to 40 volts AC at 4,000 - 5,000 rpm, although this figure varies between models.

As the battery requires DC (direct current) voltage for correct charging, this AC voltage must be first rectified to DC current, and then regulated to the correct voltage for the battery of 14.5 +/- 0.5 volts.

This is done by the rectifier/regulator, which uses diodes to convert the alternator output to DC Volts and limits the resulting output to the correct figure required for optimal battery charging.

If the charging circuit does not operate correctly, the following basic checks must be carried out before further diagnosis is performed:

  • Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.

  • Check the frame and engine earth connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.

  • Ensure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.

  • Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.

Rectify any defects as necessary.

Diagnosis – Charging Circuit

Charging Circuit - (Alternator flow_EN svg)

Alternator Stator

Alternator Stator - Introduction - Generic

The alternator stator is an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into three phases. It is possible to check for continuity and short circuits through the coils and to ground.

note
Only repair the stator harness between the alternator regulator/rectifier and where the harness goes into the crankcase.Do not attempt to repair the alternator stator coils.If the battery is not fully charged, the charging voltage may be lower than specified when checking at 2,000 rpm.Make sure all additional accessories (auxiliary lights, heated grips etc.) are switched off.

Alternator Stator - Fault

Fault

Possible cause

Action

Battery not charging

Main fuse

Check the condition of the fuse.

Battery

Check the condition of the battery.

Refer to the instructions supplied with recommended battery charger to make sure the battery is serviceable.

Alternator

Proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Regulator/Rectifier

Test the regulator/rectifier (see Regulator/Rectifier)

Pinpoint Tests

Alternator Stator - Pinpoint Test

Test

Result

Action

1

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Battery positive (+)

- Battery negative (-)

- Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 1

- Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 2

- Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 3

- Rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector pin 4

OK

Proceed to test 2

Faulty

Rectify fault, proceed to test 6

2

Check cable and terminal integrity:

- Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 1

- Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 2

- Rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector pin 3

OK

Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead first. Disconnect rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector (4 pin). Proceed to test 3

Faulty

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

3

Check cable continuity:

- Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 1 to battery lead negative

- Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 2 to battery lead negative

- Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 3 to battery lead positive

- Rectifier/regulator main harness connector pin 4 to battery lead positive

OK

Reconnect the battery leads, positive (red) lead first. Reconnect the rectifier/regulator to main wiring harness connector (4 pin). Disconnect the rectifier/regulator to alternator harness connector (3 pin). Proceed to test 4

Open circuit

Locate and rectify wiring fault, proceed to test 6

4

Check resistance through the coils:

- Alternator harness pin 1 to 2

- Alternator harness pin 2 to 3

- Alternator harness pin 3 to 1

0.2 Ohms to 3 KOhms

Proceed to test 5

<0.2 Ohms - Short circuit

>3 KOhms - Open circuit

If the fault is between the connector and the crankcase, repair the harness. proceed to test 6

If the fault is after the crankcase, replace the unit. Proceed to test 6

5

Check for short to earth:

- Alternator harness pin 1 to metal frame

- Alternator harness pin 2 to metal frame

- Alternator harness pin 3 to metal frame

Open circuit

Proceed to test 6

Short circuit

Replace unit. Proceed to test 6

6

Reconnect the harness and run the engine. Check the charging voltage at 2,000 rpm:

13.5 V - 15 V

Action complete - quit test

Test rectifier/regulator (see Regulator/Rectifier).

If rectifier/regulator is serviceable, contact Triumph service

Fault still present

Circuit Diagram

Alternator PPT

Regulator/Rectifier

Regulator/Rectifier - Introduction

Internally the rectifier/regulator consists of three diodes, one between each input and the positive terminal, and three Field Effect Transistors (FETs), one between each input and the ground terminal.

As the voltage of the AC signal from the alternator rises, the voltage controller switches the FETs to avoid over voltage on the output.

The diodes and FETs can be checked using a multimeter on DIODE setting. Disconnect the two electrical connectors from the rectifier/regulator and check the readings as indicated below.

note
This test does not check for voltage regulation.

Regulator/Rectifier - Fault

Fault

Possible cause

Action

Battery not charging

Main Fuse

Check the condition of the main 30A fuse:

Battery

Check the condition of the battery.

Refer to the instructions supplied with recommended battery charger to make sure the battery is serviceable.

Regulator/Rectifier

Disconnect the black and the grey connectors from the rectifier/regulator and proceed to pinpoint test 1:

Alternator

Test the alternator stator (see Alternator Stator).

Pinpoint Tests

Regulator/Rectifier - Pinpoint Test

Test

Result

Action

1

Check FET forward bias:

Positive (+) probe to rectifier black socket pin 1 to:

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3

0.4 V to 0.7 V

Proceed to test 2

Open circuit or short circuit

Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4

2

Check diodes function forward bias:

Negative (-) probe to rectifier black socket pin 3 to:

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3

0.1 V to 0.3 V

Proceed to test 3

Open circuit or short circuit

Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4

3

Check diodes reverse bias:

Negative (-) probe to rectifier black socket pin 1 to:

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2

- Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3

Positive (+) probe to rectifier black socket pin 3 to:

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 1

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 2

- Negative (-) probe to rectifier grey socket pin 3

More than 1.4 V or OL on meter

Proceed to test 4

Less than 1.4 V or short circuit

Replace the unit. Proceed to test 4

4

Reconnect the harness and run the engine. Check the charging voltage at 2,000 rpm:

13 V - 15 V

Action complete - quit test

Fault still present

Test alternator stator (see Alternator Stator)

If alternator stator is serviceable, contact Triumph service

Circuit Diagram

Regulator rectifier circuit